You are on page 1of 665

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and

Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-1 11

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Landlord and Tenant (Consolidation) Ordinance, Cap. 7 Demolished Buildings (Re-development of Sites) Ordinance, Cap. 337 Validity of Approved Plans Approved plans forming the basis of an Exclusion Order under the Landlord & Tenant (Consolidation) Ordinance are normally excluded by Buildings Ordinance section 16(3A) from the application of Buildings Ordinance section 16(3)(d). Consent applied for after more than two years of approval will be given if it is still practical for the work to be completed within the Re-development Order period. Material Variation 2. For a project affected by an Exclusion Order, amendments as follows to the approved plans would be deemed to be a "material variation" : (a) (b) (c) a reduction in floor space of more than 10%; or a change in use of any part of the proposed building; or the involvement of other premises also subject to the Landlord and Tenant (Consolidation) Ordinance (e.g. by extension of the project).

The authorized person (or his client's solicitors) must apply to the Lands Tribunal (Registrar, Lands Tribunal, Wanchai Law Courts, Wanchai Tower, 12 Harbour Road, Hong Kong) for an amending Exclusion Order. 3. Any approval given by the Building Authority under the Buildings Ordinance does not imply that the plans will also be accepted under the Landlord and Tenant (Consolidation) Ordinance. Penalty-Free Extension 4. In case of delays to commencement of building works by the date laid down in an Exclusion Order, penalty-free extension of one month may be granted by the Building Authority upon request before expiry of the commencement period. /5. Examples ....

- 2 5. (a) Examples of circumstances which may justify penalty-free extensions are : inability to obtain vacant possession, subject to the applicant having commenced legal proceedings and pursuing such proceedings with due diligence; inability to obtain entry to adjacent property to construct adequate shoring or other precautionary works required; and inability to obtain consent to commence demolition works for other reasons beyond the control of the applicant.

(b) (c)

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/LEG/lO First issued December 1974 This revision March 1994 (AD/D) Index under : BO s16(3A) - Approved Plans Demolished Buildings (Re-development of Sites) Ordinance, Cap. 337 Exclusion Orders Landlord & Tenant (Consolidation) Ordinance, Cap. 7 Material Variation Re-development Orders

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-2 13

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Calculation of Gross Floor Area and Non-accountable Gross Floor Area Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(a) and (b) Calculation of Gross Floor Area Building (Planning) Regulation (B(P)R) 23(3)(a) stipulates that gross floor area (GFA) is the area contained within the outer surface of external walls of a building measured at each floor level. Any portions of this area not floored over must be included in the plot ratio calculations. 2. However where large voids occur, a modification of B(P)R 23(3)(a) may be granted on application in the following circumstances : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) in front of cinema and theatre balconies; in banking halls and shopping arcades; in single-staircase buildings in which cockloft floors are provided in the ground storey; in auditoria, sporting halls (including squash courts), school halls and religious institutions; and in main common entrance lobbies.

3. In the case of "split level" designs where the difference in level between adjoining floors is less than 1 m, the floor may be regarded as being level for the purposes of this regulation. For greater differences in level, the authorized person should clarify with the Buildings Department before embarking on the project. 4. Subject to the special circumstances of each case, the Building Authority (BA) is in general prepared to consider favourably application for modification in respect of : (a) chimney shafts forming an integral part of a new building; (b) (c) fire refuge areas which observe the stated criteria (see Code of Practice for Means of Escape); covered areas clearly intended for and designed as playgrounds (see Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers (PNAP) 116); swimming pool filtration plant rooms; and genuine and properly designed pipe-ducts with adequate access for inspection and maintenance. /5. Where .

(d) (e)

-25. Where a curtain wall system forms the external face of a building, the BA is prepared to accept the outer face of the structural elements, e.g. beams, columns and floor slabs, as the external wall for the purpose of measurement of GFA and site coverage where : The curtain wall system itself does not form part of the structural system of the parent building; The system does not result in any additional floor area at a floor level; and The projection of the system from the outer face of the structural elements does not exceed 300 mm.

6. Cladding may take a variety of forms and as a general rule, should be considered individually for the purpose of measuring GFA. In the case, however, of a form of cladding which may be equated in its design to a curtain wall system, the method of measure of GFA and site coverage given in paragraph 5 above may be adopted as indicated in the sketches illustrating the above principle for the measurement of GFA and site coverage at Appendix A. 7. External wall finishes may be disregarded for the purpose of measurement of dimensions under B(P)R 23(3). However, no part of any wall finishes should project beyond the site boundaries. Non-accountable Gross Floor Area 8. Under B(P)R 23(3)(b), the BA may exclude from GFA calculation floor space occupied solely by machinery or equipment for lift, air-conditioning, heating system or any similar service. The phrase "any similar service" may generally be interpreted to include water tanks, boiler rooms, electrical switch rooms, meter rooms, transformer rooms, generator rooms, pump rooms, telephone equipment rooms, cable riser duct room, CO2 rooms, hose reel closets, sewage treatment plant rooms and ducts for central ventilation or smoke extraction system. In each case, both the premises for and the size of any such feature should be justified. To guard against possible abuse, the BA will take the following into consideration when considering exclusion of the above features from GFA calculation for single-family residence or house type developments: (a) (b) There should not be any duplication in the provision of services when GFA exclusions are also being separately applied for; and Only the minimum amount of GFA necessary for accommodating and maintaining the services and commensurate with the development would be allowed to be excluded. The authorized person may be required to demonstrate why it is not possible to consolidate the provision of all related services into multi-purposes or centralised rooms such that the area which is excluded from GFA could be used for efficiently. /9. For .

-3-

9. For plant rooms and other features that are excluded from GFA calculation, the enclosing walls/columns and the associated protected lobby, if any, solely serving the said rooms or features and do not serve any other function in accordance with paragraph 11, may also be excluded from GFA calculation. 10. Air-conditioning plant rooms to be excluded from GFA calculation should as a rule be located outside the individual residential units. For an air-conditioning plant room proposed with access within an individual residential unit, the authorized person should justify why access to such room cannot be located outside the unit. In any event, the provision and size of such rooms need to be justified before consideration for exclusion from GFA will be given. In the event that such room is permitted to be provided with access within the individual unit, such plant room should meet the following criteria before it can be considered for exclusion from GFA calculation under B(P)R 23(3)(b) :(a) (b) The floor of the plant room should have a level difference of a minimum of 500 mm with the floor of the main accommodation; The plant room should have at least one side open, but railing, open grille and lourve on the open side to parapet level are acceptable. Enclosure above parapet level may be allowed where there is a need to separate the intake air and exhaust air. Enclosure for the purpose of compliance with paragraph 12.3 of the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction may also be allowed on the open side; and The open side should face into open air.

(c)

Where an air-conditioning plant room is not proposed, air-conditioning platforms, complying with the requirements set out in PNAP 68, provided on the external elevations of the building are not accountable for GFA calculation under regulation 23(3) of the B(P)R. 11. The horizontal area of staircases and lift shafts should normally be measured for GFA together with the floor through which they pass. However, where these features pass through a floor accepted as not being accountable for GFA (by reason of the captioned regulation), the area of the features may also be discounted, with one exception. The exception is that entrance lobbies, lifts, staircases and exit corridors, other than those solely serving the non-accountable floors, at the level(s) of main access to a building from the street(s) should always be included in the measurement for GFA. In such locations, these features have a local function and do not merely pass through a floor. For the features passing through a floor that is partly accountable and partly non-accountable for GFA, their exclusion from GFA either in its entirety or parts thereof will be considered on a case-by-case basis taking into account their locations and functions. The principle is that such features on a particular floor should be counted for GFA if the area they serve at that floor is accountable for GFA calculation.

/Carparking .

-4-

Carparking and Loading and Unloading Areas 12. Under B(P)R 23(3)(b), the BA has the discretionary power to disregard from GFA calculations any floor space that he is satisfied constructed and intended to be used solely for, inter alia, parking motor vehicles and loading and unloading of motor vehicles. The BA generally accepts that public and private car-parks, and public transport termini provided in buildings are space for parking or loading and unloading of motor vehicles falling within the meaning of B(P)R 23(3)(b). In exercising his discretionary power under B(P)R 23(3)(b) to disregard or not to disregard such area or any part thereof from GFA calculation, the BA will determine each case on its merits and take into account all relevant considerations including the design of the car-park and the effect on public interest such as impact on infrastructure, density and building bulk. In general, the BA will follow the following lines in his exercise of discretion :(a) Carparking spaces (i) When a lot is subject to lease/grant conditions requiring the provision or incorporation of a public carpark within a building or buildings, all the required facilities and associated works, including service core areas of such public carpark should be accountable for GFA calculation. For private carparking spaces which are intended for the use of the occupants and their bona fide visitors of the parent building, the BA may allow their exclusion from GFA calculation under B(P)R 23(3)(b). In deciding on the number of car-parking spaces that could be excluded, the BA will make reference to the standards set out in the Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines (HKPSG), the design and layout of the car-park as well as the advice of the Commissioner for Transport. For the avoidance of doubt, associated ramps and facilities passing through floors accountable for GFA may be excluded from GFA calculation if they are physically separated from and do not provide access to the accommodation on the floors they pass through.

(ii)

(iii) Where both private and public carparking spaces are proposed in the same building and upon being satisfied with the design of the carpark, the BA will assess the accountability of GFA on the following basis: Where private and public carparking spaces are provided on separate floors, the floor space exclusively provided for private carparking purposes on that floor will not be accountable for GFA and the floor(s) provided exclusively for public carparking purposes would be accountable for GFA under B(P)R 23(3)(a).

/ Where .

-5-

Where both private and public carparking spaces are provided on the same floor, only the areas, including carparking spaces, driveways, ramps, lift halls and staircases solely serving the private carpark would be considered for exclusion from GFA calculation under B(P)R 23(3)(b). Those public parking spaces, associated driveways, lift halls, staircases, ramps which serve either the public carpark or both the public and the private carparks will not be excluded from GFA calculation. Moreover the areas used by the public carpark and its associated facilities should be delineated on plans. The area of driveways, ramps, staircases and lift halls at the level(s) providing access to/ from a building for use by both private and public carparks should be included in the GFA calculation. For the avoidance of doubt, any parking provision on open areas of a site, or on an open podium roof, need not be measured for GFA.

(iv)

(v) (b)

Public Transport Terminus (PTT) The BA would take the advice of the Planning Department in determining the effect of excluding PTT from GFA calculation on the infrastructure, density and building bulk. As Planning Department has advised that the town planning intention is that all PTT should count for GFA calculation unless otherwise provided for in the relevant town plan, hence as a general rule, unless otherwise specified in the relevant town plan or any specific planning approval for the site, all PTT should be accountable for GFA.

(c)

Loading and Unloading Areas Areas for loading/unloading purposes would only qualify for exclusion from measurement of GFA if they are directly associated with spaces specifically earmarked for parking of motor vehicles for loading and unloading purposes and in accordance with the minimum requirements as specified in lease conditions or the HKPSG, whichever is the less. For instance, areas set aside for loading/unloading detached container boxes in a container yard should be measured for GFA.

( CHEUNG Hau-wai ) Building Authority

-6-

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/9 (VII) First issue December 1974 Last revision July 2006 This revision April 2007 (AD/NB1) (Paragraph 12 revised) Index under : B(P)R 23(3) Calculation of Gross Floor Area and Non-accountable Gross Floor Area Cladding Curtain wall system Gross Floor Area Calculations Gross Floor Area Exclusions Non-accountable Gross Floor Area

APP-2

EXTERNAL WALL OF THE BUILDING FOR THE PURPOSE OF MEASUREMENT OF G..F.A./SITE COVERAGE

EXTERNAL WALL OF THE BUILDING FOR THE PURPOSE OF MEASUREMENT OF G..F.A./SITE COVERAGE

300 MM MIN. FROM FLOOR LEVEL

300 MM MIN. FROM FLOOR LEVEL

300 MM MIN. FROM FLOOR LEVEL

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-3 14

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorised Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Nomination of an Authorized Person, Registered Structural Engineer or Registered Geotechnical Engineer to act in stead When an authorized person (AP), registered structural engineer (RSE) or registered geotechnical engineer (RGE), who has been appointed in respect of building or street works, is incapacitated by illness or proposes to be temporarily absent from Hong Kong, a temporary replacement should be nominated by submission of Form BA21 within 7 days. Buildings Ordinance section 4(2) and Building (Administration) Regulation 23(2) refer. 2. While an AP, RSE or RGE may be appointed in respect of more than one active project (i.e. with works in progress and/or applications currently or about to be lodged with the Buildings Department (BD)), the AP, RSE or RGE nominating a temporary replacement should (a) complete and submit one Form BA21 for all active projects as defined above, a list of which is to be given in the Form to be submitted in duplicate; in the case of a RSE or a RGE appointed in respect of more than one project under different APs, submit one Form BA21 for all active projects under each AP. A list of the respective projects is to be given in the Form which should be signed by the AP concerned; advise the nominee that if it is necessary for him to communicate with BD in respect of any of the listed active projects he should on every such occasion make brief reference to the fact that he does so under the authority of an earlier submission of Form BA21; advise the nominee that he cannot further nominate another AP/RSE/RGE to act in his stead, and advise BD by letter within 7 days that the arrangements covered by Form BA21 have ceased if he recovers from illness, or return from overseas before the expiry date of the temporary replacement given in the Form.

(b)

(c)

(d) (e)

3. Under section 4(2) of the Buildings Ordinance, an AP/RSE/RGE may nominate another AP/RSE/RGE to act in his stead ONLY under the following circumstances :(i) (ii) the period must be temporary; AND he is unable to act by reason of his illness or absence from Hong Kong /4..

-2-

4. To avoid ambiguity and abuse of the Buildings Ordinance, Building Authority (BA) considers that an acting period exceeding 3 months or at frequent intervals is not temporary and such nomination may not be accepted by BA. Under such circumstances, the owner may be advised to appoint another AP/RSE/RGE. 5. Upon receipt of an application, Buildings Department will formally acknowledge the Form BA21 with a copy to the owner informing him the period and reason of acting.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref : BD GR/CC/21 BD GP/BORD/75 First issue December 1974 Last revision August 2002 This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup) (General amendments to include RGE) Index under : AP, RSE or RGE - Nomination thereof to act instead B(A)R 23(2) - Nomination of an AP, RSE or RGE to act instead BOs 4(2) - Nomination of an AP, RSE or RGE to act instead Nomination of AP, RSE or RGE to act instead

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-4 17

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorised Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Water Supply and Wells

Where a development depends on a source of water supply other than from the waterworks, the adequacy and probable effects of the supply should be closely investigated before any design work is started. Application to the Water Authority for the issue of a Certificate Regarding Water Supply Availability should be made early and such certificate should be submitted together with the first submission of building plans. 2. Where the Water Authority certifies (on Form WWO 1004 or current equivalent) under Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 10A(5) that a supply of water from the waterworks is not available, permission may be considered upon application to obtain water from a well or other sources. Assessment of Demand 3. Demand for flushing and potable water should be assessed with regard to Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 10A(4). "Potable water" refers to a supply of water for the purposes of Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 10A(2). Flushing Supply 4. The quantity of flushing water required should be assessed in accordance with the following standards : User Domestic buildings Offices, factories, department stores, shops, public buildings and other nondomestic buildings of a like nature Restaurants Cinemas Schools Hotels and boarding houses Unit per number of required soil fitment per day per number of required soil fitment per day per seat per day per seat per day per head per day per room per day Average Demand 450 450 litres litres

13.5 litres 4.5 litres 18 90 litres litres

/Potable Supply ..

-2-

Potable Supply 5. In view of the diversity and degree of fluctuation in demand, potable supply should be assessed on individual merits and should be satisfactory and sufficient in all respects for the purposes for which potable water is supplied. Where in doubt, the Water Authority should be consulted. For Air-conditioning 6. The Water Authority has advised that neither a fresh nor a salt mains water supply will be provided for evaporative type air-conditioning, except where required in connection with a specific industrial process, and then only for the immediate needs of that process. Wells 7. Normally, wells may not be sunk on government land. Permission under Building (Construction) Regulation 85 to sink a well in private land will be given only where : (a) (b) 8. following : (a) the well yield is adequate; and the water abstraction will not adversely affect nearby services, buildings, structures or land. An application for permission to sink a well should be accompanied by the a plan, including cross-sections, showing the proposed well relative to any services, buildings, structures and land within the area of groundwater drawdown likely to be caused by the water extraction, existing ground conditions in the area and any changes to such conditions to result from the development for which this well is required; a plan showing details of the well design, including well screen and electrode switching devices, if any, and a statement of the proposed well development method; a statement of the proposed rate and duration of water extraction per day; and a proposal for carrying out a well yield test.

(b)

(c) (d)

9. If these cannot demonstrate that the nearby services, buildings, structures or land will not be affected, the following additional particulars prepared by a Registered Geotechnical Engineer shall be required : /(a) a site..

-3-

(a)

a site investigation report specific to the proposed well construction, with drillhole logs embracing the site area, including measurement of groundwater/piezometric levels and field permeability tests; a geotechnical assessment, supported by calculations, of the effect of the proposed water extraction, in both the short and long term, on affected services, buildings, structures or land. The assessment should include groundwater changes, ground movements and stability of adjacent buildings, structures and land as appropriate; and if necessary, a detailed proposal for conducting field tests either separately or in conjunction with the yield test, to verify assumptions and predictions made in (b) above.

(b)

(c)

10. There are certain areas in the territory where, because of the geological conditions, it is not advisable to sink wells to extract groundwater as this is likely to cause excessive settlement. The Water Authority has agreed that flushing water will normally be supplied whenever possible within these areas, which at present include Yuen Long Town in Area Number 2 and Ma On Shan in Area Number 4 of the Scheduled Areas. Well Yield Test 11. Where the period of pumping is to be less than 12 hours per day, the manner and method of testing described in Appendix A are approved for the purposes of Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 10A(7). Where the required quantity of water cannot be obtained with less than 12 hours pumping per day or where there is concern over the long-term yield of a well, a more sophisticated test may be required. For such cases, approval may be sought for other methods, as recommended in BS 6316:1983, to be used. 12. Both the Buildings Department and the Geotechnical Engineering Office should be notified in writing at least one week before the commencement of any well yield test. Certificates as to Supply of Water 13. The Certificates required to be made by authorized persons under Building (Administration) Regulation 25A will be accepted in the model forms suggested at Appendix B (for permanent connection) and Appendix C (in accordance with Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 10A(7)). One extra copy of reports on well yield tests should be submitted for the Geotechnical Information Unit of the Civil Engineering Library via the Geotechnical Engineering Office. /The water..

-4-

14. The water quality of potable water supply should be to the satisfaction of the Building Authority. In this connection, a water sample examination report (obtainable from the Water Authority on application), or other acceptable evidence, may be required.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GR/BL/P/3 GC 4/16/21 BD GP/BORD/75 First issue January 1975 Last revision March 1994 This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD) (Paras. 9 & 10 and Annex I to Appendix A amended) Index under : B(A)R 25A - Water Supply Certificate B(SSF,P,DW&L)R - Water Supply Flushing Water Demand, Assessment of Water Supply, from Well or Other Sources Well Yield Test

Appendix A (PNAP 17) Well Yield Test Procedure (APP-4)

1. A yield test on a well shall be carried out only during the period from 1 December to 30 April. 2. The well yield test shall be carried out over a period of seven consecutive days. The rate of pumping for the first to the sixth day shall be the proposed daily yield averaged over the proposed daily pumping period for the well. This shall not be more than 12 hours per day, to permit at least a 12 hour daily recovery period. (See paragraph 5 for the pumping rate on the seventh day). 3. The actual quantity of water pumped each day shall be measured by a water meter. The quantity pumped shall not be calculated from the rated output of the pump. 4. The water level in the well, measured from the ground surface, shall be read at least 24 hours before the start of the test, immediately before the start and immediately before the end of pumping each day. For the first and the sixth day of pumping, the water level shall also be measured, with respect to the time when pumping commences, at 1-minute intervals for the first 10 minutes, every 10 minutes from 10 to 120 minutes and every 1 hours thereafter for the duration of pumping. 5. An examination for suspended soil particles in the pumped water shall be made on the seventh day, at the full discharge rate of the installed pump and at the maximum drawdown level. 6. The water pumped from the well shall be discharged into a proper drain or water course and not into any position where it can percolate back into the well or the aquifer. Notes (a) This test is used only to ascertain that the quantity of water required is available, to test the recharge and recovery of groundwater and to test the adequacy of the well screen and filter pack to prevent excessive soil loss. The duration of pumping per day should be long enough to provide the required daily well yield. Under no circumstances should it be assumed that, because the required flow can be met for part of a 24-hour period, it can continue to be met for a 24-hour day for 7 days per week. The test results are acceptable if the quantity of water pumped each day is not less than the required daily quantity and there is adequate recovery of groundwater after the pumping is stopped each day, and the pumped water is clean when examined as in paragraph 5 above. Well yield test results should be recorded in the form at Annex I.

(b)

(c)

(d)

Annex I to Appendix A (PNAP 17) (APP-4) RECORDS OF WELL YIELD TEST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. on 6. Quantity of flushing/potable* water required per day = Depth of well = bottom of screen Diameter of well = m. (Depth to : top of screen = = m.) mm. ). m. (taken litres. m.)

Type of pump : surface/submersible* (Make/Model No. Groundwater level at 24 hours before test = ).

For test carried out in accordance with the procedure described in Appendix A to PNAP 17. Quantity of water abstracted (litres)

Date

Time Start Stop

Hours pumped

Water level in well(s) Before Pumping After Pumping

* Delete as appropriate.

(Rev. 12/2005)

(Model Certificate) Certificate by an Authorized Person Regarding Connection of Water Supply Building (Administration) Regulations Regulation 25A (1)(b)(i)/(1)(c)/(2(b)(i)/(2)(c)* To : The Building Authority BD Ref. : _______________________________ Address : _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ Lot No. : _______________________________

Appendix B (PNAP 17) (APP-4)

Date : ______________________

Connection of (Flushing/Potable)* Water Supply from (Well/Source other than Well)* I hereby certify that a permanent connection to the above building of a supply of water from (a well/other source (state source)* has been made in accordance with Regulation 10A(1)/(2)* of the Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulations.

Signed __________________________________________ Authorized Person Full Name in block letter __________________________________________ Certificate of Registration No. ________________ Expiry date _______________ * State as appropriate.

Appendix C (PNAP 17) (APP-4) (Model Certificate) Well Yield Test Certificate Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 10A(7)(c) To : The Building Authority BD Ref. : _______________________________ Address : _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ Lot No. : _______________________________ Date : ____________________

I hereby certify that a Well Yield Test has been carried out in accordance with the approved well plan and the standard procedure described in Appendix A of Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers No. 17 (or state other approved alternative method)* and that the results shown in Annex I attached are a true record.

Signed __________________________________________ Authorized Person Full Name in block letter __________________________________________ Certificate of Registration No. ________________ Expiry date _______________ * State as appropriate.

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-5 27

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Height of Storeys Building (Planning) Regulations 3(3) & 24 This practice note clarifies the measurement of storey heights for the purposes of Building (Planning) Regulations (B(P)R) 3(3) and 24. 2. It is the established practice of the Buildings Department to measure storey heights, in terms of B(P)R 24, between structural members regardless of finishes such as false ceilings, screeding, plastering and flooring. The same principle applies in measuring the clear height of balconies in terms of B(P)R 3(3). 3. In the case of peripheral beams in walls, it may be difficult to adhere to the required minimum height of 2.3 m to the underside. Accordingly, where beams project internally from the face of external walls, a height of 2 m is permissible. Similarly, the regulation should not inhibit provision of beams over doorways. These may be provided at the required door height. 4. Although the minimum height applies generally to any part of building used as an office or for habitation, it is recognized that the minimum clear height in staircases is 2 m and that beams across narrow corridors (where a doorway could have been provided) need only be at the appropriate door height. This is the "notional doorway" situation. 5. Please note that 2.5 m is the minimum height for environmental reasons. A greater height would be preferable for occupants, especially in domestic buildings.

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/14 First issued February 1976 This revision May 1994 (AD/D) Index under : B(P)R 3 & 24 - Height of storeys Height of storeys - B(P)R 3 & 24

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers BUILDINGS ORDINANCE OFFICE PRACTICE NOTE FOR AUTHORIZED PERSONS AND REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS

APP-6 41

Shops and Department Stores Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 5 By virtue of sub-regulation (5)(a) of this regulation, the number of persons employed or likely to be employed in a shop or department store shall be a matter for the Building Authority to determine. 2. Accordingly, for the purposes of determining the number of persons for whom sanitary fitments should be provided in shops and department stores the determination shall be at the rate of 1 person for every 15 square metres of usable floor area. 3. The ratio of males to females for the purpose of sub-regulation (5)(c) should be assumed to be 1:1 except that where a department store is designed for a particular company or firm and it is known that the number of males to females which will be employed by them is other than 1:1, this may be so stated in the schedule of sanitary fitments incorporated in the plans and provision made accordingly. 4. For the purpose of assessing usable floor area any storage space over part of a shop need not be included, where, however, there is a complete floor over a shop accessible only from the shop the area of this should be included in the area of the shop for determining the sanitary fitment facilities to be provided.

(A.G. Eason) Building Authority

Ref. : BLD(B) GP/BREG/SF/2 First issued July 1977 This update January 1990 (GBS/D) Index under : B(SSFPDW&L)R 5(5)(a) - Shops and Department Stores Shops and Department Stores - assessment of sanitary fitments

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-7 43

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Application for Registration as Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers Under section 3 of the Buildings Ordinance (BO), the Building Authority (BA) shall keep an authorized persons register, a structural engineers register and a geotechnical engineers register. This practice note sets out the registration requirements for authorized persons (AP), registered structural engineers (RSE) and registered geotechnical engineers (RGE). Requirements for Registration as AP/RSE/RGE 2. Under section 3(7) of the BO, a person must not be included in the AP/RSE/RGE register unless: (a) (b) he has obtained the prescribed qualifications; and he is recommended by the respective Registration Committee for inclusion.

Qualifications for Registration as AP/RSE/RGE under Building (Administration) Regulation 3 3. follows: The prescribed qualifications for registration as AP, RSE or RGE are as (a) A person shall not be included in the AP register unless he is a registered architect, a registered professional engineer (RPE) in the structural or civil engineering discipline or a registered professional surveyor; A person shall not be included in the RSE register unless he is an RPE in the structural or the civil engineering discipline, and in the latter case unless he has such practical experience in structural engineering as may be approved by the Registration Committee; or Save for the transitional arrangements described in paragraphs 8 and 11 below, a person shall not be included in the RGE register unless he is an RPE in the geotechnical engineering discipline; and /(d) ..

(b)

(c)

-2-

(d)

In addition the person should have, for a continuous period of 1 year within the 3 years preceding the date of his application, had such practical experience gained in Hong Kong as the Registration Committee considers appropriate.

Registration Committees 4. Under section 3(5) of the BO, the BA is to establish 3 panels with sufficient members from whom he is to appoint committees to be known respectively as Authorized Persons Registration Committees (APRC), Structural Engineers Registration Committees (SERC) and Geotechnical Engineers Registration Committees (GERC). 5. The function of the Registration Committee is to assist the BA in considering applications for inclusion in the relevant register. The Registration Committee will examine the qualifications and experience of the applicants and conduct professional interviews with the applicants. Professional Interviews 6. The scope of professional interviews for AP, RSE and RGE is detailed in Appendix A. Application for Registration as AP/RSE/RGE 7. Application for registration as AP, RSE and RGE should be submitted in the specified form (Form BA 1) together with the prescribed application fee. In preparing the application documents, applicants should make reference to the Advisory Notes for Completion of Form BA 1 which is distributed with the specified form. Transitional Arrangement for RPE in the Structural or Civil Engineering Discipline to Apply for Registration as RGE 8. The registration system for RGE is established under the Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 2004. Upon commencement of this new registration system for RGE on 31 December 2004, an RPE in the structural or civil engineering discipline may, within 12 months, i.e. on or before 30 December 2005, apply for registration as RGE under section 53I of the BO, so long as the applicant complies with the following conditions: (a) He has such practical experience in geotechnical engineering as may be approved by the GERC; and /(b) ..

-3-

(b)

For a continuous period of 1 year within the 3 years immediately preceding the date of his application, he has had such practical experience in geotechnical engineering gained in Hong Kong as the GERC considers appropriate.

9. Applicants complying with paragraph 8 above shall be deemed to have satisfied the prescribed qualifications for registration as RGE. The applicants are required to attend a professional interview conducted by the GERC. The scope of the professional interview is detailed in Appendix A. 10. Upon registration as RGE through the above transitional arrangement, the registration shall be valid for 3 years provided that he remains as an RPE in the structural or civil engineering discipline. However, RGE registered through this arrangement shall, within 3 years from the date of registration as RGE, obtain the qualification of RPE in the geotechnical engineering discipline in order to apply for renewal of his registration. Transitional Arrangement for AP in the List of Engineers and RSE to Apply for Registration as RGE 11. Upon commencement of the registration system for RGE on 31 December 2004, AP in the list of engineers and RSE may, within 12 months, i.e. on or before 30 December 2005, apply for registration as an RGE under section 53I of the BO. If the applicant complies with the conditions specified in section 53I(2)(a) of the BO and the detailed requirements as stipulated in PNAP 293 on Registration of Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers as Registered Geotechnical Engineers, the applicant shall be deemed to have satisfied the prescribed qualifications for registration as RGE. The BA will consider the applications without seeking the advice of the GERC. Attendance of professional interview with the GERC is therefore not required. Upon registration as RGE through this arrangement, the registration will be valid for 5 years which is renewable as long as his name remains in the register of AP/RSE. Retention and Restoration of Names in the Registers 12. Save for the RGE registered through the transitional arrangement mentioned in paragraphs 8 to 10 above, the registration of AP, RSE or RGE shall be valid for 5 years. 13. An application for retention of name in a register (i.e. renewal of registration) should be submitted in the specified form (Form BA 1A) in accordance with sections 3(9B) and 3(9C) of the BO. Retention applications received by the BA outside the specified time limit (i.e. not earlier than 4 months and not later than 28 days prior to the date of expiry of the relevant registration) under section 3(9C)(b) of the BO will not be accepted. /14. ..

-4-

14. A person whose name is removed from a register under section 3(11A), 3(11B) or 3(11C) of the BO may, within 2 years beginning on the date the relevant registration expires, apply for restoration of his name to the relevant register. Application for restoration should also be submitted in the specified form (Form BA 1B) in accordance with sections 3(12) and 3(13) of the BO.

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority

Ref: BD GR/AP/21 BD GR/CC/57 First issue: August 1977 Last revision: July 1994 (AD/SE, AD/LM) This revision: effective from 31 December 2004 (AD/Sup) Registration of RGE added. Overall content revised. Index under: Registration of AP, RSE & RGE AP, SE & GE Registration Committees BOs3(5A)(c) Professional Interview Scope of Professional Interviews for Registration as AP, RSE & RGE Transitional Arrangements for Registration as RGE Retention and Restoration of AP, RSE & RGE

Appendix A (PNAP 43) (APP-7) Scope of Professional Interviews for Registration as AP, RSE and RGE An applicant must satisfy the Registration Committee on his suitability for inclusion in the relevant register for which he applies. In this context, an applicant has to demonstrate that he has adequate practical experience and general knowledge in his profession to meet local requirements and to discharge his duties in Hong Kong. He will also be expected to have acquired a working knowledge of the BO and allied matters: the main criterion is a thorough understanding of general principles and fundamental requirements. 2. The principal subjects upon which the Registration Committee is likely to test an applicant's knowledge include: (a) (b) The objectives of the BO and Regulations and the mechanism of control; The statutory role, functions and duties of an AP, RSE or RGE, as the case may be, and those of the BA in respect of private building development in Hong Kong; Sufficient general awareness of local conditions to practise efficiently and effectively in Hong Kong without having to make frequent enquiries on matters of common local knowledge; For registration as AP: A working knowledge of the BO and Regulations, relevant codes of practice and such allied matters as the Town Planning Ordinance and outline zoning plans, lease conditions and the usual requirements of other authorities relevant to an AP in Hong Kong; (An applicant should therefore be familiar with all the processes from the evaluation of development potential of a private lot through to the issue of an occupation permit.) (e) For registration as RSE: A working knowledge of the BO and in particular those Regulations and relevant codes of practice pertinent to the design and supervision of structural works;

(c)

(d)

/(f) ..
-1-

(f)

For registration as RGE: A working knowledge of the BO and in particular those Regulations, relevant codes of practice, geotechnical standards and technical guidance documents pertinent to the design and supervision of geotechnical works;

(g) (h)

The procedures for an AP, RSE or RGE to follow in order to meet local statutory requirements; and Practice notes, circular letters and other advisory information published by government departments which are relevant to an AP, RSE or RGE.

Reference Materials 3. A list of legislation and publications affecting the building industry can be found in Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 115.

(Rev. 12/2004)

-2-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-8 45

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Chimneys and Flues A chimney is a building as defined in the Buildings Ordinance. Chimneys and flues should not only be structurally stable but also be protected from corrosion. Structural Design 2. For the structural design of a chimney, special attention should be given to the following points : (a) Wind load Provision for wind-excited oscillations should be given and analyzed by aerodynamic methods. For circular chimneys the simplified method in Appendix A may be adopted. (b) Steel chimneys (i) Design should be in accordance with the appropriate provisions in the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel with the modifications given in BS 4076:1989. To control buckling, the allowable compressive stress in the chimney structure should be taken as 115 MPa in the case of a chimney with effective height to diameter ratio of less than 21 and diameter to thickness ratio of less than 130; it should be further reduced for higher aspect ratios. The 25% increase in allowable stresses due to wind load should not be applied to the design of the chimney. (iii) Reduction coefficient should be applied to the allowable stresses in steel where the temperature is higher than 315C. Guys ropes provided as anchorage to a chimney should be positioned at a minimum distance of 3 m below the outlet of the chimney to avoid the corrosion action of the emergent combustion products. /In....

----

(ii)

(iv)

In view of the practical problems associated with examination and maintenance, the guy ropes should not be considered in strength and stability calculations. (v) Brackets constructed to provide resistance to lateral displacement of the chimney and/or supporting part or all of the weight of the chimney should be positioned at distances not exceeding 6 m apart. Materials, design and construction of the brackets should comply with the appropriate provisions of the Building (Construction) Regulations.

Construction and Corrosion Protection 3. For construction and corrosion protection of chimneys and flues, the relevant parts of BS 4076:1989, BS 4543:Part 2 and Part 3:1990 and BS 5854:1980 should be followed. Attention should also be given to the following points : (a) Height of chimney and flue A chimney or flue should terminate in such a position that the products of combustion cannot enter nearby windows or other openings, fresh air inlets, mechanical ventilation inlets or exhausts. The disposition is considered satisfactory if its height is approved by the Director of Environmental Protection under the Air Pollution Control Ordinance, Cap. 311, subject to a minimum of 3 m above the highest point of its own roof or of any adjoining structure, whichever is the higher. (b) Heat transmission A chimney or flue should be so placed and shielded as to be accessible by maintenance personnel only. It should also be so placed, shielded and as necessary insulated that the temperature of the exposed faces would not cause danger to any person or any part of any building. The acceptable temperature is different in each case according to the materials of the nearby parts of any building and the use of the surrounding areas. The insulation required depends on the acceptable temperature and the type and rate of fuel used. It is impossible to specify common standards. Calculations and justification should therefore be provided in each case to verify compliance with the Building (Construction) Regulations. In this connection, BS 5854:1980 provides some guidelines. /(c) Corrosion ....

(c) Corrosion protection

Both the exterior and interior surfaces of a steel chimney or flue should have satisfactory protective treatment in accordance with BS 4076:1989. Allowance for corrosion should be made in the shell in addition to the thickness obtained from calculations for structural stability. Normally, allowance of 3 mm would be required for chimneys externally fitted with waterproof insulation or cladding and internally lined and protected. For unprotected chimneys, 4.5 mm should be provided for a design life of ten years and 8 mm for 20 years. Unprotected oil-fired steel chimneys are not recommended. (d) Bimetallic action Bimetallic action could adversely affect a chimney or flue, and should be avoided. If it is essential in the design that two dissimilar metals have to be connected, a suitable nonconductive and water-impervious film or agent should be placed between them.

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/12/A First issued September 1977 This revision July 1994 (AD/SE) Index under : Chimneys

PNAP 45 Appendix A APP-8 Wind-excited Oscillations of Circular Chimneys Flexible slender structures are subject to oscillations due to wind action. It has been found that chimneys of circular cross section oscillate more strongly across wind than along wind. It is therefore reasonable to assume that the along wind oscillation will not cause stresses greater than those calculated for the forces in the 1983 edition of the Code of Practice on Wind Effects. For across wind oscillation, the following simplified approach adapted from BS 4076:1989 may be applied : (a) The Strouhal critical velocity V cr for the chimney is to be determined by :Vcr = 5Dt where is the natural frequency of the chimney on its foundations (in Hz), to be calculated analytically or by the following approximate formula in case of a regular cone : Ws 500 (3Db-Dt) W = h2 and h Dt Db W Ws (b) is the height of chimney (in m) is the diameter at top (in m) is the diameter at bottom (in m) is the mass per meter height at top of structural shell including lining or encasing, if any (in kg) is the mass per meter height at top of structural shell excluding lining (in kg)

If Vcr exceeds the design wind velocity given by equation (4) in the 1983 edition of the Code of Practice on Wind Effects, severe oscillation is unlikely and no further calculation is required.

/(c) If Vcr ....

- 2 (c) If V cr is less than the design wind velocity, the tendency to oscillate C may be estimated by the following empirical formula : 10Dt2 0.6 + K W 1.5 + Dt

where K

is the calculated deflection (in m) at the top of the chimney for unit distributed load of 1 kPa is 3.5 for all welded construction, 3.0 for welded with flanged and bolted joints and 2.5 for bolted riveted or all riveted.

(d)

If C is less than 1, severe oscillation is unlikely. If C is between 1 and 1.3 the design wind pressure for the chimney should be increased by a factor C If C is above 1.3 the fitting of stabilizers or dampers should be provided to control oscillations.

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers BUILDINGS ORDINANCE OFFICE

APP-9 47

PRACTICE NOTE FOR AUTHORIZED PERSONS AND REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS

Country Parks Ordinance, Cap 208 Buildings Ordinance section 16(1)(d) Since the first publication of this practice note the Country Parks Authority has considerably increased the number of designated or proposed country parks and special areas to which section 10 (1) of the Ordinance applies. 2. Authorized persons (APs) and registered structural engineers (RSEs) are also reminded that section 10(1) provides that : "After the publication of a notice by the Authority under section 9(1), no new development shall be carried out within the area of the proposed country park shown in the draft map without the prior approval of the Authority." 3. Notwithstanding any action which the Country Parks Authority may take in respect of proposals for new development of land that falls within a designated or proposed country park or special area, Buildings Ordinance section 16 (1)(d) may be invoked to reject any such proposals unless and until the prior approval of the Country Parks Authority has been obtained. Failure to comply with any conditions attached to the Country Parks Authority's approval may likewise result in the proposals being so rejected. It is therefore in the interest of all concerned that, upon application in respect of the development of a site to which the Country Parks Ordinance applies, that the Country Park Authority be consulted as soon as possible. 4. APs and RSEs should therefore familiarize the locations of all country parks and in this respect copies of plans, showing the locations and boundaries of such, may be purchased from the Agriculture and Fisheries Department.

(A.G. Eason) Building Authority Ref. : BLD(B) GP/LEG/23 First issued March 1978 This update January 1990 (GBS/D) Index under : BO s16(1)(d) - Country Parks Ordinance, Cap 208 Country Parks Ordinance, Cap 208

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-10 48

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Oil Storage Installations Building (Oil Storage Installations) Regulations An oil storage installation is defined in section 2(1) of the Buildings Ordinance as any tank having a capacity of not less than 110,000 litres or a group of tanks (within the same cluster or bunded area) any one of which has a capacity of not less than 110,000 litres, constructed above ground level for the purpose of storing petroleum products. 2. The construction of an oil storage installation should not commence without having first obtained approval and consent under section 14(1) of the Buildings Ordinance. 3. An above-ground oil storage installation will be deemed to satisfy the requirements of the Building (Oil Storage Installations) Regulations (the 'B(OSI)R') if it meets the standards set out in the Code of Practice for Oil Storage Installations 1992. 4. An oil storage installation should not commence operation before a licence to do so has been granted under the Regulations. 5. All existing oil storage installations and their associated works should have been licensed under the Regulations. Any new installation and its associated works will require a licence. Any alterations and additions (including a new tank) to an existing installation or its associated works will require an endorsement in the licence for the installation. As a prerequisite to the granting of a licence for a new installation, the following documents in respect of the proposed operation instructions of the installation and its associated works should be submitted for agreement : (a) six copies of the proposed operation instructions in English and one copy in Chinese (Although for licensing purposes the operation instructions are written in English, it is essential that they should also be written in Chinese to ensure clear understanding of the operation by each grade of personnel); and one set of the general arrangement plans.

(b)

In the case of an endorsement of alterations and additions in the licence of an existing installation where operation changes are proposed, amended operation instructions and general arrangement plans should also be submitted for agreement.

/6.It should

-2-

6. It should be noted that an occupation permit and a certificate of general inspection are required prior to the granting of a licence for new installations. For new tanks in an existing licensed installation, the original licence should be returned with the application for endorsement. The licence is renewed annually and the application must be accompanied by the certificates of external inspection of the tanks as required under Regulation 8(1)(b) of the B(OSI)R, in the form as attached at Appendix B, and certificate of inspection of the associated works as required by Regulation 8(1)(c) of the B(OSI)R, in the form as attached at Appendix C. 7. In addition, in accordance with Regulation 8(1)(a) of the B(OSI)R, a general inspection must be carried out of all tanks internally not later than the tenth year in the life of the tank. Thereafter, such inspection shall be carried out once in the fifth year after the year in which the first inspection was carried out. Each certificate of general inspection of a tank must be issued immediately after the inspection, in the form as attached at Appendix A, to the licensee who shall then deliver it to the Building Authority. 8. For the repair of or the alteration and addition to an existing installation, two copies of the proposals, signed by a registered structural engineer, should be submitted in order to obtain written authorization, as required under Regulation 10 of the B(OSI)R. Where the repair works are considered to be extensive on the basis of the fact and special circumstances of the particular case, or where the alteration and addition involve non-exempted building works, approval under section 14(1) of the Buildings Ordinance should also be sought. The normal requirements and procedures under the Buildings Ordinance for carrying out building works apply. 9. There have been cases where partially constructed tanks are damaged during a typhoon. Suitable precautionary measures should therefore be adopted during the construction or repair of tanks in anticipation of unfavourable weather conditions. 10. Demolition of the whole or any part of an oil storage installation must be carried out in such a manner as to minimize the risk of environmental pollution, fire or explosion. A clear statement of the method of demolition to be employed should be submitted for agreement and be to the satisfaction of the Building Authority before, or with, the application for consent to commence work or the application for written authorization, as the case may be. The guidelines and procedures as stipulated in the attached Appendix D (Guidance Notes on Demolition Methods of Oil Storage Installations) and Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 71 (Demolition Works - Measures for Public Safety) should be taken into account in the design of the demolition methods. ( CHEUNG Hau-wai ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/A/6/1 (II) First issue May 1978 Last revision March 1996 This revision August 2007 (AD/NB2) - Sections 1(a) and 12 in Appendix D revised Index under : Building (Oil Storage Installations) Regulations Oil Storage Installations

APP-10

APP-10

Appendix C (PNAP 48) AUTHORITY OF HONG KONG BUILDINGS ORDINANCE (Chapter 123) BUILDING (OIL STORAGE INSTALLATIONS) REGULATIONS Regulation 8(1)(c) Certificate of Inspection of Associated Works

(APP-10)

To the Building Authority, In accordance with the provisions of Regulation 8(1)(c) of the Building (Oil Storage Installations) Regulations, I Structural Engineer, hereby CERTIFY that I have inspected/supervised the , Registered inspection on

_____________________

of the associated works of the oil storage installation operated by

__________________________________________________________________________________ (company) at ____________________________________________________________________________ (address)

on ______________________________________________________________________________ (lot no.) and in my opinion the associated works are

fit for use for a further twelve months and the repairs listed in paragraph 2 below are required. unfit for use until the repairs listed in paragraph 2 below are completed to my satisfaction. 2. The following repairs to the associated works are required :

Signature of Registered Structural Engineer

Date Address of Registered Structural Engineer c.c. Director of Fire Services

Appendix D (PNAP 48) (APP-10) Guidance Notes on Demolition Methods of Oil Storage Installations Environmental Impacts 1. In order to minimize the environmental impacts arising from the demolition of oil storage installations, the guidelines and procedures stipulated in the following documents should be taken into account in the design of the demolition methods : (a) Environmental Protection Department Guidance Note for Contaminated Land Assessment and Remediation, Professional Persons Environmental Consultative Committee Practice Note 1/93 and Practice Note 2/93 on Noise from Construction Activities, obtainable from the Technical Secretary of the Environmental Protection Department; Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 144 on Control of Environmental Nuisance from Construction Sites; and The Air Pollution Control Ordinance on the submission of Asbestos Investigation Report and Asbestos Management Plan, if disposal of asbestos waste is involved.

(b)

(c)

Protection Hoarding 2. The work area is to be enclosed with a suitable hoarding to prevent unauthorized access. Where only part of an oil storage installation is to be demolished, or where the oil storage installation is to be demolished in stages, a fire screen should be erected to separate the part being demolished from the remainder of the storage facility in operation. Gas Freeing 3. Full precautionary measures as recommended in the Institute of Petroleum Marketing Safety Code should be carried out. A formal system of permit-to-work must be exercised on site by the demolition contractor. Precautions should be taken to prevent fire or explosion caused by gas and vapour particularly when removing tanks or pipes which might have contained flammable liquid or gas. 4. All pipes and tanks should be certified gas-free by a competent person. A competent person in this respect is a person who has successfully completed a training program established and maintained in accordance with standard industry practices. /This ..

-1-

This training program can be conducted by qualified industry personnel within a company or by a qualified commercial firm. In either case, the company contracting/hiring/utilizing the competent person will be responsible for the judgement of the competency of an individual. The qualification course should include a specific program of training skills to be developed; a regular course of instruction; a means to evaluate the successful completion of the course; and a formal certification process to confirm that the individual is competent to perform the gas-freeing of an oil storage tank prior to demolition. The evaluation can consist of a written test; hands-on performance to pre-determined skill standards; or a combination of the two. The Standing Advisory Committee established by regulation 4 of the Building (Oil Storage Installations) Regulations may review the adequacy of the training. Sludge and Chemical Waste 5. The type of sludge and chemical waste that will arise from the demolition work should be identified and arrangements made for its disposal. Disposal will have to comply with the Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste) (General) Regulations. Discharge of Waste Water 6. Where tanks or pipes are to be emptied or removed, precautionary measures should be taken to avoid the spillage of any petroleum products which may cause contamination to the ground. Any contaminated materials such as absorbent or cleaning stuffs should be disposed of properly. The drainage system and the oil interceptors should be kept intact and maintained in a serviceable condition until all the tanks, pipes and sludge have been removed. 7. Except during discharge of effluent in accordance with the operating procedures of the oil interceptors, the seaboard valves on the oil interceptors should remain closed and locked at all times during demolition until all the tanks, pipes and sludge have been removed. Discharges of effluent from oil interceptors must comply with the conditions of any licence under the Water Pollution Control Ordinance governing the standard and quantity of effluent discharged from that oil storage installation. Bunded Areas 8. As far as possible the demolition of floors and walls of the bunded area should not commence before all tanks and pipes spills have been removed. Where this is not possible adequate precautions must be taken to prevent the possibility of petroleum products escaping to the environment. Programme of Work 9. When part of the oil storage installation will be in operation during demolition work, due safety consideration must be taken for the operating environment and the demolition work should be programmed accordingly. The agreed operation instructions should be complied with at all times. /Drainage ..
-2-

Drainage 10. Precautions should be taken to avoid contaminated washing water or other liquids from entering the storm drainage system, either accidentally during heavy and violent rainstorms or deliberately as a result of washing down. A plan of the storm drains should be available on site at all times. Extreme Weather Conditions 11. Consideration should be given to the possibility of extreme weather conditions occurring during demolition of the tanks, and suitable precautionary measures should be adopted. Contamination Assessment Report 12. A contamination assessment report is required before the work commences. Guidelines on the preparation of a contamination assessment report are set out in Environmental Protection Department Guidance Note for Contaminated Land Assessment and Remediation. The report shall include the following :(a) (b) information on activities carried out on site including those in the past if there were changes; an inventory of chemical/hazardous substances stored/used on site with the locations clearly shown on site diagrams and composition of hazardous substances precisely given; details of manufacturing processes if there are any; and soil sampling plan and analytical method that will be adopted.

(c) (d)

13. The contamination assessment helps to identify the specific lots of soil which are contaminated and need treatment or special disposal, or which can be disposed of in the normal manner. Relevant remedial work will be required wherever necessary. Soil Samples 14. After demolition of the above ground structures and facilities, tests on soil samples for hydrocarbons and lead content should be carried out as specified in the contamination assessment report.

(Rev. 8/2007)
-3-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-11

BUILDINGS ORDINANCE OFFICE

PRACTICE NOTE FOR AUTHORIZED PERSONS AND REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS

49

Street Improvement Schemes Submission of Building Plans in respect of Lots affected thereby Notwithstanding the Roads (Works, Use and Compensation) Ordinance, Cap 370, any street improvement scheme approved before its enactment in 1982 remains valid. The following principles continue to apply to such schemes and lots affected thereby. Street Improvement Plans 2. Street improvement plans are only an indication of desirable improvements. They do not constitute any representation by Government that they will be implemented nor are they indicative that Government will resume the whole or any part of any property to implement any street improvement. 3. In this respect, the existence of an approved street improvement plan which may affect a property cannot be regarded as providing a basis upon which a property owner can claim for compensation or damages. Building Plans 4. The approval under the Buildings Ordinance of building plans which conform to an approved street improvement plan does not imply that the latter plan will be implemented, or that compensation or damages will be paid. 5. The approval under the Buildings Ordinance of building plans which do not conform to an approved street improvement plan must however be regarded as entirely without prejudice to any action Government may take under any other enactment, including resumption of the whole or any part of the affected property. Generally 6. For development or re-development of a lot which appears to be affected by an approved street improvement scheme, it may save time and obviate possible abortive work if the authorized person makes an enquiry to the Highways Department to ascertain Government's intention, before embarking upon formal submission of building plans for approval. (A.G. Eason) Building Authority Ref. : BLD(B) GR/BL/TP/4 First issued May 1978 This update January 1990 (GBS/D) Index under : Street Improvement Schemes

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-12 50

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Prestressed Ground Anchors in Building Works The use of permanent prestressed ground anchors in a project imposes a long-term monitoring commitment on the maintenance parties which usually involves appreciable recurrent cost and, should deficiencies be revealed, remedial works may be difficult and expensive. The past records show that compliance with this criterion by the owners is not practically viable. For these reasons, Buildings Department takes the view that the permanent ground anchors requiring long term monitoring are short-lived temporary building works and the Building Authority has the power to refuse to accept such temporary building works for incorporation into a permanent building under the Buildings Ordinance. 2. In the exceptional circumstances where permanent prestressed ground anchors are considered acceptable, their provision and installation in building works should be in accordance with the requirements and procedures given in Appendix A.

( CHOI Yu-leuk ) Building Authority

Ref : BD GP/GEO/5 BD GP/BORD/A/19 First issue June 1978 Last revision October 1996 This revision January 1999 (AD/SE & GGE/I) - Para. 2 & Appendix A amended Index under : Ground Anchors Prestressed Ground Anchors in Building Works

Prestressed Ground Anchors in Building Works

Appendix A PNAP 50 APP-12

In the exceptional circumstances where permanent prestressed ground anchors are considered acceptable, their provision and installation in building works should be in accordance with the requirements given in the Model Specification for Prestressed Ground Anchors (GEOSPEC 1). In conjunction with the publication of GEOSPEC 1, a Prior Approval System for Permanent Prestressed Ground Anchors (PASA), operated by the Geotechnical Engineering Office came into effect. The PASA confers a level of acceptance on proprietary ground anchor systems (Approved Anchor Systems) and on different types of ground anchors (Approved Anchor Types) within each Approved Anchor System. The object of the PASA is to ensure consistent and satisfactory standards in the provision of ground anchors and to save time for designers, contractors, suppliers and approving authorities in avoiding repetitive checking of the design of components and assembly details. The PASA therefore simplifies the processing of submissions for building works incorporating ground anchors. It must however be pointed out that the PASA does not remove any of the responsibilities of the authorized persons (AP) and registered structural engineers (RSE) under the Buildings Ordinance. Submissions including anchor systems not under the PASA may still be made in the usual way. Further details of the PASA, and definition of terms, are given in GEOSPEC 1. 2. A list of the current Approved Anchor Systems and Approved Anchor Types is available free from the Geotechnical Information Unit of the Civil Engineering Library. Copies may also be obtained by writing to the Technical Secretary of the Geotechnical Engineering Office, Civil Engineering Department. 3. Approved Anchor Types in the Prior Approval list when supplied and installed in compliance with the relevant Prior Approval Documents are considered technically acceptable to the Building Authority. Where permanent prestressed ground anchors under the PASA are to be used in a private project, the RSE would normally be required to provide the following information in relation to the anchors in the submission for approval : (a) (b) a plan showing the location, inclination and length of the anchors required; the Anchor Class (as defined in GEOSPEC 1), design working load and design free anchor length of each anchor together with supporting justification including geotechnical information and design calculations; which anchors are to be subjected to Suitability Tests and Extended Acceptance Tests; the compressive movement which must be allowed for between the anchor pad and the fixed length during stressing; details of the anchor pad provision; and /(f).... -1-

(c) (d) (e)

(f)

arrangements for long-term monitoring, including the schedule for future monitoring, provision of access and the agreement of the relevant maintenance party that it is willing to undertake the required long-term monitoring and maintenance.

4. In addition, the RSE will be required to submit plans and sections of the proposed anchored structure showing site boundaries and geotechnical information together with his own anchor design calculations. The RSE will also be required to furnish with the submission, plans of all adjacent buried and surface public utility services and adjacent buried and surface structures and to demonstrate that anchors will not cause damages. Plans and design calculations relating to other works not related to anchors should be submitted in the usual manner. 5. Prior to consent application for works in relation to the anchors, the RSE should submit additional plans for approval, giving the name of the Approved Anchor System and the Approved Anchor Types adopted, the specification of any materials which may need to be replaced, the schedule and procedures for future monitoring and guidelines on the interpretation of future monitoring results; the name and experience of the anchor installation contractor to be employed should also be submitted. The installation contractor must be suitably experienced in the installation of the adopted Approved Anchor System and should therefore be selected from the list of Nominated Anchor Contractors as specified in the Prior Approval Documents for the Approved Anchor System. Conditions and requirements under Buildings Ordinance section 17(1) may be imposed for such standards of workmanship and qualified supervision as appropriate, and consent to the anchoring works may be refused if any of the above information is not provided to the satisfaction of the Building Authority or is in conflict with the requirements of the PASA. 6. For the purpose of checking on site the adequacy of the ground anchors, RSEs are advised to maintain a certified true copy of the full set of the Prior Approval Documents on site prior to commencement of the approved anchor works. The RSE shall ensure that the provision, installation, testing and monitoring of the anchors is in accordance with the Prior Approval Documents. 7. After installation of any anchor system, the RSE should submit to the Buildings Department (BD) an as built location drawing showing the full length and details of each anchor installed together with the following information, which may have been shown in the approved plans or required as conditions to consent : (a) (b) (c) (d) the name of the Approved Anchor System and Approved Anchor Type; the specification for any materials which may need to be replaced; the design load of each anchor; a summarized as built record of total length, bond length, free length, angle of inclination, descriptions of all strata encountered in drilling, quantity of grout injected and pressures, used for each anchor; /(e).... -2-

(e) (f)

the dates of all stages of installation, testings and monitoring; all anchor stressing records and test records including those for trial anchors, Suitability Tests, Acceptance and/or Extended Acceptance Tests; a record of the monitoring results taken to date; the schedule and procedures for future monitoring; and guidelines on the interpretation of future monitoring results.

(g) (h) (i)

8. Monitoring of prestressed ground anchors is essential throughout their service life to ensure their continued satisfactory performance. The requirements for monitoring are given in GEOSPEC 1. It is therefore essential that the parties responsible for subsequent maintenance are consulted and their agreement obtained before prestressed ground anchors are adopted and that they are provided with complete as built details. 9. In accordance with GEOSPEC 1, testing of existing grease in the anchor heads is to be undertaken during anchor monitoring, in addition to the normal anchor inspections and residual load measurement. During the past few years, the Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO) has received some queries on the method of determination of the chloride, nitrate and sulphide ion contents in the grease. The GEO has issued Corrigendum 1/98 (May) and Corrigendum 2/98 (September) to clarify the method of extraction of water-soluble ions and of the method of calculation of the soluble ion contents. These corrigenda are attached to the Appendix and AP/RSEs are requested to take these into account when undertaking work in the monitoring of prestressed ground anchors. 10. In the past, submissions have sometimes proposed the provision of ground anchors extending outside the site boundary into public or private streets, government land or adjacent private land. Ground anchors can give rise to unacceptable consequences such as the obstruction of new works or new public utility services, and, in addition, their existence could inhibit the development of land. Furthermore, an undesirable situation could result should damage to property or public utility services be caused during installation. Therefore only in exceptional circumstances will approval be given to submissions of any new development incorporating ground anchors outside the site boundary. 11. If it is intended to extend the ground anchors outside the site boundary into government land, application to the Land Authority (Lands Department) for permission should be made at the early stages of design. Where it is intended to extend the anchors into adjacent private land, the specified Form BA5 for the site formation works should include the lot number of the adjacent private land, to indicate the acquiescence of the adjoining owner.

This revision January 1999 (Para. 9 added & paras. 10 & 11 re-numbered) -3-

Annex to Appendix A PNAP 50 APP-12

MODEL SPECIFICATION FOR PRESTRESSED GROUND ANCHORS (GEOSPEC 1)

1989 Edition (Hong Kong Government) CORRIGENDUM No. 1/98 (May)

Table 1 Properties of Grease (Page 75)

Replace Note 3(a) with the following : (a) Weigh, accurate to 0.001g, about 5g of grease into a separating funnel, add 70ml of hexane and shake the mixture until the grease is completely dissolved. Add Note 3(g) at the end of the table : (g) For the purpose of calculating the chloride, nitrate and sulphide ion contents, the concentration should be determined as parts per million by mass of the final aqueous extract.

Notes :

(1)

Note 3(a) is amended to specify the use of hexane as the organic solvent. This revision is to enable more effective separation of the organic solvent from the aqueous extract in the extraction process during the grease testing. Note 3(g) is added to clarify for users the intended calculation method for chloride, nitrate and sulphide ion contents.

(2)

-1-

MODEL SPECIFICATION FOR PRESTRESSED GROUND ANCHORS (GEOSPEC 1)

1989 Edition (Hong Kong Government) CORRIGENDUM No. 2/98 (September)

Table 1 Properties of Grease (Page 75)

Replace 3(a), 3(d) and 3(f) with the following : (a) Weigh, accurate to 0.001g, 5g0.05g of grease into a separating funnel, add 70ml of hexane and shake the mixture until the grease is completely dissolved. (d) Add, to the second separating funnel containing the combined water extract, about 20 - 30 ml of hexane, gently swirl the mixture and again allow for complete separation of the 2 layers. Carry out a blank determination, following the same procedures, with the same amount of reagents, as the sample determination. Subtract the corresponding blank value, if any, from each of the water-soluble ion determinations to obtain the corrected values of these ion determinations.

(f)

Notes :

(1)

Note 3(a) is amended to prescribe the acceptable tolerance in the weighing of the grease sample. Note 3(d) is amended to using hexane as the organic solvent consequent to revising Note 3(a) in Corrigendum No. 1/98 (May). Regarding Note 3(f), it is necessary and common practice to conduct a corresponding blank determination to obtain a real value of the target analysis determination. Regarding Note 3(g) in Corrigendum No. 1/98 (May), the term mass of the final aqueous extract shall be interpreted as the mass of deionized water used for the extraction of water-soluble ions in the grease sample. The mass or the volume of organic solvent (hexane) for dissolving the grease sample shall not be included in the calculation of water-soluble ion contents.

(2)

(3)

(4)

-2-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-13 53

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Submission of Certificate of Completion of Building Works Application for Occupation Permit (OP) and Submission of Record Plans and Information Submission of Certificate of Completion of Building Works Upon the completion of buildings works, a certificate of completion of building works not resulting in a new building, (Forms BA14/14A), or resulting in a new building (Form 12/13) should be submitted in accordance with Building (Administration) Regulation 25. While there is no statutory time limit under the Buildings Ordinance for processing such certificates, the Buildings Department will generally provide a reply to Form 14/14A within 28 days advising on the acceptance of the completed works or the outstanding issues to be rectified. As a certificate of completion of new buildings and application for OPs are usually submitted together in Form BA12 or 13, they will be processed together within 14 days in accordance with section 21 of the Buildings Ordinance. 2. If the same contractor is employed for both the foundation works and the superstructure works for a new building or in the alteration and addition works to an existing building, where spread footing foundation with excavation depth not exceeding 4.5m is adopted, the certification of completion of both the spread footing and superstructure works in such cases may be made in the Form BA12/13 or a single Form BA14, as the case may be, and a separate Form BA14 for completion of the spread footing works is not required.

Simultaneous Submission of Amended Building Plans and Application for OP 3. A Form BA 12/13 is sometimes submitted at or about the same time as the submission of amended plans for approval. This would complicate the processing process. In line with the declaration on Form BA 12 or 13 that the new building has been erected in accordance with the plans approved, the Building Authority (BA) takes the view that authorized persons (AP)/registered structural engineers (RSE)/registered geotechnical engineer (RGE) should submit and secure approval of amendment plans in advance of an application for OP. The exception is that minor positional deviations from the approved plans which do not contravene the Buildings Ordinance, Cap. 123 and Regulations may be acceptable. /Submission ..

-2-

Submission of Record Plans 4. Where several alterations have been made to the original design, the BA may require, under Building (Administration) Regulation 46, the submission of "new plans" showing the building as completed. 5. However, for those projects where amendments to the original building plans have subsequently been approved, APs should submit a set of general building plans with the application for occupation permit, amalgamating all the plans approved by the BA and thereby representing the building as completed. Each of those plans should bear either the signed and dated approval chop applied by the BA or a chop giving the AP's personal certification of the plans being identical to those approved by the BA on the date specified. To limit the volume of paper, the BA would accept plans photographically reduced to not less than a ratio of 1:200. 6. approved. Record plans should not contain any amendments which have not been

7. In addition, the Commissioner of Rating and Valuation (CRV) has requested that, for all newly completed buildings, one set of record plans be supplied to him for rating purposes. As record plans are now mostly produced from computer softwares such as AutoCAD or Microstation, the CRV would welcome if AP could also submit, on a voluntary basis, a CD-ROM containing the softcopy of the record plans in AutoCAD or Microstation format. The CRV has committed that the CD-ROM and the softcopy of the record plans will only be used for relevant rating purposes and will not be released to other Departments or parties. If AP is willing to facilitate CRV in discharging his duty, the additional set of plans, together with the CD-ROM (the frontage is marked with CD-ROM containing plans for the CRV) if any, may be included in the submission to the Buildings Department for transmission to the CRV. Submission of Schedule of Building Materials and Products 8. Under the Buildings Ordinance, the AP, RSE, RGE and registered contractor (RC) have responsibilities to supervise building works including the selection and application of building materials and to certify compliance with relevant provisions of the Buildings Ordinance upon completion of works. To expedite the processing of an application for OP, the BA requires the submission of a schedule under Building (Administration) Regulation 44, confirming the use of accepted building materials and products in construction. 9. The schedule should be submitted with an application for OP. The AP should confirm and certify in the schedule the application and performance of building materials and products in compliance with the relevant provisions of the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations; the RC should confirm the use of those building materials /and ..

-3-

and products in construction. Except for regularly used building materials, the schedule should cover all materials and products not specified on the approved plans, the application of which would involve the structural integrity and fire safety of the building, and the cast iron pipes and fittings as stipulated in Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 282. A sample schedule is provided at Appendix A. 10. Where appropriate, a schedule should also be submitted on completion of building works not resulting in a new building, such as alteration and addition works to an existing building.

( CHEUNG Hau-wai ) Building Authority

Ref. :

BD GP/BORD/10 (IV) BD GR/BORD/93 (II) BD GR/OP/4/M BD GR/OA/177

First issue July 1978 Last revision August 2006 This revision November 2007 (AD/NB1) (new para 2 added) Index under : Record Plans Schedule of Building Materials and Products Submission of Amended Building Plans and Application for an Occupation Permit Simultaneous Submission of Record Plans Submission of Schedule of Building Materials and Products Form BA 14 Form BA14A

Certificate of Accepted Building Materials and Products BD Ref. : Date :

Appendix A (PNAP 53) (APP-13)

Re : __________________________________________________________ (Address of development site) To the Building Authority, Part A (to be certified by AP) I, (name in full) _______________________________, authorized person, confirm that accepted building materials and products have been specified in the above building construction. Pursuant to Building (Administration) Regulation 44, I duly endorse the attached Schedule of Building Materials and Products (Annex A. 1 & A. 2). 2. I hereby certify that the building materials and products listed in the attached Schedule are acceptable products under relevant building regulations and that I am satisfied with the application and performance of these products.

Signature of authorized person Certificate of Registration No.: Date of expiry of registration: Part B (to be certified by RC) 3. *I/We, (name in full) __________________________________________, * registered general building contractor/registered specialist contractor in the **________________category, hereby confirm that the accepted building materials and products listed in the attached Schedule have been used and properly applied in the above building construction. Name of the person appointed to act for the registered contractor for the above works

Signature Certificate of Registration No.: Date of expiry of registration: * Delete whichever is inapplicable ** Enter the name of the sub-register for the category of specialized work (Rev. 12/2005)

Annex A. 1 Schedule of Building Materials and Products Re : ____________________________________________________________________ (Address of development site) (A) Fire Resisting Products
Building Product Product Name Name of Manufacturer and Place of Manufacture (City and Country) a) Fire resisting doorset * * * Fire Resisting Performance# (minutes) Integrity Insulation Compliance with Relevant Building Regulations & Codes of Practice Name of laboratory accreditation body Name of laboratory / assessing organization Report no. Date of test / Validity assessment report date Details of Test or Assessment Report Remarks/ Comments

b) Lift landing door c) Fire resisting glazing

d) Fire-stop or sealing system in wall/floor/curtain wall, etc e) Others (e.g. proprietary products, fire shutter, etc)

# The performance on stability has to be demonstrated where applicable. * Corresponding legend in approved plan should be specified where applicable _________________________________ Signature of Authorized Person ___________________ Date

Annex A.2 Schedule of Building Materials and Products (contd) (B) Other Building Materials and Products
Building Product Product Name Name of Manufacturer and Place of Manufacture (City and Country) a) Glazing barrier Compliance with Relevant Building Regulations & Codes of Practice Name of laboratory Name of laboratory / Report no. accreditation body assessing organization Date of test / Validity date assessment report Details of Test or Assessment Report Remarks/ Comments

b) Cast iron pipes and fittings c) Others

I confirm that the above mentioned building products have been tested or assessed as stated and hereby certify that the application and performance of these products comply with the relevant Building Regulations.

__________________________________ Signature of Authorized Person ___________________ Date (Rev. 12/2005)

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-14

Cinemas and Other Places of Public Entertainment in Non-domestic Buildings or Composite Buildings Cinemas Under regulation 49B of the Building (Planning) Regulations (B(P)R), a cinema or cinemas accommodating not more than 2,000 people in aggregate may be situated in any storey or storeys of a non-domestic building or the non-domestic part of a composite building. A pair or group of such cinemas may share exits, foyers, waiting spaces, vestibules and projection rooms. Apart from the relevant provisions of the Buildings Ordinance and the requirements in the Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire (the MOE Code), the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction (the FRC Code) and the Code of Practice for Means of Access for Firefighting and Rescue (the MOA Code), the requirements stipulated in this practice note shall also apply to such cinemas. Shared Exits General Requirements 2. Notwithstanding paragraph 23.2 of the MOE Code, cinemas in a nondomestic building or non-domestic part of a composite building may share the exit routes with other accommodations of non-domestic use in the same building, subject to compliance with the following requirements: (a) all cinema boxes should be provided with a dedicated smoke extraction system and other fire services installations to the satisfaction of the Director of Fire Services; all cinema boxes should be separated from other accommodations with fire resisting walls and floors having adequate fire resistance period (FRP) as specified in the FRC Code. Every door to a cinema box should have an FRP of not less than that required for the walls of the cinema box. Door openings at cinema boxes giving access to the cinema foyer(s) or the adjoining non-domestic accommodations are not required to be provided with a protected lobby under this situation; Fire separation should be provided between the cinema boxes and the cinema foyers in accordance with the requirements in (b) above. Such fire separation is not required if the smoke extraction system is also provided to the cinema foyer(s) to the satisfaction of the Director of Fire Services and, in such case, adequate fire separation /should ..

(b)

(c)

-2-

should be provided between the foyers and other accommodations of the building. Any opening made in the separating walls between the cinema foyers and the adjoining non-domestic accommodations for communication should be protected by a door or a fire shutter with the same FRP as the wall; (d) The exits that serve both the cinema and the adjoining accommodations should be accessible from the common circulation area of the building without having to pass through other private premises; If a staircase is directly connected to a cinema or a group of cinemas at any one storey where occupants of the cinemas do not need to pass through the adjoining non-domestic accommodations to reach the staircase, the entire staircase should be constructed in compliance with the requirements set out in paragraphs 17.2 (b) and 26.2 of the MOE Code; The shared exits should have adequate widths and sizes, based on the total capacity of the cinemas and the adjoining non-domestic accommodations in accordance with the requirements set out in paragraphs 4 to 7 below; In a composite building, the exit routes of the cinemas must be separated from the exit routes of the domestic parts of the building; The exit routes of the cinemas including those shared exits should discharge to streets of not less than 4.5m wide. Two of the exit routes from each floor should discharge into different thoroughfares; and The cinemas are not situated at basement.

(e)

(f)

(g)

(h)

(i)

Entrance to a Cinema 3. The entrance to a cinema or to the cinema foyer may be provided through the circulation areas of the adjoining non-domestic accommodations, such as shopping arcade, subject to compliance with the requirements mentioned above. Width of Exit Routes 4. The width of each exit route and the total width of all the exit routes from the cinemas should be not less than the width shown in Table 2 of the MOE Code. In the case of any cinemas or portion thereof which are 12m or more above pavement level, the width of each exit route and the total width of all the exit routes should be not less than that required in paragraph 25.1, 25.3 and 25.4 of the MOE Code. /5. ..

-3-

5. Where a cinema or a group of cinemas share the exit routes with any part of the adjoining non-domestic accommodations at the same storey of the building, the total numbers and minimum width of the exit routes required for the cinemas and that part of the adjoining accommodations designated to share the exit routes with the cinemas should be determined in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph 4 above, based on the total number of persons of both the cinemas and the relevant part of the adjoining accommodations. 6. If the required width of a shared exit route on a particular floor is greater than that required for the floors below, the exit staircase from that particular floor downward to the ground level should be of the width not less than that required for that particular floor. Horizontal Exits 7. Subject to the following requirements, some of the exits from the cinemas may discharge through the adjoining non-domestic accommodations (e.g. shopping arcade) to the protected staircases or routes on the same floor provided that: (a) the width of such exits from a cinema should be not more than half of the total width of exits required for that cinema; and the common circulation areas of the adjoining non-domestic accommodations, including the cinema foyer through which exits from the cinemas will discharge, should have a floor area of not less than 0.5m2 per person based on the sum of: (i) the total number of persons in the cinemas which is allowed in the design for evacuation through such exits to the adjoining non-domestic accommodations, calculated on a pro-rata basis by reference to the width of such exits and the total width of the exits required for the cinemas; the number of persons in the cinema foyer calculated at a ratio of one person per 0.5m2 of the floor area of the foyer; and the number of persons in the circulation areas of the adjoining non-domestic accommodation calculated in accordance with Table 1 of the MOE Code.

(b)

(ii)

(iii)

Gangways and Seatways 8. The seating layout of the cinemas should comply with the following requirements: (a) The maximum length of a row of seats in a cinema box should not exceed 12m for a seatway with gangway on one side only, and 24m for a seatway with gangways on two sides; and /(b) ..

-4-

(b)

The number of seats in a row should not be more than that set out in Table A in accordance with the width of seatway. Table A Maximum number of seats in a row Width of Seatway (mm) 300 to 324 325 to 349 350 to 374 375 to 399 400 to 424 425 to 449 450 to 474 475 to 499 500 or more Maximum number of seats in a row Gangway on one side Gangway on two sides 14 7 15 8 9 18 10 20 11 22 12 24 12 26 28 12 Limited by the maximum Limited by the maximum length of seatway of 12m length of seatway of 24m

The width of seatway is the minimum clear horizontal distance between the back of one seat unit and the nearest projection of the seat unit in the row behind. Where seats tip up automatically, the width of seatway should be measured between the back of one seat unit and the maximum projection of the seat unit behind when the seat is in the tipped-up position. 9. Gangways of not less than the width shown in Table B should be provided. Table B Minimum width of gangways No. of persons served Less than 500 501 1000 1001 1500 over 1500 Projection Rooms 10. All projectors and the associated equipment shall be placed within a projection room or projection rooms which are separated from the cinemas and other accommodations by walls and floors having an FRP of not less than 1 hour. Every door to a projection room shall have a leakage rate of not exceeding 3m3/hour/m(head and jambs only) when tested at 25 Pa under BS 476: Section 31.1 and with FRP of not less than 1 hour. The above requirements shall not apply to cinemas where no film projector, or electric arc, xenon, or other light source projection equipment which generates hazardous gases, dust or radiation, is used. /11. .. Minimum width of gangways 1 100 mm each 1 200 mm each 1 350 mm each 1 500 mm each

-5-

11. The exit routes from the projection rooms should comply with requirements in the MOE Code. However, an elevated projection room associated to one cinema box only may be provided with only one exit if the sum of its direct distance and travel distance complies with paragraph 14(3)(b) of the MOE Code. The exit or one of the exits from such projection room may discharge through the seating area of the cinema box it serves to the exit staircase. 12. A projection room suite, if not provided with natural ventilation, must be mechanically ventilated to the open air by an independent system. Cinema Foyers 13. Accommodation for persons awaiting admission required under regulation 49E of the B(P)R shall be provided on the basis of 0.5m per person at a ratio of one in six persons for whom seating accommodation is provided. Cinemas in Basements 14. Cinemas in basements should comply with the requirements in paragraph 23.3 of the MOE Code. In addition, the following requirements apply: (a) Foyers The foyers shall be located on the ground floor. The minimum size of the foyer shall be based on 0.5m per person at a ratio of one in three persons for whom seating accommodation is provided. (b) Lifts All lifts serving other floors may open into the cinema or cinemas through a protected lobby. The fireman's lift shall open into the ventilated lobby in the firefighting and rescue stairway and such lobby shall give access to the cinema boxes. (c) Separation All parts of a cinema or cinemas must be separated from other parts of the buildings by walls, floors or other elements of construction having a FRP of not less than 4 hours. Reference should also be made to paragraph 6.2 and 15 of the FRC Code. Installation of Cinema Seats 15. It is acknowledged that extensive renovation and fitting out works will usually be carried out by the cinema operators after the issue of the occupation permit (OP) for the building in which the cinema is situated or after completion of A&A works to /the ..

-6-

the cinema premises. In order to minimize unnecessary waste in the replacement of seats, the Building Authority will not require the installation of cinema seats prior to the issue of OP, or the submission of Form BA14 certifying completion of A&A works, as the case may be, provided that the overall layout of gangways and seatways are properly demarcated on site and an undertaking from the developer/Authorized Person is submitted confirming that the seats would be installed before an application for the cinema licence is made. Other Places of Public Entertainment 16. The requirements set out in the preceding paragraphs may also be applicable to and shall be acceptable for other places of public entertainments (PPE) as if it is a cinema provided that the conditions set out in the preceding paragraphs for cinemas are complied with. 17. Where the aggregate population of all other PPE (i.e. there is no cinema or theatre) in the building is not more than 500 persons in a non-domestic building not having polluting industrial undertakings or the non-domestic part of a composite building, the site of such PPE premises may be permitted to abut on one thoroughfare if the said thoroughfare is an acceptable Emergency Vehicular Access and Director of Fire Services does not have any adverse comment on the arrangement. Similarly, modification of the requirement of the Building (Planning) Regulation 49A may be considered for such PPE premises with a total capacity in aggregate not more than 500 persons in such buildings. Cinema and other Places of Public Entertainment with Capacity of Less Than 50 persons 18. A PPE including cinema with a capacity not exceeding 50 persons may share the exit routes with other non-domestic accommodations in the same building and the requirements stipulated in this PNAP and in Part III of the MOE Code on means of escape for places of public entertainment do not apply to such a premises, provided that: (a) the total capacity in aggregate for all such premises, each having a capacity not exceeding 50 persons, in the same building is not more than 150 persons; such premises is not situated in basement; any projection room, if provided, shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraphs 10 to 12 above; and a cinema foyer, where applicable, is provided in accordance with paragraph 13 above.

(b) (c)

(d)

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority

-7-

Ref. : BD GP/LEG/2 (V) This PNAP is previously known as PNAP 54 First issue July 1978 Last revision September 2005 This revision April 2010 (AD/NB1) - Paras. 16 & 17 added, paras. 15 & 18 amended.

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-15 55

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorised Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Site Formation Temporary or Permanent Filling Work

Authorized persons (APs), registered structural engineers (RSEs) and registered geotechnical engineers (RGEs) should be aware of the potentially disastrous consequences of flowslides of loosely placed, unretained earth fill. Regrettably, examples of inadequate compaction are still found on or adjacent to construction sites. 2. Where in the opinion of the Building Authority (BA) the failure of a fill slope arising from private building works could endanger the public, the BA will require the AP/RGE to submit for approval suitable drawings of the filling work. These drawings should specify the standards laid down in Appendix A attached. The RGE appointed shall give periodic supervision and make such inspections as may be necessary to ensure that the filling works are being carried out in general accordance with the provisions of the Ordinance and regulations and with the plans approved by the BA, and the supervision plan prepared in compliance with the technical memorandum issued under section 39A of BO, and qualified supervision imposed under BO s.17(1)(6)(e) as set out in PNAP 83. 3. Prior to filling work, the AP/RGE should give notice to the BA of the date of commencement of the work. 4. During construction, the AP/RGE should submit monthly reports to BD giving records of tests on compaction of fill slopes together with a covering assessment on the adequacy of compaction. The RGE should ensure that the soil at test location of the in-situ density test shall be of the same type and source to the material used for maximum dry density determination. The reports should be signed by the RGE. The contents of the covering assessment should include : (a) a summary of the results of in situ density tests, laboratory compaction tests and relative compaction of the fill, highlighting areas of non-compliance with the specified compaction standards; and details of any corrective measures taken to rectify areas of inadequate compaction.

(b)

Records of compaction tests in accordance with Appendix A should also be kept on site for inspection by the officers of the Buildings Department (BD) and Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO). /5. Where.

-2-

5. Where there is reason to believe that the placed fill may be loose, the BA will arrange for field checks to be carried out, initially by GCO probes, and supplemented by observations of fill materials in trial pits if an appreciable cobble and boulder content in the fill is suspected. The AP/RGE will be required to arrange for labourers to carry out the GCO probes and trial pit excavation. 6. If loose fill is detected, the AP/RGE must arrange for the in situ density tests of the loose layer to be carried out in the presence of officers of BD and GEO. Where extensive loose fill is found which could pose a significant threat if not rectified, the BA will issue a Cease Works Order under Buildings Ordinance section 23 or 24A. 7. Upon completion of the filling work and prior to submitting certificate of completion of site formation works and seeking an occupation permit, the AP/RGE should submit to the BD: (a) (b) "as-built" plans and sections of the work showing its relationship to existing and proposed buildings; and complete records of in situ density tests and laboratory compaction tests and relative compaction of the fill, all to be in accordance with Appendix A.

8. If structural works are involved, the RSE is to sign the structural calculations and structural assessment reports. The RSE is also to certify completion of the structural works. 9. The issue of an occupation permit will normally be refused under Buildings Ordinance section 21(6)(a) if temporary fills have not been removed from site or if permanent fills, the failure of which would endanger the public, have not been formed in compliance with Appendix A.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority Ref.: BD GP/GEO/3 BD GP/BORD/75 First issue December 1981 Last revision June 1994 This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD) (Paras.1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 and Appendix A amended, para. 8 added) Index under : Filling work Site formation

Appendix A (PNAP 55) (APP-15) Standards for Filling Work (1) The in situ field dry densities of compacted materials forming the peripheral portion of an earth fill slope shall be not less than 95% of the maximum dry density described in item (2) below. The maximum dry density and optimum moisture contents shall be determined in accordance with the standard given in Geospec 3 Model Specification for Soil Testing. Each soil type shall be tested when first used and thereafter at the same time as every set of field density tests are obtained. Records shall be kept, identifying on drawings the soil type, plan location and elevation reference to Principal Datum of each test together with the maximum dry density and optimum moisture contents. Graphs of dry density vs moisture contents, laboratory test record sheets and a complete soil description are to be kept in a companion folder. The in situ field density and moisture contents shall be determined in accordance with the standard given in Geospec 3 in determination of the relative compaction achieved. The number of determinations for each batch of fill material shall be as stated in Table 1 below. Records shall be kept, identifying on drawings the soil type, plan location and elevation reference to Principal Datum of each test together with dry density of soil tested, moisture contents and relative compaction achieved (%). The field sheets, calculation sheets and a complete soil description are to be kept in a companion folder. When only a small amount of fill (depth less than 1 m and total volume less than 300 m3) is proposed, the frequency of in situ density testing may be reduced if the in situ density tests are supplemented by the results of penetration tests. The relative compaction of fill material shall be determined in accordance with the standard given in Geospec 3. As a general principle, it is essential that the maximum dry density determination was carried out on same batch of soil type and source corresponding to the test location of the in-situ density test. When the tests in (2) and (3) above are to be carried out, only laboratories accredited under the Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) for the relevant tests shall be employed.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

/Table 1

-1-

Table 1 Number of Determinations for Moisture Content and Relative Compaction Achieved Description Area of fill in excavations for structures, pits and trenches and on formations Size of area of fill in batch * 0 - 100 m No. of determinations per batch * 3

100 500 m Exceeding 500 m Other areas of fill 0 - 1 ha 1 - 10 ha Exceeding 10 ha *

2 for each 100 m or part thereof 1 for each 100 m or part thereof 4 for each 1000 m or part thereof 3 for each 1000 m or part thereof 2 for each 1000 m or part thereof

A batch of fill material is any quantity of fill material of the same type and has similar properties throughout.

(Rev. 12/2005)

-2-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-16 59

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Cladding Works

This practice note amalgamates Practice Notes for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers (PNAP) 59 and 256 in respect of cladding works. PNAP 256 is withdrawn with immediate effect. 2. Cladding means a facing or architectural decoration additional to the external walls of building: e.g. aluminium or metal cladding, polished granite slabs or limestone cladding, marble facing and the like. Cladding should comply with the performance requirements stipulated in the Building (Construction) Regulation 39 in respect of material type, fixings, strength and durability. 3. Cladding shall be provided with sufficient permanently flexible joints horizontally and vertically to cater for differential movement in the cladding and in the structure to which it is attached. All external anchors, dowels and fixings should be of stainless steel or other corrosion resistant materials. Any metal dowels and fixings securing the cladding panels should be suitable, permanent and adequately protected from corrosion. For testing of anchors and cladding panels, see paragraphs 9 to 15 below. Submission of Cladding Plans 4. Where cladding is to be affixed to any part of the exterior of a building, details such as the location and material should be shown in the general building plan for approval by the Building Authority. When the cladding to be installed is above 6 metres from the adjoining ground level, in addition to the building plans, details such as the thickness, strength, durability, and type of the cladding, material of fixings and sequence of support should also be shown in the structural plans. Failure to do so may result in delay or refusal to give approval to the cladding submission. As regards the fixings of stone cladding, sand/cement bedding and/or epoxy bonding alone is not considered a suitable and permanent fixing. 5. The following details are required to be included in the structural plans for cladding for submission to the Building Authority for approval: (a) structural framing and details of structural elements excluding any unnecessary shop fabrication details; (b) (c) (d) elevations including location of expansion joints; anchors and support details; design standards and codes of practice; /(e) ..

-2-

(e) (f) (g)

material specifications for structural steel, aluminium alloy, granite/marble and anchors; workmanship specifications for welding, galvanization and measures to overcome bi-metallic effects; and structural calculations comprising design check on the parent structure, analysis on the structural adequacy and stability of the proposed cladding system, element design for granite/marble, aluminium or metal cladding and deflection check on major load carrying members, if applicable.

Separate Registered Structural Engineer 6. In view of the speciality of cladding works, a separate Registered Structural Engineer (RSE) may be appointed to prepare the design and to supervise the carrying out of such works. Under such circumstances, the specified Forms BA4 and BA5 indicating the appointment of the separate RSE and the scope of works for which he/she is responsible are required to be submitted together with the plans submitted for approval. Upon completion of the works, the separate RSE so appointed is required to certify satisfactory completion of the works in accordance with Building (Administration) Regulation 25(3). 7. When structural details for cladding works are submitted by the separate RSE, the submission should be accompanied by an assessment report prepared by him/her giving an account of the effect of the proposed works to the parent structure. The assessment report should be appended with a statement signed by the project RSE to confirm that he/she is fully aware of the connection details and the effect of the works on the parent structure. 8. The separate RSE who is appointed for the cladding works shall be responsible for the supervision of the construction of such works, including the installation of any cast-in anchorage e.g. anchor plates, cast-in embeds and through bolts, etc., in the parent structure except in the event where the cast-in anchorage has been pre-installed in the parent structure prior to his/her appointment. For such cases, the structural details and layout of the pre-installed parts should be given in the superstructural plans to be submitted for approval by the project RSE who shall then be responsible for the supervision of the installation of such parts. The separate RSE should refer to the pre-installed connection details when designing the cladding works and should co-ordinate with the project RSE for necessary amendment if different connection details are to be used.

/Tests ..

-3-

Tests on Anchors 9. On-site strength tests should be carried out on a representative number of each type and size of drilled-in anchors for those parts of the cladding above 6 metres from the adjoining ground level. Such tests are necessary to verify the performance and workmanship of the anchors installed and should be carried out under the direction of the RSE or Authorized Person (AP). 10. Each representative anchor should be tested by pull-out test to demonstrate that its pull-out capacity is not less than 1.5 times the recommended tensile load as specified by the anchor manufacturer. The tested anchor should be considered satisfactory if it does not show any signs of separation, plastic deformation or deleterious effect during the test. Tests on Stone Cladding Panels 11. Stone cladding is a natural material. The mechanical properties, physical properties and chemical properties can vary considerably between different types and grades of stones. Tests on stone cladding panels are required to be carried out to verify the characteristic strengths adopted in the design and to form part of the quality assurance during construction. The characteristic strengths shall be not less than three times that of the designed strengths used. 12. When stone cladding is to be used, the following tests are required to be carried out for each type of stone: (a) flexural strength test of dimension stone to ASTM C880 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimension Stone or to BS EN12372 Natural Stone Test Methods, Determination of Flexural Strength under Concentrated Load or to other appropriate equivalent standards; and strength test of individual stone anchorage to ASTM C1354 Standard Test Method for Strength of Individual Stone Anchorages in Dimension Stone or to other appropriate equivalent standards.

(b)

13. As limestone is highly susceptible to acid rain and may deteriorate quickly when being used as exterior cladding material, in addition to paragraph 12 above, aged strength testing to simulate weathering due to extreme temperature change and extreme moisture content change should be carried out for limestone cladding to demonstrate that the residual flexural and anchorage capacities are not less than 80% of those obtained in the standard tests specified in paragraph 12 above. The aim of aged strength testing is to simulate the conditions in which limestone panels are fully saturated and return to their driest conditions and to simulate the critical temperature changes during their intended life. /14. ..

-4-

14. At least 5 test specimens are selected at random from batches of stone delivered to site for each of the test specified in paragraphs 12 and 13 above. 15. The test should be carried out by or under the direction and supervision of a testing agency independent of the supplier of the stone cladding. The test results should be certified by the testing agency, and endorsed by the AP/RSE to confirm that the test results have reached the required characteristic strengths adopted in the design. No consent for the commencement of the stone cladding works will be given until the test reports specified in paragraphs 12(a), 12(b) and 13 above for each type and grade of stone, selected randomly from the first batch of stone delivered to site, have been submitted and found to be satisfactory by the Building Authority. However, if there are difficulties in arranging test specimens to be delivered to site, specimens may be selected from the blocks of stones at the quarry that are to be used on the proposed project. Design and Construction Standards 16. Standards commonly used for the design and construction of cladding works, which are acceptable to the Building Authority, are given in Appendix A.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/6(IV) First issue May 1979 Last revision March 2003 This revision June 2006 (AD/NB2) (amalgamating PNAP 256; paragraphs rearranged) Index under : Cladding Stone Cladding Structural Plans for Cladding

Appendix A (PNAP 59) (APP-16) Standards Commonly Used for the Design & Construction of Cladding Works Acceptable to the Building Authority Reference Standards The standards listed in this appendix are intended to provide reference information only for the purpose of design and construction of cladding works. It should be noted that: (a) (b) the standards listed are not meant to be exhaustive; national standards and codes of practice of various countries, though similar in major aspects, do not have exact equivalence to one another; should a certain design standard be adopted, it should be applied to the design consistently; and Building Regulations shall always take precedence over other design standards should there be a conflict between them.

(c) (d)

A. Material & Workmanship Material & Workmanship Steel Aluminium Standard Hong Kong Code of Practice BS 1161:1977(1991) BS 1470:1987 Title Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2005 Specification for aluminium alloy sections for structural purposes Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes: plate, sheet and strip Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes rivet, bolt and screw stock

BS 1473:1972(2002)

-1-

BS 1474:1987

Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes: bars, extruded round tubes and sections Specification for MIG welding aluminium and aluminium alloys of

BS 3571:Part 1:1985 Stainless Steel BS 8118-2:1991

Structural use of aluminium Specification for materials, workmanship and protection Specification for stainless and resisting steel plate, sheet and strip heat-

BS 1449:Part 2:1983 BS 6105:1981 Sealant BS 7475:1991 BS 6213:2000

Specification for corrosion-resistant stainless steel fasteners Specification for fusion austenitic stainless steels welding of

Selection of construction sealants. Guide

B. Design Design Steel Aluminium Standard Hong Kong Code of Practice CP 118:1969 BS 8118-1:1991 Natural Stone BS 8298:1994 Title Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2005 The structural use of aluminium Structural use of aluminium Code of practice for design Code of practice for design and installation of natural stone cladding & lining

/C. Testing ..

-2-

C. Testing Testing Sealant Standard BS 3712: Part 1:1991(1996) Part 2:1973(2000) Part 3:1974(2000) Part 4:1991(1996) Anchors BS 5080: Part 1:1993 Part 2:1986(1993) Title Building and construction sealants: Methods of test for homogeneity, relative density and penetration Methods of test for seepage, staining, shrinkage, shelf life and paintability Methods of test for application life, skinning properties and tack-free time Method of test for adhesion in peel Structural fixings in concrete and masonry: Method of test for tensile loading Method for determination of resistance to loading in shear

(6/2006)

-3-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-17 61

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Rock Faces Building (Planning) Regulations 27 and 47 For the purposes of Building (Planning) Regulation 47, only a widely-jointed (spacing over 600mm) rock face having no unfavourably oriented joints or other discontinuities or other defects will be regarded as a massive rock face. For slopes other than massive rock face, the provisions of Building (Planning) Regulation 27 will apply. 2. The Appendix of this PNAP elaborates on the requirements on submission of site formation plans involving rock faces and the standard of good practice to enable safety of rock faces. The importance of engaging qualified geotechnical engineers in the rock face survey is stressed and the lessons learnt from past rock face failures including the Fei Tsui Road fatal landslide are incorporated. 3. Adequate measures should be taken to prevent uncontrolled rockfalls during construction. This is particularly important for works on existing rock faces that affect public safety.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/28 First issued June 1979 Last update May 1994 This update December 1996 (AD/SE,GGE/I) Index under : Blasting B(P)R 27 & 47 Rock Faces Rock Faces - B(P)R 27 & 47

Appendix to PNAP 61 Appendix to APP-17 Requirements on Submission of Site Formation Plans Involving Rock Faces The purpose of this Appendix is to lay down the requirements on submission of site formation plans involving rock faces and to elaborate on the standard of good practice to enable safety of rock faces both during construction and in the long term. The importance of engaging qualified geotechnical engineers in the rock face survey is stressed and the lessons learned from past rock face failures including the Fei Tsui Road Fatal Landslide are incorporated. 2. As for design of other types of slopes, design of rock faces starts with site investigation which may include site reconnaissance, aerial photograph interpretation, engineering geological field mapping and drillhole investigation. Rock mass condition including information on discontinuities could be obtained by appropriate field and laboratory testing such as packer (water absorption) tests, impression packers and close circuit television surveying, etc. Useful information on this aspect is contained in the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes, Geoguide 2 - Guide to Site Investigation and Geoguide 4 - Guide to Cavern Engineering. Some guidelines on shear strength of rock mass and rock joints can be found in Geoguide 1 - Guide to Retaining Wall Design. 3. Methods of stability analysis and principle stabilisation measures for rock slopes are summarised in Tables 5.6 and 5.7 of the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes. 4. Persons responsible for the formation of rock faces will rarely be able to assess the full extent of the stability problem until excavation is nearly completed. Only then will the spacing, persistence, orientation and other characteristics (such as nature of constituent infill materials, roughness and aperture size) of discontinuities and other planes of weakness in the rock be revealed. It is, therefore, frequently necessary to make assumptions about the jointing pattern an other characteristics in order to evaluate the overall stability of the rock slope and to make provision for local support of the final face and, as appropriate, general support of the rock slope. These assumptions and the basis for them must be clearly and fully stated on the site formation plans submitted for approval. 5. Such plans should also contain notes on observance of the following standard of good practice : a) any blasting to be carried out shall be controlled to avoid damage to the final face. Pre-split or smooth-face methods shall be used to form the final face in suitable geological conditions; if expanding agents are to be used for rock splitting, the method to prevent the uncontrolled flow of the expanding agents shall be stated, and any adverse effect on the stability of rock faces shall be assessed;

b)

-2c) immediately after excavation, the intended final face shall be scaled by removing loose material and shall be surveyed by a qualified geotechnical engineer or engineering geologist, e.g. Registered Professional Engineer (Geotechnical) with adequate experience in the design and construction of rock faces. The survey shall include the identification of any water seepages and weak or relatively impermeable geological zones or structures which may have adverse effect on the stability of the slope (for example, unfavourably oriented persistent layers of kaolinitic clay in altered or weathered rocks). Results of the survey shall be used in the design and detailing of support measures, rockfall control measures and drainage measures; and large-scale engineering geological drawings (marked-up transparent overlays to photographs or otherwise), showing all salient rock features including any weak or relatively impermeable geological zones or structures together with appropriate descriptions in accordance with Geoguide 3, the dimensioned location, dimensioned extent and details of all support and drainage measures, shall be submitted for the approval of the Building Authority. Documentation will also be required on : i) ii) calculations and supporting data to justify the design of all support measures and to confirm overall stability; photographs of the scaled rock faces, where physically possible.

d)

6. With regard to para 5(c), your attention is drawn to the Geotechnical Engineering Office Investigation Report on the Fei Tsui Road Fatal Landslide of 13 August 1995. The existence of an unfavourably oriented persistent layer of weak and relatively impermeable material in the ground is a principal cause of failure. A copy of the report is available for inspection in the Civil Engineering Library of the Civil Engineering Building at 101 Princess Margaret Road, Homantin, Kowloon.

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-18 66

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Pile Foundations

To facilitate the processing of pile foundation submissions and to ensure proper design and construction of pile foundation works, the following guidelines should be observed. Recognized Types of Pile Foundation 2. A recognized type of pile foundation is regarded as the piling system recognized by the Building Authority (BA) prior to the approval of piling plans through the submission of relevant technical details for assessment, normally by the registered structural engineer (RSE) in conjunction with the registered specialist contractor experienced in such system. A list of recognized types of pile foundation is available from the Buildings Department (BD). 3. Where it is proposed to use a piling system, which is not a recognized type, the RSE is advised to prove its acceptability to the BA before detailed piling plans are submitted for approval. To enable the BA to fully consider the system, all relevant technical details on materials, manufacturing process, structural design, method of installation, method of assessing foundation capacity and applicability relating to ground conditions and selected examples of the use of the system elsewhere, if applicable, should be submitted following which a demonstration of the system may be called for. Piling Plans Submission 4. The following particulars are required, under Building (Administration) Regulations 8 and 10, to be included in the pile foundation submission for approval: Particulars to be shown on the piling plan (a) (b) a block plan showing the location of the site; details showing the characteristic features of the site and environments, including locations of ground investigation boreholes, slopes, existing foundations, nullahs, retaining walls and the like; layout arrangement, identification, expected depths and cut-off levels of the piles; layout arrangement of the pile caps; size, shape and structural details of the pile element, including details of the shoe, head, splices and cap/pile connection; pile bearing capacity and method of verification on site; /(g) ..

(c) (d) (e) (f)

-2-

(g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l)

specification of structural materials; magnitude of characteristic dead, imposed and wind loads and their critical combinations acting on each pile or each group of piles; installation specifications, such as founding criteria, method of installation, method of overcoming underground obstruction; method of controlling and monitoring the verticality, inclination and alignment of piles during installation; details of monitoring requirements for adjacent and nearby buildings, structures, land, streets and services; and Where dynamic pile driving formula is used, the parameters for the assessment of the ultimate pile capacity, such as the effective energy per blow, efficiency of blow and penetration of pile for a hammer blow. Particulars to be given in separate documents

(m)

site investigation report including results of ground investigation, necessary field and laboratory tests and photographs of all the soil samples and rock cores taken; design calculations based on recognized foundation engineering principles; and appraisal report on the effects of the piling works on adjacent and nearby buildings; structures, land, streets and services, including any proposal of precautionary and protective measures.

(n) (o)

5. The RSEs attention is drawn to Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers (PNAP) 289 in preparing the piling plan submission, in particular for items (k) and (o) of paragraph 4 above. In addition, the geotechnical reports and supporting documents if required should be prepared and signed by the registered geotechnical engineer. Design of Pile Foundations 6. In the design of pile foundations, the general guidelines provided in the Code of Practice for Foundations should be followed. Pre-design Ground Investigations 7. Prior to the design of the pile foundation, sufficient ground investigations should be carried out so that adequate information on the geology of the site can be obtained and hence the general founding levels of the piles can be estimated. For further guidelines on ground investigation works, please refer to PNAP 132. /Pre-drilling ..

-3-

Pre-drilling 8. For piles founded on rock, sufficient pre-drilling should be carried out prior to the installation works, such that the quality of the founding rock can be identified and the appropriate founding levels can be determined. The pre-drilling should be sunk to at least 5 m below the rock head of the specified grade. 9. Pre-drilling should be carried out for each of the large diameter bored piles, barrettes and the like, and the records of the pre-drilling should be submitted to BD at suitable intervals during the construction of the piles. 10. For minipiles, socketted steel H-piles and similar small diameter bored piles founding on rock, pre-drilling at location in close proximity of the piles should be made. The number of pre-drilled boreholes required should be such that the pile tip of every such pile should be within 5 metres from a pre-drilled hole. The predrilling should be sunk into the rock mass for at least 5 m below the rock head of the specified grade or the designed length of the rock socket of the nearest pile, whichever is the deeper. Post Construction Proof Drilling 11. When large diameter bored piles, barrettes and the like are completed, core-drilling should be carried out at the concrete/rock interface for each of these piles. To facilitate successful core-drilling at the interface, a pipe of not less than 150 mm diameter may be left in at about 1 m above the interface. The core-drilling should be carried down to at least 1 m below the interface. 12. It is always expected that the concrete should be in good contact with rock at the interface and the rock is consistently of the required grade beneath the pile base. However, minor imperfection observed during the interface core-drilling, such as a thin layer of sediment, segregated concrete or weathered seam in the rock beneath the pile base, may be considered acceptable provided that the RSE can demonstrate his acceptance with justifications. As an alternative, the RSE may include in the foundation plans, proposals of remedial works for rectifying any such imperfections at the interface if found. The proposals should provide details of the method statement and the supervision required by the RSE. 13. For minipiles, socketted steel H-piles and the like, there would be practical problem for core-drilling at the concrete/rock interface. To verify the rockhead profile and hence assess the adequacy of the socketted length for these types of piles, some additional proof drill holes should be sunk into the rock mass and down to at least 5 m below the as-built top level of the rock socket of the nearest pile or to the as-built bottom level of the rock socket of the nearest pile, whichever is the deeper. The number of post-installation boreholes should be at least 2 for sites with /100 ..

-4-

100 piles or less; or 1% of the number of piles for sites with more than 100 piles (any fraction of a borehole so calculated should be construed as one additional borehole). The RSE should determine the location of the boreholes. When submitting the certificate on completion of the piling works (Form BA 14), the RSE should submit an assessment report with a rockhead contour plan based on the ground investigation, the pre-drilling and the post-installation drilling, together with the piling record plan. Registered Specialist Contractor in the Ground Investigation Field Work Category 14. All ground investigation works, pre-drilling, interface core-drilling, postinstallation drilling and proof test core-drilling must be carried out by a Registered Specialist Contractor in the Ground Investigation Field Works category. The contractor who is appointed to carry out proof test core-drilling required under Building (Construction) Regulation 30 should make declaration on its connection with the foundation contractor, including whether or not it is a holding/subsidiary/an associated company of the foundation contractor, or has financial relationship with it (e.g. cross-directorship), or has financial interest in the foundation works. Quality Supervision for Piles Foundations 15. Adequate supervision should be provided for the pre-drilling, construction and proof test of pile foundations to ensure built quality. Requirements for quality supervision to be provided for pile foundation works are stipulated in the Code of Practice for Site Supervision. PNAP 242 stipulating the quality supervision requirements for foundation works is hereby withdrawn. Ground-borne Vibrations Arising from Pile Driving and Similar Operations 16. Adequate control of ground-borne vibrations should be provided for the pile driving and similar operations. In this connection, requirements are stipulated in PNAP 289. Pile Foundations in the Scheduled Areas 17. Some special requirements for pile foundations in the Scheduled Areas are given in PNAPs 77, 85, 161, 165 and 279. Form BA 14 18. Upon completion of the piling works, a specified Form BA14 certifying the completion should be submitted in the manner prescribed in Building (Administration) Regulation 25. For exceptionally large sites, foundation works may be suitably phased and separately considered for proof testing. BD should be consulted as early as possible on such special arrangement. To expedite the selection of piles for proof tests, piling record plans and reports may be separately submitted prior to the submission of the specified Form BA14. /Piling ..

-5-

Piling Record Plan and Reports 19. Upon completion of the piling work two sets of piling record plan and reports should be submitted as may be required under Building (Administration) Regulation 10 to certify the satisfactory completion of the piling works. These should include: (a) a plan showing characteristic features of the site and the identification, location, depth and size of each pile as constructed;

(b) a report listing the date of construction, the quality and quantity of materials used and driving performance or excavation record of each pile; (c) reports on any tests as required for the particular piling system; and

(d) an assessment report with rock head contour plans, as appropriate. Within 14 days of the receipt of these documents, BD would inform the AP/RSE of the representative piles identified for proof tests. To avoid unnecessary delay, the AP/RSE should ensure that full information on the completed piles is included in the piling record plan and reports. Proof Tests 20. Proof tests on foundation units are required under Building (Construction) Regulation 30. Except in special circumstances where the standard of acceptance is to be determined according to the design and factor of safety, the BA will normally be satisfied if the procedures and criteria described in the Code of Practice for Foundations are followed. Alternative procedures and acceptance criteria, supported by justification based on recognized foundation engineering principles and relevant to a particular site and building may also be adopted. 21. Alternative procedures and acceptance criteria, or methods other than test loading or core-drilling, which can demonstrate the performance of the foundation under loads or verify the integrity and the load-response interaction between the foundation unit and the bearing stratum may also be adopted. In this connection, the following should be submitted well in advance of the completion of the foundation works so that the BA may fully consider the suitability of the proposed method of testing: (a) relevant recognized engineering principles and theories for the proposed method of testing; (b) detailed procedures of testing; (c) acceptance criteria; /(d) ..

-6-

(d) interpretation of the test results; and (e) any verification tests performed to justify the parameters to be used in the proof test. Further On Site Tests 22. Whenever doubt exists as to the design assumption or load carrying capacity of any pile foundation, further on site tests may be required under Building (Construction) Regulation 29. Amendments to Approved Plans 23. For submission of amendment plans and their related consent applications, the fast track procedures for securing consent for amendments outlined in PNAP 215 shall apply. 24. Consent to the commencement of the pile cap and superstructure works will not be given until: (a) satisfactory piling records have been submitted; (b) specified Form BA14 has been submitted; (c) the required proof tests have been satisfactorily carried out; and (d) all relevant imposed conditions including materials testing requirement have been complied with. Concurrent Processing of Applications 25. Procedures are in place in BD for concurrent processing of applications for approval and consent in respect of new foundation works. Except in cases where any imposed condition should require to be first met, e.g. shoring to adjoining buildings to be completed before piling works may commence, BD will consider giving approval of plans for foundation works and consent for such works at the same time. If an AP or RSE wishes to take advantage of these procedures, he should co-operate with the department by ensuring that an application for consent is not submitted before the 32nd day of the submission of plans for approval, to avoid unnecessary complications in administrative work. 26. To minimize the idling time on construction sites, applications may also be made for consent to commence excavation works for substructures prior to the final completion of foundation works, provided that the supervision plan for the excavation works is submitted and any earth-retaining elements (such as sheet piles) have been satisfactorily installed. These procedures mean that earth-retaining elements may be /installed ..

-7-

installed concurrently with the foundation works, thereby allowing excavation works for substructures to be carried out while foundation record plans are being examined and proof tests arranged. Consent for the construction of substructure elements (pile caps, for example) will be given only after satisfactory completion of the required proof tests.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref.: BD GP/BREG/C/11 First issue February 1980 Last revision December 2005 This revision February 2006 (AD/NB2) (Para 15 and 17 amended) Index under: Pile Foundations Pre-drilling Core-drilling Test Quality Sueprvision

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-19 68

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Projections in relation to site coverage and plot ratio Building (Planning) Regulations 20 & 21 In accordance with Building (Planning) Regulation 2, site coverage means the area of a site that is covered by the building(s) erected thereon. In simple terms, the site coverage is the shadow cast on a site with the sun directly overhead. Hence all components of a building, including all projections, should be accountable for site coverage. However, site coverage is also a measure to control the building bulk. 2. In the case of plot ratio, the definition of gross floor area uses the term external wall. Clearly wall does not just mean concrete or brick material, and windows and parapet railings should obviously also be included. For projections from a building, it is accepted that if the projections are not at a floor level, or potential floor level, and do not dominate the face of a building, measurement as accountable gross floor area is not required. 3. It follows from the above that the following projections from the face of a building, having no significant impact on building bulk, need not be counted for site coverage and plot ratio: (a) pitched roof eaves and flat roof overhangs complying with B(P)R 7(1) (provided these are not contained within parapet walls as part of an accessible flat roof); (b) individual air-conditioner boxes and platforms of reasonable size which have a built-in system for condensate disposal; (c) individual canopies, window hoods complying with B(P)R 7(1) and porches having projection no exceeding 1.5m; (d) window cills and window surrounds projecting not more than 100 mm; (e) string courses, fins and architectural mouldings complying with B(P)R 7(1) (but not structural beams and columns); (f) window flower boxes not exceeding 500mm in width; (g) external drainage pipes and gutters complying with B(P)R 7(1); and (h) sunshades solely used for the purpose of energy conservation projecting not more than 1.5m from the external wall. 4. It is emphasized that, notwithstanding paragraph 3 above, if any of the listed features is so exaggerated, excessive in scale, or defeats the provisions of the Ordinance (for example, a structural beam doubling as a flower box) or is provided or designed in an unusual way, that feature will be counted for site coverage and, if appropriate, also for plot ratio. /5. ..

-25. It follows from the above that all other projections must be included in site coverage and plot ratio calculations. However projecting windows may be accepted as not counting for plot ratio provided they satisfy all the following criteria within the storey from which they project : (a) the projecting window is from domestic accommodation only; (b) only one such projecting window is located on one external wall and situated in any one room; (c) the total areas of the projecting windows together with the louvres/open grilles, if any, for the purpose of shielding of air-conditioning plants placed underneath or above the projecting windows, do not exceed 50% of the total areas of the faade of the said floor on the same elevation; (d) the extent of the projection is not more than 500 mm from the face of the main external wall; (e) the base is not less than 500 mm above finished floor level; (f) the top is not less than 500 mm from the underside of the finish ceiling; and

(g) the window complies fully with Building (Planning) Regulation 3A. For the purposes of this requirement, the height of 1100 mm protective barrier will be measured from floor level and any part of the window within this dimension should be fixed or otherwise suitably protected in line with clause (2) of the Regulation. 6. Except those complying with Part II of the Building (Planning) Regulations, no projections will normally be allowed over streets unless they can be justified in the public interest. In this context the projection of individual air-conditioning boxes/platforms and window hoods may be allowed, provided they do not project more than 500 mm over a street and are at a height of not less than 2.5 m above ground (please also see PNAP 116).

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/2 (III) First issue March 1980 Last revision March 2000 This revision May 2004 (AD/NB1) (General revision) Index under : B(P)R 20 & 21 - Projections in relation to site coverage and plot ratio Bay Windows Projecting Windows Projections

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-20 70

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorised Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Building Proposals affected by Street Widening Building (Planning) Regulation 22(2) When part of a lot is to be acquired by Government for the purpose of street widening, the owner may be given one or a combination of the following forms of compensation : (a) (b) (c) Bonus plot ratio and/or site coverage under Building (Planning) Regulation 22(2). Cash settlement (negotiated by the Lands Department). An exchange of Land (negotiated by the Lands Department).

2. In the event of (a) being adopted, the interpretation of Building (Planning) Regulation 22(2) will be of concern to land owners and authorized persons (APs) and its implications will require to be ascertained on other related Building (Planning) Regulations. It is for the purpose of avoiding doubt that this practice note is issued so that APs may acquaint themselves and the owners with the method by which compensation in terms of development potential may be quantified. 3. In considering whether or not to permit the bonus under Building (Planning) Regulation 22(2), the Building Authority will be prepared, subject to paragraph 4 below and the provisions of Building (Planning) Regulation 23(2)(a), to accept the part or parts of a lot required for street widening to count also as site area, in respect only of the first building subsequently erected on the reduced site area, for the purposes of arriving at the permitted plot ratio and site coverage for the building. 4. The statement in paragraph 3 above is made with the proviso that : (a) all claims for bonus under the Regulation will be dealt with individually according to the special circumstances of each case; the additional plot ratio referred to in Building (Planning) Regulation 22(2)(b) may only be given where the Building Authority is satisfied that the density of the development or redevelopment is not excessive; /(c) ..

(b)

-2(c) a separate block plan (in quadruplicate) indicating the area to be surrendered accompanies the building plan submission claiming bonus under Building (Planning) Regulation 22(2); the building plans are suitably endorsed to indicate the areas to be surrendered; and a formal Agreement to Surrender to the satisfaction of Lands Department is executed and registered in the Land Registry.

(d) (e)

5. With regard to Building (Planning) Regulation 25, a similar principle may be used, i.e. the setback area may count as open space where it is at the side or rear of a building. 6. Having established, at the time of submitting building plans for approval, that the lot concerned is affected by street widening proposals, APs are advised at the same time to submit a set of those plans to the Chief Estate Surveyor/Acquisition, Lands Department. The purpose of this procedure is to provide the earliest opportunity to consider the proposed method adopted for achieving compensation in terms of development potential. Agreement to Surrender 7. A temporary occupation permit or an occupation permit will not be issued before the execution of an Agreement to Surrender incorporating all the relevant terms and conditions. AP should remind the owners for early preparation and execution of the required Agreement.

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority Ref. : BLD(B) GP/BREG/P/4 BLD(B) GP/BL/P/5 First issue April 1980 Last revision January 1990 This revision December 2008 (AD/NB1) (General amendment and para. 7 added) Index under : B(P)R 22(2) - Building Proposals affected by Street Widening Street Widening - B(P)R 22(2)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-21 71

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorised Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Demolition Works Measures for Public Safety Introduction To ensure public safety, the control of demolition works is governed by the Buildings Ordinance, Building (Administration) Regulations and Building (Demolition Works) Regulations, which impose requirements for: (a) (b) (c) (d) application for approval of plans for demolition works; application for consent to commence the works; site safety supervision; appointment of Technically Competent Person to supervise demolition works and operator of powered mechanical plant or equipment; and certification of completion of works.

(e)

2. This practice note sets out the procedures to be followed by authorized persons (AP), registered structural engineers (RSE) and registered geotechnical engineers (RGE) in meeting these requirements. Some points for practical application are also clarified. Demolition Proposals 3. All demolition proposals should be submitted for formal approval as prescribed under Regulation 8(3) and (4) of the Building (Administration) Regulations. When preparing plans for demolition works, reference should be made to the Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings 2004 (the Code) issued by the Buildings Department (BD) for guidance for complying with the Buildings Ordinance and its related regulations. The Building Authority (BA) may refuse to approve under section 16(1)(a) and (e) of the Buildings Ordinance any demolition proposal which does not contain all the plans and documents prescribed in the regulations. 4. The BA will exercise his discretion to refuse an application for consent to the commencement of demolition works under section 16(3)(a) and (b) of the Buildings Ordinance where his approval to the demolition plans for the works has not been given. / Precautionary ....

-2Precautionary and Protective Measures 5. Notwithstanding the need to include the precautionary and protective measures for the demolition works on the plans submitted for approval, the following measures, which at the time of their erection do not affect the structure of any building, may be erected without the consent of the BA : a) b) c) d) e) protective wire nettings; dust screens of plastic or tarpaulin sheets; scaffolds and intermediate catchfans; hoarding, covered walkway, gantry and catch platforms; shoring & propping for stabilizing buildings under demolition or adjoining buildings.

Site Safety Supervision Plan 6. A supervision plan as defined under section 2(1) of the Buildings Ordinance is required to be lodged with the BA by an AP prior to or at the time of application for consent to commence demolition works except for works which satisfy all of the criteria set out in paragraph 11 of the Technical Memorandum for Supervision Plans. The supervision plan should be prepared in accordance with the recommendations in the Code of Practice for Site Supervision issued by BD. Under section 16(3)(bc) of the Building Ordinance, the BA may refuse to give his consent to the commencement of demolition works where an AP has not lodged a supervision plan for the works. Execution and Supervision of Demolition Works 7. AP, RSE, RGE and Registered Specialist Contractor (RSC) are required to observe the requirements on the provision of a full time site engineer for demolition of complex structures, debris management system, and other execution and supervision particulars as stipulated in the Code. 8. Where a site engineer is required to be appointed, he/she shall be directly responsible to the RSC. Any subsequent change of the site engineer shall be reported to the AP/RSE/RGE and the BA by the RSC.

Video..

-3Video Record of Demolition Works 9. Video camera to record the entire demolition process shall be provided by the RSC for all types of demolition sites. The video camera(s) should be installed at strategic location(s) agreed by the AP/RSE/RGE and be securely protected from being tampered with so that the entire demolition process including the movement of debris and the overall sequence of demolition can be recorded for reference and review purposes. While the exact number of cameras is to be determined by the AP/RSE/RGE, there should be at least one video camera for each site. The location of the video camera(s) should be shown in the demolition plan. 10. The video records should be kept by the RSC for at least 14 days.

Appointment of Operator of Powered Mechanical Plant or Equipment 11. The use of powered mechanical plant or equipment for demolition works carries risks and particular care should be taken. In certain circumstances, it may even be unsafe and should not be allowed, for example, the use of a crane and hammer in a densely populated area. To ensure public safety, the operator of powered mechanical plant or equipment used in demolition work shall meet the requirements as specified in Regulation 9(3) of the Building (Demolition Works) Regulations. 12. For the purpose of Building (Demolition Works) Regulation 9(3)(b), an operator should have completed a training course in Demolition of Building Course for Plant Operators organised by the Construction Industry Training Authority (CITA) and obtained the relevant certificate. Equivalent training and certificate issued by a recognised examining body may also be favourably considered by the BA for meeting the requirement. 13. An application for consent to the commencement of demolition works must be accompanied by the personal particulars, qualifications and experience of the operators of any powered mechanical plant or equipment proposed to be used in the demolition works in accordance with Regulation 31 of the Building (Administration) Regulations. The information to be submitted should include the operators names in Chinese and English, Hong Kong identity card numbers, dates of birth, addresses and telephone numbers. The BA may refuse the consent application under section 16(3)(b) of the Buildings Ordinance where such particulars have not been submitted. 14. The BA will vet the particulars of the plant operators and advise the AP on the suitability of the operators as soon as possible, having regard to their qualifications, experience and training. 15. Where there is a change in the appointment of the operator, the BA should also be notified within 7 days of the change and provided with the personal particulars, qualifications and experience of the new operator. Danger.

-4Danger from Fire or Explosion 16. Dangerous and hazardous materials left by the previous occupants may cause risk of fire or explosion through the leakage or accumulation of gas or vapour due to demolition operations. RSCs for demolition works should be asked to ensure all flammable goods are removed from site and any remaining flammable goods are stored in proper storage facilities. All parties are drawn to the attention of the provisions of Building (Demolition Works) Regulation 6. Demolition of Dangerous Buildings 17. In addition to the normal procedures under the Building (Demolition Works) Regulations, some special arrangements specifically apply to the demolition of dangerous buildings under the BAs order. The following notes are given for guidance and are not intended to be exhaustive : (a) Closure Immediately after a closure order has been issued and the building vacated, the premises should be secured against unauthorized entry. Otherwise, the BA has the authority to secure the building and charge the costs to the owner. An AP, the owner or anyone affected by the closure who wishes to gain entry to the building subsequently, should apply to the Existing Buildings Division (EBD), BD for a permit. (b) Shoring All shores are preferably in structural steel of Grade 250 or above and to comply with the current edition of Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel or equivalent. The position of dead shores should first be discussed with EBD. Raking shores or more permanent forms of support for party walls and any common structures should also be suitably designed and constructed. Plans should be submitted for agreement prior to their erection. In the construction of shores, attention must particularly be given to the connection details between the steel shoring and the party wall. Temporary shoring should be removed after the demolition works have been completed but, where necessary, should be replaced by a more permanent form of support. (c) Pedestrian Passageways Matters relating to pedestrian passageways associated with demolition works are dealt with in PNAP 75. /(d)..

-5(d) Joint Demolition Where several adjacent buildings are to be demolished, an AP appointed in respect of one should not arrange to commence demolition works until the demolition of all buildings can proceed simultaneously. Any consequential delays should be notified to EPD early, so that co-ordination by the parties concerned may be put in hand. (e) Party Walls In most cases, exposed party walls which remain to enclose existing buildings will require raking or flying shores (Appendix A) from the site of the demolished building. In many cases, an order requiring such works may be issued by the BA. Where a party wall is next to a framed building, any such order served may require demolition of the party wall and provision of new enclosure to the framed building. Where conditions permit, the BA may be prepared to consider alternative permanent measures, to be proposed by the AP in charge. Early discussion will avoid delays. Party walls that will remain should be regularly inspected as demolition proceeds and repairs (including rendering, facing up cut brickwork and removing old wood joist ends) should be carried out concurrently with the demolition works or in special circumstances, as soon as possible. (f) Default Where works have not commenced or have not been carried out within the period specified in the order, the BA may cause the works to be carried out and then recover the costs together with plus supervision charges from the owner. The AP appointed should advise his client accordingly and attend to all matters without delay. (g) Liaison It is the duty of the AP to advise the BA of any unexpected weaknesses in adjacent buildings, structures and ground revealed by demolition works. He should immediately discuss with EBD any such problems encountered. Street Name Signs on Buildings 18. To ensure efficient replacement of street name plates, AP are requested to inform the Director of Highways of any case where street name plates are affixed to buildings to be demolished : Buildings Ordinance section 32 refers. Public

-6Public Drainage System 19. To ensure proper updating of drainage records and better control of drainage connections, AP are requested to inform the Drainage Services Department (Hong Kong and Islands Division/Mainland South Division/Mainland North Division, as appropriate) once the Registered General Building Contractor (RGBC) or RSC has completed the sealing of drains : Building (Demolition Works) Regulation 3(2)(b) refers. Demolition affecting slopes and retaining walls 20. If demolition works affect slopes and retaining walls, the RSE should ensure that all the relevant recommendations by the RGE are incorporated in the demolition plans. Any difference in opinion should be resolved between the RSE and RGE before submission to the BD. The Geotechnical Reports and supporting documents are to be prepared and signed by the RGE. Safety and Convenience of Third Parties 21. Proper protection and safe passage for the public must be provided at all times by the erection and maintenance of suitable hoardings, covered walkways and gantry, and catch platform. 22. Every effort must be made to minimize any nuisance to the public arising from dust, noise and vibration. Design of hoarding, covered walkway and gantry, and catch platform 23. Reference could be made to Chapter 3 of Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings 2004 for the general design requirements of hoarding, covered walkway and gantry, and catch platform. The deck of the catch platform shall be designed to support a uniformly distributed load of 5.0 kPa or a point load of 20 KN acting on an effective area of 300mm x 300mm. Being a temporary structure, a wind load of 0.67 kPa (i.e 37 % of the design wind pressure of 1.82 kPa as given in the Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004) could be adopted for checking the stability of these structures. 24. A design example of a gantry with single bay hoarding on each side is given in Appendix B for reference. If the catch platform which shall have a minimum 2000mm distance from the existing building line encroaches into the 500mm (minimum) recess from the carriageway, the catch platform shall be raised to allow 5500mm headroom over the carriageway. For narrow service lane (width 3.5 m or less) which are generally shielded from wind, a single deck design with the deck functioning as a catch platform fully capable of resisting the superimposed design loads is considered acceptable because of the relatively lower risks associated with these areas. A single deck design for narrow service lanes is also given in Appendix B for reference. Structural justification may not be required if the parameters as adopted in the design examples are strictly followed. /25

-725. Site constraints such as the presence of congested underground utilities and narrow pedestrian walkways may sometime prohibit the construction of footings and counterweight, or render the sole reliance on counterweight for maintaining stability uneconomical. Under such circumstances, AP/RSE are encouraged to consider more economical designs with recyclable materials as alternatives to the examples given in Appendix B. Such alternatives may include the adoption of a rigorous analysis and/or the provision of tie forces at upper levels in securing the stability of the structure, thus reducing counterweight and/or some structural members sizes. Certification on Completion of Demolition Works 26. Within 14 days of the completion of any demolition works, the AP and the RSE shall certify the completion of works in the specified form BA 14A for demolition works. The specified form can be downloaded from BDs website. Withdrawal of PNAP 268 27. With the incorporation of the content of PNAP 268 in the Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings 2004, PNAP 268 is hereby withdrawn.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/DW/1 (III) BD GP/BORD/27 GC/4/16/1 (GEO file) First issue May 1980 Last revision July 2005 (AD/NB2) This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup) (Paras. 2, 7, 8 & 9 amended to include RGE and para.20 added) Index under : BO s32 - Names of Streets Dangerous Buildings - Demolition of Debris Management Buildings Supporting Ground Demolition of Demolition Works Drainage System, Public, Protection of During Demolition Mechanical Plant - Use of In Demolition Works Party Walls Public Drainage System, Protection of During Demolition Resident Supervision Shoring Street Name Signs Video Recording

APP-21

(APP-21)

(APP-21)

(APP-21)

(APP-21)

(APP-21)

(APP-21)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-22 74

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Dewatering in Foundation and Basement Excavation Works

Dewatering may result from works or may be part of the method for constructing foundations and basement excavations. The procedures for dewatering activities and precautionary measures against impairing the stability and causing undue settlement of any adjoining buildings, streets and land should be to the satisfaction of the Building Authority (BA). 2. The following information should be included on the plans for submission to the Building Authority : (a) the foundation details of adjoining buildings and details of nearby underground utilities (e.g. fresh water pipe, gas main, sewer and the like); details of the dewatering proposals including ground treatment, if any (e.g. grouting and recharging); the method and sequence of construction; and the location and details of instrumentation for monitoring the effects of the works on adjoining buildings, streets and land (including the change in ground water conditions in the adjoining ground) during construction, together with information on -(i) criteria for limiting movements and groundwater pressures and action to be taken if these limiting values are reached; intervals between readings; and availability of monitoring records.

(b) (c) (d)

(ii) (iii) 3. (a)

The following information should be submitted with the plans : A site investigation report This report should include adequate information on groundwater and geological conditions including permeability, compressibility and consolidation characteristics of the various soil strata, particle size analyses and other test results relevant to consideration of the dewatering activities and preventive measures against settlement; /(b) A report ....

- 2 (b) A report on the conditions of adjoining buildings This report should give information on the structure and conditions of all adjoining buildings that may be adversely affected by the proposed works; (c) Shoring/Underpinning details These details are to be submitted if any adjoining building need shoring/underpinning precautions; and (d) Assessment of excavation and dewatering effects This assessment on the adjoining buildings, streets and land should include the criteria for limiting movements and the like, as mentioned in paragraph 2(d)(i) above. 4. During the foundation and basement construction works, the authorized person/registered structural engineer appointed for the works should supervise and inspect as necessary: (a) to ensure that such works are being carried out in accordance with the provisions of the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations and with the approved plans; and to verify the design assumptions throughout the process of construction. A suitably experienced full-time supervisor should be employed where necessary.

(b)

5. Piezometric and settlement monitoring records should be made available at all times and copies submitted to the BA periodically. 6. These requirements are not exhaustive. Please also refer to the relevant sections on groundwater and drawdown control in the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works published by the Civil Engineering Department and to BS 8004:1986 British Standard Code of Practice for Foundations.

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/14 First issued February 1981 This revision May 1994 (AD/SE) Index under : Basement - Dewatering in Excavation Works Dewatering in Foundation and Basement Excavation Works Excavation Works - Dewatering

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-23 75

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Hoardings, Covered Walkways and Gantries (including Temporary Access for Construction Traffic) Building (Planning) Regulations Part IX Applications under Building (Planning) Regulation 64 for hoarding/covered walkway permits should be accompanied by six sets of plans showing the hoarding/covered walkway, including details of any proposed temporary vehicular access and post holes, existing traffic signs or traffic provisions (e.g. bus lanes, taxi ranks, bus stops and pedestrian crossings) and existing trees, as well as other relevant information. Any traffic sign or street light likely to be obscured or required to be resited must be declared. If public transport facilities or pedestrian crossings are affected or carriageway width is reduced, this must also be declared. Failure to declare may delay the issue of a permit. 2. Subject to the agreement of the Transport Department (TD) and the Highways Department (HyD), the resiting and subsequent reinstatement of any affected traffic signs and street furniture, and repair of damaged public pavements may be carried out by the building owner at his own cost to the satisfaction of HyD. Any resiting and subsequent reinstatement of street lights shall be carried out by HyD at the building owners expense. 3. No trees, either within the lot or on government land, may be felled, pruned or interfered with without the prior approval of the District Lands Officer and the government department responsible for maintenance of the tree concerned. 4. HyDs and TDs standard requirements for hoardings/covered walkways are set out at Appendix A. 5. In cases where hoardings/covered walkways have to encroach on the carriageway, TD will have no objection provided that the affected traffic lane is maintained with a minimum width of 2.8m while the carriageway is maintained with a minimum width of 5.5m. Where these minimum width requirements cannot be met, the authorized person (AP) should establish early contact with TD to clarify on the need for temporary traffic management measures or traffic impact assessment (TIA). Normally, TIA will only be required for hoardings/covered walkways sited on the carriageway of a traffic sensitive road, that is either a red route, a pink route or bus corridor, or on any other carriageway which is within 70 metres of a signalised junction with a traffic sensitive road that cannot meet the minimum width requirement. For the list of traffic sensitive roads, the Senior Engineer/Survey of the Traffic & Transport Survey Division, Survey Section of TD may be consulted by telephone no. 3150 8230. A TIA report should be submitted at least two months in advance of the application for a hoarding permit so as to enable TD and the Police to assess the need for any temporary traffic management measures. Guidelines and requirements of TIA for hoardings/covered walkways occupying part of the carriageway are set out in Appendix B. /6. ..

-2-

6. In all cases of deviation from normal practice, details should be included on the plans submitted and reasons provided in the accompanying letter so as to enable TD to note that there are specific circumstances or constraints affecting the site. Construction of Hoardings/Covered Walkways 7. Hoardings/covered walkways for demolition works should be provided in accordance with the Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings and Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structure Engineers (PNAP) 71 where typical details of a covered walkway with catch platform are given. For general building works, reference should be made to PNAP 224. It should be stressed that these are for reference only and that in certain instances variations in the design may be accepted to meet special site conditions. 8. Hoardings/covered walkways for demolition works, or in certain special cases, e.g. on narrow pavements, may have to be sited on a carriageway and a raised floor will then be required. Hoardings/covered walkways for general building works will normally be required to be sited entirely on the footpaths with no floor. Proposals which include prefabricated units of non-traditional construction requiring little maintenance are preferred. 9. A minimum clear width of 1.1 m is required for hoardings/covered walkways sited on a carriageway. As regards hoardings/covered walkways on a footpath, the clear width should be related to the existing pavement width as follows:Existing Pavement Width 2.5 m or less Clear Width in Walkway Normally 1.5 m minimum. Exemption may be considered if the pavement is of insufficient width Width of the pavement minus 0.8 m subject to a maximum of 2m 2m

over 2.5 m to 3 m over 3 m

The required clear width must not be obstructed in any manner e.g. by traffic signs, scaffold poles, supports for formwork or the like. The vertical clearance inside the covered walkway should be 2.3 m minimum. 10. In case the clear width of the pedestrian walkways is affected or not in compliance with the required width specified in the table above, during the erection period of hoarding/covered walkways and the construction of building works, an appropriate temporary pedestrian diversion scheme and protective measures should be submitted to enable TD and the Police to assess the need for any temporary pedestrian management measures. /11. ..

-3-

11. Should there be any utility pit cover located within the hoarding area, the relevant utility undertaking should be informed prior to the construction of the hoarding. The hoarding, including its foundation, must not obstruct the access to such pits and opening of the pit cover at all times. Lighting Standard for Covered Walkways 12. A temporary lighting system should be provided for all covered walkways of building sites and be maintained in good order by the building owners. The average illuminance on the floor level of the covered walkway should be within the range of 35 lux to 50 lux. 13. A recommended lighting layout for a typical walkway (2 m wide and 2.5m high) is the installation of luminaires complete with 18 W or 20 W 600 mm long tubular fluorescent lamps at 3 m spacing. Excavation Permit 14. An Excavation Permit from the Director of Highways is required for excavation works involved in the erection/demolition of hoardings, covered walkways and gantries to be carried out on public roads maintained by HyD, under section 10 of the Land (Miscellaneous Provisions) Ordinance (Chapter 28). Failure to obtain the necessary permit would constitute an offence under that Ordinance. In this connection, reference should be made to PNAP 197 and HyD's Excavation Permit Processing Manual - Chapter 5, Section 1 which may be accessed/downloaded at HyD's website http://www.hyd.gov.hk/eng/public/publications/xppm/index.htm. Temporary Access for Construction Traffic 15. The position of any temporary access, including location of gantries shall be agreed by TD. Temporary access should be constructed basically in accordance with the typical details of run-in in HyD Standard Drawings (PNAP 300 is relevant) for proper protection of the utilities under the pavement and to safeguard the safety of the road users. It should be formed and reinstated to its original state on completion of the work by and entirely at the expense of the building owner. Permanent reinstatement, if required and subject to Governments agreement, could be carried out by the building owner at his own expense and under the supervision of the AP to the satisfaction of the Director of Highways. 16. The maximum width of the gantries should normally be not more than 6m. For a proposed gantry wider than 6m, the proposal should be accompanied by justifications for such width viz. demonstration by a swept path analysis of the vehicles using the gantry. In addition, information on the frequency of the vehicles that would enter into the site and the measures to safeguard the safety of pedestrians crossing the ingress/egress points should also be submitted for consideration. /Temporary ..

-4-

Temporary Suspension of On-Street Public Parking Spaces 17. Where suspension of on-street parking spaces is necessary, application should be made to the Commissioner for Transport in accordance with the Notes for Guidance attached at Appendix C. Streamlined Processing of Hoarding Permit Application 18. To promote self-discipline and to facilitate the development progress, the Building Authority (BA) will complete the processing of an application for a permit to erect hoardings, covered walkways or gantries within 30 days of receipt of such application provided that the following criteria are met: (a) (b) (c) A TIA report is not required; HyDs and TDs requirements in Appendix A are complied with; the AP/registered structural engineer (RSE) certifies that the standard designs mentioned in paragraph 7 above are adopted and are in compliance with the provisions of the Buildings Ordinance; no contractor shed will rest on the top of the hoardings/covered walkways; the registered geotechnical engineer (RGE) certifies that the stability of any nearby slope or retaining wall, if applicable, is not adversely affected (supporting documentation may be required if significant signs of distress or failure of the slope/wall in question have been noted); the hoardings/covered walkways are structurally safe; and no felling, pruning or interference with trees is required.

(d) (e)

(f) (g)

19. Under the streamlined processing, the AP/RSE/RGE, as the case may be, are required to submit hoarding plans, Form BA 19 together with the certificate at Appendix D to the Buildings Department (BD) for centralized processing. In cases where the criteria for streamlined (fast-track) processing are not met, the application will be processed within 60 days. 20. AP/RSE should note that consent for general building works will be refused if the required hoardings/covered walkways proposals have not been received by the BA. /Validity ..

-5-

Validity Period of Hoarding Permit 21. In the case of hoardings/covered walkways for demolition works, permits will normally be issued for six months only. Permits for hoardings/covered walkways for general building works will be issued for three years maximum conditional upon the submission of annual safety certificate (Appendix E) certifying that the hoardings/covered walkways are structurally safe. The safety certificate should be submitted not less than 7 days before each anniversary of the date of issue of the hoarding permit. 22. If evidence shows that the site has been idle for a prolonged period or an annual safety certificate has not been submitted, the hoarding permit may be cancelled and the hoarding should be removed immediately in accordance with the relevant conditions of the permit. Renewal of Hoarding Permit 23. Renewal of hoarding permit will be considered upon application. The renewal will only be granted if the applicant can demonstrate the need for the period requested and only the minimum period will be granted. An application for renewal of the permit should be made to the BA in writing at least 30 days before its expiry with the following supporting documents: (a) (b) The original permit Form BD 109; and A safety certificate (Appendix E) from the AP/RSE/RGE, as the case may be, that the hoardings/covered walkways are still structurally safe and the stability of any nearby slope or retaining wall, if applicable, is not adversely affected.

Minor Amendments to Hoardings/Covered Walkways 24. Minor amendments to the permitted hoardings/covered walkways may be carried out without prior agreement of the BA if the following criteria are met: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) HyDs and the TDs requirements in Appendix A are complied with; the original TIA, if any, is still valid; the position of the gantry and run-in/out is not changed; the hoardings/covered walkways are certified by the AP/RSE to be structurally safe; no contractor shed will rest on the top of the hoardings/covered walkways; /(f) ..

-6-

(f) (g)

the RGE certifies that the stability of any nearby slope or retaining wall, if applicable, is not adversely affected; and no trees are affected.

However, the AP should deposit with BD a set of the amended hoarding plans and the safety certificate (Appendix E) within 7 days of the completion of amendment works on site. 25. While the BA will carry out audit checks, the AP/RSE should ensure that the hoardings/covered walkways are constructed in accordance with the selfcertified hoarding plans and that they are structurally safe. Proper Use and Maintenance of Hoardings/Covered Walkways 26. Hoardings/covered walkways should not be used for any other purposes such as for displaying advertisements or for storage of building materials and equipment inside or above the covered walkways. 27. Proper maintenance of hoardings/covered walkways is required under Building (Planning) Regulation 66. The primary consideration must be public safety and convenience. If a hoarding/covered walkway is in disrepair and if request for repair or renewal is not complied with, the BA may cause the necessary work to be carried out at the building owners expense in accordance with Building (Planning) Regulation 67.

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/16 (Pt V) BD GP/BREG/C/31 First issue February 1981 Last revision February 2004 This revision February 2009 (AD/NB1) (General revamp, including Appendix A, B, C, D & E) Index under : Building (Planning) Regulation Part IX Hoardings, Covered Walkways & Gantries Excavation works on public road Public road - excavation works Excavation permit

Appendix A (PNAP 75) (APP-23) Highways Department and Transport Department Standard Requirements for Hoardings/Covered Walkways A. (1) Highways Department The internal layout of the site shall be so arranged that no backing in/out movement of construction traffic is required except in cases where small or narrow sites are involved in which case reversing into the site will be permitted. The hoarding shall be properly lit at night. The promoter (i.e. the one who finances the proposed excavation works) should apply for an Excavation Permit from the Regional Office of Highways Department (HyD) prior to the commencement of excavation works on a public road maintained by HyD. One copy of the approved plan should accompany his application, together with a copy of the Hoarding Permit issued by the Buildings Department. A clear width of not less than 500 mm shall be maintained between the edges of the hoarding and the carriageway. Where the hoarding and covered walkway are erected on the carriageway, no obstruction to the drainage channels and gullies of the road shall be permitted. The authorized person (AP) shall be responsible for the removal of all obstructions to the flows in the drainage channels and gullies. Lighting and guarding in accordance with the Road Traffic (Traffic Control) Regulations shall be provided by the AP. Relevant requirements stipulated in the Code of Practice for the Lighting, Signing and Guarding of Road Works should also be followed. The maximum insertion of footing into public pedestrian pavement shall be limited to 450mm. Any concrete plinth sitting on pavement shall not be more than 250mm in thickness and not more than 1000mm in height, and the minimum clear spacing between two concrete plinths shall not be less than 1100mm. The exposed faces of the concrete plinth shall be of smooth surface and any exposed edges and corners shall be chamfered. The hoarding/covered walkways shall be erected at no more than 300mm away from the lot boundary. The hoarding/covered walkway shall not obscure any street lights. Where any street light will likely be affected by the hoarding/covered walkway, the proposal should be sent to the Chief Engineer/Lighting of HyD for comment. /Where ..
-1-

(2) (3)

(4) (5)

(6)

(7) (8)

Where temporary removal or resiting of existing street light is required, the AP should request HyD for such removal/resiting, at the lot owner's cost, with sufficient advance notice. In case the floor of a hoarding/covered walkway obstructs access to the street light draw-pit, the relevant section of the floor should be portable and removable. (9) The AP is required to notify HyD and, if necessary, submit photographic record of original condition of footpath before commencement of hoarding erection, in particular for those hoardings with concrete bases for which application for Excavation Permit is not required. Transport Department No reversing movement of construction vehicles from/to the construction site will be permitted except in cases where small or narrow sites are involved in which case reversing into the site will be permitted. No construction vehicles will be permitted to queue and wait outside the construction site. All loading/unloading activities of construction vehicles will be confined within the construction site. The hoarding should be properly lit at night. The hoarding shall not obscure any traffic signs or traffic signals, traffic counting detectors or similar traffic equipment. Where resiting/removal of any traffic aids (such as traffic signs, traffic signals, guardrail and the like) or where temporary suspensions of parking spaces is necessary, the AP should submit his application to the Transport Department (TD) for approval of such resiting/removal, with advance notice of 3 weeks. Upon obtaining TD's approval, the AP should carry out the resiting/removal/reinstatement works at the building owner's cost, with sufficient advance notice of 10 days. In case the floor of a hoarding obstructs the access to the draw-pit marked with ATC, the relevant section of the floor should be portable and removable. When temporary suspension/removal/relocation of public transport facilities (such as bus/tram stops and shelters, tram posts and wires, on-streets bus termini, PLB/taxi stands, queue rails, regulators kiosks) are required, please contact the appropriate Chief Transport Officer (Transport Operations) (Hong Kong, Kowloon or New Territories Division) direct for all necessary arrangements. The building owner shall bear the cost thus incurred. Where the hoarding is erected at or close to a road bend or a non-traffic signal-controlled road junction, the AP should ensure that a desirable minimum visibility distance pertaining to the general traffic speed is maintained. In case of doubt, the AP should contact the appropriate Chief Traffic Engineer of TD to clarify the detailed arrangement. /(8) ..
-2-

B. (1)

(2) (3) (4) (5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

The hoarding shall not cause sightline problem to the road users, e.g. the use of high concrete plinth of more than 800mm in height at or near run-ins, junctions and crossings etc, should be avoided. The appropriate Chief Traffic Engineer of TD should be consulted, if necessary.

(Rev. 2/2009)

-3-

Appendix B (PNAP 75) (APP-23) Guidelines and Requirements of Traffic Impact Assessment for hoardings/covered walkways occupying part of the carriageway 1. 1.1 Requirements for Traffic Impact Assessment Hoardings/covered walkways occupying part of the carriageway is considered as a type of road opening works in terms of traffic impact and the Traffic Impact Assessment (TIA) requirement for road works on traffic sensitive roads shall apply. Similar work on non-traffic sensitive roads but within 70m of a road junction of a traffic sensitive road shall also be governed by this TIA requirement. Note : - A TIA will not be required if a minimum inner lane width of 2.8 metres, after encroachment, can be maintained. 1.2 For guidelines on TIA and day-time ban requirements for road works on traffic sensitive routes, please refer to HyD's Guidance Notes RD/GN/021 which may be accessed/downloaded at HyD's web site http://www.hyd.gov.hk/eng/public/publications/guidance_notes/index.htm. Objectives of Traffic Impact Assessment The main objectives of TIA are : a) to assess the traffic impacts of occupying part of the carriageway; and b) to devise appropriate temporary traffic management measures to ameliorate the traffic impacts. 3. 3.1 Contents of the Traffic Impact Assessment Report The TIA report should contain at least the following information : a) the name of the Agency to which the hoardings/covered walkways belong; b) the address of the site concerned; c) date of submission; d) the name of works agency, i.e. the contractor; e) the name and telephone number of the contact person for the TIA; /f) ....
-1-

2. 2.1

f)

description of the works including the proposed programme and phasing of works; if any

g) existing street inventory within the Study Area; The Study Area should be large enough to include all significant impacts of the proposal. At minimum, the area should include the adjacent signal controlled intersections or the area of influence that the proposed works may have an impact on the existing road network. The existing street inventory within the Study Area should be recorded in detail. This usually includes street names, number of lanes and lane widths, direction of traffic flows, road markings and traffic aids, geometric and characteristics at critical intersections, existing site access points, right of way and pedestrian facilities. h) existing traffic conditions; Traffic counts should be carried out to obtain traffic flow figures for the TIA. The count should be carried out at the critical peak periods. The signal phasing and timing at signalized intersections and the public transport services affected should be included. Pedestrian counts should also be required if existing pedestrian are severed. i) forecast traffic conditions (if necessary); The existing traffic conditions can be used for the traffic analysis for carriageway occupation not exceeding six months from the submission date of the TIA report. For works beyond such period, the future traffic conditions should be estimated by using growth factor method based on historic volume information and existing counts. The Annual Traffic Census reports published by TD can be used for such purpose. The forecast future traffic conditions can then be applied to the implementation of the temporary traffic management measures. j) proposed traffic management measures; Appropriate temporary traffic management schemes should be devised for implementation together with closure of the part of carriageway required for the hoardings/covered walkway erection work. The various aspects in Annex 1 should be followed in proposing traffic management measures. In addition, swept path analysis should be conducted for all affected turning movements. /k) ....
-2-

k) traffic analysis; The traffic analysis should be carried out for the most critical peak period. The following items need to be assessed : volume/capacity ratios (v/c ratios) of the roads; reserved capacities (RC) of the road junctions; design flow/capacity ratio (DFC) of priority junctions and roundabouts.

The calculation of the v/c ratios, RC and DFC should be carried out in accordance with the Transport Planning and Design Manual (TPDM) Volumes 2 and 4. l) consultation (optional) The parties which have been consulted on the proposal should be included here. Examples are the Area Traffic Control (ATC) Division and/or Traffic Engineering (TE) Division of TD, the Police, the public transport operators, etc. m) recommendations Summary findings and recommendations of given. It should include a recommended detailed plans showing the proposed occupying part of the carriageway and the measures. 4. 4.1 Procedures One copy of the TIA report Kong, Kowloon, NT West Commissioner of Police, the affected. The TE Division Division. should be submitted to the TE Division (Hong or NT East) of TD with copy sent to the ATC Division of TD if ATC signal junctions are will co-ordinate the comments from the ATC the TIA should be traffic scheme and hoardings/walkways traffic management

4.2

The TE Division of TD can reject the TIA or approve it with or without conditions. A copy of such notice will be sent to the applicant within a reasonable period, normally three weeks from the date of receiving the TIA report. However, for complicated cases, the Division may need to liaise with the applicant or other parties and the process will take longer, but in any case within six weeks.

(Rev. 2/2009)

-3-

Annex 1 Appendix B (PNAP 75) (APP-23) Issues to be taken into account in preparing traffic management measures 1. Lighting signing and guarding of Road Works The Code of Practice for the Lighting, Signing and Guarding of Road Works should be followed. 2. Pedestrian arrangement Adequate and safe pedestrian crossing facilities and temporary diversions should be provided. 3. Access arrangement Existing ingress/egress and other vehicular rights of way which may be affected by the project may need to be maintained. Recommended temporary access designs may be required. 4. Parking Extent of on-street parking spaces or other off-street parking facilities affected by the works should be identified and consideration should be given as to whether it is necessary to provide alternative parking spaces under the project to supplement the loss of existing provisions. 5. Public transport arrangements Adequate public transport services should be maintained. Schemes of temporary routing and stops should be agreed with the concerned transport operators and TD in advance. 6. Servicing arrangement Extent of existing loading/unloading provisions affected by the works should be identified and consideration should be given as to whether alternative provisions is required. 7. Special event arrangement If there is any special event, such as Race Days, or concerts etc., then the adequacy or otherwise the deficiencies of the road networks affected by the road opening works should be analysed and checked and taken into account. 8. Safety consideration Due consideration should be given to the safety aspect of all the proposed temporary schemes and measures towards all road users and pedestrians. (Rev. 2/2009) -1-

Appendix C (PNAP 75) (APP-23) Application for Temporary Suspension of Public On-street Parking Spaces (Metered or Non-metered) Notes for Guidance A. (1) General Conditions An application for the suspension of parking spaces should be submitted to the Commissioner for Transport (C for T), marked for the attention of the Chief Transport Officer for the appropriate region (Hong Kong, Kowloon or the New Territories). The application should specify the intended suspension period, and when and where the suspension is intended to take place. The application should be supported with reason for the proposed action, and should be copied to the Commissioner of Police (C of P), marked for the attention of the Senior Staff Officer/Traffic (SSO/T) responsible for the region in question. If other Government departments are involved in the activity requiring the suspension of spaces, the application should also be copied to that department or departments as appropriate. Alternatively, for projects which involve other special arrangements, the application can be discussed together with other details in a meeting amongst parties concerned. The number of parking spaces to be suspended should be kept to a minimum at any one time. Applicants should plan to carry out their work by stages if too many spaces would be affected. No work shall commence at the parking spaces prior to their suspension. No person shall remove any parking sign, meter head, meter post, studs or carriageway markings without the authorization of the C for T. When works are completed before the approved suspension period, the applicant must notify the District Senior Transport Officer/Transport Officer (DSTO/TO) of the Transport Department (TD) by telephone for the early reinstatement of the parking spaces for public use. The applicant should subsequently confirm such notification in writing. When it becomes apparent that works will extend beyond the approved suspension period, the applicant should notify the DSTO/TO of TD by telephone as soon as possible and subsequently confirm this in writing. When observation shows that the works requiring the parking spaces to be suspended have been completed, the C for T, in liaison with the C of P, may arrange for such spaces to be reinstated, even if the period of suspension requested has not fully elapsed. /(8) ..
-1-

(2)

(3) (4) (5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

The C for T, in liaison with the C of P and departments concerned, may arrange for parking spaces to be reinstated when the affected area is observed to be no longer in use for works. Notwithstanding the requirement for advance notice described in sections B and C below, the applicant may, for emergency cases, contact the DSTO/TO of TD and the appropriate SSO/T of the Hong Kong Police Force (HKPF) for special consideration to arrange for the suspension of parking spaces at short notice. For cases where advance notice is not practicable, the applicant should notify the appropriate SSO/T of the HKPF immediately and the DSTO/TO of TD as soon as possible. Suspension of Parking Spaces for a Period less than Three Months Applications must be submitted in writing together with sketches showing the parking spaces to be suspended, so as to reach the DSTO/TO of TD at least seven working days before the commencement of the proposed suspension. Notwithstanding paragraph (1) above, for the suspension of not more than two parking spaces for no more than one day for road works, an application can be submitted by telephone three working days in advance to the DSTO/TO of TD and the appropriate SSO/T of the HKPF and followed by confirmation in writing on the same day. Care should be exercised in undertaking works on the footway or road carriageway to ensure that parking signs, meter posts and studs or carriageway markings are not damaged. However, should these traffic aids be damaged accidentally, the applicant must inform the Highways Department (HyD), TD and HKPF immediately. In such cases, the applicant shall be responsible for the cost of the damage incurred and/or the replacement or reinstatement of the equipment or traffic aids affected. Suspension of Parking Spaces for a Period more than Three Months Applications must be submitted in writing, together with sketches showing the proposed parking spaces to be suspended, so as to reach the DSTO/TO of TD at least 30 days prior to the commencement of the proposed suspension. The maximum period of suspension that may be approved is one year. In case suspension of the parking spaces for a longer period is required, the applicant must submit a fresh application prior to expiry of the approved suspension period. The applicant must bear the costs of removal and subsequent reinstatement of the affected parking spaces. The costs should be paid in advance to the HyD, that is before the suspension is effected. /(4) ..

(9)

B. (1)

(2)

(3)

C. (1)

(2)

(3)

-2-

(4)

The applicant must inform the DSTO/TO of TD and HyD at least one week before the completion of the project so that arrangements can be made to reinstate the suspended parking spaces.

(Rev. 2/2009)

-3-

Appendix D (PNAP 75) (APP-23) Self-certification by Authorized Person, Registered Structural Engineer and Registered Geotechnical Engineer for the Streamlined Processing of Hoardings, Covered Walkways or Gantries Application

To the Building Authority

Part A (to be certified by AP) In accordance with Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers (PNAP) 75, I hereby certify the following for the application for permit to erect hoardings, covered walkways or gantries with plans (drwg no. ______________________________ to ____________________________) to be erected at ____________________________________________________________________________:

Requirements of the Transport Department and the Highways Department as specified in Appendix A to PNAP 75 are complied with. Submission of traffic impact assessment report is not required. No contractor shed will rest on the top of the hoardings/covered walkways. Standard details of hoardings/covered walkways in the Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings / PNAP 71* are adopted and are in compliance with the provisions of the Buildings Ordinance. The hoardings/covered walkways are structurally safe. No felling, pruning or interference with trees is required.

Date_________________ Signature of authorized person

(Name in full) Certificate of Registration No. : Date of expiry of registration :

-1-

Part B (to be certified by RSE) 2. safe. I certify that the design of the hoardings, covered walkways or gantries is structurally

3. I also certify that the structural details of the hoardings, covered walkways or gantries: are in accordance with the structural details given in the Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings / PNAP 71* and are in compliance with the provisions of the Buildings Ordinance.

are not in accordance with the structural details given in the Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings / PNAP 71* and the corresponding structural calculations for the revised design are prepared and submitted which are in compliance with the provisions of the Buildings Ordinance.

Date_________________ Signature of registered structural engineer

(Name in full) Certificate of Registration No. : Date of expiry of registration :

Part C (to be certified by RGE if applicable) 4. I certify that the stability of any nearby slope or retaining wall, if applicable, is not adversely affected.

Date_________________ Signature of registered geotechnical engineer

(Name in full) Certificate of Registration No. : Date of expiry of registration: Tick box as appropriate * Delete where inapplicable (Rev. 2/2009)
-2-

Appendix E (PNAP 75) (APP-23) Safety Certificate for Hoardings/Covered Walkways or Gantries

To the Building Authority,

Part A (to be certified by AP/RSE)


In accordance with the condition of hoarding permit no. ____________, In support of the application for renewal of hoarding permit no. ______________, In connection with minor amendments to the hoardings/covered walkways,

I (name in full) _____________________ (Chinese) ________________________,*authorized person/registered structural engineer, hereby certify that I have inspected the hoardings, covered walkways and gantries erected at (address of the site) _____________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________on (Lot No.)_____________________ and in my opinion they are structurally safe and capable of lasting another ___________ months.

Date_________________ Signature of *authorized person/ registered structural engineer Certificate of Registration No. : Date of expiry of registration :

Part B (to be certified by AP for minor amendment) 2. (a) (b) (c) I certify the following: Highways Departments and Transport Departments requirements in Appendix A are still complied with; the original traffic impact assessment, if any, is still valid; the position of the gantry and run-in/out is not changed;

-1-

(d) (e)

no contractor shed will rest on the top of the hoardings/covered walkways; and no trees are affected.

Date_________________ Signature of authorized person

(Name in full) Certificate of Registration No. : Date of expiry of registration :

Part C (to be certified by RSE for minor amendment) 3. I certify that the design of the hoardings, covered walkways or gantries is structurally safe. 4. or gantries:

I also certify that the structural details of the hoardings, covered walkways are in accordance with the structural details given in the Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings / PNAP 71* and are in compliance with the provisions of the Buildings Ordinance. are not in accordance with the structural details given in the Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings / PNAP 71* and the corresponding structural calculations for the revised design are prepared and submitted which are in compliance with the provisions of the Buildings Ordinance.

Date_________________ Signature of registered structural engineer (Name in full) Certificate of Registration No. : Date of expiry of registration :

-2-

Part D (to be certified by RGE if applicable) 5. affected. I certify that the stability of any nearby slope or retaining wall, is not adversely

Date_________________ Signature of registered geotechnical engineer

(Name in full) Certificate of Registration No. : Date of expiry of registration:

Tick box as appropriate * Delete where inapplicable

(Rev. 2/2009)

-3-

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-24

Railway Protection Railways Ordinance Mass Transit Railway (Land Resumption and Related Provisions) Ordinance Buildings Ordinance Scheduled Area No. 3

As a result of the merger of the Mass Transit Railway Corporation and Kowloon-Canton Railway Corporation (KCRC) on 2 December 2007, the MTR Corporation Limited (MTRCL) becomes the operator of all the railway lines in the territory. The existing railways in operation comprise the following lines Tsuen Wan Line, Kwun Tong Line, Island Line, Tseung Kwan O Line, Tung Chung Line, Airport Express, Disneyland Resort Line, East Rail Line, West Rail Line, Ma On Shan Line and Light Rail. 2. To safeguard the safety and stability of the railway structures, railway protection areas have been delineated and shown on relevant plans and a set of building/engineering guidelines produced. Copies of the plans showing the railway protection areas are available for inspection in the MTRCL. They can also be viewed and downloaded from the web site of MTRCL (http://www.mtr.com.hk./engtxt/railway/protection_boundary_map.html). 3. As a general guide, the boundary of the railway protection areas is about 30 m outside the outer surface of the railway structures or the railway fence/wall, or from the nearest rail if there is no railway fence/wall, but it encompasses the whole of any lot where any part thereof lies within the 30 m distance. At the railway stations, the area enclosed by the boundary is more extensive. 4. The railway protection areas of some of the railway lines are designated as Scheduled Area No. 3 in the Fifth Schedule to the Buildings Ordinance. The railway protection areas in Schedule Area No. 3 are: (a) Tsuen Wan Line, Kwun Tong Line, Island Line, Tseung Kwan O Line, Tung Chung Line and Airport Express (i) the areas delineated on the plans numbered MTR/G/1 to 3, MTR/RP/1 to 22, MTR/RP/25 to 27, MTR/RP/30 to 46, MTR/RP/50 to 55, MTR/RP/60 to 66 and MTR/RP/101 to 170 dated 29 June 1998 signed by the Secretary for Planning, Environment and Lands and deposited in the Land Registry; and /(ii) ..

-2-

(ii)

the areas delineated on the plans numbered MTR/G/4, MTR/RP/23 Rev. A, MTR/RP/24 Rev. A, MTR/RP/28 Rev. A, MTR/RP/29 Rev. A, MTR/RP/56 Rev. A, MTR/RP/57 Rev. A, MTR/RP/58 Rev. A, MTR/RP/59 Rev. A and MTR/RP/202 to 223 dated 29 May 2002 signed by the Secretary for Planning and Lands and deposited in the Land Registry.

(b)

West Rail Line (i) the areas delineated on the plans numbered KCR/WR/RP/100 to 120 (Rev. 1), KCR/WR/RP/121 (Rev. 2) and KCR/WR/RP/122 to 145 (Rev. 1) dated 6 June 2003 signed by the Secretary for Housing, Planning and Lands and deposited in the Land Registry; and the areas delineated on the plans numbered KCR/ERE/TSTE/RP/100, KCR/ERE/TSTE/RP/101 and KCR/ERE/TSTE/RP/111 dated 1 June 2004 signed by the Secretary for Housing, Planning and Lands and deposited in the Land Registry.

(ii)

Copies of these plans are available for inspection in the Buildings Department (BD). -----5. The guidelines at Appendix A apply to all building works (including ground investigation works and underground drainage works) to be carried out in the railway protection areas. Ground investigation works and underground drainage works in Scheduled Area No. 3 are subject to additional control as stated in paragraph 11 below. Building Works 6. Plans submitted to BD for proposed building works within the railway protection areas are circulated to the MTRCL for their comment under the centralized processing arrangements. Section 27 of the Railways Ordinance, Cap 519 or section 15 of the Mass Transit Railway (Land Resumption and Related Provisions) Ordinance, Cap 276 will be invoked to require the incorporation of any necessary measures to protect the railway lines. 7. Authorized persons (APs), registered structural engineers (RSEs) and registered geotechnical engineers (RGEs) are required to monitor any movement and vibration on the railway structures when required by the MTRCL. Upon request by the MTRCL, APs, RSEs and RGEs should submit a monitoring proposal to the MTRCL for agreement and forward a copy of the monitoring records to them. APs, RSEs and RGEs are required to inform the MTRCL direct of the commencement of any building works within the railway protection areas to enable them to plan an appropriate monitoring programme. If any adverse situation becomes apparent, the MTRCL will alert the interested parties. /8. ..

-3-

8. Any other necessary monitoring within the building site (e.g. monitoring of piezometric change) will be carried out by the AP/RSE/RGE of the site, who should maintain regular contact with the MTRCL and keep each other informed of the monitoring records as necessary. 9. The Director of Buildings may in writing, under the provisions of section 12 of the Mass Transit Railway (Land Resumption and Related Provisions) Ordinance, Cap 276, authorize an employee of the MTRCL to enter any building site within the railway protection areas for the purpose of monitoring construction. Alternatively, the Secretary for Transport and Housing may issue such notice under the provisions of section 24 of the Railways Ordinance, Cap 519. Building Opening adjacent to a Railway Vent Shaft 10. There are certain restraints on the design of and making alteration to properties in close proximity to a railway vent shaft to minimise the possibility of contamination by fire or smoke. In this connection, APs and RSEs are advised that any opening such as an openable or fixed window, doorway, building ventilation system intake or exhaust and the like in any building shall be located not closer than 5 m to the opening of any railway vent shaft, irrespective of whether such vent shaft is free-standing or is accommodated in a building. This distance may be reduced to 2.5 m, if the exhaust air from the railway vent shaft is directed away from and is not likely to affect the opening by natural convection. Ground Investigation Works and Underground Drainage Works 11. Ground investigation works within Scheduled Area No. 3 require prior approval and consent from the Building Authority. Plans prescribed under Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(l) should be submitted and the proposals should follow the guidelines at Appendix A. Application for concurrent processing of approval and consent in respect of ground investigation works should follow Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers (PNAP) ADM-16. Underground drainage works in or for any existing buildings to be carried out in Scheduled Area No. 3 are not exempted from application for approval and consent to commence works and are subject to the full provisions of the Buildings Ordinance. 12. Proposals for ground investigation works or underground drainage works in or for any existing buildings to be carried out within railway protection areas other than those designated as Scheduled Area No. 3 should be forwarded to the MTRCL for comment prior to commencement of the proposed works. Practice Note Repealed 13. PNAP APP-131 is repealed.

----

/Guidelines ..

-4-

Guidelines for Registered Contractors 14. A similar practice note is issued to Registered Contractors.

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BORD/67 BD R&L/29/78

This PNAP is previously known as PNAP 77 First issue April 1981 Last revision December 2005 This revision November 2009 (AD/NB1) (generally revised, Appendix A amended)

PNAP APP-24 Appendix A

Technical Notes for Guidance in Assessing the Effects of Civil Engineering Construction/Building Development on Railway Structures and Operations

A.

General All proposals for new building and engineering works including utilities works within the limits of the railway protection areas shall be subject to special scrutiny of the Government prior to giving approval to any plans and/or consent for commencing construction works. Every proposal shall be assessed individually on its impact on existing railway and related structures/installations including all plants and fixtures necessary for the safe operation of the railway and subject to satisfactory compliance with the following technical requirements.

B. 1.

Underground Railway Structures Site Formation/Foundation Works Where site formation or foundation works or excavation works etc. are proposed above, beneath or adjacent to railway underground structures/installations including cooling water mains system, the effects of such works shall not exceed the following limits: (a) The vertical or horizontal pressure change on any underground structures/installations due to the works, including filling, ground improvement, dewatering, field testing (such as plate loading test, pressure-meter test and packer test) etc. and due to addition or reduction of loads transmitted from foundations (including any loads arising during construction), shall not exceed 20 kPa. Differential movement resulting from the works shall not produce distortion in any railway structures/installations including the plinth or track in excess of 1 in 1 000 in any plane or a total movement in any railway structures/installations including the plinth or track exceeding 20 mm in any plane. The induced level difference between rails of a track in perpendicular plane resulting from the works shall not exceed 5 mm. The peak particle velocities induced to any railway structures resulting from blasting (where permitted) and from driving or withdrawing of piles or any similar operation which can induce prolonged vibration shall not exceed 25 mm/sec and 15 mm/sec respectively, when measured with a vibrograph.

(b)

(c)

(d)

-1-

(e)

No pile, foundation, borehole/drillhole, well, soil nail, horizontal drain, rock bolt/dowel or other geotechnical installation shall be driven, constructed or installed within a distance of 3 m from any point of the underground railway structures. Any part of an anchor, if allowed, shall be more than 3 m away from any part of a railway structure/installation, and the centroid of the fixed length of the anchor shall be more than twice the fixed length away from any railway structure/installation.

(f)

2.

Ground Investigation Works Ground investigation proposals should include the followings: (a) Details of the exploration and locations of the proposed exploration holes, trial pits, trenches, field testing or instrumentations relative to any railway structures whether inside or outside the lot; Proposed depth of boreholes/drillholes, pits or trenches; A method statement for sinking boreholes/drillholes, excavating trial pits and trenches including back-filling, conducting field testing or installing instrumentation; A method statement for checking verticality of boreholes/drillholes located within a distance of 10 m on plan of any point of the underground railway structure, should boreholes/drillholes be sunk to a depth of 3 m from the highest point of the railway structures; and A method statement for controlling depth of boreholes/drillholes sinking within a distance of 3 m on plan of any point of the underground railway structures.

(b) (c)

(d)

(e)

Each proposal will also be judged against the technical guidelines as specified in paragraph B.1 above. 3. Utility Works Utility trenches/pits which require excavation within the railway protection areas shall not be carried out without the approval of the Government in consultation with the MTRCL. 4. Marine Works Any reclamation, dredging, laying of pipes, dropping of anchors, or other engineering works to be carried out within the railway protection areas shall be submitted to the Government for approval in consultation with the MTRCL.

5.

Sinking of Wells

-2-

Sinking of wells within railway protection areas is building works subject to the control of the Buildings Ordinance including section 14(1) thereof. Before the carrying out of the works, the approval of plans and consent for the commencement of such works should be obtained from the Building Authority.

C. 1.

Overhead Railway Structures Scaffolding, Advertising Signs, Projections Erection of scaffolding, working platforms, advertising signs or any projections at a level above the railway tracks shall not be allowed within a distance of 6 m on plan of any point of the railway tracks, without the consent of the Government. When such works are permitted to be carried out within the 6 m limit, effective measures to protect the railway structures shall be provided. According to individual circumstances it may be necessary for such works to be conducted outside the railway operation hours. All protective works shall be subject to the special approval of Government.

2.

Overhead Structures The requirements of paragraph B.1(b) to B.1(f) should also apply to overhead structures.

3.

Utility Works When cables, ducts and pipes, etc are to cross above or below railway overhead structures, the Utility Undertaking shall submit to the Government details of the cables, ducts, pipes and the method of construction and seek special approval before work can commence. When cables, ducts and pipes, etc are to pass over the railway, the provisions of paragraphs B.1, C.1 and D. shall apply.

D. 1.

At-grade Railway Structures When utility works are to be carried out across the at-grade railway tracks, agreement from the MTRCL has to be sought. Unless prior special agreement has been obtained, piling works will not be permitted within 3 m on plan from the railway fence or wall along the railway premises, or 7 m on plan from the centreline of the nearest track when there is no railway fence or wall. Vibration measured on the overhead power line mast, or signalling and telecommunication furniture of railway shall not exceed the peak particle velocity of 10 mm/sec and the vibration amplitudes shall not exceed 80 m. The requirements of paragraphs B.1, B.2, B.3 and C.1 shall also apply to the at-grade railway structures and tracks.

2.

3.

4.

-3-

E.

Operation of Stationary Lifting Appliance (tower crane, hoist, piling/drilling rigs) When such an appliance is erected adjacent to railway tracks and/or above ground structures/installations, effective measures to protect the railway structures shall be provided. According to individual circumstances it may be necessary for such works to be conducted outside the railway operation hours. All protective works shall be subject to special Government approval. The Government may impose conditions on the operation and positioning of the appliance if in its opinion such operation and positioning may endanger the safe operation of the railway. The arc in which the jib of lifting appliance swings shall not encroach within 6 m of the railway tracks and above ground structures/installations on plan except with special Government approval.

1.

2.

F.

Mobile Lifting Appliance Where a mobile lifting appliance (e.g. crane, excavator) operates within 6 m on plan of railway structures and any part of the appliance is higher than the railway track level, the provisions of paragraph E. shall apply.

G.

Maintenance of Road Lamp Standards When road lighting tower maintenance vehicles are to be used to service road lamp standards adjacent to railway tracks, the working equipment shall not be positioned closer to the railway tracks than the nearest part of the road lamp standard where the height of the lamp standard is greater than the height of the tracks. If the working equipment is to be operated at a level higher than 1 m above railway tracks and closer than 6 m from the railway tracks, provisions as in paragraph C.1, E. and F. shall also apply.

H.

Fire Services Department/Police Force Vehicles The operation of Fire Services/Police vehicles adjacent to the railway tracks or vent shafts under emergency situations shall be in accordance with the emergency procedure agreed between MTRCL and the respective organization.

I. 1.

Storage of Materials No materials, containers, huts etc. shall be stored within 6 m on plan of the railway structures/tracks and vent shaft openings except with the special Government approval.

-4-

2.

No dangerous goods or other inflammable materials shall be stored within 6 m on plan of railway structures/tracks except with the special Government approval.

J.

Demolition Works Where demolition and removal works for any structure which includes scaffolding, advertising signs, container offices and buildings are proposed above or adjacent to above-ground railway structures, such as entrances, vent shafts, power distribution substations, traction substations, plant rooms, overhead railway structures and at-grade railway tracks, effective measures to protect the railway structures shall be provided. Demolition works proposal with the protective measures shall be submitted to BD for approval and consent prior to commencing work.

Ref. : PNAP APP-24 PNRC 14 (Rev. 11/2009)

-5-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers BUILDINGS ORDINANCE OFFICE

APP-25 78

PRACTICE NOTE FOR AUTHORIZED PERSONS AND REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS

Requirements for a Geotechnical Assessment at General Building Plan Stage Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(ba) Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(ba) empowers the Building Authority to require a geotechnical assessment of the adequacy of a site for proposed building works at `general building plans' stage. This provision will assist authorized persons to identify at an early stage any fundamental geotechnical constraints that could arise on certain sites or for certain types of development. It should ensure that the geotechnical feasibility of the proposed building works is adequately assessed and reflected in the general building plans. Criteria for Submission of Geotechnical Assessment 2. Plans as prescribed in Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(a), (b), (c) or (h) should be accompanied by a geotechnical assessment when any of the following apply : (a) (b) where the maximum gradient across a site from boundary to boundary or, for a large site, across any 50 m long strip, is greater than 15, where a slope inclined at more than 30 and greater than 7.5 m high (including the height of any retaining wall at its toe or crest) exists on the site or within 7.5 m of the site, where there is to be an excavation with a face longer than 10 m and either : (i) (ii) (iii) (d) (e) the excavation is to be deeper than 7.5 m at any point at any stage; or the excavation will be below a plane projecting down at 45 from the toe of any retaining wall; or the excavation is to be made below HKPD minus 1 m on reclaimed coastal land,

(c)

where a retaining wall greater than 6 m high (retained height) exists on the site or a 6 m or longer portion of such a wall exists within 6 m of the site, where special geological conditions exist, such as previous landslides, debris flows, threatening boulders and potential rockfalls. cont'd/.....

-2Contents of Geotechnical Assessment 3. (a) (b) The essential contents of a geotechnical assessment are : an outline of the topography, geology and presumed groundwater conditions of the site, a general description of the proposed works and discussion of how the existing geotechnical features (such as slopes, retaining walls and adjacent foundations) will affect or be affected by such works, a discussion to demonstrate the feasibility of the proposed development, including descriptions of construction methods and sequence of works, schematic plans and sections of the proposed site formation works and foundation works, taking the above discussion into account, a plan showing the scope and extent of the proposed ground investigation specifying, by reference to section 15.3 of GEOGUIDE 2 : Guide to Site Investigation, the level of independent site supervision of the works to be undertaken, and descriptions of intended investigations of the stability of existing slopes and retaining walls and any preventive or remedial works that may be needed.

(c) (d) (e)

(f)

Rejection of Building Plan 4. Any general building plan to which the criteria at para. 2 apply, received by the Buildings Ordinance Office not accompanied by a geotechnical assessment is liable to be rejected under Buildings Ordinance section 16(1)(a). (A.G. Eason) Building Authority Ref. : BLD(B) GR/BOP/14 First issued April 1981 This Amendment October 1991 (GGE) (para. 2 amended, para. 3 added) Index under : B(A)R 8(1)(ba) - Geotechnical Assessment Building Plans - Requirements for a Geotechnical Assessment Geotechnical Assessment

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-26 81

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Pouring of Concrete against Walls of Adjoining Buildings

The use of walls of adjoining buildings as permanent shuttering during concrete pouring operations has resulted in the failure of portions of such walls, causing damage to property and injury to persons. 2. This practice is not acceptable unless a physical check has been made to confirm the safety of the wall to be so used. Such check should include confirmation of its thickness, conditions and structural capability to withstand any load imposed on it by the wet concrete and tamping process. 3. Where the stability of the wall is in question or cannot be verified, independent shuttering should be provided to prevent any load being imposed on the wall. Alternatively, precautionary measures must be taken to provide adequate support and to minimize the load. 4. Unless evidence clearly indicates otherwise, total or partial failure of a wall in these circumstances will be taken to indicate negligence in carrying out checks or in taking satisfactory precautionary measures and will be considered as an offence under Buildings Ordinance section 40.

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BOP/3 First issued February 1982 This revision May 1994 (AD/SE) Index under : Adjoining Buildings - pouring of Concrete against Walls of Concrete - pouring against Walls of Adjoining Buildings Walls - pouring of Concrete against Walls of Adjoining Buildings

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-27 82

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Gas Water Heaters Building (Planning) Regulation 35A

Building (Planning) Regulation 35A requires suitable provision for the installation of a room-sealed gas water heater in every bathroom in a building. This note specifies the arrangements considered generally to be acceptable. 2. In some instances (e.g. with special ducted flue systems), other arrangements may be accepted. Each case will be carefully considered on its merits and in the light of any special circumstances presented for consideration. Size of the Aperture 3. (a) (b) 4. (a) (b) A standard aperture should be : 380 mm by 380 mm normally; or 240 mm by 240 mm when the bathroom is of such a size that only a shower could be fitted. Non-standard apertures may be constructed provided that : the size is to suit a specific water heater flue installed before completion of building; and if necessary, the aperture may be enlarged later to the appropriate standard size (the provision for which can be clearly discernible) without cutting reinforcing bars, re-positioning services or the like.

Location 5. (a) The general requirements are as follows: An aperture should be located in the clear face of an external wall, except that in buildings served by a permanently open and well ventilated balcony approach, apertures may be placed so as to vent into such balconies; As for the internal face of the wall, there should be an unobstructed area around the aperture. The minimum dimensions are as follows :50 mm above 100 mm to each side 150 mm below /(c)....

(b)

-2(c) (d) The base of the aperture should be not less than 200 mm and not more than 2 400 mm above floor level. The aperture should be not less than 300 mm from any corner or from any other opening into the building (e.g. an openable window, a vent, an air-conditioner opening or another aperture); The aperture should be in a wall which has a clear space of not less than 1 500 mm between it and any facing wall or other part of a building, or site boundary. However, if the boundary abuts a street, an aperture may be provided in any wall abutting that street; An aperture should not be positioned directly below any fixed clothes drying racks installed during the construction of the building. Flue terminal guards (supplied/designed by the appliance manufacturers) should be fitted at aperture locations if selected water heating appliances do not incorporate an overheating protector. The water heater, when fitted, should not cause obstruction or inconvenience to the normal use of the room in which it is installed, and should be readily accessible for use; and The length of the hot water pipes from the water heater should comply with the requirements of Waterworks Regulation 19 (Cap 102). For apertures facing into an enclosed space (such as a light well) : (a) (b) The entire enclosed space should contain no obstruction to restrict a vertical flow of air; The enclosed space should be ventilated to the external air below the lowest aperture so as to maintain the air flow. The area of the vents providing this ventilation should be not less than 0.05 m2 for each aperture which faces into the enclosed space. No vent may have any internal dimension less than 200 mm; and The minimum plan dimension of the enclosed space in relation to its height should be not less than 3 m not less than 4 m not less than 5 m 7. (a) not more than 10 storeys high between 11 - 19 storeys high 20 or more storeys high

(e)

(f)

(g)

(h) 6.

(c)

For apertures facing into a re-entrant : The minimum plan width of the re-entrant should be not less than 1.5 m; /(b)....

-3(b) (c) At each storey, any obstruction (e.g. tie beam) at the open end of a reentrant may not reduce the vertical open area by more than 20%; and The entire re-entrant should contain no obstruction to restrict a vertical flow of air.

8. With respect to the location of the standard aperture for water heaters, please refer to the drawing at Appendix A. Sealing 9. When a gas water heater is not fitted at the time of construction, a standard aperture must still be provided. There is no objection to it being sealed. However, any such sealing should be of easily removable brickwork or blockwork. Moreover, any aperture so sealed should be clearly discernible (e.g. by means of recessing) from the inside of the building.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GR/PU/1 First issue May 1983 Last revision December 1997 This revision December 1998 (AD/D) - para. 3 amended Index under : Apertures for Gas Water Heaters B(P)R 35A - Gas Water Heaters Gas Water Heaters - B(P)R 35A

Appendix A PNAP 82 APP-27 ACCEPTABLE LOCATION OF ROOM-SEALED WATER HEATER TERMINAL INTERNAL VIEW

Ceiling

M Q L K K K N Q P LxM N P

Dimension Unobstructed Area Height Above floor Standard size

Non standard

Minimum 100 mm 150 mm 50 mm 200 mm (2400 max.) 380 x 380 mm or 240 x 240 mm to suit

* Unobstructed area shaded

Floor

This revision December 1998

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-28 83

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Requirements for Qualified Supervision of Site Formation Works, Excavation Works, Foundation Works on Sloping Ground, and Ground Investigation Works in the Scheduled Areas Buildings Ordinance Section 17 Buildings Ordinance Section 17 explicitly empowers the Building Authority to require qualified supervision of certain building works when giving his approval of plans or consent to the commencement of the works. 2. The principles used by the Building Authority in assessing the need for qualified supervision of building works with significant geotechnical content, including site formation works, excavation works, foundation works on sloping ground and ground investigation works in the Scheduled Areas, are as follows : Category (I) periodic inspections by a qualified geotechnical engineer who was involved in the preparation of the geotechnical content of the submission This category of qualified supervision applies to sites where the results of stability analyses or ground movement calculations are sensitive to variations in the geotechnical design assumptions. According to B(A)R 8(1)(bb), (bc) etc, the geotechnical design assumptions must be checked on site as works proceed. This is the first duty of the geotechnical engineer providing the site supervision. Having checked the geotechnical design assumptions, the need for modifications to the design has then to be judged by the geotechnical engineer. Some types of design assumptions which may be critical for stability, and which are often found by expert inspection on site to be in error, are : (a) the geological model (eg variation in weathering may affect the penetration depth of steel sheet piles); and the groundwater regime (eg occurrence of a perched water table may impair stability). /Category (II) ....

(b)

- 2 Category (II) periodic inspections by a senior qualified geotechnical engineer who was responsible for the preparation of the geotechnical content of the submission This category of qualified supervision is to be imposed for sites of high sensitivity (eg excavation sites adjoining old buildings with shallow foundations). The personal attention of the qualified supervisor is needed to recognise, evaluate and communicate concerns to the authorized person and the client at a senior level. Category (III) full time supervision by a suitably experienced person This category of qualified supervision applies to sites where day-to-day checks on compliance with specifications or working procedures are necessary. It is used for works which depend for their success and safety on a high standard of workmanship and materials. Some examples are works involving ground anchors, compaction of fill slopes, and excavation and lateral support works involving complicated working procedures. 3. A qualified supervision package may be provided using a combination of Categories (I), (II) and (III) above. In any case, details of the individuals who are to carry out the supervision are to be submitted to the Building Authority for agreement. 4. The following provides guidance on the suitability of persons nominated for compliance with qualified supervision requirements : Category (I) Registered Professional Engineer (Geotechnical) or equivalent from the firm which prepared the geotechnical content of the submission. Registered Professional Engineer (Geotechnical) who is a partner/director or equivalent of the firm which prepared the geotechnical content of the submission. Suitably experienced qualified or graduate engineer/geologist or technical inspector/works supervisor, depending on the type of works.

Category (II)

Category (III)

/5. Registration ....

- 3 5. Registered Professional Engineer (Geotechnical) is not a pre-requisite for acceptance of persons nominated for Category (I) and Category (II) qualified supervision. Each case should be considered on its own merits. For sites where geotechnical problems are of a minor nature and the consequences of failure would be insignificant, the Building Authority will normally not impose the requirement for qualified geotechnical supervision. 6. For certain sites, geotechnical supervisory requirements have been included in the lease or land title document, and on application the sectional Chief Building Surveyor will advise whether this is the case for a specific site.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BORD/32 First issued March 1982 This update December 1997 (GGE, AD/SE) - Supervision levels renamed Index under : BO s17 Supervision Requirement for Qualified Supervision of Building Works with Geotechnical Content Building Works with Geotechnical Content

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-29 84

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Lift and Escalator Installations

Building Works Requirements The design and construction of buildings and building works

accommodating lift and escalator installations are governed by Building (Construction) Regulation 9A, which specifies performance requirements in broad terms. Detailed technical standards are promulgated in the Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of Buildings and Building Works for the Installation and Safe Use of Lifts and Escalators 1993 (the Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts and Escalators) issued by the Building Authority (BA). Compliance with this Code will be considered as satisfying the requirements of Building (Construction) Regulation 9A. 2. Other standards may also be accepted if it is proved to the satisfaction of the BA

that they are capable of achieving equivalent performance. If other standards are to be applied, it will speed up the processing of plans if the full background to such standards and their suitability for local conditions are clearly explained.

Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts and Escalators 3. The Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts and Escalators is kept

under review and amendments from time to time to cater for changes in circumstances, advancement in technology and latest development in building standards. 4. Since its publication in 1993, various amendments have been made to the

Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts and Escalators. These amendments are set out at Appendix A. The Code should therefore be read in conjunction with the amendments at Appendix A, which will be incorporated in the next reprint of the Code. /Adequacy ..

- 2 Adequacy of Fixing Details 5. Buildings with lift and escalator installations shall be designed and

constructed so as to provide adequate structural strength for the safe operation, maintenance and inspection of the lifts and escalators. In this regard, Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers are reminded to pay particular attention to the following fixing details, including layout arrangement, specification of structural materials, anchor and load distribution, so as to ensure that the machine and pulley rooms as well as liftwells shall be so constructed to withstand the loads and forces to which they will normally be subjected:

(a)

fixing details between the guide rail mounting bracket and the supporting building structure;

(b)

fixing details between the lift machine and the supporting building structure; and

(c)

fixing details between the deflector sheave (pulley) bracket and the supporting building structure.

Electrical, Mechanical and Operational Requirements 6. Requirements for the electrical, mechanical and operational aspects of lifts

and escalators are laid down in the Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of Lifts and Escalators and the Code of Practice for Lift Works and Escalator Works issued by the Director of Electrical and Mechanical Services (DEMS) under the Lifts and Escalators (Safety) Ordinance, Cap. 327 (LE(S)O). Works Required by the DEMS in Connection with an Application for Permission to Put Lifts or Escalators into Service

7.

Authorized Persons are reminded to ensure that all essential building and

lift/escalators works as well as works associated with the lift and escalator installation (the associated works) should be completed before submitting application to the DEMS under

/the ..

- 3 -

the LE(S)O for permission to put the lifts and escalators into service. The DEMS has advised that in the past most of such applications were submitted while the associated works had not yet been completed. A list of the associated works often found incomplete for a lift installation is attached at Appendix B and that for an escalator installation is at Appendix C for reference. Practice Note Repealed
8. PNAP 276 is repealed.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority Appendix A : Amendments to Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts and Escalators B : Associated works often found incomplete for Lift Installations C : Associated works often found incomplete for Escalator Installations

Ref. : BD GP/LEG/41 BD GP/BREG/L/4 BD GP/LEG/15 (IX) First issue May 1982 Last revision September 2002 This revision March 2007 (AD/Sup) - Overall revision Index under : Code of Practice on Building Works for Lifts and Escalators Escalator Installation Lift Installation

Addendum to the Code of Practice On the Design and Construction of Buildings and Building Works for the Installation and Safe Use of Lifts and Escalators 1993 Paragraph in the Code 1.1

Appendix A (PNAP 84) (APP-29)

Amendments Replace the Code of Practice for the Design, Construction, Maintenance, Examination and Testing of Lifts and Escalators by the Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of Lifts and Escalators and the Code of Practice for Lift Works and Escalator Works. Renumbered as 2.1. New paragraph added:If there are justifications to deviate from, or practical difficulties to comply with, the minimum dimensions given in Table 1, then the requirements may be modified provided that a registered lift engineer or a person authorized by a registered lift contractor confirms in writing that:(i) (ii) the installations can be accommodated in the proposed lift wells and machine rooms; any future maintenance, repair, major alteration, replacement, examination and testing of the lifts can be carried out in the proposed liftwells and machine rooms safely and without difficulty; and the lift installations are in full compliance with the Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of Lifts and Escalators issued under the Lifts and Escalators (Safety) Ordinance.

2. 2.2

(iii)

For machine-room-less lift installations, modifications of the above minimum dimensions and non-provision of machine rooms would be acceptable provided that exemptions from relevant requirements of the Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of Lifts and Escalators have also been obtained to allow installation of such machine-room-less lifts. /2. Table 1. -1-

Table 1

Replace item 2 of Notes on Table 1 by The dimensions specified in this table are also applicable to rated speeds lower or higher than those stated (i.e. lower than 1.0 m/s for all rated loads; higher than 1.75 m/s for 630 kg, 3.5 m/s for 1,600 kg, etc.). For intermediate loads and rated speeds, the dimensions are determined by linear interpolation from relevant dimensions in Table 1. Add the following after equipment.: The position of at least one hand hold in the lift well should be approximately 1.3 m above the sill and not more than 0.9 m from the landing entrance opening. The original wording of the notice WHEN THERE IS A FIRE DO NOT USE THE LIFT specified in this paragraph is deleted and substituted by the following: IN CASE OF FIRE DO NOT USE THE LIFT

3.8.4

3.10.3

4.6.2

Replace the Code of Practice for the Design, Construction, Maintenance, Examination and Testing of Lifts and Escalators by the Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of Lifts and Escalators. Replace imperforate Triangular by obstruction and the Code of Practice for the Design, Construction, Maintenance, Examination and Testing of Lifts and Escalators by the Code of Practice on the Design and Construction of Lifts and Escalators.

5.3.1

(3/2007)

-2-

A list of associated works often found incomplete by DEMS for a lift installation when an application for permission to put the lift into service was submitted (the list is not exhaustive) 1.

Appendix B (PNAP 84) (APP-29)

Permanent doors to machine and pulley room opening outwards, fitted with self-closing devices and proper locking devices. Permanent warning notices on the outside face of the door.

2. 3.

Clear and safe access to machine and pulley rooms. Adequate railings of suitable height to machine platforms. Appropriate steps or stairways where there was a level difference.

4. 5.

Liftwells, machine and pulley rooms completely enclosed and all unnecessary holes sealed up. Permanent and adequate lighting for liftwells, machine and/or pulley rooms and/or machine platforms.

6.

Protective guards to ventilating fans. Cross-ventilation through the machine room. Wind guards to ventilation louvers.

7. 8.

Provision of adequate electricity supply by permanent cables. Proper isolation switch with permanent identification label for each lift, easily accessible from an entrance of the machine room.

9.

MCB and proper isolation switches with permanent identification labels for lighting and/or socket outlets of lift cars, wells or pits, machine and/or pulley rooms.

10. 11. 12.

Unnecessary holes in lift wells, machine and pulley rooms filled up. Surplus/protruded iron bars inside liftwells all removed. Inspection doors, emergency doors and inspection traps, where required, with proper locking devices and clear and safe access.

13. 14. 15.

Required partition between lift ways in common liftwells. Lift pits completely enclosed and waterproofed. Cat ladders with suitable hand holds for access to pits.

/16. .

-1-

16. 17.

Supporting frames and reinforced wire mesh provided to the liftwell top vents Permanent and adequate lighting installations in lift lobbies. (If decoration, false ceilings, etc are to be installed in the lift lobby after permission to use the lift has been granted, such decoration/false ceiling shall not affect or obstruct the permanent illumination of the lift lobby.)

18.

Ventilation of liftwells directed to open air either directly or via ducting/the machine/pulley room.

19. 20. 21. 22.

Permanent and adequate lighting in liftwells and lift pits. Debris and unrelated materials in liftwells, machine and pulley rooms cleared. Earth bonding for metallic parts in machine rooms. Associated works (except those purely for decoration purposes) surrounding the landing entrances.

23.

All necessary instructions and notices in both Chinese and English in the lift cars and on the landings.

24.

The maximum permissible load in both Chinese and English indicated on the lifting beams or hooks.

(3/2007)

-2-

Appendix C (PNAP 84) (APP-29) A list of associated works often found incomplete by DEMS for an escalator installation when an application for permission to put the escalator into service was submitted (the list is not exhaustive) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Permanent machine room doors fitted with self-closing devices, with permanent warning notices and proper locking devices. Clear and safe access to machine rooms. Unnecessary holes in machine rooms filled up. Provision of adequate electricity supply by permanent cables. MCB and proper isolation switches with permanent identification labels for lighting and socket outlets for each escalator. Proper protective guards where the clearance between the balustrade exterior paneling and any adjacent guard rail/wall at each landing exceeds 100 mm. Permanent obstruction guards properly installed at floor intersections, building obstacles and on criss-cross escalators. Adequate clearance between the outer edges of the handrails and the adjacent walls, criss-cross escalators or other building obstacles. Clear height above the steps and the required unrestricted area of not less than 2.3 m.

10. The required unrestricted area for accommodating passengers at both landings. 11. Permanent and adequate lighting around the escalator including both landings. (If decoration, false ceilings, etc are to be installed around the escalator after permission to use the escalator has been granted, such decoration/false ceiling shall not affect or obstruct the permanent illumination around the escalator including both landings.) 12. The part of wellway, building obstacles or external wall of adjacent criss-cross escalator facing handrail forming a smooth continuous vertical surface. 13. The underside of false ceiling at floor intersections or bottom deck of adjacent criss-cross escalator forming a smooth continuous flat surface.

(3/2007)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-30 85

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Development in Mid-levels Scheduled Area Buildings Ordinance section 2(1) Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bb)(vii) and 8(1)(l) Building works in the Mid-levels Scheduled Area, which is designated as Area Number 1 of the Scheduled Areas in the Fifth Schedule of the Buildings Ordinance (Scheduled Area No.1), are subject to additional geotechnical controls under the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations. 2. As Scheduled Area No.1 is located in the region of sloping ground, all geotechnical aspects of works require input from a Registered Geotechnical Engineer (RGE), in particular at the early planning stage of the building works. RGE should be appointed under the Buildings Ordinance to undertake the following tasks involving geotechnical elements. Ground Investigation 3. By virtue of Buildings Ordinance section 41(3), ground investigation in the Scheduled Area No.1 require approval from the Building Authority (BA). As such, ground investigation plans including laboratory testing as prescribed in Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(l) must be submitted to the BA for approval and consent before the works are commenced. 4. Ground investigations should conform to standards laid down in GEOGUIDE 2 - Guide to Site Investigation, and GEOGUIDE 3 - Guide to Rock and Soil Descriptions. These documents are prepared by the Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO) and are available for sale at the Government Bookstore. As a general rule, a requirement will be made under Buildings Ordinance section 17(1)(6)(e) that ground investigation is adequately supervised on site by a suitably experienced engineer or engineering geologist, and the cores recovered are carefully examined and properly logged. Reference should also be made to PNAP 132 - Site Investigation. Demolition 5. Demolition plans as prescribed in Building (Administration) Regulation 8(3) and (4) must be submitted for approval. Bulk Excavation 6. Bulk excavation at any site in Scheduled Area No.1shall not be carried out below levels to be determined by the Building Authority as required in Building (Construction) Regulation 21. This control measure is necessary to minimize cumulative adverse effects of bulk excavation on the stability of the hillside generally. /7.

-27. To assist the early planning of a building scheme, authorized persons (APs) and RGEs are strongly advised to request a provisional determination of bulk excavation level constraints as soon as they are commissioned for any building works in Scheduled Area No.1. The Buildings Department (BD) will normally be able to issue a tentative plan showing the approximate bulk excavation limits within 10 working days of receipt by GEO of such a request. The final determination of bulk excavation limits will generally be issued by BD within one month from the date of receipt by GEO of the following documents : (a) (b) ground investigation report; and topographic survey plan and cross-sections in terms of Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bb)(vii) and 8(1)(c).

The specifications for the survey will be provided by GEO on request. 8. The envelope of all bulk excavation must be shown on the site formation plans in accordance with Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bb)(vii). Foundation Plans 9. Building (Administration) Regulation 11A requires that for sites in Scheduled Area No.1, the foundation plan is to be submitted with the site formation plan. This is to enable the Building Authority to give due consideration to effects on the stability of the hillside resulting from factors such as changes in groundwater levels or surcharge loading which can be caused by the foundation system itself. Submissions not in compliance with this requirement may be refused under Buildings Ordinance sections 16(1)(a), (e) or (i). Performance Review 10. The requirement for a performance review as defined in Buildings Ordinance section 2(1) may be imposed as a condition on giving of approval or consent to the commencement of building works in Scheduled Area No.1. However, it is not intended to impose the requirement for every development/redevelopment site within the area. Where a performance review is required, it should demonstrate that the building works have been adequately inspected and monitored in the course of construction and that the geotechnical design assumptions upon which the building works have been based are valid. Otherwise, an application for an occupation permit or a temporary occupation permit may be refused under Buildings Ordinance section 21(6)(f). Other Geotechnical Controls 11. There are additional geotechnical controls which may be applied on sites in Scheduled Area No.1 covering landslip debris resistance, sequence of works and groundwater drainage works under Buildings Ordinance sections 16(1)(q), 17(1)(6)(f) and 28A to D. /Extra

-3Extra Set of Plans 12. In order to facilitate processing of building development proposals in Scheduled Area No.1, one extra set of the following plans should be submitted : (a) (b) (c) (d) general building plans; site formation plans together with relevant reports and calculations; foundation plans including pilecap details, relevant reports and calculations; and excavation and lateral support plans.

Geotechnical Information 13. The Mid-levels Consultants Study was summarized in a report entitled Mid-levels Study : Report on Geology, Hydrology and Soil Properties (1982). The report is available for sale at the Government Bookstore. 14. In addition, all factual data on geology, hydrology and soil properties collected in the course of the Mid-levels Study between 1979 and 1981 are available from the Geotechnical Information Unit as per PNAP 104. These data may assist in the geotechnical appraisal of the site. Boundary of Scheduled Area No.1 15. A plan showing the boundary of Scheduled Area No.1 is on display in BD and in the Geotechnical Information Unit of the Civil Engineering Library.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/BOP/28 GC 4/16/9 First issue July 1982 Last revision April 1998 This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD) (Paras. 1,3, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 & 15 amended, para. 2 added) Index under : Bulk Excavation Limits Ground Investigation Mid-levels Scheduled Area Performance Review Scheduled Area No. 1

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-31 87

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Permanent Water Supply to Fire Service Installations Buildings Ordinance section 21(6)(d) Where a permanent supply of water for a fire service installation in a building is required under the provisions of the Code of Practice (Minimum Fire Service Installations and Equipment), it is essential that a permanent connection is made prior to occupation of the building. 2. (a) For the issue of an occupation permit, the following arrangements will apply : Where water supply to a fire service installation is either not required at all or has already been permanently connected, the Fire Service certificate required under Buildings Ordinance section 21(6)(d) will be issued in the normal way; Where a fire service installation is considered by the Director of Fire Services to be satisfactory but a permanent water supply connection has not been made, the Fire Service certificate will be issued with a rider that it shall be valid only when the permanent water supply has been connected; and In the case above, an occupation permit will not be issued until the terms of any such rider have been fulfilled.

(b)

(c)

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BOP/6 BD GP/BORD/l0 II BD GP/BREG/SF/4 First issued July 1982 This revision May 1994 (AD/D) Index under : BO s21(6)(d) - Permanent Water Supply to Fire Service Installations Fire Service Installations - Permanent Water Supply Occupation Permits - Permanent Water Supply Water Supply - Fire Service Installations

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-32 88

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Hong Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions) Ordinance, Cap 301 Temporary Exemption from the Operation of a Height Restrictions Order Under section 3(4) of the Hong Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions) Ordinance, the Director of Civil Aviation (DCA) may grant an exemption from the operation of an order made pursuant to subsection (1AA) for a period not exceeding two months which may be extended for a further two months. 2. If any projects are being or to be carried out in an area which is subject to height limitations under this Ordinance, authorized persons and registered structural engineers are requested to ensure that the responsible registered contractor obtains the prior approval of DCA to any item of temporary plant or equipment likely to project beyond the prescribed height at any time during construction. ----3. A copy of Practice Note No. 7 for registered contractors on this subject is attached as Appendix A for information. Height Restrictions for Kai Tak Airport 4. The Hong Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions) Order 1997 which prescribed the height restrictions of buildings in respect of Kai Tak Airport was repealed on 10.7.98. In other words, these height restrictions have been lifted. However, authorized persons and registered structural engineers are reminded that the height restrictions in respect of the new airport at Chek Lap Kok remain in force.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/LEG/33 BD GP/BL/TP/20 (VI) First issue August 1982 Last revision April 1998 This revision July 1998 (AD/D) - para. 4 amended and paras. 5 & 6 deleted Index under : Hong Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions) Ordinance, Cap. 301

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-33 90

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Pulverised Fuel Ash in Concrete

The technical and environmental benefits of using Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA) as a partial replacement for Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) in concrete are well established. However, it is necessary to ensure effective curing; in cold weather, in particular, very early strengths may be lower than equivalent OPC mixes. 2. The use of PFA as a partial cement replacement in concrete is permitted on the following conditions : (a) PFA as a separate constituent may be used only with OPC and should comply with BS 3892: Part 1:1982, except that the criterion for maximum water requirement may not apply; Blended cement containing PFA should comply with BS 6588:1985 and have a nominal PFA content not exceeding 25%. PFA should not be used as a partial cement replacement in concrete in addition to blended cement; The PFA content should not exceed 35% by mass of the cementitious content (OPC plus PFA) of the concrete. It should, however, be noted that 25% PFA replacement is usually only used in normal construction whereas PFA replacement exceeding 25% is for special applications such as marine construction and massive pours which will require expert advice and stringent site control; The AP/RSE should specify the PFA content and extent of its use in the structural submissions. He should satisfy himself and the registered contractor should make sure that the concrete supplier has adequate quality control measures to ensure that the finished concrete complies with the specifications and statutory requirements in all respects. The AP/RSE shall be informed if deviations have been found; and When the PFA replacement exceeds 25%, the AP/RSE should also satisfy himself that there will not be any adverse effect on the structure due to removal of formwork, creep and long-term deflection etc.

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(C M LEUNG) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/1 First issued : December 1982 Last revision : May 1994 This revision : September 2001 paragraph 2 amended (AD/NB2) Index under : PFA Pulverised Fuel Ash

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-34 92

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Structural Design of Bridges and Associated Highway Structures

Occasionally, a bridge or associated highway structure is required to be constructed in connection with a private development, say, under the terms of the lease conditions. The bridge or associated highway structure may be located within the private lot, outside the lot boundary or partly outside the lot boundary. 2. The design and construction of such structures should be carried out in accordance with the Structures Design Manual for Highways and Railways, issued by the Highways Department. The plans should always be examined by the Advisory Committee on the Appearance of Bridges and Associated Structures (ACABAS). As part of the centralized plans processing system, the Building Authority will arrange for the relevant plans to be examined by ACABAS: see PNAP 107. Wholly or Partly within a Private Lot 3. When a bridge or associated highway structure is built wholly or partly within a private lot or gains support from or is connected to a building resting on a private lot, the plans should be processed under the Buildings Ordinance. This includes : (a) (b) any bridge erected between two private buildings, if the bridge gains support from either or both of the buildings; or a bridge which gains support from a private building at one end and rests on government land at the other, whether or not separate access is available from the public street.

4. Notwithstanding the standards of the Structures Design Manual for Highways and Railways, structural design and construction of this type of building works should also satisfy the requirements of the Building (Construction) Regulations with due observation of the recommendations of the relevant Codes of Practice and Practice Notes for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers, issued by the Building Authority. Wholly Outside a Private Lot 5. A bridge or associated highway structure of the free-standing type, built entirely on government land or over public highways, may have to be constructed outside a private lot. These are exempted from the Buildings Ordinance. 6. The Director of Highways is the competent authority for the control of such structures. The Highways Department will be responsible for vetting plans, permitting works to be carried out, imposing requirements for the testing of foundations, examining material quality control data and liaising and corresponding with the appointed Authorized Person or Registered Structural Engineer. /7. In....

- 2 7. In addition to the requirements of the Structures Design Manual for Highways and Railways, the Highways Department will also require the following design standards to be satisfied : (a) Geometric Design and Layout The geometric layout and dimensions of the structures should comply with the Transport Planning & Design Manual Volume 2, issued by the Transport Department; (b) Materials and Workmanship All materials for the works and workmanship should also comply with the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works, 1992 Edition (Hong Kong Government); (c) Retaining Walls Retaining walls should be designed and constructed in accordance with GEOGUIDE 1 (Guide to Retaining Wall Design, Second Edition), issued by the Geotechnical Engineering Office of the Civil Engineering Department; (d) Lighting The lighting of the structures should comply with the requirements of the Lighting Division of the Highways Department and the Electrical and Mechanical Services Department; (e) Geotechnical Requirements The geotechnical aspects should comply with the requirements of the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes, issued by the Geotechnical Engineering Office; and (f) Landscape Improvement The adverse impact of the structures on their surroundings or landscape should be minimized by introducing appropriate treatment and/or landscape planting. Such proposals should form part of the design. Consultation with the Landscape Unit of the Highways Department prior to submission is welcomed.

/8. Structural....

- 3 8. Structural details of bridges and highway structures to be built wholly outside a private lot, including resubmissions, should initially be submitted to the Buildings Department. They should comprise 3 sets of plans, 2 sets of calculations and 2 sets of site investigation documents, for transmission to the Highways Department. When the works are completed to satisfaction, the Highways Department will so certify in writing, thus concluding its technical and administrative involvement in the works. Concluding Observation 9. The manuals and guides mentioned above are available from the Government Publications Sales Centre.

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GR/OP/9 First issued February 1983 This revision May 1995 (AD/SE) (minor revision to para 9) Index under : Bridges Highway Structures Structural Design of Highway Structures

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-35 98

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorised Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Refuse Storage and Collection Building (Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers and Refuse Chutes) Regulations Access for Refuse Collection Vehicle When planning the location of refuse storage and material recovery chambers (RS&MRC), and making arrangements for ready access thereto, the limiting specifications of refuse collection vehicles currently in use by the Food and Environmental Hygiene Department, taking the worst case for planning purposes, are as follows: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Length 10.00 m; Width (including mirrors) 3.00 m; Height 3.80 m; Headroom required for bin-lifting operation 4.50 m; Ground clearance 0.22 m; Angle of departure (angle of rear projection, including bin-lifting device, above ground in relation to ground contact of rear wheels) 8 degrees; Turning circle 20.00 m; Gross vehicular weight 25 tonnes; Maximum gradient for access 1:10; Minimum width of access road 3.50 m; and Parking space for refuse collection operation 5.00 m x 12.00 m.

(g) (h) (i) (j) (k)

2. Unless refuse collection vehicles can leave the area of a RS&MRC in a continuing forward direction, it may be necessary to provide basic hammer-head turning facilities of 27.00 m x 9.50 m with an approach 10.90 m wide. Alternative measures may be designed based upon the limiting vehicle specifications provided above. Appendix A illustrates two alternative designs for general reference. /3. ..

-23. The planned refuse collection vehicle access and exit routes from a public street to the RS&MRC should be indicated on the building plans. RS&MRCs which are intended to be visited by refuse collection vehicles should be located on the ground floor or podium floor with direct vehicular access from the street without passing through intervening floors. Building (Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers and Refuse Chutes) Regulations 4. The Building (Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers and Refuse Chutes) Regulations cover, inter alia, the provision of material recovery chambers (MRC), RS&MRC and refuse storage and material recovery rooms (RS&MRR) as well as the requirement on mechanical ventilation and air-purifying facilities for MRC, RS&MRC and RS&MRR. 5. The Building (Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers and Refuse Chutes) (Amendment) Regulation 2008 (the Amendment Regulation) introduced a new regulation 3A on the mandatory requirement for the provision of a RS&MRR on every floor of new domestic buildings or the domestic part of new composite buildings, except in the circumstances as provided for in regulations 3A(2), (3), (4), (5) and (6). The Amendment Regulation will come into operation on 1 December 2008, and its application will be governed by the provisions of section 39(2) of the Buildings Ordinance. Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers, Material Recovery Chambers and Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Rooms 6. When submitting plans for buildings of the type referred to in the Schedule to Regulation 3 of the Building (Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers and Refuse Chutes) Regulations, calculation showing the usable floor space or aggregate usable floor space, the minimum floor space for any chamber required, and the actual size of any proposed chamber should be provided. 7. Every RS&MRR should have adequate provisions for fire prevention and fire fighting such as fire alarm and sprinkler. The room should be separated from the remainder of the building by walls having a FRP of 2 hours and the access door thereto should have a FRP of 1 hour. The self-closing mechanism to the door should not permit the door to be held in the open position. Appendix B provides details of typical layouts and minimum dimensions for RS&MRR. 8. Subject to satisfactory planning, the area of RS&MRC, MRC, RS&MRR, refuse chutes and hopper rooms (where provided) may, under Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(b), be excluded from measurement in gross floor area calculations. /Mechanical..

-3Mechanical Ventilation and Air Purifying Facilities for Material Recovery Chambers, Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers and Rooms 9. Where a centralised ventilation system is adopted, a single air purifier may be installed before final discharge into the atmosphere. Alternatively where there is no particular odour problem a mechanical fan coupled with a particulate filter at each RS&MRR/MRC may be considered. 10. The main exhaust outlet for a centralised ventilation system should be located at upper roof level away from other buildings. However in the case where the building is surrounded by taller buildings, the discharge may be located at the main RS&MRC. 11. The noise level of the system should conform with the Technical Memorandum published under the Noise Control Ordinance (Cap 400). Fire dampers should be provided if the system has exhaust grilles and ducting at each floor. 12. Air purifying devices such as chemical air scrubber, bio-oxygen generator, photo-oxidation generator or other appropriate devices should be provided within a RS&MRC.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/RC/1 (II) First issue November 1983 Last revision September 2000 This revision August 2008 (AD/NB1) Para. 5 added and paras. 4 & 6 amended Index under : Access for Refuse Collection Vehicles - B(RS&MRC and RC)R 5 B(RS&MRC and RC)R 3 - Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers and Chutes B(RS&MRC and RC)R 5 - Access for Refuse Collection Vehicles Refuse Collection Vehicles - B(RS&MRC and RC)R 5 Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers and Chutes B(RS&MRC and RC)R 3 Material Recovery Chambers - B(RS&MRC and RC)R 4A Material Recovery Rooms - B(RS&MRC and RC)R 4B Ventilation and Air Purifying - B(RS&MRC and RC)R 12A B(RS&MRC and RC)R 12A - Ventilation and Air Purifying of Refuse Storage and Material Recovery Chambers/Material Recovery Rooms

APP-35 APP-35

APP-35

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers BUILDINGS ORDINANCE OFFICE

APP-36 100

PRACTICE NOTE FOR AUTHORIZED PERSONS AND REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS

Industrial Buildings - Occupancy and Related Matters Determinations by the Commissioner for Labour Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 5(5) Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 5(5)(b) provides that the occupancy of an industrial undertaking shall be determined by the Commissioner for Labour. This occupancy figure is useful as a data base for assessing the adequacy of the provision of sanitary fitments and also for planning exit route arrangements in accordance with the Code of Practice on Means of Escape where an industrial building has a single user. 2. (a) The Commissioner for Labour has advised as follows: for the purposes of Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 5(5)(b) and (c) the occupancy in flatted factories may be calculated on the basis of 4.5 m of usable floor space per person and the ratio of male to female workers shall be taken as 1:1, and for the purposes of Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 5(5)(b) and the Code of Practice on Means of Escape in relation to the occupancy in single user specialized industrial workplaces he will make a determination of occupancy according to the specialized trade process proposed.

(b)

3. Since by virtue of the Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Amendment) Ordinance 1990, kitchens to restaurants, fast food shops, cafes and the like are classified as industrial undertakings, the Commissioner for Labour has also advised that for the purposes of Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 5(5)(b) and (c) the occupancy in such kitchens may be calculated on the basis of 4.5 m of usable floor space per person and the ratio of male to female workers shall be taken as 2:1. 4. The above advice of the Commissioner for Labour is supported by the Building Authority. Submission of plans containing a departure from this advice without acceptable justification will be rejected under relevant provisions of the Buildings Ordinance and the Regulations made thereunder (Darwin Chen) Building Authority Ref. : BLD(B) GP/BOP/6 BLD(B) GR/BC/IC/17 First issued December 1983 This amendment February 1993 (GBS/D) - para 3 added Index under : Industrial Buildings - Occupancy & Related Matters

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-37 106

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Curtain Wall, Window and Window Wall Systems Submission of Curtain Wall Plans Curtain walls shall be designed to meet the specific requirements set out in Regulation 43 of the Building (Construction) Regulations (Cap 123 sub. leg. B). In addition, attention should be paid to the requirements for wind loads, horizontal impact loads on the curtain wall when there is no protective barrier provided, protection of openings, protection against corrosion and the quality of materials. 2. The following details are required to be included in the curtain wall plans for submission to the Building Authority for approval: (a) structural framing and key structural details and the installation procedures excluding any unnecessary shop fabrication details; structural calculations comprising design check on the parent structure, analysis on the structural adequacy and stability of the proposed curtain wall system, element design for aluminium alloy, fixing components, glazing, and deflection check on major load carrying members; workmanship specifications for welding, galvanization measures to overcome bi-metallic effects, and corrosion prevention; elevations including panel arrangements; typical and non-typical sections showing structural members and supports; typical and non-typical connections; specifications on allowable tolerance of the positioning of curtain wall supports and any remedial arrangements in cases where such tolerance is exceeded; /(h) ..

(b)

(c)

(d) (e) (f) (g)

-2-

(h)

the mode of support from and connection to the loadbearing structure of the building (anchorages in structural concrete members or welded connections to structural steel members) and any justification and application for modification of Regulation 43 of the Building (Construction) Regulations (Cap 123 sub. leg. B) for using other mode of support, e.g. drilled or bolted fixings; the projection of the curtain wall system from the outer face of the structural elements, e.g. beams, columns and floor slabs, for consideration of exemption from gross floor area and site coverage calculations; standard specifications or codes of practice on structural glazing; material specifications for structural steel, aluminium alloy, cast-in anchors, fixing screws, structural sealant, and glazing; and sections showing compliance with Regulation 90 of the Building (Construction) Regulations (Cap 123 sub. leg. B) and the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction on such relevant aspects as the protection against spread of fire and smoke between floors, between different compartments on the same floor, and between the accommodation of a storey and the required staircase or its intercepting lobby.

(i)

(j) (k)

(l)

Submission of Plans of Window or Window Wall above Ground Floor 3. In general, window and window wall systems should satisfy the performance requirements stipulated in the Building (Construction) Regulations (Cap 123 sub. leg. B) and the requirements on lighting and ventilation stipulated in the Building (Planning) Regulations (Cap 123 sub. leg. F). 4. If a window or window wall system is at a location where the design wind pressure, qz, is 2.86 kPa or above, and it meets conditions (i) and (ii) below: (i) the window or window wall system is to form wholly or partly the external wall above ground floor of a building; and the least dimension of the structural opening for such window or window wall exceeds 1.8m and the area of structural opening exceeds 6m2, /structural ..

(ii)

-3structural framing and key structural details, excluding any unnecessary shop fabrication details, containing the following information to demonstrate that the window or window wall system is of adequate strength and stability should be submitted for approval: (a) (b) information described in sub-paragraphs 2(b), (c), (d), (e), (f), (g), (j), (k) and (l) above; structural adequacy in resisting horizontal imposed loads specified in Table 3 of Regulation 17(3) of the Building (Construction) Regulations (Cap 123 sub. leg. B) for window or window wall system that functions as a protective barrier; and deflection checks to ensure that the maximum deflection of the structural elements does not exceed span/180 and, where deflection value is adopted from manufacturers, proposal on substantiation test.

(c)

5. Where the structural details of a window and window wall system are not required to be submitted for approval, the Authorized Person (AP) and Registered Structural Engineer (RSE) should ensure that the design, fabrication and installation of such system would achieve the required safety standard. Attention should be given to the requirements on horizontal imposed loads, protection of openings, function of protective barriers, corrosion protection, quality control of materials and protection against the spread of fire and smoke between floors. Submission of Plans of Window or Window Wall Plans at Ground Floor 6. Structural details of a window or window wall (including glass shop front) at ground floor with the design span of its structural elements (i.e. mullion, glass fins, etc) exceeding 6m should be submitted for approval. The structural information mentioned in sub-paragraphs 4(a) to (c) above should be included in the submission. Separate Registered Structural Engineer 7. In view of the speciality of curtain wall, window and window wall works, a separate RSE may be appointed to prepare the design and to supervise the carrying out of such works. Under such circumstances, the specified Forms BA4 and BA5 indicating the appointment of the separate RSE and the scope of works for which he/she is responsible are required to be submitted together with the plans submitted for approval. Upon completion of the works, the separate RSE so appointed is required to certify satisfactory completion of the works in accordance with Regulation 25(3) of the Building (Administration) Regulations (Cap 123 sub. leg. A). /8. ..

-48. Where structural details for a proposed curtain wall, window or window wall system are submitted by the separate RSE, the submission should be accompanied by an assessment report prepared by him/her giving an account of the effect of the proposed works to the parent structure. The assessment report should be appended with a statement signed by the project RSE to confirm that he/she is fully aware of the connection details and the effect of the works on the parent structure. 9. The separate RSE who is appointed for the curtain wall, window or window wall works shall be responsible for the supervision of the construction of such works, including the installation of any cast-in anchorage, e.g. anchor plates, cast-in embeds and through bolts, etc., in the parent structure except in the event where the cast-in anchorage has been pre-installed in the parent structure prior to his appointment. For such cases, the structural details and layout of the pre-installed parts should be given in the superstructure plans to be submitted for approval by the project RSE who shall then be responsible for the supervision of the installation of such parts. The separate RSE should refer to the pre-installed connection details when designing the curtain wall, window or window wall works and should coordinate with the project RSE for any necessary amendment if different connection details are to be used. Tempered Glass 10. Because of its high strength, tempered glass may be used in curtain wall, large window and window wall systems to resist high wind pressure. However, due to the possibility of spontaneous breakage in tempered glass, it is recommended and encouraged to minimize the use of this product in curtain wall, window and window wall systems above ground floor in buildings. Alternative products to accomplish this are the use of thicker glass, heat-strengthened glass, laminated glass, or various combinations of these products. Glass of suitable type, thickness and size should be selected to provide an appropriate degree of safety, taking into account the intended use and the possibility of catastrophic consequences in the event of breakage. 11. Where tempered glass is chosen, the AP/RSE should ensure that an acceptable method of quality control (such as heat soaking, infrared photography or laser photography) has been adopted by the glass manufacturer/fabricator to minimize the risk of spontaneous breakage of tempered glass. Compliance certificates or test reports on the method of quality control confirming that the glass conforms to the relevant standards should be submitted prior to the application of an occupation permit.

/Heat ..

-5Heat Soak Process 12. It is widely recognized that heat soaking1 accelerates the expulsion of the nickel sulphide inclusions in tempered glass and that heat soak process is the most effective means of eliminating tempered glass with nickel sulphide. It is therefore recommended that, in the absence of other recognized quality control methods acceptable to the AP/RSE, heat soaking conforming to BS EN 14179-1:2005 or other equivalent international standards should be carried out as it is part of the quality control measures for tempered glass used in curtain wall, window and window wall works. 13. When heat soaking is adopted as the method of quality control to minimize the risk of spontaneous breakage of tempered glass, the heat soaking process shall be applied to all tempered glass panes to be used. The compliance certificate should include the following information: (i) (ii) (iii) identification of the batch; quantity and configuration of thermocouples used to measure the glass surface temperatures in the oven; graphs of the heat soak process cycle associated with each of the thermocouples indicating the glass surface temperatures at representative glass locations and time duration of the heating phase, holding phase and cooling phase of the process; name of the tempered glass manufacturer; location of the oven; calibration report of the oven;

(iv) (v) (vi)

(vii) date of carrying out the heat soaking process; (viii) quantity and size of the tempered glass subject to the heat soaking process and records of breakages of panels in the tests; and /(ix) ..
Note Heat soak process that significantly reduces the risk of damaging nickel sulphide usually includes, inter alia, an oven of taking the glass panes through three phases of the process. The heating phase commences with all the glass panes at ambient temperature and concludes when the surface temperature of the last glass pane reaches 280oC. The holding phase commences when the surface temperature of all the glass panes has reached a temperature of 280oC. The duration of the holding phase is 2 hours minimum. The surface temperature of the glass panes shall be maintained in the range of 290oC10oC during the holding phase. The cooling phase commences when the last glass pane to reach 280oC has completed its holding phase. The glass temperature shall be brought down to ambient temperature during this phase.
1

-6(ix) minimum dimension of glass separation in the oven.

Other Methods of Quality Control 14. Unlike heat soak process which eliminates defective glass panes in the oven by early breakage, the infrared photography or laser photography tests conducted by the glass fabricator aim at detecting the existence of nickel sulphide in the glass panes on site. If infrared photography or laser photography tests are adopted, the test reports should be appended with a statement signed by the RSE to confirm that all glass panes have been thoroughly imaged, and that the tests have been conducted by a laboratory accredited under the Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) or equivalent. 15. Technology is constantly changing. In order not to preclude new quality control methods that are innovative and economical, APs and RSEs are encouraged to review from time to time new quality control methods that may be proposed by the glass manufacturers/fabricators in future. In this respect, if any quality control method other than heat soak process is proposed by the AP/RSE, full details of the proposed method including the principle, method statement and limitations should be submitted to demonstrate suitability of the proposed method. Structural Sealant 16. Because of better aesthetic appearance, structural sealant may be used in the construction of curtain wall, window or window wall systems. The proposed structural sealant should be compatible with the glazing system and the structural frame with which it is in contact, which should develop an adequate strength with its substrates and has a safety factor suitable for the application. Compliance certificates comprising the Sealant Compatibility Report, Sealant Adhesion Report and the Print Review Report issued by the manufacturers/suppliers and endorsed by the RSE are required to be submitted prior to the application of an occupation permit. 17. The establishment of a suitable safety factor for a structural sealant depends on a number of factors such as risks to building occupants and pedestrians, its long-term durability, degree of redundancy, nature of applied loads, quality control during fabrication and erection. In addition to a suitable safety factor, other measures to ensure durability may include an effective quality control program during fabrication, regular inspection and timely execution of repair work. Guidelines on the maintenance, repair and inspection requirements are given in paragraphs 21 to 24 below. Design and Construction Standards 18. Standards commonly used for the design and construction of curtain wall, window and window wall systems, which are acceptable to the Building Authority, are given in Appendix A. /Safety ..

-7Safety Test 19. Under Regulation 43(6) of the Building (Construction) Regulations (Cap 123 sub. leg. B), all curtain wall systems are required to undergo a safety test. The test should be carried out by an independent laboratory accredited within its scope of accreditation by the HOKLAS or by other laboratory accreditation bodies which have reached mutual recognition agreements/arrangements with HOKLAS. The test carried out by an accredited laboratory should be within its scope of accreditation. The test reports should be made on a HOKLAS Endorsed Certificate or equivalent Certificate/Report and be also appended with a statement signed by the RSE who has prepared the plans to confirm the acceptance criteria appropriate to the test have been complied with. They should be submitted prior to the application of an occupation permit. 20. As a curtain wall system may comprise various panel sizes subject to a wide range of design wind pressure, the test panels should be selected based on engineering judgement and with justification of mathematical computation models where appropriate. It is desirable to specify the representative test panel(s) in the curtain wall plans. Detailed requirements of the safety test are given in Appendix B. Maintenance, Repair and Inspection 21. In view of the special requirements for the design and construction of curtain wall, window and window wall systems, it is important that owners of the buildings installed with such systems are given all relevant information including in particular the names and addresses of the specialist suppliers and manufacturers, both local and overseas. Copies of approved plans and working drawings will also be useful to them. 22. Curtain wall, window and window wall systems are required to be regularly inspected after they have been installed in buildings. Proper maintenance and repair are essential in keeping them in a safe condition. All owners of buildings where curtain wall, window or window wall systems have been constructed should make arrangements for the systems to be inspected visually, at least twice a year and before and after typhoons. Full inspection of the curtain wall, window or window wall systems should be carried out by AP, RSE or other suitably qualified and experienced persons under the direct supervision of AP/RSE, not more than two years after handing over and thereafter at an appropriate interval. When making such inspection, AP, RSE, other responsible personnel and building management personnel should watch out for signs of distress or deterioration. Some examples of these are listed below: cracked, loose, broken or missing glass panels; bulging, bowing, separation, displacement of panels; staining rust, chemical, water; / fixings .. delamination, rotation,

-8 fixings damaged and missing parts, corrosion, looseness, other defects; sealant extrusion between joints and panels, wrinkle, split, missing, change in colour and other signs of deterioration; hardening, cracking gaskets; malfunctioning of locking devices and bar hinges of openable windows; and water seepage or moisture behind curtain wall, window or window wall.

23. A maintenance manual is a useful tool for building management. It helps formulate a planned inspection and maintenance programme for a curtain wall, window or window wall system. The manual should record the service history of a curtain wall, window or window wall system. Details of previous maintenance, repairs, modifications, findings of inspections, actions proposed subsequent to inspections and inspection records should be included in the manual. The AP/RSE should advise his/her client of the need for providing a maintenance manual for the reference of the persons responsible for full inspection of the curtain wall, window or window wall system. 24. The Building Authority recommends all APs and RSEs to adopt the guidelines given in this practice note. They are also requested to offer help and advice as appropriate to their clients who have a curtain wall, window or window wall system in their buildings. Aluminium Windows 25. Reference may be made to PNAP 248 in respect of the design and installation guidelines on aluminium windows. Concurrent Processing of Approval and Consent Applications 26. For curtain wall works, the application for approval of plans and consent to the commencement of works may be made concurrently as provided for in PNAP 272.

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority

-9Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/6(IV) First issue September 1984 Last revision June 2006 This revision January 2009 (AD/NB2)

(Paras. 4b, 11, 12, 13, 16, 19 and Appendix A revised; paras. 14, 20 and 26 added para. 1 deleted)

Index under : Curtain Wall Systems Heat Soak Test Regular Inspections of Curtain Walls Structural Plans for Curtain Walls and Window Walls Testing of Curtain Wall Systems Tempered Glass Window/Window Wall Systems Structural Sealants

Appendix A (PNAP 106) (APP-37) Standards Commonly Used for the Design & Construction of Curtain Wall, Window and Window Wall Systems Acceptable to the Building Authority Reference Standards The standards listed in this appendix are intended to provide reference information only for the purpose of design and construction of curtain wall, window and window wall systems. It should be noted that: (a) the standards listed are not meant to be exhaustive; (b) national standards and codes of practice of various countries, though similar in major aspects, do not have exact equivalence to one another; (c) should a certain design standard be adopted, it should be applied to the design consistently; and (d) Building Regulations shall always take precedence over other design standards should there be a conflict between them. A. Design, Material & Workmanship Title/Description Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004 Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2005 Specification for aluminium alloy sections for structural purposes Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip and plate. Mechanical properties Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip and plate. Tolerances on dimensions and form for hot-rolled products Aluminium
1

Design, Standard Material & Workmanship Wind Hong Kong Code of Practice Steel Aluminium Hong Kong Code of Practice BS 1161:1977(1991) BS EN 485-2:2004 BS EN 485-3:2003

BS EN 515:1993

and

aluminium

alloys.

Wrought products. Temper designations BS EN 573-2: 1995 Aluminium and aluminium alloys, chemical composition and form of wrought products. Chemical symbol based designation system. Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical composition and form of wrought products. Forms of products Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes rivet, bolt and screw stock Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical composition and form of wrought products. Chemical composition Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles. Mechanical properties Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles. Round bars, tolerances on dimensions and form Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles. Square bars, tolerances on dimensions and form Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles. Hexagonal bars, tolerances on dimensions and form Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles. Seamless tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles. Porthole tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles.
2

BS EN 573-4:1995

BS 1473:1972(2002)

BS EN 573-3:2003

BS EN 755-2:1997

BS EN 755-3:1996

BS EN 755-4:1996

BS EN 755-6:1996

BS EN 755-7:1998

BS EN 755-8:1998

BS EN 755-9:2001

Profiles, tolerances on dimensions and form BS EN 12020-2:2001 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles in alloys EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063. Tolerances on dimensions and form Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic materials. Arc welding of aluminium and aluminium alloys Structural use of aluminium Specification for materials, workmanship and protection Glass for glazing Classification Terminology for work on glass Glass in building Heat Soak thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass Part 1 : Definition and description Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate glass products. Definitions and general physical and mechanical properties Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate glass products. Float glass Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate glass products. Polished wire glass Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate glass products. Drawn sheet glass Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate glass products. Patterned glass Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate glass products. Wired patterned glass Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate glass products. Wired or unwired channel shaped glass Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate glass products. Supplied and final cut sizes
3

BS EN 1011-4:2000

BS 8118-2:1991

Glass

BS 952: Part 1:1995 Part 2:1980 BS EN14179-1:2005

BS EN 572-1:2004

BS EN 572-2:2004 BS EN 572-3:2004 BS EN 572-4:2004 BS EN 572-5:2004 BS EN 572-6:2004 BS EN 572-7:2004

BS EN 572-8:2004

BS EN 572-9:2004

Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate glass products. Evaluation of conformity/Product standard This DIN standard covers glass in building, sheet glass, plate glass, cast glass, glass edge, chemical and physical properties of glass, glass edges and thermally toughened glass. Japanese Industrial Standard for Float Glass and Polished Plate Glass Japanese Industrial Laminated Glass Japanese Industrial Tempered Glass Standard Standard for for

DIN 1249

JIS R 3202-1996 JIS R 3205-1998 JIS R3206-1997 JIS R 3222-1990 ASTM C162-05 ASTM C1036-06 ASTM C1048-04

Japanese Industrial Standard for Heat Strengthen Glass Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products Standard Specification for Flat Glass Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass Standard Specification Architectural Flat Glass for Laminated

ASTM C1172-03 ASTM C142299(2005)e1 ASTM E2190-02 ANSI Z97.1

Standard Specification for Chemically Strengthened Flat Glass Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation American National Standards Institute: Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Materials used in Buildings Specification for tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass for hot rolled steel plates 3 mm thick or above

Stainless Steel

BS EN 10029:1991

BS EN ISO 9445:2006

Continuously cold-rolled stainless steel narrow strip, wide strip, plate/sheet and cut lengths. Tolerances on dimensions and form Hot rolled narrow steel strip. Tolerances on dimensions and shape Continuously hot-rolled uncoated plate, sheet and strip of non-alloy and alloy steels. Tolerances on dimensions and shape Heat resisting steels and nickel alloys Mechanical properties of corrosionresistant stainless-steel fasteners. Bolts, screws and studs Mechanical properties of corrosionresistant stainless-steel fasteners. Nuts Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic materials. Arc welding of stainless steels Selection of construction sealants. Guide Standard Specification for Secondary Edge Sealants for Structurally Glazed Insulating Glass Units

BS EN 10048:1997 BS EN 10051:1991+A1:1997

BS EN 10095:1999 BS EN ISO 35061:1998 BS EN ISO 35062:1998 BS EN 1011-3:2000

Sealant

BS 6213:2000 ASTM C1369-07

B.

Design Design Steel Standard Hong Kong Code of Practice CP 118:1969 BS 8118-1:1991 BS 8118-2:1991 Title/Description Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2005 The structural use of aluminium Structural use of aluminium. Code of practice for design Structural use of aluminium. Specification for materials, workmanship and protection Code of practice for glazing for buildings
5

Aluminium

Glass

BS 6262:1982

BS 6262-1:2005 BS 6262-2:2005 BS 6262-3:2005 BS 6262-4:2005 BS 6262-6:2005 BS 6262-7:2005 AS 1288-2006 AS/NS 2208-1996

Glazing for buildings. General methodology for the selection of glazing Glazing for buildings. Code of practice for energy, light and sound Glazing for buildings. Code of practice for fire, security and wind loading Glazing for buildings. Code of practice for safety related to human impact Glazing for buildings. Code of practice for special applications Glazing for buildings. Code of practice for the provision of information Australian Standard: Glass in Buildings Selection and Installation Safety Glazing Materials in Buildings

CAN/CGSB-12.20-M89 Structural Design of Glass for Buildings Construction Ministry Covering the design for external Notice No. 109 (Japan) claddings/roofing against wind pressure Safety Design Guideline Issued under the Construction Housing Guidance Notice 116 dated 315.86 on Glass Opening (Japan). This guideline concerns with safety design against human impact. Japanese Architectural Standard Specification 17 for Glazing Work (JASS 17) BS 5357:2007 BS 5516-1:2004 Code of practice for installation and application of security glazing Patent glazing and sloping glazing for buildings. Code of practice for design and installation of sloping and vertical patent glazing Patent glazing and sloping glazing for buildings. Code of practice for sloping glazing

BS 5516-2:2004

BS 5544:1978(2006) BS 6206:1981(2007)

Specification for anti-bandit glazing (glazing resistant to manual attack) Specification for impact performance requirements for flat safety glass and safety plastics for use in buildings Windows doors and rooflights. Design for safety in use and during cleaning of windows, including door-height windows and roof windows. Code of practice

BS 8213-1:2004

Structural Use of Glass Published by the Institution of Structural Engineers, UK in Buildings ASTM E1300 - 07e1 Federal Standard CFR 1201 Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings 16 Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials as published in Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), USA Glass Design for Sloped Glazing, USA Structural Design Guidelines Aluminium Framed Skylights, USA for

AAMA General References AAMA AAMA BS 8200: 1985

Structural Sealant Glazing Systems (A Design Guide), USA Code of practice for design of nonloadbearing external vertical enclosures of buildings Standard practice for periodic inspection of building facades for unsafe conditions

ASTM E2270-03

C.

Testing Standard AS/NZS 4284: 2008 ASTM E283-04 Title/Description Testing of Building Facades Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences
7

Testing Curtain Wall, Window, Window wall

Across the Specimen ASTM E330-02 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Glass in Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors under the Influence of Uniform Static Loads by Destructive Method Standard Test Method for Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors for Water Penetration using Dynamic Pressure Specification for Field Check of Metal Shop Fronts, Curtain Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage Specifications for Field Check of Water and Air Leakage through Installed Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Air Pressure Difference Specification for impact performance requirements for flat safety glass and safety plastics for use in buildings Building and construction sealants: Methods of test for homogeneity, relative density and penetration Methods of test for seepage, staining, shrinkage, shelf life and paintability Methods of test for application life, skinning properties and tack-free time Method of test for adhesion in peel
8

ASTM E331-00

ASTM E547-00

ASTM E997-01

AAMA 501.1

AAMA 501.2

AAMA 501.3

Glass

BS 6206:1981(1994)

Sealant

BS 3712: Part 1:1991(2006) Part 2:1973(2006) Part 3:1974(2006) Part 4:1991(2006)

Anchors

BS 5080: Part 1:1993 Part 2:1986(1993)

Structural fixings in concrete and masonry: Method of test for tensile loading Method for determination of resistance to loading in shear

(Rev. 1/2009)

Appendix B (PNAP 106) (APP-37) Safety Test Curtain wall systems without a history of previously accepted test will be required to undergo a safety test to confirm that they will perform satisfactorily. The test shall be carried out on a specimen of at least one floor height and shall include the different features of the curtain wall system being used. The test may either be a cyclic test or static load test as described below. 2. The requirements and procedures for the two tests are: Cyclic test (a) The test is described in BS 5368: Part 3; (b) Table 1 shows the sequence and duration of the operation; (c) For the test preparation, p1 should be 0.5 p2; (d) For the repeated positive and negative pressure test, p2 should be the pressure obtained from the product of the total pressure coefficient Cp and the design wind pressure qz appropriate to that part of the building, determined in accordance with the Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong. The number of pressure pulses should not be less than 5; (e) For the safety test, the maximum required pressure p3 should be 1.25 p2; (f) The deformation test described in clause 9.1 of BS 5368: Part 3 may be omitted but the deflection limits of members specified in (g) below should be measured during the repeated positive and negative pressure tests;

(g) The glass should not break and the deflection of any structural element of the specimen should not exceed 1/180 of the span or 20mm, whichever is the less, during the repeated positive and negative pressure tests; and (h) The extent of recovery of deformation 15 minutes after the removal of the test load should be at least 95% and the specimen should not show any signs of separation, plastic deformation or deleterious effect.

Table 1 :

Sequence and Duration of Tests for both Positive and Negative Pressures Test Preparation 0-p1-0-p1-0-p1-0 Repeated Test 0-p2-0-p2-0-p2-0-p2-0-p2-0 Test Safety 0-p3-0

Test Pressure

Duration The period of transition from one pressure value to another should be not less than 1 second. The pressures are to be held at maximum or minimum values for at least 3 seconds. Static load test (a) The test load is to be 1.25 times the design wind pressure of the system and should be maintained for at least 15 minutes. The design wind pressure should not be less than the value obtained from the product of the total pressure coefficient Cp and the design wind pressure qz appropriate to that part of the building, determined in accordance with the Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong; (b) During the load test, the glass should not break and the deflection of any structural element of the specimen should not exceed 1/180 of the span or 20mm, whichever is the less; and (c) The extent of recovery of deformation 15 minutes after the removal of the test load should be at least 95% and the specimen should not show any signs of separation, plastic deformation or deleterious effect.

(6/2006)
2

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-38 107

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Bridges over Streets Buildings Ordinance section 31(1)

There are occasions when bridges may have to be constructed over streets. A bridge may link buildings which have integrated functions and/or associated interests, or may be required by the Director of Lands under the terms of the lease. 2. Where a bridge or associated highway structure is to be constructed wholly or partly within a private lot or gains support from or is connected to a building resting on a private lot, exemption under Buildings Ordinance section 31(1) may be given provided that : (a) the Building Authority is satisfied that the bridge -(i) (ii) (iii) is functionally necessary; is constructed in a suitable location and at an appropriate height; and is in the public interest.

In this respect, the Building Authority will take into account any advice given by the Director of Lands and the Director of Highways; and (b) the design of the bridge and any associated highway structures is acceptable to the Advisory Committee on the Appearance of Bridges and Associated Structures (ACABAS).

3. As part of the centralized processing system, the Building Authority will arrange for the relevant plans to be referred to ACABAS for examination via the relevant authority. In this connection, the building plans should include : (a) (b) drawings showing the general arrangement of the bridge; the elevations of all parts to be exposed to view together with either a perspective or axonometric view and sufficient information to illustrate the form, texture and colour treatment of the proposed bridge and associated structure; comprehensive photographs of the site (to be affixed to the plans); and in the case of footbridges, details of anticipated pedestrian flows (to be indicated on the plans) to justify the proposed width, design and location.

(c) (d)

Eight sets of building plans should be submitted for reference by each individual ACABAS member. /4.If.

- 2 4. If general building proposals are extensive, it would be more convenient to show all aspects of a proposed bridge (except structural calculations) on a separate drawing, or a separate set of drawings, to which cross-reference to the main building plans should be clearly made. This could then be treated as a separate submission and avoid delays in the building development. 5. In some cases, ACABAS may require the attendance of authorized persons (APs) and registered structural engineers (RSEs) at a meeting to facilitate comprehensive consideration of the proposals. The terms of reference of ACABAS is at Appendix A. If ACABAS does not find a design acceptable, the Building Authority may not allow the exemption requested. Any suggestions for improving a design, to be considered when re-submitting plans, will be passed on to APs and RSEs. 6. Where a bridge or associated highway structure of a free-standing type is to be constructed entirely on government land or over a public highway, ie outside a private lot, the structure is exempted from the provisions of the Buildings Ordinance. The Director of Highways is the competent authority for such structures. However, for administrative convenience, it has been agreed that BD should also co-ordinate. Plans should therefore be submitted to BD for referral to the Highways Department. 7. PNAP 92 on the subject of "Structural Design of Bridges and Associated Highway Structures" should be read in conjunction with this practice note.

----

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GR/CC/112 First issued November 1984 This revision September 1994 (AD/D) Index under : ACABAS Bridges Highway Structures

PNAP 107 Appendix A APP-38

Terms of Reference of Advisory Committee on the Appearance of Bridges and Associated Structures (ACABAS) The terms of reference of ACABAS are : (a) to enquire into the visual merits, general amenity value and related environmental factors of all proposals for bridges and associated structures over, under, on or adjacent to public roads in the Territory; to advise the Director of Highways on standards to be applied and procedures to be adopted to encourage an appropriately high level of aesthetic quality in the design of bridges and associated structures and to promulgate general guidance on such matters; to receive and scrutinize individual proposals at the preliminary design stage, to advise designers of their acceptability or otherwise and to make recommendations as deemed necessary; and to refer proposals to the Director of Highways where, after consideration by ACABAS, disagreement is found to be irreconcilable either -(i) in principle, because for instance a design is likely to result in disproportionate damage to sensitive historic, scenic, ecological or other environmental features; or in detail, because for instance the proposed layout, style or surface finishes are considered to be inappropriate,

(b)

(c)

(d)

(ii)

provided that, should the Director of Highways feel unable to arbitrate, or should the Department or other body responsible for the proposals so request, such disagreement may be referred to Policy Branch for a decision.

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-39 110

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Inspection and Copying of Plans and Documents Plans and other documents submitted to the Building Authority (BA) for the purposes of the Buildings Ordinance (BO) are public records. Provided that the copyright owners do not specifically deny access to the plans and documents and subject to paragraphs 2 to 13 below, the BA may, under section 36G of the BO, upon request and payment of the prescribed fee, permit the public to inspect and issue to the public copies of such building records. Criteria for permitting inspection and/or issue of copy of building records 2. Applications for inspection and issue of certified true copies and/or noncertified copies of approved plans, related documents and Buildings Department (BD) Forms should be made in accordance with paragraphs 6 to 13 below. In considering these applications, the BA is obliged to take into account the provisions of the Personal Data (Privacy) Ordinance (Cap 486), the Copyright Ordinance (Cap 528) (CO), the Code on Access to Information and the obligation to confidence. 3. Under the obligation to confidence, the BA will not permit inspection or issue copies of any plans or documents of building projects, which are submitted to him for the purpose of the BO, until the subject works have been completed. The building records that may be inspected by or issued with copies to the public are therefore confined to the latest approved plans, structural calculations and related documents of completed building projects. 4. The BA may only permit inspection or issue of copies of the plans and documents for the purpose of facilitating the ascertaining by the applicant of the following matters: (a) matters relating to the construction of any building or the carrying of any building works or street works; (b) whether a building, building works or street works have been completed or carried out in compliance with the provisions of the BO or any other enactment; and matters other than those stipulated in items (a) & (b) above that the BA considers appropriate for the building records concerned to be made available for inspection and issue of copies in the interest of the public.

(c)

The applicant should make a declaration confirming the aforesaid matter(s). /5. ..

-25. Applications for inspection or issue of copies of building records for matter(s) stipulated in paragraph 4(c) above may only be considered if justified with relevant special circumstances, or if it is accompanied by an authorization from the copyright owner of the plans or documents with a positive statement that he is the owner of the copyright. Building Information Centre (BIC) 6. The BIC of BD provides services for the inspection and copying of the building records. Applicants can obtain such services through either attending the BIC in person or gaining access to BDs Building Records Access and Viewing On-line (BRAVO) system via the internet. Attending the BIC in person 7. Applicants may attend the BIC in person to inspect and obtain copies of building records. Applications for mere inspection of approved plans and other documents should be made in the standard form, Form BIC-1. When the plans or documents are retrieved, inspection will be arranged in the BIC during office hours by appointment. BD pledges to produce the electronic records available for viewing within 3 working days upon receipt of the application. If electronic records are not available, paper or microfilm records, if available as the case may be, will be made available for viewing. Care should be exercised in handling these paper and microfilm records so as to avoid damage or disturbance to their order in the file bundles. An applicant, who wishes to obtain hard copies of plans or documents, should immediately after he has inspected and identified the plans or documents to be copied, apply for the issue of copies using the standard form, Form BIC-2. 8. An applicant may also opt for the One-Stop Service and use the standard form, Form BIC-3, in which case BD staff would identify the plans or documents in the subject files for copying on behalf of the applicant and prepare the requested hard copies. 9. Applications for hard copies of occupation permits (OP) should be made in the standard form, Form BD 25. In completing the form, an applicant should ensure that detailed particulars of the subject building such as the lot number and address are accurate for the identification of the OP being requested. Access to BRAVO system via the Internet 10. An applicant can inspect and/or make request for issue of hard copies of the building records via the BRAVO system, but the applicant should register as a User before he is allowed to do so. Application for registration as a User can be made in the standard form, Form BIC-BRAVO 1. Upon successful registration, the User account login name and assigned password would be sent to the applicant by registered mail. /11. ..

-311. Upon payment of the prescribed fee, the applicant can inspect and/or make request for the issue of hard copies of plans and documents through the Internet. The requested copies are to be collected at the BIC. Fees and Forms 12. Fees as prescribed in Regulation 42 of the Building (Administration) Regulations will be charged for the inspection and/or copying services. 13. The standard application forms, Form BIC-1, Form BIC-2, Form BIC-3, Form BIC-BRAVO 1 and Form BD25 can be downloaded from BDs website (www.bd.gov.hk). Applicants may submit these standard forms either by mail, email (enquiry@bd.gov.hk), fax or in person. Enquiries on applications for inspection and/or copying services may be made to the BIC at telephone no. 2626 1207 or through fax (for matters related to BRAVO: fax no. 2625 0351, for other matters: fax no. 2625 4367). Copyright issues arising from Change of Authorized Person/Registered Structural Engineer/Registered Geotechnical Engineer (AP/RSE/RGE) 14. Plans of buildings are protected as copyright artistic works under the CO. The concern about copyright may arise when there is a change of AP/RSE/RGE during the course of works, and the new AP/RSE/RGE wishes to use the approved plans of the resigned AP/RSE/RGE to build and/or to make amendments. In such cases, the onus is on the new AP/RSE/RGE to ensure that he/she has properly obtained the consent of the copyright owner(s) to use the approved plans of the resigned AP/RSE/RGE; otherwise, the new AP/RSE/RGE may infringe the copyright. Please note that the aforementioned copyright issues are by no means exhaustive in covering different aspects of copyright issues comprehensively. There are other aspects of copyright which need to be observed under the CO in order to relieve liability for copyright infringement. You should enlist the expertise of your legal advisor as necessary.

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/6-5/1 First issue : February 1985 Last revision : January 2005 This revision : January 2009 (AD/Sup) Index under

(Generally revamped and all appendices deleted)

: BD Records Access to and Copying of Inspection of Plans and Documents Copying of Plans and Documents Building Records Access and Viewing On-line (BRAVO)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-40 111

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Hotel Development

Building (Planning) Regulation (B(P)Reg) 23A, which came into operation on 1 November 2000, provides the Building Authority (BA) with a discretionary power to treat a hotel building or the hotel part of a building as a non-domestic building for site coverage as well as plot ratio purposes and to disregard certain supporting facilities together with the setting down and picking up areas for hotel users from gross floor area calculations. 2. This practice note sets out the factors that the BA will take into consideration, for the purposes of B(P)Reg 23A(2) & (3), in deciding whether a hotel proposal will be accorded with the treatment detailed in the identified regulation. 3. For hotels to qualify for the treatment under B(P)Reg 23A, the BA will consider the following : (a) whether the site itself or the site relative to its neighbourhood is suitable for hotel development; (b) whether basic facilities such as reception counter, storerooms for linen, administration office, staff toilets for the operation of the hotel and facilities ancillary to the functions of a hotel (eg dining, entertainment and, commensurate with hotel patronage, shopping facilities) are provided; whether the whole building or the portion of the building intended for use as a hotel is provided with a central air-conditioning system and a centralized hot water supply system; and whether there is evidence indicating that the hotel building or the hotel part of the building when completed will be operated as a licensed hotel under the Hotel and Guesthouse Accommodation Ordinance (Cap. 349).

(c)

(d)

4. For the purpose of para 3(a), when considering whether a site is suitable for hotel development, the BA will take into account, inter alia, the following aspects: (a) the predominant nature and character of the surrounding land uses. In general, a site will be taken as suitable if it is permitted to be developed as a hotel under an outline zoning plan (OZP), either permitted under Column 1 of the Notes for the OZP or has obtained permission from the Town Planning Board through an application under section 16 of the Town Planning Ordinance (Cap 131); / (b) whether

-2-

(b)

whether the scale of a hotel development is compatible with the surrounding developments. In this respect, the BA will take into account the development intensity of the proposed hotel and compare it with the permitted development intensity of surrounding developments (under the OZP, the lease conditions or the Building (Planning) Regulations); whether an adequate number and width of streets are available to serve the proposed hotel and to cope with the additional vehicular and pedestrian traffic generated; and whether any necessary transport, parking, loading and unloading facilities for hotel use would be provided.

(c)

(d)

5. Confirmation by a hotel operator that he has been appointed to operate the proposed hotel building upon completion may be accepted as evidence for the purpose of para. 3(d). 6. The BA acknowledges that requirements for the basic and ancillary facilities described in paragraph 3(b) above as well as transport facilities mentioned in paragraph 4(d) above may vary according to the types of hotels in terms of their size and the number of rooms. The BA will take into consideration the special circumstances of each case in evaluating the requirements on a case-by-case basis. 7. For necessary transport, parking, loading and unloading facilities for hotel use in paragraph 4(d) above, the BA will take into account Transport Department's assessment on the traffic impact, vehicle loading, unloading and parking requirements having regard to the size, location and traffic conditions of each site. For hotels having 100 or more guestrooms, provisions in accordance with the Hong Kong Planning Standards & Guidelines should normally be provided in respect of parking and loading/unloading facilities. 8. Change of use of existing buildings into hotel use will also be assessed based on the above factors for consideration under B(P)Reg 23A. 9. For the purpose of disregarding any floor space used for provision of supporting facilities that are unique and integral to the normal operation of the hotel under B(P)Reg 23A(3)(b), the BA must be satisfied that the facilities comply with the following criteria : (a) (b) (c) their size is reasonable, their location practical and their design genuine to serve the intended purpose; they are accessible to hotel staff only; and abuse of use is unlikely. / Unless

-3-

Unless there are strong justifications, the BA would not expect the gross floor area of such facilities to exceed 5% of the total gross floor area for the hotel in normal circumstances. For the avoidance of doubt, offices for the administration and management of the hotel are not considered as unique supporting facilities for the purpose of B(P)Reg23A(3)(b)(iv). 10. Attention is drawn to the sanctions set out in B(P)Reg 23A(8) and (9). In this regard, Buildings Department, with advice from the Licensing Authority, has put in place a monitoring system and will take action under the aforesaid provisions if any unauthorized change of use is identified. 11. The provisions of B(P)Reg 23A apply to bona fide hotels only, and do not apply to service apartments.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GR/CC/278 BD GP/BL/P/22 (VII) First issue February 1985 Last revision November 2002 This revision August 2004 (AD/NB1) (Para. 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9 & 10 amended, para. 6 & 7 added and previous para. 10 deleted) Index under : Hotel concessions Hotel development

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-41 112

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Buildings to be Planned for Use by Persons with a Disability Building (Planning) Regulation 72 Pursuant to section 84 of the Disability Discrimination Ordinance (Cap 487), the Building Authority (BA), as a public authority which has the power to approve building works, shall not approve plans for a new building or for the alterations or additions to an existing building unless the person seeking approval satisfies the BA that such access as is reasonable in the circumstance to the building or premises will be provided for persons with a disability. The Building (Planning) Regulations also require certain categories of buildings to be planned for use by persons with a disability. All authorized persons and registered structural engineers shall make the necessary provisions and incorporate the facilities for persons with a disability in a building, at the design stage of the project, to comply with the legislation. Relevant Building Regulations 2. The regulations stipulating requirements for buildings to be planned for use by persons with a disability include : Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(m) Building (Planning) Regulation 2(1) : Building (Planning) Regulation 39(3)(e) Building (Planning) Regulation 72 and the THIRD SCHEDULE Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 61(3) Further guidance is given in the Design Manual: Barrier Free Access 2008. Application of Building (Planning) Regulation 72 3. The Building (Planning) (Amendment) Regulation 2008 (the Amendment Regulation) introduced, inter alia, a new THIRD SCHEDULE setting out the revised requirements for the provision of facilities in certain categories of buildings to provide for better access to and use of such buildings and their facilities by persons with a disability. The Amendment Regulation will come into operation on 1 December 2008, and its application will be governed by the provision of section 39(2) of the Buildings Ordinance. 4. Part 4 of the THIRD SCHEDULE to the Building (Planning) Regulations identifies those categories of buildings (including domestic, non-domestic and composite buildings) where limited facilities for persons with a disability are to be provided under Building (Planning) Regulation 72. Save for those buildings which are exempted under Building (Planning) Regulation 72(4), all other buildings not included in Part 4 of the THIRD SCHEDULE are required to comply fully with the regulations mentioned in paragraph 2. Exemption .. disability

-2Exemption or Deviation from Building (Planning) Regulation 72 5. In an application for approval of plans for a new building or for the alterations/additions to an existing building, access and facilities for persons with a disability should be clearly shown on the submitted plans. 6. There are occasions where proposals for building development cannot meet the full requirements for access and facilities for persons with a disability stipulated in the Building Regulations. Exemption or deviation from the regulations will be considered by the BA on individual merits of each case. The BA is prepared to consider applications to vary the requirements provided that the BA is satisfied that special circumstances exist. Examples of special circumstances include the physical location and immediate environs of a development site render compliance with the legislation impracticable or where such provisions would impose unjustifiable hardship on the applicant or any other person. The circumstances under which the BA may consider such applications are outlined in AppendixA. Alteration and Addition Submissions 7. Where alteration and addition works are proposed to an existing building without initial access for persons with a disability, all practical measures should be taken to provide suitable access and facilities for persons with a disability. Applications for exemption citing the prevailing special circumstances would be considered on a case by case basis. Advisory Committee on Barrier Free Access (ACBFA) 8. In considering applications for exemption or deviation from the regulations, the BA has established an advisory committee namely Advisory Committee on Barrier Free Access (ACBFA) to provide a forum for the deliberation and discussion of the proposals. The BA will take into account the advice given by ACBFA in making decisions on the applications. The terms of reference and membership of ACBFA are at Appendix B. Withdrawal of PNAP 247 9. PNAP 247 on Design Manual : Barrier Free Access 1997 is withdrawn with effect from 1 December 2008.

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/25(IX) First issue April 1985 Last revision December 2001 This revision November 2008 (AD/NB1) generally revised, Appendices A & B amended and paras. 3 & 9 added Index under : B(P)R 72 - Buildings for Persons with a Disability Persons with a disability - Buildings to be Planned for Use by

Building (Planning) Regulation 72

Appendix A (PNAP 112) (APP-41)

Special Circumstances that may be Acceptable to the Building Authority for Applications to Vary Provisions 1. Deviation from the requirements may be considered in the circumstances where the provision of a passenger lift to the top floor cannot be provided due to a height restriction imposed by the Hong Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions) Ordinance, Cap 301. In such cases, the Building Authority (BA) will be satisfied with the design of the building in respect of the non-provision within the top floor of facilities for persons with a disability. The exception being cases where the top floor has communal facilities such as canteens and recreation rooms. 2. For alterations and additions works to existing buildings where initial access for persons with a disability is not provided, the BA would be satisfied with the design of the building in respect of the non-provision of facilities for persons with locomotory disabilities in cases where the provision of a ramp access would involve alteration works to the common parts of a building and where the applicant can demonstrate that : the applicant has no control over the area; consent from co-owners or owners' corporation to permit the carrying out of the alteration works to the common parts of the building is declined or cannot be obtained; and where ground beam is involved, there is spatial or structural constraint.

(Rev.11/2008)

Appendix B (PNAP 112) (APP-41) Advisory Committee on Barrier Free Access (ACBFA) Terms of Reference The terms of reference of ACBFA are to offer advice to the Building Authority in relation to plans submitted for a new building or for alteration and addition to an existing building as to whether reasonable access and facilities will be provided in the building for persons with a disability. In arriving at such an advice, the Committee should consider the following : the standards and requirements contained in Building (Planning) Regulation 72, the Design Manual - Barrier Free Access 2008 and any other relevant statutory provisions; whether it is practicable to provide such access within the curtilage of the building, bearing in mind the physical location and immediate environs of the building; and whether providing such access would impose unjustifiable hardship on the person seeking approval or any other person.

Membership

The membership of ACBFA is as follows : Chairman Members : Assistant Director/New Buildings 1, Buildings Department : A representative of the Commissioner for Rehabilitation A representative of the Director of Architectural Services A representative (authorized person) appointed by the Director of Buildings A lay member appointed by the Director of Buildings Three representatives nominated by the Commissioner for Rehabilitation representing the physically handicapped, visually impaired and hearing impaired respectively Technical Secretary/Building, Buildings Department Secretary : Building Surveyor/Technical Services 1, Buildings Department

In attendance : The Senior Building Surveyor or Building Surveyor of the case (Rev.11/2008)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-42 116

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Amenity Features

Amenity features are loosely defined as those elements of design that whilst not statutory requirements are desirable to improve the standard and quality of a building or a development project. Provision of such features enhances the sense of care and pride for buildings, thereby inducing proper maintenance and repair. To encourage these features, the Building Authority is prepared to consider modification and exemption, under the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations, for the provision of new amenities in both new developments and existing buildings. 2. To justify favourable consideration for modification or exemption, such proposals should meet one or a combination of the following objectives : (a) (b) (c) (d) encouraging efficient and effective building management; enhancing the quality of life for residents and users; obviating the desire or temptation for unauthorized building works; and improving environmental compatibility with the neighbourhood.

3. It is not possible to lay down hard and fast rules. Applications would be considered on their individual merits and relevance to a particular building and its users. 4. For large schemes or innovative designs, it is advisable prior to formal submission to hold a preliminary discussion with the Buildings Department. If necessary, a proposal will be the subject of consultation with the Lands and the Planning Departments. The intention is that Buildings, Lands and Planning Departments would consider a proposal on similar grounds and in its entirety : factors such as the preservation of trees, landscape and antiquities would be regarded as positive contributions. 5. Some examples of amenity features are given below.

Air-conditioning 6. For residential buildings, wall boxes or platforms in reinforced concrete or other suitable material may be constructed as a permanent feature, even over streets, and as such may be excluded from site coverage considerations (see PNAP 68). For commercial and industrial buildings, a centralized air-conditioning system should be provided or suitable internal areas should be set aside for this purpose at the design stage. Allowance should be made for adequate ducting and trunking, recesses, set-backs, open yards or other suitable spaces at or above floor levels where air-conditioning package units (or other plant and accessories) can be accommodated without the need to project over streets. /7. .

-2-

7. In accordance with Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(b), any floor space genuinely intended for air-conditioning may be excluded from gross floor area calculations. The following provisions would be considered reasonable in the absence of the detailed design layout of the plants : (a) (b) air-conditioning plant rooms not exceeding 1% of the total gross floor area of a building; or air handling units, not exceeding 4% of the total gross floor area of each floor on which they are situated.

If it is intended to exceed these percentages or where an air-conditioning room is provided in each domestic unit, full justification must be submitted. In such cases, the advice of the Director of Electrical and Mechanical Services would be sought during processing. 8. If an unusually extensive system is proposed for exclusion from gross floor area calculations, then it should be shown in detail on the approved plans and be operational before an application for occupation permit is made. 9. In all cases where buildings will be or are likely to be air-conditioned, careful consideration should be given to the location of the exhaust of the plant and the need to provide a disposal system for the condensation from the plant to prevent causing nuisance to adjoining occupants and the public. Security Gates 10. As long as they do not obstruct the means of escape from a building and have locks openable from the inside without keys, security gates may be installed prior to the issue of an occupation permit or may be indicated on floor plans in suitable positions for future installation. Suitable positions are considered to be : (a) (b) (c) entrances to individual units; main staircase exits from buildings; and in a composite building, between the domestic part and the commercial part. (In this case, the gate would be across an exit route, preferably in a lobby, and should be designed to prevent the entry of non-residents into the domestic part of the building.) Counters, Kiosks, Offices, Stores, Guard Rooms, and Lavatories for Watchmen and Management Staff 11. Such provision enhances standards of control and maintenance of buildings. The Building Authority will consider favourably on application for exemption from gross floor area calculations where such provision meets the following criteria : /(a).

-3-

(a) (b)

it should not be excessive in size; and it should be located in a common area or designated as a common area in a Deed of Mutual Covenant to prevent abuse.

Miniature Logistic Service Room 12. Small logistic service room in a multi-storey residential building allows the temporary storage of delivered goods under the custody of the management staff while the occupants are out. Such facility not only improves security but also alleviates fire hazard as otherwise the goods would be left unattended in the common lobby or staircase. Where such provision is provided in accordance with the following criteria, the Building Authority (BA) will favourably consider application for exemption of such rooms from GFA calculation : (a) (b) Mail Room 13. Mail rooms for large commercial and industrial buildings are facilities which enhance the serviceability of the buildings. The BA will consider favourably an application for exemption from gross floor area calculations where the provision of a mail room meets the following criteria : (a) (b) it should not be excessive in size; it should be endorsed by Postmaster General (in this connection an additional set of plans should be submitted for consideration by Postmaster General); it should be located in a common area or designated as a common area in a Deed of Mutual Covenant to prevent abuse; and the building is centrally managed. For a typical mail room, (a) (b) there should be a small public area for tenants to enter and collect their items from the lockable boxes; there should be a small counter for postmen to sort mail into lockable mail boxes; /(c) .. The room is not excessive in size. As a general guide, a room size of 8 m2 may be allowed for a block size of 240 flats. The room should be located in the common area adjacent to the management office or guard post.

(c)

(d) 14.

-4-

(c) (d) -----

a stamp vending machine and a posting box are usually provided in the mail room for the convenience of the tenants; and it is preferably provided at ground floor or basement level. A typical mail room detail is at Appendix A for attention.

Building Service Facilities 15. Projections 16. These are generally covered in PNAP 68 and canopies are specifically dealt with in PNAP 173. 17. For individual domestic units, clothes-drying racks, anti-burglar bars and small window hoods designed to provide protection from the elements and falling objects would not have any site coverage or plot ratio implications. Similarly, any projections that improve the energy efficiency of a building, including enhanced wall thicknesses would also be disregarded for the purposes of site coverage and plot ratio. Horizontal Screens 18. In open areas frequently used by occupants at ground floors or podium floors; or roof gardens/play areas at podium floor around the perimeter of a domestic tower, horizontal screens may be permitted to provide protection against inclement weather and falling objects subject to the following conditions: (a) (b) (c) the horizontal screens will not materially affect the lighting and ventilation of the areas or nearby buildings; the areas are designated as common area in the Deed of Mutual Covenant; and the areas do not form part of any commercial premises. These are generally covered in PNAP 13.

19. In assessing the acceptability of the width of the horizontal screens, the BA will take into consideration the population using the facility, the size of the development and the design of the screens. Prestige Entrances 20. These are generally covered in PNAP 13. The BA aims to adopt a liberal attitude towards provision of such features. However, care must be taken in the design to ensure that future occupants would maintain the integrity of protected lobbies and corridors related to means of escape and fireman's lifts. /Recreational ..

-5-

Recreational Facilities 21. The provision of podium roof gardens and play areas is encouraged. Where these amenities occur under and within the perimeter of a domestic tower, a modification of Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(a) would be granted, provided the area is open in design and not encumbered with structural elements. For the avoidance of doubt, it is clarified that staircases or lift shafts that pass through such floors may be discounted from gross floor area considerations, provided they are not connected with an entrance to the building from outside the podium level or do not serve other accountable accommodation at that level. 22. Certain other recreational facilities such as squash courts, gymnasiums, indoor swimming pools, sauna facilities, function rooms (for either active or passive recreational activities) are often clearly identifiable with a particular development and aim to benefit the residents and occupiers generally. These can be considered for exclusion from gross floor area calculations by modification of Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(a) on a case-by-case basis. 23. This concession does not apply to substantial luxury clubs with restaurants and other facilities obviously meant for an exclusive membership and commercial takings, rather than for the general benefit of residents and occupiers. Satellite Dishes 24. These are becoming quite common nowadays being installed in response to public demand. It would seem appropriate therefore to make provision at the design stage of a building to accommodate such a feature. 25. Such a provision could be by way of cast-in-situ mounting blocks and/or built-in-fixing bolts together with an appropriate increase of the design load of the structural elements to accommodate the weight of the dish. Concluding Observations 26. The BA is open to suggestions for consideration as amenities in the context of this practice note.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

-6-

Ref. : BD GP/BORD/48 BD GP/BREG/P/9 (IV) First issue October 1985 Last revision September 2000 This revision February 2003 (AD/NB1) - paras. 1, 7 and 9 amended Index under : Air Conditioning Amenity Features Recreational Facilities

(APP-42)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-43 117

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Licensing of Child Care Centres, Kindergartens and Restaurants When applications are made to the licensing authorities in respect of child care centres, kindergartens and restaurants, the plans are referred to the Buildings Department (BD) for comments on structural safety and means of escape. The guidelines within BD may be of interest to authorized persons (APs) advising clients. Child Care Centres and Kindergartens 2. Child care centres and kindergartens may not be located above G/F level in a non-purpose built building unless certain conditions are fulfilled. Where the premises is located above G/F, the following guidelines apply: Location Acceptable with conditions Conditions

(a) in composite buildings with (1) Premises shall conform to not more than two commercial general standards of the Code of Practice for Means of floors above G/F Escape. (b) in composite buildings with three or more commercial (2) Child care centre is subject to the 12m and 24m maximum floors where the child care height rule under Child Care centre or kindergarten itself Centre Regulation 19. occupies one or more entire commercial floors and not more than two floors above (3) Kindergarten is subject to the 24m maximum height rule G/F remain commercial under Education Regulation 7. (c) in institutional buildings (d) in high-rise domestic buildings (e) in wholly buildings commercial (4) In addition to conditions (1), (2) & (3), two independent means of escape are provided (f) in composite buildings with for the exclusive use of the three or more commercial occupants of the centre or floors above G/F other than kindergarten. (b) (g) in single staircase buildings (5) In addition to conditions (1), other than (h) and (i) (2), & (3), two extra staircases must be provided to the premises to be licensed and the single staircase serving the whole building must be sealed off therefrom. /Acceptable ....

- 2 -

Acceptable without conditions

Location Conditions (h) in single-family domestic Unconditional buildings not exceeding three main storeys (i) in New Territories "exempted" buildings

Unless applications comply with these guidelines, intended change in use under Buildings Ordinance section 25 will be prohibited. 3. Child Care Centres or kindergartens should not be located in an industrial building. They are considered incompatible uses both from a fire-fighting and town planning point of view. Restaurants (a) Certification

4. When commissioned for projects involving restaurant licence applications, authorized persons (APs) and Registered Structural Engineers (RSEs) may be required to certify direct to the licensing authority that certain categories of building safety requirements imposed by the Buildings Department have been fully complied with. Under such circumstances, APs and RSEs have an important role to play in supervising the works and ensuring the safety of restaurant patrons and employees. Certificates and structural justifications submitted direct to the licensing authorities are audited by BD and appropriate action will be taken in cases involving negligence and/or misconduct. (b) Unauthorized Building Works

5. BD also advises the licensing authorities of the existence of any unauthorized building works (UBW) which constitute a risk to the safety of restaurant patrons and employees. In such cases, the licensing authorities are advised to reject the licence applications until the UBWs are removed or rectified. If building works which are not exempted under section 41 of the Buildings Ordinance are proposed, the attention of the building owners should be drawn to the contents of PNAP 125 regarding the consequences of carrying out such works without having first obtained the approval and consent of the Building Authority.

/(c) Discharge ....

- 3 (c) Discharge Value

6. Commercial buildings are often designed as shops or offices and later changed to restaurant use. In these cases, any surplus discharge capacity of the staircases in a building may have been utilised by other existing restaurants established after the issue of the occupation permit. These circumstances can render a proposed additional restaurant unacceptable in terms of the permitted discharge value. In preparing plans for alteration and addition, it should be noted therefore that existing restaurants should be taken into consideration when calculating discharge values of the staircases and exit routes. (d) Structural Assessment

-----

7. Floors proposed for restaurant use should be checked to demonstrate adequate structural capacity to safely sustain the loads caused by the floor slab selfweight, finishes, permanent partitions, any other permanent construction, any equipment/plant proposed and the minimum imposed load in accordance with the Building (Construction) Regulations. Supporting structural calculations should contain relevant particulars of all proposed equipment/plant and permanent construction as listed in Appendix A.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/LIC/3 First issued December 1985 This revision August 1996 (AD/S) Index under : Child Care Centres - licensing of Kindergartens - licensing of Licensing - Child Care Centres, Kindergartens and Restaurants Means of Escape in relation to Uses on Upper Floors Restaurants - licensing of Uses on Upper Floors - B(P)R 41(1)

PNAP 117 Appendix A APP-43

Required Particulars of Equipment/Plant and Permanent Construction

Equipment/plant and permanent construction commonly proposed for restaurants are : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) raised screeds in kitchens, stages and lavatories etc. new brickwalls or solid partitions fish tanks large kitchen equipment, walk-in freezers etc. large centralized air-conditioning units.

2. With reference to raised screeds in item (a) above, the authorized person or registered structural engineer should either confirm that the screed was laid under his supervision or he should carry out a core test in respect of the material, type, density and thickness to ensure compatibility with any supporting calculation. 3. With regard to the items (b) to (e) above, the type, size, thickness and density of the constructional materials and the manufacturers catalogue and specification of the plant and equipment should be clearly given, in order to demonstrate the correct specific/operating weight used in the checking calculation.

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers BUILDINGS ORDINANCE OFFICE

APP-44 118

PRACTICE NOTE FOR AUTHORIZED PERSONS AND REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS

Streets in relation to Site Area Building (Planning) Regulation 23(2)(a) When developing large areas of land it is often necessary to provide new streets, and in some circumstances it is realized that this can have an inhibiting effect upon planning considerations. This particularly applies when the new streets will enclose or otherwise isolate areas of land so that the original site is divided into several separate sites. 2. In most such cases each new site is usually developed separately to its maximum potential, and if any open space amenity areas or parks are provided these tend to be fragmented throughout the whole development project. If a developer did wish to provide one large open park, on an island site, the plot ratio potential would thereby be `lost', and this important factor can sometimes be a deterrent to what might be better planning. 3. There are, in the Buildings Ordinance, at present no explicit provisions which permit a `transfer' of plot ratio potential, such as in the park situation referred to above, and if such an arrangement was permitted there could often be inherent problems related to the inability under the Buildings Ordinance to prevent the park being subsequently developed with buildings, causing an excess of building mass in the neighbourhood and an overloading of the infrastructure. 4. In some cases, however, sites may be subject to effective planning controls in addition to the Buildings Ordinance, particularly in relation to enforceable lease control drawings, Master Layout Plans, and conditional permissions under Town Planning Ordinance section 16. Where these controls do exist, and a park is proposed on one site, consideration may be given to the special circumstances of generally improved planning in respect of any application submitted on Form 29 and possibly a higher plot ratio allowed on another site within a large development project, and consequential adjustments of other regulations, provided this does not significantly impair specific planning requirements. 5. Where such a higher plot ratio is allowed, with or without consequential adjustments, any subsequent change in the control drawings, Master Layout Plans, or Town Planning permission would naturally be opposed if this would negate the benefits of any permission granted on Form 30. (A.G. Eason) Building Authority Ref. : BLD(B) GP/BREG/P/11 First issued February 1986 This update January 1990 (GBS/D) Index under : B(P)R 23(2)(a) - Streets in relation to Site Area Site Area Streets in relation to Site Area

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-45 122

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Testing of Reinforcement for Concrete Buildings Ordinance section 17(1)6 empowers Building Authority to impose requirements for testing reinforcement when approving structural plans or consenting to the commencement of building works. 2. The purpose of such testing is to verify the specified properties of steel bars delivered to site. These verification tests are additional to the routine testing carried out by the manufacturer at the rolling mill. Authorized persons (APs) and registered structural engineers (RSEs) should ensure that specimens are selected at random from batches of steel reinforcement delivered to site. Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Bars 3. With effect from 15 April 1996, the new Construction Standard CS2:1995 (CS2) on carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete will be adopted by the Buildings Department as an acceptable standard for compliance with the requirements in the Building (Construction) Regulations. This Standard incorporates the full product standard for such steel bars and the requirements for classification and certification of reinforcement by Quality Assured Stockists (QA Stockists) and the requirements for the testing of reinforcement by the end purchaser. The Standard is available for sale at the Government Publication Centre. The main features of CS2 are given in Appendix A. 4. The verification tests imposed under Buildings Ordinance section 17(1)6 shall be the purchasers tests referred to in CS2:1995 and shall be performed by a Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) accredited laboratory. 5. (a) The test report should include the following information : Classification and Certification by QA Stockists for Class 1, Class 2 and Class 3 reinforcement; Full description of test specimens including name of steel manufacturer, country of origin, grade and size as stated by the person submitting them for testing; Sketch of pattern of deformation and mill marks; Identification of the batch and date of delivery to the site to which the test specimens relate; Measured mass and calculated effective cross-sectional area of test specimens; and /(f) Results ....

-----

(b)

(c) (d)

(e)

- 2 (f) Results of yield stress, tensile strength, elongation, bend and rebend tests if required.

Other Steel 6. For steel reinforcement other than carbon steel bars, every batch of steel delivered to the site should be tested to verify the mass, bend and tensile properties in accordance with the purchaser's tests specified in : (a) (b) BS 4482:1985 for hard drawn steel wire; and BS 4483:1985 for steel fabric.

7. Furthermore, APs and RSEs should ensure that sufficient routine inspection and testing have been carried out by the manufacturer and that a mill certificate is included with the test reports. HOKLAS Endorsed Certificates 8. All verification tests shall be carried out by testing laboratories accredited by HOKLAS. To allow time for the laboratories and HOKLAS to process the applications for CS2 accreditation, a six months transitional period is provided, i.e. up to 15 October 1996, certificates issued by the laboratories with HOKLAS accreditation on BS 4449 will still be accepted by the Buildings Department for the purpose of performing purchasers tests in accordance with CS2. As from 16 October 1996, only the certificates issued by the laboratories with HOKLAS accreditation on CS2 will be accepted by this Department.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/3 First issued December 1986 This revision March 1996 (AD/SE) - CS2 incorporated Index under : Construction Standard CS2 Reinforcement Testing Testing of Reinforcement for Concrete

PNAP 122 Appendix A APP-45 The Main Features of Construction Standard CS2:1995

1.

Under this Standard the QA Stockist is to receive the bulk shipments of reinforcement, to check the manufacturers documentation against the reinforcement supplied, and eventually dispatch the reinforcement to site clearly classified Class 1, Class 2 or Class 3 as appropriate; Reinforcement produced by Quality Assured Manufacturers and handled by a QA Stockist will be classified either Class 1 - fully lot traceable, or Class 2 - not lot traceable. Reinforcement produced by non Quality Assured manufacturers will be classified Class 3. Reinforcement not handled through a QA Stockist will also be classified Class 3 irrespective of whether it is quality assured material or not; A series of purchasers tests is required to be carried out on all reinforcement delivered to site before it is used in the construction work. The frequency of testing will depend on the classification of the reinforcement. For details of purchasers testing, please see Section 5 of CS2; The long term objective is to rely on the third party certification of product conformity based on testing and continuous product surveillance and on the quality assurance of the stockists. The purchaser would know the quality of the reinforcement being received and would not need to carry out further testing for quality assured reinforcement. However, in the initial stage of introducing this scheme, the end purchaser testing of quality assured reinforcement should continue; and The Public Works Central Laboratory (PWCL) will monitor the results of the end purchasers tests over a period of two years, after which a review of the purchaser testing requirements will be undertaken. In order to make the monitoring reviews meaningful, PWCL would only accept rebars for testing provided the bar patterns have been registered at PWCL.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Ref.: PNAP 122 First issued March 1996 (AD/SE)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers BUILDINGS ORDINANCE OFFICE PRACTICE NOTE FOR AUTHORIZED PERSONS AND REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS

APP-46 124

Pollution from Industrial Buildings Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 90 Buildings Ordinance sections 24 and 28 and Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 90 contain provisions which may be invoked by the Building Authority to tackle the problem of water pollution caused by the discharge of effluent from industrial buildings. 2. Following the issue of the first practice note on this subject in May 1987, more stringent measures have been taken in order to minimize the effects of untreated noxious effluent getting into drainage systems and causing pollution to water-courses and the sea. Such effluent can also seriously impair sewage treatment facilities or damage private or public drains and sewers. There is also the possibility of Government's drains and sewers being overloaded by industrial discharge or of workers being injured while repairing or maintaining drainage systems. 3. In addition to consulting the Environmental Protection Department in cases involving a single occupancy specialized industrial building where the industrial processes to be pursued are known and specific facilities can therefore be allowed for beforehand, the Building Authority will also pay particular attention to plans for 'flatted factory' development regarding general effluent treatment provisions. 4. It is therefore desirable for all authorized persons and registered structural engineers to seek from their clients information on the proposed industrial processes which the intended building occupants will pursue, and ensure that at drainage plan submission stage building uses are clearly stated and adequate provisions are made to treat any noxious effluent. Failure to provide this information may result in rejection of the drainage proposals under Buildings Ordinance section 16(1)(i). 5. In the case of 'flatted factory' development where multi-occupancy is to be expected, the assumption will be made that the industrial undertakings and places of work will normally discharge effluent of such volume or chemical composition as to call for the provision of drainage facilities other than those required under Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 5(1). Failure to make provision for future effluent discharge may lead to disapproval of the plans under Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 90. 6. For 'flatted factory' development, unless specific facilities are provided, each industrial unit should have an individual drainage outlet, adequately trapped, to receive treated trade effluent from that unit. This outlet must be connected to the foul water system and be of a size indicated below: Factory usable floor area less than 1,000 m2 more than 1,000 m2 Size of outlet 100 mm diameter 150 mm diameter minimum Contd/..

-2The size of the vertical foul water down pipe will depend upon the number of floors served and should generally be within the range of 150 - 300 mm diameter. These outlets must not be connected to any storm-water drainage system. The outlets can be temporarily sealed at floor level until required by occupants of the unit for the purpose of discharging treated effluent, the assumption being that any effluent identified in Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 90 will be treated by the occupants of the unit prior to being discharged into the outlet. ----7. The need to provide a petrol interceptor in areas used for the servicing and parking of vehicles is well known. Standard details of the petrol interceptor are attached for general information. The preferred contemporary practice regarding other types of industrial effluent and appropriate methods of treatment is not so standardized or so clear. In case of doubt it may be necessary to obtain the advice of consultants. 8. In addition to tackling the pollution problem at plans submission stage, it is also worth mentioning that more attention will be focused on illegal, insanitary and polluting drains and sewers in future. To this end a unit has already been set up in the Buildings Ordinance Office with specific responsibility for seeking out and dealing with polluting factories. It is in the interest of all concerned that timely steps are taken to protect our environment.

(A.W. Samson) Building Authority

Ref: BLD(B) GR/BREG/SF/2 First issued May 1987 This update March 1992 (GBS/D) (para. 7 amended and grease trap details deleted) Index under : B(SSFPDW&L)R 90 - Pollution from Industrial Buildings Effluent - noxious Pollution from Industrial Buildings

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-47 125

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Unauthorized Alterations and Additions Buildings Ordinance Section 14 There may be occasions when clients approach authorized persons or registered structural engineers to submit plans for building works already completed. This advises you on the action that the Building Authority (BA) would take if such plans were submitted. No Retrospective Approval 2. The BA has no powers to give retrospective approval or consent for building works already commenced, carried out or completed. Buildings Ordinance (BO) section 14(1) provides that no person shall commence or carry out any building works without having first obtained the approval and consent of the BA. BO section 42(5) further provides that the powers of exemption are not applicable to section 14. Powers of Disapproval 3. For plans of building works already completed, the BA's position under the BO is as follows : (a) The submission will be rejected under section 16(1)(a) as it is not a proposal for approval and consent prior to the commencement of works. The same will also be rejected under section 16(1)(c) because of the nature of the application in the Form BA 5 or BA 17, which relates to an application for building works to be carried out or for permission to erect respectively. It is not an application for approval and consent to structures already erected. Furthermore, if the submission is the subject of an effective demolition order, it will be rejected under section 16(1)(d) for contravening the said order.

(b)

(c)

/Advice ....

- 2 Advice to Clients 4. Should a client contemplate pursuing building works without first obtaining approval and consent, you should draw his attention to the need for prior approval of plans and consent for commencement. The client should be firmly advised that commencing or carrying out any building works without prior approval and consent may result in the BA : (a) (b) serving an order under the BO requiring inter alia the demolition of such building works; and prosecuting under the BO Part IV. On conviction, the offender could face a heavy fine and even a custodial sentence.

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority

Ref.: BD GP/BORD/18 BD GP/BOP/23 First issued July 1987 This revision January 1996 (AD/LM) Index under : BO s14 - Unauthorized Alterations & Additions Unauthorized Alterations & Additions - BO s14

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-48 131

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Requirements for Qualified Supervision of Structural Works, Foundation Works and Excavation Works Buildings Ordinance section 17 As the design and construction of buildings become more complex, it is necessary to exercise closer supervision during construction. Buildings Ordinance section 17 provides that conditions may be imposed when approval of plans or consent to commence building works is given, to require qualified supervision to be provided at certain stages of construction or for some particular operations. Examples are : (a) major excavation and foundation construction; (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) concreting; carrying out of compliance testing; prestressing operations including pre-tensioning, posttensioning, grouting and lock-off; fabrication, erection and examination of key structural steelwork elements on site; and carrying out of specialist building works.

2. The personnel assigned to supervise the works should possess adequate technical knowledge and experience relevant to the works and should be fully conversant also with the engineering basis upon which the works are designed. The authorized person, registered structural engineer, registered geotechnical engineer and registered contractor are required, under their respective duties stipulated in Buildings Ordinance section 4(3) and 9(3) and Building (Administration) Regulations 37 and 41, to ensure that qualified supervision is carried out properly. 3. The requirements for qualified supervision of geotechnical works are covered by PNAP 83. Ref. : BD GP/BORD/65 ( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

First issue June 1990 Last revision May 1994 (AD/SE) This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup) (Para 2 is amended to include RGE) Index under : BO s17 - Requirement for Qualified Supervision of Structural Works, Foundation Works and Excavation Works Supervision - Structural Works, Foundation Works and Excavation Works

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-49 132

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Introduction

Site Investigation and Ground Investigation

"Site investigation" ( ) is defined in s.2 of Building (Construction) Regulation as investigation of the physical characteristics of the site and includes documentary studies, site surveys and ground investigation. These works are carried out to obtain adequate geotechnical and other relevant data for the design and construction of building works such as foundation and site formation works. This practice note sets out the acceptable standards of site investigation in general and ground investigation, which constitutes a major part of site investigation, in particular. 2. In this practice note, the term "site investigation" covers a broad scope of investigation including the topography and history of the site. "Ground investigation" refers to actual surface or subsurface investigation by such methods as boreholes and test pits, including on-site and laboratory tests. Technical Guidance Documents 3. The Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO) Technical Guidance Note No.1 provides a list of technical guidance documents including GEOGUIDE 2 (Guide to Site Investigation) and GEOGUIDE 3 (Guide to Rock and Soil Descriptions), and other relevant documents currently used by the GEO as de facto geotechnical standards in Hong Kong. Site investigation carried out in accordance with the recommendations of these technical guidance documents will be deemed to meet the minimum acceptable standards. For the standards of carrying out ground investigation field works and the acceptance criteria of ground investigation works, reference should be made to the Code of Practice for Site Supervision. Registered Specialist Contractor (Ground Investigation Field Works Category) 4. Ground investigation field works include all site operations in ground investigation and exclude laboratory testing of samples and field density tests. Ground investigation field works have been designated, by notice in the gazette, as a category of specialized works. A sub-register of registered specialist contractors (ground investigation field works category)(the RSC(GIFW)) has been established in the register of specialist contractors, and all ground investigation field works are required to be carried out by the RSC(GIFW). Detailed scope of work and registration requirements of the RSC(GIFW) can be found in PNAP 214. Laboratory testing of samples obtained from site operations in ground investigation is beyond the jurisdiction of RSC(GIFW). Field density tests and all laboratory testing of samples obtained from the investigation are required to be carried out by laboratories which are accredited for carrying out the tests concerned, as outlined in PNAP 167. 5. The RSC(GIFW) are responsible for the carrying out of ground investigation field works mainly for the following purposes:

-2-

(a)

compiling a ground investigation report for submission to the Building Authority in support of a plan for approval under the Buildings Ordinance, including but not limited to, foundation plans, site formation plans, excavation and lateral support plans as prescribed under Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1) and 9; compiling the geotechnical assessment for submission under Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(ba) with a general building plan. The assessment should include a suitable plan showing the scope and extent of the proposed ground investigation.

(b)

6. It is the duty of the RSC(GIFW) to ensure all information in the ground investigation reports submitted to the Building Authority are correct even though some of the actual operations e.g. geophysical surveys, might have been carried out by others. All drillhole cores and samples obtained during ground investigation (other than those samples selected for testing) are to be kept in good conditions for inspection by staff of the Buildings Department, and if necessary the Geotechnical Engineering Office, until acknowledgement of the satisfactory completion of the site formation, foundation, or other related works has been given. Quality Supervision Requirements for Ground Investigation Field Works 7. The details of the quality supervision requirements for ground investigation field works and the related administrative procedures are provided in the Technical Memorandum for Supervision Plans and the Code of Practice for Site Supervision. 8. contractors. A practice note similar to this one has also been issued to all registered

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/1-150/10 First issue January 1990 Last revision January 2004 This revision February 2006 [AD/NB2 and Deputy Head of GEO (Island)] (Paragraph 3 amended, original paragraphs 4 to 6 and 10 to 22 and Appendices A to D deleted, paragraph 7 added.) Index under : Ground Investigation Ground Investigation Field Works Registered Specialist Contractor (Ground Investigation Field Works Category) Scheduled Areas Site Investigation

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-50 133

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Temporary Buildings - Building (Planning) Regulations 50-52 Within the provisions of Building (Planning) Regulations 50(1)(a)(i) and 50(1)(a)(ii), temporary buildings fall within one or both of the following categories : (a) (b) buildings required for a temporary purpose only; and buildings constructed of short-lived materials.

ALL provisions of the Buildings Ordinance (Cap. 123) and subsidiary legislation apply to them. Thus, as far as procedures are concerned, they are subject to approval and consent, supervision by an authorized person (AP) and/or a registered structural engineer (RSE), construction by a registered contractor, certification of completion and the issue of a temporary occupation permit. 2. However, the following two aspects covered in the Building (Planning) Regulations for temporary buildings take precedence over similar provisions in the Ordinance or Building Regulations : (a) Plans shall be submitted with -(i) (ii) (iii) (b) a Form BA17, which replaces Form BA5 (for application for approval) and Form BA8; a Form BA5 for the certificate of preparation of plans by the AP and RSE; and a Form BA4 for the notice of appointment of the AP and RSE.

Upon approval of the plans, a Form BD107 is issued if the consent to commence works may also be granted. This Form replaces the approval letter S.L. 9 and Form BD103 and states the duration for which the temporary building may remain.

3. The commencement of erection of a temporary building is subject to Buildings Ordinance section 20. The works must be commenced within three months of the issue of a Form BD107, otherwise an application on Form BA9 for renewal of consent has to be made. Once erected, a temporary building may normally remain until the Form BD107 expires. /4. As the ....

- 2 4. As the application on Form BA17 encompasses both an application for approval of plans and an application for consent to commence works, the statutory time limits for processing both applications are regarded as running concurrently. In other words, the time limit for processing a Form BA17 application is either 60 days or 30 days, depending on whether it is a first submission or a resubmission. 5. Upon completion, a temporary building requires a temporary occupation permit (i.e. Form BD105) before it may be occupied. Application should be made on Form BA12. The conditions in the Form BD107 as to the maximum number of persons to be accommodated, the removal of the temporary building upon expiry or cancellation of the permit and the expiry date of the permit will become conditions in the temporary occupation permit. 6. Upon expiry or cancellation of the permit, the temporary building should be removed forthwith, otherwise an order under Buildings Ordinance section 24(1) may be served to require its removal. If the building remains occupied after the expiry or revocation of the temporary occupation permit, prosecution under Buildings Ordinance section 40(1) may be instigated. 7. If it is required to extend the existence of the temporary building, an application in writing should be submitted to the Building Authority with the following documents : (a) (b) the original Form BD107 and Form BD105 (previously known as Form 32 and Form 24 respectively); and a certificate from an AP and/or RSE that the building is capable of lasting the extended term (maximum five years) in safe and (if applicable) sanitary conditions for the purposes specified in the application.

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/15 First issued June 1990 This revision March 1994 (AD/D) Index under : B(P)R 50-52 Temporary buildings

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers BUILDINGS ORDINANCE OFFICE

APP-51 137

PRACTICE NOTE FOR AUTHORIZED PERSONS AND REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS

Monitoring and Maintenance of Horizontal Drains ---This Practice Note encloses a guidance note (Appendix A) on the monitoring and maintenance of horizontal drains installed in connection with any building works. It amplifies the relevant parts of Chapters 4 and 11 of the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes (Second Edition). Drainage Works in Scheduled Area No. 1 2. Maintenance of horizontal drains installed in the Mid-levels area (specified as Scheduled Area No. 1 in the Fifth Schedule of the Buildings Ordinance) is subject to additional control under Buildings Ordinance section 28A to 28D. Other Drainage Works 3. In areas outside the Scheduled Area No. 1, the use of horizontal drains which require specific long-term maintenance in situations where there is a significant risk to life will only be approved where a positive undertaking is received that the necessary maintenance will be carried out to ensure their continued effectiveness. 4. Since private developments are normally subject to change of ownership, it is envisaged that an acceptable undertaking could only be given in rare cases such as where a major private body undertakes a development for its own specific purposes and it can be accepted that the ownership will not change.

(A.G. Eason) Building Authority

Ref. : BLD(B) GR/GEO/7 Issued November 1990 (GGE) Index under : Horizontal Drains

Appendix A Guidance Note on Monitoring and Maintenance of Horizontal Drains Introduction 1. Horizontal drains are installed in both rock and soil slopes in Hong Kong. The drains installed in rock slopes are typically short and are used mainly to drain individual rock joints or local areas of groundwater seepage. Longer drains tend to be installed in soil and mixed rock/soil slopes, usually with the aim of achieving an overall reduction in groundwater pressures within the slope. This guidance note is mainly concerned with the latter type of drains. 2. A horizontal drain system can be an effective slope stabilization measure provided that due care is given to design requirements and construction methods. Even where such care has been exercised, it is important to ensure that the system will perform satisfactorily in the long term by carrying out appropriate monitoring and maintenance schemes. The cost of monitoring and a commitment to long-term maintenance should be considered at the preliminary design stage in comparison with other stabilization measures before deciding whether to adopt a horizontal drain system. 3. The procedures described here are intended to cover horizontal drain systems that are designed to lower groundwater pressures so that the required factor of safety of a slope can be achieved (Geotechnical Manual for Slopes, Second Edition. Tables 5.1 & 5.4). These procedures need not be followed for other drain systems, but regular inspection and maintenance should still be carried out. 4. To ensure satisfactory performance of a horizontal drain system, the designer of the system should be closely involved with the monitoring and should prepare a suitable programme of maintenance. The maintenance authority should appoint a suitably-experienced maintenance officer to be responsible for compiling the maintenance inspection records. If the maintenance authority has any reason to believe that the system is not performing effectively, this should be brought to the attention of the designer without delay. This approach is consistent with the more general guidance on slope maintenance given in Chapter 11 of the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes Monitoring Requirements 5. As part of the initial design stage, the designer should devise an instrumentation scheme which is suitable for the project, including the type, number and location of piezometers for groundwater monitoring and the techniques to be used for drain flow measurement. Allowance should be made for the maintenance and replacement of defective instruments within the contract and for any subsequent period when instrument monitoring is likely to be required. The piezometers should be installed at an early stage. preferably at the same time as the ground investigation for the design of the horizontal drain system is carried out. Open hydraulic piezometers are commonly used for long-term observation (GEOGUIDE 2 : Guide to Site Investigation, Section 20.2.3). `Halcrow buckets' are often installed in the piezometer tubing to detect the highest piezometric level that has occurred in the period since the last reading. For a large drain installation, the water from individual drains may he conducted to a single point through a system of pipes and channels to facilitate drain flow measurement. Contd/.

-26. The monitoring of piezometric levels and drain flow rates should be carried out at least once every two months during the dry season and weekly during the wet season. The latter should be carried out within two days of any heavy rainstorm (for example, rainfall >100 mm in 24 hours). All drains and piezometers on the site should monitored. The need for frequent site visits and manual monitoring can be avoided by using computerized automatic recording systems, but before adopting such a system the designer should consider carefully his requirements in relation to the cost and necessary support services. 7. The monitoring of piezometric levels should start at the earliest stage and should preferably cover two wet seasons before the design is finalized. If this is not possible, then the results from continuing monitoring during the period of design and preparation of tender documents should be used to make a final review of the design. The data should be used to establish the `base groundwater levels' in the wet and dry seasons prior to drain installation. The monitoring of both piezometric levels and drain (low rates should be carried out both during and after the installation of the system. Monitoring should be terminated in accordance with the procedures described in paragraph 13. The data obtained during construction may be used in an `observational approach' to design, whereby the design parameters, such as the spacing of the drains, are modified during construction in accordance with the monitoring results. This approach is particularly helpful for horizontal drain installation because the performance of individual drains is sensitive to the heterogeneous nature of the ground conditions commonly encountered in Hong Kong. 8. Particular attention should be given in monitoring programmes to cases where the existing groundwater regime may be modified significantly by adjacent development or pumping works. Evaluation of Drain Performance 9. The effectiveness of a horizontal drain system should be gauged by considering, in descending order of significance, the following aspects of overall groundwater response at the site: (a) (b) (c) (d) the piezometric levels after drain installation should not rise above the design level in heavy rainstorms, the `base groundwater level' after drain installation should be lower than the pre-installation value, the range of groundwater fluctuations (storm response) should be lower than the pre-installation values, and the rate of drop of piezometric level after a rainstorm should be faster than the pre-installation rate, with the level returning to normal within & few days after the rainstorm.

10. In addition to the above, drain flow rates due to similar rainfalls measured shortly after installation and subsequently after a long period of tine should also provide an indication of the long-term performance of the drains. Contd/..

-311. Other factors which the designer should consider in the evaluation of drain performance include the adequacy of the acquired data, reliability of the design data (including the assumed groundwater conditions), the number of heavy rainstorms during the monitoring period, and the degree of contribution of the drains to the calculated factor of safety. Termination of Monitoring 12. The designer should plan groundwater monitoring with the object of assessing the effectiveness of a horizontal drain system before the end of the Contract Maintenance period. However, monitoring should be continued beyond this period if the designer considers it necessary on the basis of the criteria given above. Once the effectiveness of the system has been fully assessed, the designer should then decide either to terminate the monitoring if he is satisfied with the performance, or to recommend remedial measures if he considers that the system is not performing effectively. If remedial works are to be carried out, monitoring of piezometers and drain flows should continue in order to gauge the effectiveness of the improved new system. Further remedial works may be necessary. This process should be continued until the designer is satisfied that the system is performing effectively. 13. Subsequently, if there is observational evidence of possible substantial changes in existing groundwater conditions (for example, large variation in drain flows, signs of new surface seepage), this should be brought to the attention of the designer by the maintenance authority. The designer can then assess whether the monitoring should be reactivated. Maintenance Requirements 14. Regular maintenance of horizontal drains is required to ensure that they function properly and do not become clogged. Materials likely to close drains are organic elements (plant roots, fungi or algae), fines washed out of the surrounding soils, and precipitates of calcium, magnesium, iron and other compounds. In most cases, flushing with a clean water jet under controlled pressure should be adequate to restore the drain function. If soil deposits have dried up in the drain, then it is necessary to brush the drain during the flushing. Cleaning of the drain should commence from the deep end and proceed toward its outlet. This process should be repeated until the water flowing out of the drain appears clean. 15. The programme of maintenance and the `as built' details of the drain system should he prepared by the designer and handed over to the maintenance authority. Maintenance of the drains should be carried out at least once during the Contract Maintenance period and then once annually. The maintenance work should include inspection of the drains and surroundings, removal of weeds, clearing of outlets and flushing the drains with a water jet (as described above). In addition, if the drains contain removable inner liners, these should be replaced where considered necessary on the basis of the site inspection, the flushing operations and previous observations (for example, where the drains are found to be blocked or where drain flows are substantially reduced). All the drains at the site should be examined and maintained. A record of the observations made in the maintenance inspections and details of the work done should be kept tor future reference in the maintenance inspection record. A note should also be made in the maintenance Contd/

-4inspection record if any significant changes in drain flows or new areas of surface seepage are observed (see paragraph 14). If large increases in flow are recorded the discharge should be tested and the surrounding area inspected to assess whether the water originates from leaking services. If this appears to be the case, the appropriate authority should be notified and requested to trace and repair the leak. 16. In some special cases (for example, an extensive drain system in a natural hillslope where access to the outlet locations is difficult), a more cost-effective maintenance plan may consist of monitoring the effectiveness of the system using permanently-installed piezometers, and carrying out the cleaning and flushing of drains only if shown to be necessary by the monitoring. Routine inspections and clearing of the drain outlets should still be carried out regularly. 17. In all cases, it is necessary for a suitably-experienced maintenance officer to examine the system when the annual maintenance is being carried out. This will enable problems to be identified and corrected at an early stage.

Ref. : PNAP:137 Issued November 1990 (GGE)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-52 139

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Supply of Plans to Registered General Building Contractors and Registered Specialist Contractors Building (Administration) Regulation 36 Under Building (Administration) Regulation 36, it is the duty of the authorized person (AP) appointed for any building works or street works to supply to the registered general building contractor (RGBC) and the registered specialist contractor (RSC): (a) (b) a copy of plans approved by the Building Authority in accordance with Regulation 30; a copy of structural details prepared by the registered structural engineer and approved by the Building Authority; and a copy of any supervision plan.

(c)

2. Legal advice has confirmed that only a copy need be supplied to the RGBC and RSC. However, the copy of approved plans should be an exact reproduction of the plans as approved, stamped, signed and dated by the Building Authority. 3. While the regulation does not specify the time within which a copy of the plans should be supplied, it is imperative that APs supply copies of the latest plans promptly in order that the RGBC and RSC can carry out continuous supervision of the works properly.

( C M LEUNG ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/A/17 First issue December 1990 Last revision May 1994 This revision August 2001 (AD/Sup) revamped generally Index under : B(A)R 36 Supply of Plans to Registered General Building Contractors and Registered Specialist Contractors

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-53 140

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Building (Construction) Regulations

The Building (Construction) Regulations set out the performance requirements for the design and construction of building, street, building works and street works. However, they do not contain reference to any specific prescriptive standard. 2. Appendix A lists those standards or technical criteria accepted by the Building Authority as complying with the performance requirements in the Regulations. Plans based on other standards or technical criteria may be approved if they can be shown to achieve the performance requirements. It will facilitate the processing of such plans if full background to other standards or technical criteria, and their compatibility with local conditions, is detailed in the submission. 3. In this connection, please approach the Buildings Department at an early stage for agreement in principle to any alternative standard being considered.

( CHEUNG Hau-wai ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/23 First issue Last revision This revision Index under : December 1990 August 1994 February 2007 (AD/NB2) - Appendix A revamped Acceptable Standards - B(C)R Building (Construction) Regulations

Standards Acceptable to the Building Authority Design and Construction Category Concrete Fire Resisting Construction Foundation Precast Concrete Steel Standard Hong Kong Code of Practice Hong Kong Code of Practice Hong Kong Code of Practice Hong Kong Code of Practice Hong Kong Code of Practice Title

Appendix A (PNAP 140) (APP-53)

Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2004 Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996 Code of Practice for Foundations Code of Practice for Precast Concrete Construction 2003 Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2005 Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 1987 #1 Specification for steel chimneys Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004 Structural use of aluminium. Code of practice for design Glazing for buildings Code of practice for glazing for buildings Patent glazing and sloping glazing for buildings Code of practice for the use of masonry. Structural use of unreinforced masonry Code of practice for earthworks Code of practice for design and installation of natural stone cladding and lining

Wind Effect Aluminium Glass

BS 4076: 1989 Hong Kong Code of Practice BS 8118: Part 1: 1991 BS 6262 Part 1-4, 6 & 7: 2005 BS 6262: 1982 #2 BS 5516 Part 1 & 2: 2004 BS 5628: Part 1: 2005 BS 6031: 1981 BS 8298: 1994

Miscellaneous

#1 #2

This code will be phased out on 31 August 2007. BS 6262: 1982 has been partially replaced by various parts of BS 6262: 2005. It will be withdrawn upon publication of all seven parts of the revised BS 6262.

-1-

Concrete Materials, Workmanship and Testing Category Materials Standard BS 12: 1996 BS 882: 1983 BS 1014: 1975 BS 3892: Part 1: 1982 Title Specification for Portland cement Specification for aggregates from natural sources for concrete Specification for pigments for Portland cement and Portland cement products Pulverized-fuel ash. Specification for pulverizedfuel ash for use as a cementitious component in structural concrete (The criterion for water requirement may not apply) Specification for sulphate-resisting Portland cement Concrete admixtures

BS 4027: 1980 BS 5075 Part 1: 1982 Part 3: 1985 BS 6588: 1985

Specification for Portland pulverized-fuel ash cement

Reinforcement

BS 8500 Concrete. Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206-1 Part 1 & 2: 2002 BS EN 197: Part 1: 2000 Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for common cements BS EN 206: Part 1: 2000 Concrete. Specification, performance, production and conformity BS EN 446: 1997 Grout for prestressing tendons. Grouting procedures BS EN 447: 1997 Grout for prestressing tendons. Specification for common grout BS EN 12620: 2002 Aggregates for concrete Hong Kong Construction Carbon Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Standard CS2: 1995 Concrete BS 4447: 1973 Specification for the performance of prestressing anchorages for post-tensioned construction BS 4449: 1997 Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete BS 4482: 1985 Specification for cold reduced steel wire for the reinforcement of concrete BS 4483: 1998 Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete BS 4486: 1980 Specification for hot rolled and hot rolled and processed high tensile alloy steel bars for the prestressing of concrete BS 5896: 1980 Specification for high tensile steel wire and strand for the prestressing of concrete -2-

Category Reinforcement

Standard BS 7123: 1989 BS 7973 Part 1 & 2: 2001 BS 8666: 2000

Title Specification for metal arc welding of steel for concrete reinforcement Spacers and chairs for steel reinforcement and their specification

Testing

Specification for scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel reinforcement for concrete EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete EN 10138 Prestressing steels EN ISO 17660 Permitted welding process for reinforcement Hong Kong Construction Testing Concrete (Volume 1 & 2) Standard CS1: 1990 Hong Kong Construction Carbon Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Standard CS2: 1995 Concrete BS EN 445: 1997 Grout for prestressing tendons. Test methods

Steel Materials, Workmanship and Testing Category Material Standard BS 4360: 1986 #3 BS 5950: Part 7: 1992 Title Specification for weldable structural steels Structural use of steelwork in building. Specification for materials and workmanship: cold formed sections Specification for weldable structural steels. Hot finished structural hollow sections in weather resistant steels Weldable structural steels. Hot finished structural hollow sections in weather resistant steels. Specification Hot rolled products of structural steels Hot-rolled products in weldable fine grain structural steels Plates and wide flats made of high yield strength structural steels in the quenched and tempered or precipitation hardened conditions. Delivery conditions for quenched and tempered steels Structural steels with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance. Technical delivery conditions

BS 7668: 1994 #3

BS 7668: 2004

BS EN 10025 Part 1-6: 2004 BS EN 10113 #3 Part 2 & 3: 1993 BS EN 10137 #3 Part 2: 1996 BS EN 10155: 1993 #3

#3

To be phased out on 31 August 2007

-3-

Material

BS EN 10164: 1993 #3 BS EN 10164: 2004 BS EN 10210 #3 Part 1: 1994 BS EN 10210 Part 1: 2006 BS EN 10219 #3 Part 1: 1997 BS EN 10219 Part 1: 2006

Bolt

BS 3692: 1967 #3 BS 3692: 2001 BS 4190: 1967 #3 BS 4190: 2001 BS 4320: 1968 BS 4395 #3 Part 1 & 2: 1969 BS 4604 Part 1 & 2: 1970 BS 4933: 1973 BS 7419: 1991 BS EN 14399 Part 1-6: 2005 BS EN ISO 4014: 2001 BS EN ISO 4016: 2001 BS EN ISO 4017: 2001 BS EN ISO 4018: 2001 BS EN ISO 4032: 2001 BS EN ISO 4033: 2001 BS EN ISO 4034: 2001 BS EN ISO 7091: 2000

Steel products with improved deformation properties perpendicular to the surface of the product. Technical delivery conditions Steel products with improved deformation properties perpendicular to the surface of the product. Technical delivery conditions Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain structural steels. Technical delivery requirements Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain steels. Technical delivery requirements Cold formed welded structural sections of nonalloy and fine grain steels. Technical delivery requirements Cold formed welded structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain steels. Technical delivery requirements Specification for ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Metric units ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Specification Specification for ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Specification Specification for metal washers for general engineering purposes. Metric series Specification for high strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and washers for structural engineering Specification for the use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural steelwork. Metric series Specification for ISO metric black cup and countersunk head bolts and screws with hexagon nuts Specification for holding down bolts High strength structural bolting assemblies for preloading Hexagon head bolts. Product grades A and B Hexagon head bolts. Product grade C Hexagon head screws. Product grades A and B Hexagon head screws. Product grade C Hexagon nuts, style 1. Product grades A and B Hexagon nuts, style 2. Product grades A and B Hexagon nuts. Product grade C Plain washers. Normal series. Product grade C

#3 To be phased out on 31 August 2007

-4-

Category Welding consumables

Standard BS 639: 1986 #3

BS EN 440: 1995

BS EN 499: 1995 #3

BS EN 756: 2004

BS EN ISO 2560: 2005

Welding standard

BS 5135: 1984 #3 BS EN 1011 Part 1: 1998 Part 2: 2001 BS EN 22553: 1995

Title Specification for covered carbon and carbon manganese steel electrodes for manual metal-arc welding Welding consumables. Wire electrodes and deposits for gas shielded metal arc welding of nonalloy and fine grain steels. Classification Welding consumables. Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of non-alloy and fine grain steels. Classification Welding consumables. Solid wires, solid wire-flux and tubular cored electrode-flux combinations for submerged arc welding of non-alloy and fine grain steels. Classification Welding consumables. Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of non-alloy and fine grain steels. Classification Specification for arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic materials Welded, brazed and soldered joints. Symbolic representation on drawings Specification for approval testing of welding procedures

Welding procedure BS 4870 specification Part 1: 1981 #3 Part 3: 1985 #3 Part 4: 1988 #3 BS EN 288: 1992 #3

BS EN 1418: 1998

BS EN ISO 15614 Part 1: 2004 Part 8: 2002

Specification and approval of welding procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedures specification for arc welding Welding personnel. Approval testing of welding operators for fusion welding and resistance weld setters for fully mechanized and automatic welding of metallic materials Specification and qualification of welding procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test

#3 To be phased out on 31 August 2007

-5-

Category Welder qualification tests

Standard BS 4871 Part 1: 1982 #3 Part 3: 1985 BS 4872 Part 1: 1982 BS EN 287 #3 Part 1: 1992 BS EN 287 Part 1: 2004 BS 729: 1971 #3 BS 4652: 1995 BS 4921: 1988 BS EN 22063: 1994 #3 BS EN ISO 1461: 1999 BS EN ISO 2063: 2005

Title Specification for approval testing of welders working to approved welding procedures Specification for approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is not required. Fusion welding of steel Approval testing of welders for fusion welding. Steels Qualification test of welders. Fusion welding. Steels Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles Specification for zinc-rich priming paint (Organic media) Specification for sherardized coatings on iron or steel Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Thermal spraying. Zinc, aluminium and their alloys Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles. Specifications and test methods Thermal spraying. Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Zinc, aluminium and their alloys Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products Method for tensile testing of metals (including aerospace materials) Tensile testing of metallic materials. Method of test at ambient temperature Charpy impact test on metallic materials. Test method (V- and U-notches) Metallic materials. Brinell hardness test Metallic materials. Vickers hardness test Radiographic examination of fusion welded butt joints in steel Methods for ultrasonic examination of welds

Protective treatment

BS EN ISO 11124 Part 1-4: 1997 Destructive test of BS 18: 1987 #3 material BS EN 10002 Part 1: 2001 BS EN 10045 Part 1: 1990 BS EN ISO 6506 Part 1-3: 2005 BS EN ISO 6507 Part 1-3: 2005 BS 2600 #3 Part 1: 1983 Part 2: 1973 BS 3923 #3 Part 1: 1986 Part 2: 1972

Non-destructive test methods

#3 To be phased out on 31 August 2007

-6-

Category Non-destructive test methods

Standard BS 5289: 1976 #3 BS 6072: 1981 #3 BS 6443: 1984 #3 BS EN 571 Part 1: 1997 BS EN 970: 1997 BS EN 1290: 1998 BS EN 1435: 1997 BS EN 1714: 1998 BS EN ISO 9934 Part 1: 2001

Title Code of practice. Visual inspection of fusion welded joints Method for magnetic particle flaw detection Method for penetrant flaw detection Non-destructive testing. Penetrant testing. General principles Non-destructive examination of fusion welds. Visual examination Non-destructive examination of welds. Magnetic particle examination of welds Non-destructive examination of welds. Radiographic examination of welded joints Non-destructive testing of welded joints. Ultrasonic testing of welded joints Non-destructive testing. Magnetic particle testing. General principles

Aluminium Materials, Workmanship and Testing Category Material Standard BS 1161: 1977 BS EN 485 Part 1: 1994 Part 2: 2004 Part 3: 2003 Part 4: 1994 BS EN 515: 1993 BS EN 573 Part 1: 2004 Part 2: 1995 Part 3: 2003 Part 4: 2004 BS EN 755 Part 1-2: 1997 Part 3-6: 1996 Part 7-8: 1998 Part 9: 2001 BS EN 12020 Part 1 & 2: 2001 Title Specification for aluminium alloy sections for structural purposes Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip and plate

Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Wrought products. Temper designations Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical composition and form of wrought products

Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles

Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles in alloys EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063

#3

To be phased out on 31 August 2007

-7-

Category Connection

Standard BS 1473: 1972 BS 1494 Part 1: 1964

Welding

BS 4872 Part 2: 1976 BS EN 1011 Part 4: 2000 BS EN ISO 4063: 2000 BS EN ISO 9606 Part 2: 2004 BS EN ISO 15614 Part 2: 2005

Title Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes rivet, bolt and screw stock Specification for fixing accessories for building purposes. Fixings for sheet, roof and wall coverings Specification for approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is not required. TIG or MIG welding of aluminium and its alloys Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic materials. Arc welding of aluminium and aluminium alloys Welding and allied processes. Nomenclature of processes and reference numbers Qualification test of welders. Fusion welding. Aluminium and aluminium alloys Specification and qualification of welding procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Arc welding of aluminium and its alloys Structural fixings in concrete and masonry

Testing

BS 5080 Part 1: 1993 Part 2: 1986 BS EN 970: 1997 BS EN 10002 Part 1: 2001 BS EN ISO 6506 Part 1: 2005 BS EN ISO 6507 Part 1: 2005 BS EN ISO 7438: 2005

Non-destructive examination of fusion welds. Visual examination Tensile testing of metallic materials. Method of test at ambient temperature Metallic materials. Brinell hardness test. Test method Metallic materials. Vickers hardness test. Test method Metallic materials. Bend test

Glass Materials, Workmanship and Testing Category Material Standard BS 952 Part 1: 1995 Part 2: 1980 BS 6206: 1981 Glass for glazing Title

BS EN 572 Part 1-9: 2004

Specification for impact performance requirements for flat safety glass and safety plastics for use in buildings Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate glass products

-8-

Category Material

Testing

Standard BS EN 1863 Part 1: 2000 Part 2: 2004 BS EN 12150 Part 1: 2000 Part 2: 2004 BS EN 14179 Part 1 & 2: 2005 BS EN ISO 12543 Part 1, 3-6: 1998 BS 6206: 1981

Title Glass in building. Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass Glass in building. Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass Glass in building. Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass Glass in building. Laminated glass and laminated safety glass Specification for impact performance requirements for flat safety glass and safety plastics for use in buildings Glass in building. Pendulum test. Impact test method and classification for flat glass

BS EN 12600: 2002

Miscellaneous Materials, Workmanship and Testing Category Stainless Steel Standard BS EN 10088 Part 1-3: 2005 BS EN ISO 3506 Part 1 & 2: 1998 BS EN 1011 Part 3: 2000 BS 6213: 2000 BS 3712 Part 1: 1991 Part 2: 1973 Part 3: 1974 Part 4: 1991 BS 1191 Part 1 & 2: 1973 BS 1230: Part 1: 1985 Title Stainless steels Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel fasteners Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic materials. Arc welding of stainless steels Selection of construction sealants. Guide Building and construction sealants

Sealant

Gypsum plaster Gypsum plaster board Wood wool slab Natural Stone Masonry

Specification for gypsum building plasters Gypsum plasterboard. Specification for plasterboard excluding materials submitted to secondary operations Specification for wood wool cement slabs up to 125mm thick Natural stone test methods. Determination of flexural strength under concentrated load Specification for clay bricks

BS 1105: 1981 BS EN 12372: 1999 BS 3921: 1985

-9-

Category Fire - testing

Standard BS 476 Part 4 : 1970 Part 20: 1987 Part 21: 1987 Part 22: 1987 Part 23: 1987 Part 24: 1987 BS 5080 Part 1: 1993 Part 2: 1986

Title Fire tests on building materials and structures

Anchors

Structural fixings in concrete and masonry

Note :

The editions referred to in the list and in the Codes of Practice should include any amendments current in January 2007. Such editions are the most suitable for Hong Kong and may not be the latest version of a Standard.

(Rev. 2/2007)

- 10 -

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-54 142

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Retaining Walls Building (Construction) Regulations 1992 - Part XIII This aims to clarify the administration by the Building Authority of the above Regulations. Anchor Plates 2. walls. Anchor plates supporting rock or earth faces will not be treated as retaining

Minor Retaining Walls 3. (a) (b) (c) A minor retaining wall is regarded as a wall where : the difference in ground levels between the upper and the lower sides of the wall does not exceed 1.5 m; the average inclination of the ground above the top of the wall does not exceed 15 to the horizontal; and external surcharges from foundations or other structures do not impose any loading on the wall.

Drainage and Filter Material 4. Drainage material and filter material used in conjunction with the retaining walls should consist of clean, sound, durable material free from clay, organic materials and other impurities. Where site conditions are non-aggressive, geotextile filters composed of resistant synthetic polymers are suitable alternatives to granular filters in permanent works. 5. Section 8.5 of the GEOGUIDE 1 (second edition), gives some guidance on the design criteria for granular and geotextile filters. Further guidance on this can be obtained from GEO Publication No. 1/93 "Review of Granular and Geotextile Filters". Backfill Material behind Retaining Walls 6. Backfill material behind retaining walls should have in situ properties that meet design requirements. It should also meet the requirements in Table 1 at Appendix A attached. 7. (a) (b) (c) Material selected for use as backfill generally must not contain : peat, vegetation, timber, organic or other degradable materials; dangerous or toxic material; material susceptible to combustion; /(d) metal ....

----

- 2 (d) (e) (f) metal, rubber, plastic or synthetic material; material susceptible to significant volume change -- eg marine mud, swelling clays and collapsible soils; or soluble material.

8. In addition, the backfill should not be chemically aggressive : eg the presence of excessive sulphate in soils can cause accelerated deterioration of concrete and steel. Rock Faces 9. calculation. Rock faces are not considered as "earth" for purposes of earth pressure

Retaining Wall Design and Stability 10. Please refer to PNAP 166, on GEOGUIDE 1 (second edition), for the design of new permanent earth retaining wall on land. Remedial or Preventive Work to an Existing Retaining Wall 11. Where remedial or preventive works to an existing wall are proposed, the past performance of the wall during its service life is of considerable assistance to the designer. Guidance on this is given in the "Geotechnical Manual for Slopes". Designs carried out in accordance with the recommendations therein will be acceptable to Building Authority. Monitoring during Construction of Retaining Walls 12. Monitoring should be carried out so as to measure accurately the behaviour of the retaining wall and the effects of construction on groundwater conditions, the site and any building, structure, land, street or services. Demolition of Existing Retaining Walls 13. Where it is intended to carry out demolition works to existing retaining walls, demolition plans and supporting documents as prescribed in Building (Administration) Regulation 8(3) and (4) shall be submitted for approval.

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/8 First issued December 1990 This revision April 1998 (AD/LM - para 13 amended) Index under : B(C)R Part XIII - Retaining Walls Retaining Walls - B(C)R Part XIII

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

PNAP 142 Appendix A APP-54 Table 1 Grading and Plasticity Requirements for Retaining Wall Backfill

Backfill Type Requirement Crushed Rock Products Maximum Size (mm) % Passing 63 microns BS Sieve Size Coefficient of Uniformity Liquid Limit (%) Plasticity Index (%) Notes : (1) Relevant test methods for grading and plasticity of fill materials are specified in Clauses 5.1 and 5.2 of Geospec 2, Model Specification for Reinforced Fill Structure, prepared by the Geotechnical Engineering Office. The backfill may contain up to 5% of rock fragments not exceeding 200 mm in size, provided that these do not interfere with the compaction requirements or cause any damage to the retaining wall. In addition to the above requirements, the maximum particle size should not exceed two-thirds of the thickness of the compacted layer of backfill in order to ensure good compaction. This applies to soils derived from in situ rock weathering only. For sands and gravels of alluvial origin, the coefficient of uniformity should be not less than 5 and the material should not be gap-graded (i.e. having two or more distinct sections of the grading curve separated by sub-horizontal portions). There is no need to check the liquid limit and plasticity index of the soil if the backfill contains less than 30% by weight of particles less than 63 m. The determination of the particle size distribution of the backfill should be carried out without using dispersants. 200 0 5 Not applicable Not applicable Soil 75(2) 0 - 45 50(4) 45(5) 20(5)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) (6)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-55 143

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Procedure for Payment of Fees on Submission of Plans Building (Administration) Regulation 42 The Building (Administration)(Amendment) Regulations 1991 provide that fees are payable on the submission of plans under the Buildings Ordinance on and after 28 March 1991. The fees are revised with effect from 1 September 1994 in accordance with the Building (Administration)(Amendment)(No. 2) Regulation 1994 and all resubmissions of plans are free of charge. 2. For new buildings, which include both permanent and temporary buildings, fees payable for first submissions of building plans (including major revisions) cover also the submission of all associated plans, such as site formation, structural and drainage plans. Such fees are charged on the basis of the gross floor area (GFA) of the new building. For new buildings without accountable GFA and for alteration and addition and other works which will not result in a new building, fees for first submissions (including major revisions) are charged according to the total number of submitted plans of Al or smaller size, irrespective of whether they are for site formation, building, structural, drainage or other works. Buildings without accountable GFA include transformer stations, petrol filling stations, oil storage installations, jetties and similar structures, and for the purpose of this type of buildings, minor ancillary accommodation (which is otherwise accountable for GFA) may be ignored. 3. Fees are chargeable upon application for approval. When plans are submitted, a crossed cheque for the appropriate amount payable to Hong Kong Special Administrative Region Government should be enclosed. Payment by cash or post-dated cheques will not be accepted. The authorized person (AP) is responsible for calculating the fee chargeable in accordance with the payment form (Appendix A), which should accompany every first submission (including major revision). Fees paid are not refundable even though the submission is subsequently withdrawn. Copies of the standard form are available from the Buildings Department (BD). 4. If discrepancies are subsequently found in the calculation of fees, a supplementary fee will be levied or a refund of any over-payment will be made, as the case may be. The payment of supplementary fees should similarly be made by crossed cheques, each being accompanied by a payment form. 5. Where any fee payable is not enclosed with a submission of plans, or where a submitted cheque is subsequently dishonoured, the plans will be disapproved under Buildings Ordinance section 16(1)(f). For any necessary supplementary fees, payment should be made within 14 days of notification, failing which, the plans will be similarly disapproved under Buildings Ordinance section 16(1)(f). /6. For ....

-----

-26. For certain development proposals such as non-profit making schools, hospitals, and similar community buildings, exemption from payment of fees would generally be considered. A Form BA16 should be submitted to apply for exemption, stating the special circumstances surrounding the proposal together with documentary support as necessary. In such cases, it is not necessary for a cheque to be submitted when making a submission of plans. 7. When a submission is delivered at the BD receiving counter, a receipt for the payment will be issued immediately to the person delivering it. For submissions by post or delivery service, the receipt will be sent to the AP. The receipt should be kept in safe custody by the payer as evidence of payment as this will be needed in case of refund. Major Revision 8. A major revision, for the purposes of payment of fees under paragraph 7A of Building (Administration) Regulations 42 (and for avoidance of doubt the processing period in Building (Administration) Regulations 30(3)(b)), is a submission that has been so extensively revised that it must be fundamentally reassessed and a repeat of the centralized processing system necessitated (PNAP 30 refers). Examples of resubmissions that would constitute a major revision are listed below (the list can be used as a guide but is not exhaustive) : (a) (b) (c) changes in disposition and/or number of blocks within a development; change in the number of storeys, in particular, within the podium and number of basements; major changes in configuration of floor plans which would result in a fundamental reassessment of plot ratio, site coverage, lighting and ventilation and means of escape; change in the principal use of a building that would substantially affect the construction or lead to a reassessment of planning factors and/or means of escape, e.g. office to residential or hotel to office; substantial change in site area and configuration which would result in a fundamental reassessment of site coverage and plot ratio; changes that would seriously affect access to buildings; requests for substantial modifications, exemptions or bonuses that require a fundamental review of the original proposal; /(h) ground ....

(d)

(e)

(f) (g)

-3(h) ground conditions assumed in the design found to be incorrect during initial excavation necessitating reassessment of the site formation works (for site formation works not resulting in a new building); and major changes which would require to be examined under new or amended legislation or a new draft or approved Outline Zoning Plan.

(i)

9. In cases of doubt, please consult the relevant Chief Building Surveyor of the New Buildings Division 1 who would undertake to provide an answer within seven days. It should also be noted that a new Form BA5 is legally required to be included with every submission of a major revision. "Localized" Major Revision 10. Where the major revision is "localized", the fee charges may be based on the "localized" GFA ie per podium, or per affected floors of the podium, on the premise that part of a building is also a building. There would inevitably be other variations giving rise to complications in the implementation of the charging system and this could be considered on a case by case basis under Buildings Ordinance Section 42. Submission of Plans pursuant to Statutory Orders 11. The requirement for payment of fees is not applicable to "proposals for work" in response to a statutory order under the Buildings Ordinance or an advisory letter on building safety, fire safety and slope safety issues which requires the submission of plans.

(H W CHEUNG) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BOP/31 BD GP/BREG/A/8 First issue March 1991 Last revision December 2000 This revision August 2002 (AD/NB1) (para 5 amended) Index under : Fees, Procedure for Payment Major Revision Payment of Fees, Procedure Procedure for Payment of Fees

Payment of Fees on Submission of Plans Building (Administration) Regulation 42 (effective 1 September 1995)
(To be completed by the authorized person and must accompany all payments) PART 1 - PARTICULARS OF SUBMISSION BD File No.(if known) : Site Address : Name & Address of Applicant :

Appendix A (PNAP 143) (APP-55)

Name of Authorized Person : PART 2 - CALCULATION FOR CHARGES (tick in appropriate box) A. First submissions or major revision plans of new buildings with accountable GFA (charged on building plans submission only) [A] [B] [C] GFA [A] 100m (rounded UP if not a whole number) Industrial buildings Rate of Charge ($) Tick Box [B] x [C] Tick Box Minimum Charge ($) Tick Box

GFA 20,000m GFA 20,000m

2,160

8,230

>

1,740

432,400

Non-industrial buildings

GFA 10,000m GFA 10,000m

3,430

8,230

>

2,750

343,400

B. First submissions or major revision plans for new buildings without GFA, A&A and building works not resulting in a new building (charged on all categories of plans) Number of plans not larger than A1 size * Rate of Charge ($) Charge ($) x PART 3 - STATEMENT OF AUTHORIZED PERSON To the Building Authority : The cheque no. for HK$ as per the above calculations, being the charge/supplementary charge ** for this submission made on , is attached. Date * ** 11,200

Charge as per A/B ** less Payment made Supplementary Charge

$ $ $

Signature of Authorized Person

Plans larger than A1 size in either dimension are regarded as multiples of A1 size. Delete whichever is inapplicable.

PART 4 - CONFIRMATION OF RECEIPT OF PAYMENT (for office use only) Receipt no. Date BD 24 (revised Dec 2000) has been issued for the payment of the amount stated in PART 3 above. Name & Signature of Collecting Officer

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-56 147

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Exemption Criteria for Site Formation Works associated with Exempted Building Works in the New Territories General 1. The Buildings Ordinance (Application to the New Territories) Ordinance, Cap. 121, makes provisions for the issue of a certificate of exemption from sections 4, 9, 14, 21 and 30 of the Buildings Ordinance and the Building Regulations for certain building works in the New Territories. 2. Where such exemption is granted, provision is also made in section 6(a) for the issue of a certificate of exemption in respect of site formation works. This practice note describes the criteria for the issue of a certificate of exemption by Director of Lands for these site formation works. Certificate of Exemption for Site Formation Works 3. The issue of certificate of exemption for site formation works will only be considered by the relevant District Lands Officer when all the criteria listed below have been met: (a) (b) (c) (d) The maximum gradient across the lot from boundary to boundary is not more than 15 degrees. The overall gradient of an area bounded by lines 10m outside the lot boundary in any direction is less than 15 degrees. There is no slope within the area 10m outside the lot boundary steeper than 30 degrees or higher than 1.5m. There is no retaining wall or terrace wall either within the lot or within the area 10m outside the lot which is higher than 1.5m.

Conditions of Exemption 4. A certificate of exemption for site formation works would be issued with the following conditions: /(a) No ....

- 2 (a) No retaining walls or terrace walls higher than 1.5m shall be constructed. The combined height of retaining wall and slope constructed shall also not exceed 1.5m. The retaining height to breadth ratio of retaining walls constructed shall not be greater than two. The retaining walls shall be constructed of masonry or concrete. No slopes steeper than 30 degrees nor higher than 1.5m shall be constructed.

(b)

(c)

Requirement for Site Formation Submissions 5. In the event that the above exemption criteria or the associated conditions cannot be met, the prescribed plans for site formation works shall be submitted to the Buildings Department in the normal way.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BORD/1 First issued August 1991 (GGE) Last issued August 1991 This revision February 1997 (AD/S, GGE/I) (paras 2, 3 and 4 revised) Index under : Buildings Ordinance (Application to the New Territories) Ordinance Certificate of Exemption for Site Formation Works Exemption Criteria for Site Formation Works Site Formation Works, Exemption Criteria for

Appendix A Criteria for Granting Exemption of Site Formation Works (a) (b) (c) (d) The maximum gradient across the lot from boundary to boundary is not more than 15 degrees. The overall gradient of an area bounded by lines 10m outside the lot boundary in any direction is less than 15 degrees. There is no slope within the area 10m outside the lot boundary steeper than 30 degrees or higher than 1.5m. There is no retaining wall or terrace wall either within the lot or within the area 10m outside the lot which is higher than 1.5m.

Conditions to be Included in the Certificate of Exemption for Site Formation Works (a) (b) (c) No retaining walls or terrace walls higher than 1.5m shall be constructed. The combined height of retaining wall and slope constructed shall also not exceed 1.5m. The retaining height to breadth ratio of retaining walls constructed shall not be greater than two. The retaining walls shall be constructed of masonry or concrete. No slopes steeper than 30 degrees nor higher than 1.5m shall be constructed.

Conditions to be Included in the Certificate of Exemption for Building Works (a) (b) (c)* All retaining walls are excluded from this exemption and are classified as site formation works. Any structure retaining earth or fill is considered to be a retaining wall. An investigation of the stability of the existing slopes/retaining walls* is required.

* Delete as appropriate. Ref. : INST:6.4 First issued April 1980 This revision June 1996 (AD/D, GGE/I)

Appendix B Flow Chart Showing Procedures for Handling Site Formation Works Associated with NTEHs Development
Application for NTEH development DLO in consultation with GEO (including joint site visit if required) to determine whether investigation is required

Yes

Are the criteria for exemption of site formation works met?


No

Is investigation required?

No

No

Yes

Are site formation works intended?

Owner to appoint AP/ Engineer to carry out the investigation (Note 2)

Yes

Submission of proposed works to BD for approval (engagement of AP is required)

Yes

(1) Will the proposed building works adversely affect the existing slopes or retaining walls? OR (2) Are landslip preventive or remedial works required?

No

Yes

Is the investigation report acceptable to GEO?

Submission to DLO and copy to GEO for comment

No

AP/Engineer to provide further information/to carry out further investigation

Issue C of E for site formation works with conditions (Note 1)

Notes :

1. 2.

See Appendix A for the conditions to be included. These requirements should be included in the C of E for Building Works as the third condition. DLO to prepare ground features report to determine whether criteria for exemption of site formation works are met and for subsequent referral to GEO for advice.

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-57 148

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Requirements for an Excavation and Lateral Support Plan Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bc) Bulk excavation, even if shallow, can be dangerous if not properly designed. Authorized persons, registered structural engineers (RSE) and registered geotechnical engineers (RGE) are reminded to take adequate precautions to ensure public safety whenever excavation is found necessary as part of the work. 2. In general terms, excavation and lateral support (ELS) plans are required under Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bc) to be submitted for approval where excavations of substantial depth are to be carried out, the collapse of which would cause serious consequences. 3. For guidance, an ELS plan will be required to be submitted for approval where the excavation to be carried out are : (a) deeper than 4.5 m, and greater than 5 m in length; and (b) liable to affect any road, building, structure, slope steeper than 30 or water main 75 mm in diameter or greater, the affected area being defined as within the 45 line up from the base of the excavation to the ground surface.

4. Where the above conditions apply, applications for consent to commence works would not be given if an ELS plan, as prescribed in Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bc), has not been submitted and approved. 5. Where ELS plans are required to be submitted for approval as stipulated above, an RSE would be required to prepare and sign the plans and structural design as well as the structural assessment report of the effects of the excavation and dewatering on adjoining structures. An RGE would be required to prepare and sign the supporting documentations, such as geotechnical assessment, geotechnical details and calculations, geotechnical reports, site investigation reports or ground investigation reports, which should accompany the ELS plans submission. 6. It is permissible to have the ELS plans submitted in two stages, provided that the first stage submission demonstrates the feasibility of the entire scheme. Plans submitted at the first stage should show the lateral support system, for example sheet piles or a diaphragm wall, together with a strutting layout and the construction sequence. The supporting geotechnical documentation should also be provided. Calculations submitted at the first stage should include realistic ground movement estimates for the entire works. The second stage submission normally would include the structural details of the lateral support system, including detailing of the struts for each stage of excavation according to the approved first stage submission.

-2-

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/14 First issue October 1991 Last revision November 1993 This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD)

(Para. 1 amended and para. 5 added)

Index under : Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bc) Excavation and Lateral Support Plan Requirements for an Excavation and Lateral Support Plan

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers BUILDINGS ORDINANCE OFFICE PRACTICE NOTE FOR AUTHORIZED PERSONS AND REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS

APP-58 157

Testing of Drainage Works Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works & Latrines) Regulation 73 For years, the Building Authority has been testing drains in private development pursuant to the provisions in Part VII of the Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulations. Such practice has come to be misunderstood by some authorized persons as having a diminishing effect on their responsibility for ensuring compliance with the prescribed standards for drainage works. In testing drains, the Building Authority assumes a monitoring role, whereas, the ultimate responsibility for maintaining the prescribed standards must rest with the registered contractor and the authorized person. 2. identified : In a recent review of the situation, the following areas of concern were (i) (ii) There have been instances where it was found at O.P. stage that drainage works had not been duly tested; At the time of drain testing, it is not uncommon to find that the approved pipe runs, alignment and invert levels have been modified to suit unforeseen site conditions. Sometimes, such deviations which the authorized person may not have been made aware of are so extensive as to warrant an amended plan submission; and Very often, drains have to be laid in sections to phase in with the construction programme. For a large scale development, involving a correspondingly complex drainage system, fragmented drain testing can be a very onerous exercise. Nowadays, development projects requiring more than 100 drain tests are not uncommon. With its limited staff resources, the Buildings Ordinance Office is finding it increasingly difficult to cope with the growing numbers of applications for drain tests.

(iii)

3. It is felt that the above areas of concern and the attendant problems could be relieved if the authorized person was to take a more explicit role in drain testing. With this in mind, the following procedures have been formulated : (i) All applications for drain testing, submitted pursuant to Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 73(1), must be copied to the authorized person at the same time; Upon receipt of the copied application, the authorized person or his representative should arrange to attend the drain test, and, subsequently endorse the records/results of the test; Contd/..

(ii)

-2(iii) Testing of drains must proceed as scheduled, duly recorded and endorsed, even if the Building Authority or his representative is not present at the drain test; and Within 7 days from attending the drain test, the authorized person shall submit to the Building Authority a `certificate on completion of drain test', format as in Annex I, together with the endorsed drain test results.

(iv)

4. Kindly arrange for the above procedures to take immediate effect. Concurrent with this PNAP, a revised PNRC 11 has been issued to all registered contractors.

(Darwin Chen) Building Authority

Ref. : BLD(B) GP/BREG/SF/2 First issued April 1993 (GBS/D) Index under : B(SSFPDW&L)R 73 - Testing of Drainage Works Drainage Works - Testing of Testing of Drainage Works

PNAP 157 APP-58 Annex I

Certificate on Completion of Drain Test

B.O.O. Ref. :

Date : __________________

Re : _________________________________________________________ (Address of development site)

To Building Authority, I confirm that I/my representative ( ) . had witnessed the drain test which was carried out at the captioned site on Pursuant to PNAP 157 and Building (Administration) Regulation 44, test results and record plan(s), duly endorsed by me, are submitted herewith for your reference. 2. I hereby certify that the above drain test have been carried out in compliance with BS 8301:1985, and, that I am satisfied with the results of the drain test.

__________________________ Signature of Authorized Person

c.c. Registered Contractor

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-59 158

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers BAN on Hand-dug Caissons

Hand-dug caissons have been used for many years and have had a disturbing history of high accident rate and health hazards to workers. 2. Government has enacted the Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 1995 on 19 January 1995 to ban the use of hand-dug caissons. 3. "Hand-dug caisson" is defined in Section 2(1) of the Buildings Ordinance as any foundation or earth-retaining structure, or part thereof, the construction of which includes the excavation of a shaft in the ground by means of digging carried out by any person inside the shaft with or without the aid of machine tools. A new section 16(1A) empowers the Building Authority (BA) to refuse to give approval to any plans of building works where they include the construction of a hand-dug caisson. Exemption may be granted only if it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the BA personally that the following circumstances exist : (a) the depth of the hand-dug caisson does not exceed 3 metres and the diameter of the inscribed circle of the hand-dug caisson is not less than 1.5 metres; or for the site concerned -(i) (ii) the use of a hand-dug caisson is the only practical construction method; or there is no other safe engineering alternative.

(b)

Examples would be narrow or steeply-sloping sites where difficult access or insufficient working space makes it not possible or not safe to use machine tools. 4. In these exceptional circumstances, the authorized person/registered structural engineer must specify stringent safety requirements in the method statement for the building works and ensure that the registered contractor is fully aware of and complies with all safety requirements. In this respect, the provisions of the Construction Site (Safety) Regulations administered by the Commissioner for Labour should be observed. 5. The booklet "Guidance Notes on Hand-dug Caissons", published by the Hong Kong Institution of Engineers, offers advice on good practice. Reference should also be made to the "Code of Safe Working Practices for Hand-dug Caissons", published by the Occupational Safety & Health Council. /6. I ....

- 2 6. A grace period of 12 months is given for adjustment to the new legislation. With effect from 1st February 1996, the BA will not give approval to plans involving handdug caissons unless there were exceptional circumstances as specified in section 16(1A) of the Buildings Ordinance. 7. Meanwhile, authorized persons and registered structural engineers are strongly urged to avoid using hand-dug caissons in the interest of safety for workers. Loss of life or limb is too high a price to pay. 8. A similar practice note has been issued to registered contractors.

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/14 First issued May 1993 This revision February 1995 (AD/SE) Index under : Caissons Hand-dug Caissons Ban on Hand-dug Caissons

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-60 159

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Buildings Ordinance, Cap 123 Specified Forms In exercise of the powers under section 22(4) of the Buildings Ordinance, I have specified the forms listed at Appendix A. 2. Where a section of the Buildings Ordinance or a Regulation requires an application, a notice or a certificate to be submitted in a specified form, the form listed in Appendix A for the relevant purpose should be used and should not be altered or amended in any way. Failure to use the specified form may invalidate the application, notice or certificate. 3. The specified forms will be kept under regular review and revised as necessary. Their most updated versions as well as the list at Appendix A can be obtained by downloading from the website of the Buildings Department (www.info.gov.hk/bd) or from the reception counter on 12/F of Buildings Departments headquarters at Pioneer Centre, 750 Nathan Road, Kowloon during office hours.

------

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/A/1 First issue August 1993 Last revision August 2001 This revision November 2002 (AD/Support) - Appendix A revamped Index under : Specified forms

Buildings Ordinance, Cap 123 Specified Forms Form No. Purpose Relevant section of Cap 123 or Regulation

Appendix A (PNAP 159) (APP-60)

Revision Date

BA1 BA1A BA1B

BA2 BA2A BA2B BA2C

BA4 BA5 BA6 BA7 BA8 BA9 BA10

BA 11

Application for registration as authorized person (AP) / registered structural engineer (RSE) / registered geotechnical engineer (RGE) for inclusion for retention of name for restoration of name Application for registration as registered general building contractor (RGBC) / registered specialist contractor (RSC) for inclusion for renewal of registration for restoration of name for approval of technical director/ other officer / person appointed to act for the purposes of the Buildings Ordinance Notice of appointment of AP and/or RSE and/or RGE Application for approval of plans of building works and/or street works, and certificate of preparation of plans Stability certificate of AP and/or RSE Notice of urgent works required as a result of accident or emergency Application for consent to the commencement & carrying out of building works or street works Application for renewal of consent to the carrying out of building works or street works Notice of appointment of RGBC/RSC, notice of commencement of building works or street works and undertaking by RGBC/RSC Notice from RGBC/RSC on ceasing to be appointed in respect of building works or street works and certificate in respect of that part of the building works or street works carried out by the RGBC/RSC -1-

BOs 3(6) BOs 3(9B) BOs 3(12)

12/2005 12/2004 12/2004

BOs 8B BOs 8C(2) BOs 8D(2) BOs 8B

12/2004 12/2004 12/2004 12/2004

B(A)R 23(1A) B(A)R 29(1), B(A)R 18A B(A)R 18 BOs 19(1), B(A)R 28 B(A)R 31 BOs 20(2) B(A)R 20

12/2005 12/2005 11/1994 12/2005 1/1996 1/1996 5/2004

B(A)R 24

5/2004

Form No. BA12

Purpose

BA13

BA14 BA14A BA15 BA16

BA17 BA18 BA19 BA20 BA21 BA22 BA23 BA24

Certificate on completion of building works resulting in a new temporary building, a new building or part of a new building and application for temporary occupation permit in respect of such building or part Certificate on completion of building works resulting in a new building and application for permit to occupy such building Certificate on completion of building works not resulting in a new building or of street works Certificate on completion of demolition works Notice of intended material change in the use of a building Application for modification of and/or exemption from the provisions of the Buildings Ordinance and/or Regulations made thereunder Application for permit to erect a temporary building Application for permit to erect a contractor's shed Application for permit to erect hoardings, covered walkways or gantries Notice of technically competent person or persons appointed to supervise demolition works Notice of nomination by AP/RSE/RGE of another AP/RSE/RGE to act in his stead during temporary inability to act Application for authorization to carry out and/or maintain groundwater drainage works Application for grant/renewal of licence for an oil storage installation Notification to the BA of change of business address of AP/RSE/RGE/RGBC/RSC -2-

Relevant section of Cap 123 or Regulation B(A)R 25, BOs 21(2)

Revision Date

12/2005

B(A)R 25, BOs 21(2) B(A)R 25 & 26 B(A)R 25 BOs 25(1) BOs 42(2)

12/2005

12/2005 12/2005 1/1996 9/2000

B(P)R 51 B(P)R 53(1) B(P)R 64 B(DW)R 8(3) B(A)R 23(2) BOs 28B(1) B(OSI)R 6(1) & 7(3) B(A)R 45

1/1996 5/2004 1/1996 5/2004 12/2005 1/1996 1/1996 2/2005

(Rev. 12/2005)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-61 161

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Development in Area Numbers 2 & 4 of the Scheduled Areas The Scheduled Areas No. 2 (North-western New Territories) and No. 4 (Ma On Shan) are defined in the Fifth Schedule of the Buildings Ordinance. The plans illustrating the exact extent of the areas are on display in the Buildings Department and in the Geotechnical Information Unit of the Civil Engineering Library. Location maps of the areas are shown in Figures 1 and 2 respectively. 2. This practice note describes geotechnical control measures in respect of building works in Area Numbers 2 & 4 of the Scheduled Areas (these Areas). It applies to submissions relating to ground investigation, foundation design and construction in these Areas, and to any groundwater pumping proposed in the Area Number 2 of the Scheduled Areas. It is complementary to PNAP 66 : Pile Foundations. The recommendations are based on practice developed since the discovery of the cavity problems and have been accepted by the profession. 3. The geology of these Areas comprises superficial deposits overlying metamorphosed sedimentary strata (siltstones, sandstones and marble) as well as igneous rocks. The marble usually has a karstic upper surface with solution features. Large cavities occur within the marble in some locations. The planning, design and construction of works which involve ground investigations, excavations, foundations or groundwater pumping may encounter significant difficulties as a result of these ground conditions. 4. As the ground conditions are complex, early involvement of Registered Geotechnical Engineers (RGEs), who are familiar with the geological conditions of the Scheduled Areas, is essential, in particular in reviewing the geological information and in ensuring that all relevant geotechnical controls under the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations are observed. Ground Investigation 5. By virtue of Buildings Ordinance Section 41(3), ground investigation in these Areas require approval of the Building Authority (BA). Plans of any proposed ground investigation in these Areas prescribed under Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(1) must therefore be submitted to the BA for approval and consent before the works are commenced. 6. Authorized Persons (APs), Registered Structural Engineers (RSEs) and RGEs are advised to ensure that ground investigation works are carried out to a high standard and are properly supervised. Guidance on ground investigation may be obtained from GEOGUIDE 2 : Guide to Site Investigation. It is advisable to employ competent contractors with a proven reputation who are capable of producing high quality work. 7. The site supervision requirements and the minimum qualifications and experience of the supervision personnel and the Competent Person (Logging) for ground investigation field works are given in Code of Practice for Site Supervision. The cores recovered should be examined and properly logged by a Competent Person (Logging). Guidance on this aspect can be found in GEOGUIDE 3: Guide to Rock and Soil Description. /Attention

-2-

Attention should be given to logging the location and size of the cavities, the nature of the cavity wall and the infill, together with rock discontinuities. Fracture indices including Total Core Recovery, Solid Core Recovery, Rock Quality Designation and Fracture Index should also be shown on the drill logs. 8. In these ground conditions, a ground investigation is best carried out in stages. It must be adequate to ascertain whether marble with cavities exists beneath the site, and allow an assessment of whether the cavities will affect the proposed development. Some deep drillholes will be required for this purpose. Cavities in marble, and related geological structures, may follow certain trends, and inclined boreholes may provide useful information if the dominant trend is vertical or near vertical. Geophysical survey may also provide additional information between drillholes. All drillholes should be grouted on completion. 9. It is advisable to carry out the initial stages of the ground investigation prior to the finalization of general building plans for the site because, in certain circumstances, adjustments to the locations of certain structures may be the most economical means of dealing with serious problems posed by cavities. 10. The depths of drillholes should relate to the depth of marble bedrock and the magnitude of the load to be applied by the structure. If marble is encountered, a minimum penetration of 20 m into sound marble rock is recommended in order to reduce the risk of existing cavities not being identified. Where cavities are encountered in the hole being drilled or in adjacent drillholes, increased penetration is necessary. The use of water as a flushing medium should be carefully controlled as there have been cases where sinkholes were induced by excessive use of flushing water. High quality core samples of the cavity infill can be obtained by using triple-tube core-barrels with air foam as the flushing medium. The intensity and depth of drillholes for each site will be governed by the nature of the structures proposed, the foundation loading and the ground conditions encountered. 11. Further investigation will normally be required once the layout of the development and the locations of piles have been decided. Some drillholes at the edges of the main piled foundation area may be required, since cavities at the edges are likely to be more detrimental than cavities at the inner part of the foundation area itself. 12. Discussion with the relevant district Chief Geotechnical Engineer of the Geotechnical Engineering Office before a ground investigation proposal is finalized may allow the optimum drillhole layout to be adopted and could expedite approvals of foundation plans. With regard to the requirements of Building (Administration) Regulation 20, at least two weeks prior notification of the intention to commence ground investigation work in these Areas should be given to the relevant district Chief Geotechnical Engineer. 13. Pending substantial completion of the building works, all cores and samples should be retained on site in good condition for inspection by the staff of the Buildings Department and the Geotechnical Engineering Office. Foundation Design 14. Driven or machine-bored piles will usually provide the most suitable foundation for heavy structures on sites underlain by marble. Hand-dug caissons require dewatering, which might be difficult and could induce the formation of sinkholes. PNAP 158 also restricts the use of hand-dug caissons. /15..

-3-

15. When driven piles are to be used, these should be of a suitably heavy section to withstand hard driving and with modified or strengthened tips. The modified section should be such as to allow the piles to be driven through and beyond any cover or rock bridging over shallow cavities or thin overhangs, and to prevent the piles deflecting where the marble surface is inclined. Pre-drilling may be necessary when very deep rock surfaces are expected or when piles have to penetrate thick karst zones. As it is not possible to determine the exact extent and configuration of subsurface cavities/overhang under each pile, the pile layout cannot be adjusted to suit all these features. It is, therefore, necessary to increase the number of piles used above the minimum so that, where cavities lead to local lack of support, the spare piles can then carry the redistributed load without being overstressed. It is necessary to consider this in the pile cap design. 16. When high capacity bored piles or barrettes are proposed, the effect of cavities below both the plan position of each pile or barrette and the surrounding area should be considered in the choice of founding level and allowable bearing capacity. Adequate drillholes should be sunk and, where appropriate, probing should be carried out to detect the presence of cavities, if any, within the zone significantly stressed by the piles. Supporting Documentation to Accompany Foundation Plans 17. The supporting documentation prescribed under Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(d)(ii) should accompany foundation plans for building works in these Areas to be submitted to the BA for approval, and submissions not in compliance with this requirement will be liable to be refused under Buildings Ordinance Sections 16(1)(a) and 16(1)(i). Foundation Construction 18. Where driven piles are used as foundations, the piling reports submitted to the Buildings Department shall include the complete blow count records throughout pile driving. These should be presented in the form of blows per 500 mm where driving is easy, reducing to blows per 100 mm where driving is hard. The blow count should also be plotted against depth of penetration for each pile, in terms of blows per 100 mm. It is suggested that the dividing point between easy and hard driving should be at 10 blows per 100 mm. 19. surveyed. The deviation of each driven pile from its initial position should also be

20. In karst areas, there is always the risk despite conservative design, that foundation problems might arise, e.g. buckling of piles during driving, and reactivation of sinkholes or collapse of cavities during piling or foundation construction. The RSE and RGE should therefore review the ground conditions experienced during foundation construction. Pile driving and other foundation construction records should be assessed at close intervals and the necessity or otherwise of modifying the design should be considered. 21. Trial piling and instrumentation of piles may be necessary in karst areas. General guidance on proof tests on piles is given in PNAP 66. Other non-destructive tests may have to be carried out on piles which are suspected to have deflected/defects or have anomalies in pile driving records. /Requirement

-4-

Requirement for Submission of a Performance Review 22. In respect of foundation works in these Areas, a condition may be imposed under Buildings Ordinance Section 17(1)(6) to require a performance review of foundation construction to be submitted and found acceptable prior to consent to commencement of superstructure works. However, it is not intended to impose this condition on every site within the Area. 23. Where a performance review is required it should include a review of the ground conditions experienced during pile driving, pile installation or foundation construction, and an assessment of pile driving or construction records. The review should also contain the results and an assessment of the pile load tests and evidence to demonstrate that any consequential changes in the design have been undertaken and plans suitably amended and approved. 24. Consent to commence superstructure works may be refused under Buildings Ordinance Section 16(3)(ba) if any required performance review fails to demonstrate that the foundation works have been adequately inspected and the construction records adequately assessed in the course of construction, or that any necessary changes in the design have been undertaken and plans suitably amended and approved. Monitoring 25. The RSE or RGE should arrange for monitoring of the settlement of any building founded on cavernous marble using precise levelling or other approved methods. Details of the proposed monitoring should be submitted to GEO for comments via BD prior to installation of the monitoring stations. Such monitoring should commence as soon as possible after the completion of foundation works, and this should be continued until issue of occupation permit. Readings should be taken at intervals sufficiently close to minimize scatter, with a frequency not less than monthly. The results, together with an assessment of these should be submitted to the Buildings Department monthly. Any unusual or significant settlement or impact should be brought to the attention of the Buildings Department immediately. 26. It should be noted that, where appropriate, the Geotechnical Engineering Office will take over and continue the monitoring for a period following the granting of an occupation permit. 27. APs, RSEs or RGEs should note that buildings founded in weathered siltstones and sandstones above marble may also encounter difficulties. They are encouraged to monitor the settlements and impacts during the construction of these buildings and to bring any unusual settlements to the attention of the Buildings Department immediately. Water Wells 28. Where water wells are proposed within these Areas, application to the Building Authority for approval shall be accompanied by a submission prepared by a RGE demonstrating that groundwater extraction will not adversely affect the site and the surrounding areas. /29.

-5-

29. As mentioned in paragraph 10 of PNAP 17, it has been agreed with the Water Authority that, within Yuen Long town in Area Number 2 of the Scheduled Areas, piped flushing water will normally be supplied. Within Ma On Shan in Area Number 4 of the Scheduled Area, facilities for piped flushing water have been provided. Additional Information Available 30. A considerable amount of information exists on the geology of these Areas. For Area Number 2 of the Scheduled Areas, twenty 1:5000 Geological Map sheets are available, together with an account of the geology as Hong Kong Geological Survey Sheet Report No. 1 - Geology of Yuen Long. For Area Number 4 of the Scheduled Areas, a 1:5000 Geological Map sheet is available, together with an account of the geology as Hong Kong Geological Survey Sheet Report No. 5 - Geology of Ma On Shan. Copies of the Sheet Reports can be obtained (free of charge) from the Planning Division of the Geotechnical Engineering Office. Copies of the 1:5000 Geological Map sheets can be purchased from Map Publications Centre, Survey and Mapping Office of the Lands Department. 31. The updated sources of information on site investigation are given in Geotechnical Engineering Office Technical Guidance No.5.

( H W CHEUNG) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BORD/A/15 (II) BD GP/BORD/75 First issue November 1993 This issue December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD) (Paras.1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 12, 17, 20, 25, 27, 28 & 30 amended, para. 4 & 31 added and location maps updated) Index under: Scheduled Areas No. 2 & 4 Foundation Works in the Scheduled Areas Ground Investigation in the Scheduled Areas Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 1990 & 1993 Performance Review Marble

(PNAP 161) (APP-61) Figure 1

THE SCHEDULED AREA OF THE NORTHWEST NEW TERRITORIES


(THE AREA IS TERMED AREA NUMBER 2 OF THE SCHEDULED AREAS IN THE BUILDINGS ORDINANCE)

(Rev. 12/2005)

(PNAP 161) (APP-61) Figure 2 THE SCHEDULED AREA OF MA ON SHAN


(THE AREA IS TERMED AREA NUMBER 4 OF THE SCHEDULED AREAS IN THE BUILDINGS ORDINANCE)

(Rev. 12/2005)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-62 165

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Sewage Tunnel Works Sewage Tunnels (Statutory Easements) Ordinance Section 17A and Scheduled Area Number 5, Buildings Ordinance, Cap 123 The Sewage Tunnels (Statutory Easements) Ordinance [ST(SE)O] gazetted on 5 November 1993 provides inter alia for the creation of statutory easements and other rights over land in connection with sewage tunnels. For building works, the consequential amendment, viz. the new section 17A of the Buildings Ordinance, is relevant. 2. Under section 4 of the ST(SE)O, the Secretary for Planning, Environment and Lands may cause to be published in the Gazette plans showing the route of sewage tunnels and the land situated on the route over which easements and rights may be created. Such plans are deposited in the Land Registry. Copies of these plans are also available for inspection in the Buildings Department and the Drainage Services Department (DSD). 3. The recently enacted Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 1995 has added to the Fifth Schedule of the Ordinance the sewage tunnel protection areas as Scheduled Area No. 5. These areas are the areas delineated and shown edged black on the seven plans numbered KCE/S/G/765A to 771A, dated 11 November 1994, signed by the Secretary for Planning, Environment and Lands and deposited in the Land Registry. 4. With effect from 1 March 1995, all ground investigations in these areas will become building works as defined under section 2 of the Buildings Ordinance and be subject to the control under Part II of the Ordinance. 5. Proposals for building works on land situated on and in the vicinity of a route of a sewage tunnel are subject to section 17A of the Buildings Ordinance. This empowers the Building Authority to refuse approval of, or impose conditions on, proposals found to be incompatible with sewage tunnel works gazetted under section 4 of the ST(SE)O. 6. Sewage tunnels are constructed at great depths so as to minimize adverse effect on building development on the land above : a minimum cover of 30 m of bedrock will normally be allowed. In the interest of public safety, however, it is still necessary for relevant technical requirements to be met to avoid incompatibility between any building works (especially foundation works) and sewage tunnel works. For this purpose, the technical notes appended have been prepared by DSD.

----

/7. Plans ....

- 2 7. Plans submitted to the Buildings Department for proposed building works within 100 meters from the centreline of the gazetted route of sewage tunnels or for ground investigation works within Scheduled Area No. 5 will be circulated to DSD under the system for centralised processing of building plans. The procedures of the system will be followed. 8. The ST(SE)O also contains provisions for compensation. enquiries on this and related matters to the Director of Lands. Please direct

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/SEW/12 First issued April 1994 (AD/LM) This revision May 1995 (AD/LM) Index under : Sewage tunnel works Sewage tunnels

PNAP 165 Appendix APP-62 Technical Notes for Guidance in Assessing the Effects of Civil Engineering Works/Building Development on Sewage Tunnels Works These technical notes apply to building works on lands situated on or adjacent to the alignment of sewage tunnels. A. General

2. "Sewage tunnel" means an underground tunnel and associated underground structures for the transfer of sewage. A shaft connecting to a sewage tunnel is part of the sewage tunnel. For the application of these guidelines, the extent of sewage tunnels is defined by the route and minimum depth as shown on the gazetted sewage tunnel plan. The extent of a shaft is the external diameter in soil and the internal diameter plus 5 metres in rock. The Director of Drainage Services should be consulted if there is any query concerning the route and extent of sewage tunnels. 3. Shafts of sewage tunnels are located within Drainage Services Department sites. Tunnels to be constructed between these shafts are generally deep with at least 30 metres of rock cover. Most of the construction works on ground surface will not have any significant effect on sewage tunnels and no restrictions on these works will be necessary. 4. The main risks of damage to sewage tunnels arise from either site formation or foundation works constructed immediately adjacent to shaft sites or from boreholes, wells, shafts, tunnels, grouting or other deep works constructed close to sewage tunnels. There is also a risk from ground investigation works for a project requiring deep boreholes to be drilled into the rock. 5. For the purposes of these notes the term "rock" is defined as Grades I, II and III according to Table 4 - Classification of rock Material Decomposition Grades - in Geoguide 3 (Guide to rock and soil descriptions) published by the Geotechnical Engineering Office. The term "soil" is defined as Grades IV, V and VI, also defined in Geoguide 3, reclamation materials, and marine and alluvial deposits. 6. Leakage of sewage and the migration of gas from sewage tunnels poses health and safety risks. These risks must be evaluated when considering any proposed works near sewage tunnels, especially in respect of any dewatering works where there is the potential for the migration of methane in solution in the groundwater. 7. All proposals for new building works within 100 metres from the centreline of the gazetted route of sewage tunnels shall be subject to special scrutiny by Government. Each proposal shall be treated on its individual technical merits and subject to the requirements of the following technical guidelines. /B. Site ....

- 2 B. Site Formation or Foundation Works

8. Where site formation, foundation works or excavation for basements, shafts, tunnels and such like are proposed above or adjacent to sewage tunnels, the effects of such works shall be within the following limits : (a) The vertical or horizontal pressure on any sewage tunnel structure in soil due to the above operations (including filling and dewatering) and due to additional loads transmitted from foundations (including loads arising during construction) shall not be varied by more than 20kPa. or by 5% of the total overburden pressure for structures at depths greater than 20m. For sewage tunnel structures in rock, where it is not possible to assess the change in ground pressure due to the above operations, the hydrostatic pressure shall not be increased or decreased by more than 50kPa. Differential movement resulting from the works shall not produce a calculated final diametric distoration exceeding 0.1% of the shaft or sewage tunnel internal diameter and the calculated total movement in any plane shall not exceed 20mm. The peak particle velocities at any sewage tunnel structures resulting from blasting (where permitted) or from driving or withdrawing of piles or any operation which can induce prolonged vibration shall not exceed 25mm/sec for blasting and 15mm/sec for other operations. No holes or excavations shall be sunk or excavated within a distance of 3m from any point of any sewage tunnel structure without prior approval by the Building Authority for the works and the method to be employed. No pile, foundation or well shall be driven or constructed within a distance of 3m in any plane of any point of any sewage tunnel structure. Any part of a ground anchor shall be more than 3m from any part of any sewage tunnel structure.

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

9. Proposals for monitoring the effects on sewage tunnels shall be submitted to the Building Authority before works commence and subsequent data shall be submitted to the Building Authority for the duration of the works. /C. Ground ....

- 3 C. Ground Investigation Works

10. Where ground investigations are proposed within Scheduled Area No. 5, it is necessary for the following to be submitted to the Building Authority : (a) (b) (c) (d) details of the exploration and locations of the proposed exploration holes, field testing or instrumentations relative to sewage tunnels; proposed depth of holes, field testing or instrumentation; a method statement for sinking holes, conducting field testings or installing instrumentation; and a method statement for checking the alignment of holes when the minimum distance from a hole to any point of a sewage tunnel is less than 50m should holes be sunk to a depth within 3m from the highest point of the sewage tunnels. Any proposal will also be judged against the following technical guidelines : (a) The vertical and horizontal pressure on any sewage tunnel structure in soil due to site investigation works including field testing such as plate load test, pressuremeter test, packer test or any operation should not be increased or decreased by more than 20kPa or by 5% of the total overburden pressure for structures at depths greater than 20m. The peak particle velocities at any sewage tunnel structure resulting from -(i) artificial shocks generated either by the detonation of explosives or a mechanical blow at ground surface or at depth within a hole should not exceed 25mm/sec; and percussion drilling, hammer drilling or any operation which can induce prolonged vibration, should not exceed 15mm/sec.

11.

(b)

(ii)

(c) D.

No holes should be sunk or excavated within a distance of 3m from any point of any sewage tunnel.

Dewatering Works and Wells

12. Assessment shall be made regarding the leakage of sewage and the migration of gas in respect of all dewatering and well proposals within 100 metres of sewage tunnels. Monitoring proposals shall be submitted to the Building Authority with an agreed programme for the duration of the dewatering or extraction. May 1995

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-63 166

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

GEOGUIDE 1 (Second Edition) Guide to Retaining Wall Design The second edition of GEOGUIDE 1 (Guide to Retaining Wall Design), prepared by the Geotechnical Engineering Office, is now available for purchase from the Government Publications Sales Centre. It supersedes the first edition published in July 1982 and is the result of extensive consultation, locally and overseas, with consulting engineers, contractors, academics, professional bodies and Government departments. 2. The GEOGUIDE recommends a standard of good practice for the design of permanent retaining walls in Hong Kong. It covers common retaining walls and includes conventional reinforced concrete walls, gravity walls (such as crib walls, gabion walls and mass concrete walls) and cantilevered retaining walls. 3. The second edition of GEOGUIDE 1 represents a major change in the approach to the design of retaining walls. The first edition advocated limit state analysis with global factors of safety. This second edition recommends limit state analysis with partial factors of safety. This approach is more rational and permits uncertainties in major parameters to be allowed for individually. In addition, the new GEOGUIDE gives detailed treatment to the selection of geotechnical parameters and groundwater pressures for design and to the interrelation between design and construction. In general, there will be cost savings in the construction of some types of retaining wall by designing to the new GEOGUIDE. 4. Permanent retaining walls designed in their entirety in accordance with the standards and provisions of the first edition or the second edition of GEOGUIDE 1 will be acceptable to the Building Authority. Designs based on a mixture of the guidance given in the two editions are not acceptable. Design submissions must clearly state which edition of the GEOGUIDE has been used. It is strongly recommended that designs be based on the second edition rather than on the first edition. In this regard it is relevant to note that after July 1995, only designs based on the second edition will be acceptable for public works.

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/8 First issued August 1994 (AD/SE, GGE) This revision June 1995 (AD/SE, GGE) Index under : GEOGUIDE 1 - Guide to Retaining Wall Design Retaining Wall Design - GEOGUIDE 1

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-64 167

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Methods for Testing Hong Kong Soils (GEOSPEC 3 - Model Specification for Soil Testing) Introduction This Practice Note announces the adoption of a Hong Kong soil testing standard Geospec 3 to suit Hong Kong conditions. The standard is prepared to cater for the need of the profession for a comprehensive Hong Kong soil testing standard. It covers soil classification and compaction tests as listed in Appendix A (Expanded Phase I soil tests 32 nos.) and soil shear strength and compressibility tests as listed in Appendix B (Phase II soil tests 7 nos.). Geospec 3 Model Specification for Soil Testing is published by the Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO) of the Civil Engineering and Development Department and can be purchased online at the website of the Government Bookstore: http//bookstore.esdlife.com. Background 2. In 1992, with an aim to produce a series of standards for the testing of soils in Hong Kong, the GEO initiated a review of standards for the testing of soils, which is based on amendment of British Standard BS 1377: 1990 Methods of Test for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes. The first phase of the review covered soil classification and compaction tests. The result of the review was the recommendation of a new standard contained in GEO Report No. 36 Methods of Test for Soils in Hong Kong for Civil Engineering Purposes (Phase I Tests). PNAP 167 was first issued in September 1994 to promulgate the new standards contained in GEO Report No. 36. The second phase of the review included the soil shear strength and compressibility tests (Phase II soil tests), as well as Phase I tests and additional tests of the same nature (Expanded Phase I soil tests). The Geospec 3 now available contains 32 standard procedures for Expanded Phase I soil tests and 7 standard procedures for Phase II soil tests. Approval of plans or consent application 3. It is recommended that Authorized Persons (AP), Registered Structural Engineers (RSE) and Registered Geotechnical Engineers (RGE) should adopt Geospec 3 as the / standard..

standard when specifying relevant soil testing for the investigation, design and construction of building development projects. Whenever a test report involving soil tests is submitted in support of a plan for approval or in compliance with a condition of approval/consent under the Buildings Ordinance section 17(1) sub-section 6(b), the Building Authority (BA) may refuse approval of plans or consent for commencement of building works if the soil tests have not been carried out in accordance with Geospec 3. The BA may also refuse approval of ground investigation plans in the Scheduled Areas, site formation plans or any other plans with geotechnical content if the soil tests are carried out at variance with the standards in Geospec 3. Likewise, if the in-situ density tests and laboratory compaction tests on fill material have not been carried out in accordance with Geospec 3, the Certificate of Completion for the filling works may not be accepted (PNAP 55 refers). Selection of laboratories 4. Where soil tests are to be carried out, only laboratories accredited under the Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) for the relevant tests shall be employed. The BA will only accept results issued on HOKLAS-endorsed test certificates or reports. It is therefore important that the AP/RSE/RGE should ensure that the laboratory appointed has been accredited by Hong Kong Accreditation Service (HKAS) to carry out the tests ordered and is authorised to issue HOKLAS-endorsed test certificates or reports for these tests. The HKAS publishes a Directory of Accredited Laboratories (HOKLAS 009) every year listing all the laboratories accredited under HOKLAS for various tests. Information on the most updated list of laboratories and their accredited tests may be obtained from HKAS through the Quality Services Division of the Innovation and Technology Commission at telephone 2829 4840 or the HKAS website http://www.info.gov.hk/itc/hkas. Guidance on selection of laboratories is given in clause 2.3 of Geospec 3. Credibility of soil testing data 5. The BA attaches great importance to the representativeness and accuracy of soil testing data which are used to support the proposed investigation, design or construction for building development projects. In this regard, the BA takes a serious view of the credibility of such data and will give them due consideration in the context of both the disapproval of plans and the administration of sanctions for knowingly misrepresenting material facts in submissions to the BA. To assist APs, RSEs and RGEs , the following practical guidelines are given: / care .. 2

care should be taken in preparing the test schedule according to the geology of the site and relevant information should be provided for each test in accordance with Geospec 3, including information on soil type; sampling, storage and transportation of samples and preparation of test samples should be properly supervised to prevent sample disturbance and to ensure sample security; tests should be carried out with due care and test results are properly documented, and where appropriate, analysed and vetted; and any HOKLAS-endorsed test reports should not be reproduced except in full and any doubts on such reports should be clarified with HKAS for submission to the BA.

Laboratory Accreditation to Geospec 3 Standards 6. For any soil tests carried out on or after 1 July 2004, the BA will only accept HOKLAS-endorsed soil test certificates or reports from laboratories which have been accredited by HKAS for the relevant tests in accordance with Geospec 3. Phase I soil tests in GEO Report 36 7. For soil tests carried out before 1 July 2004, the BA will continue to accept HOKLAS-endorsed certificates or reports for Phase I soil tests listed in Appendix C conducted in accordance with GEO Report No. 36. The BA will also accept HOKLAS-endorsed test certificates or reports for the relevant Phase I soil tests conducted in accordance with Geospec 3 as equivalent.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/GEO/10 First Issue September 1994 Last revision May 2004 (AD/NB2, AD(G)/HKI) This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup) (Paras. 1,3, 4 & 5 amended) Index under: Soil testing 3

Appendix A (PNAP 167) (APP-64) Testing Standard for Expanded Phase I Soil Tests in Geospec 3 Standard methods Geospec 3 Test Method 5.1 Geospec 3 Test Method 5.2 Geospec 3 Test Method 5.3 Geospec 3 Test Method 6.1 Geospec 3 Test Method 6.2 Geospec 3 Test Method 7.1 Geospec 3 Test Method 7.2 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.1 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.2 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.3 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.4 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.5 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.6 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.7 Geospec 3 Test Method 9.1 Geospec 3 Test Method 9.2 Geospec 3 Test Method 9.3 Geospec 3 Test Method 9.4 Geospec 3 Test Method 9.5 Specific tests Determination of Moisture Content by Oven-drying at 45 5C Determination of Moisture Content by Oven-drying at 105 5C Comparative Test for the Determination of Moisture Content by Oven-drying Determination of Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index Determination of Liquidity Index Determination of Particle Density by Gas Jar Method Determination of Particle Density by Small Pyknometer Method Determination of Particle Size Distribution by Wet Sieving (with Dispersant) Determination of Particle Size Distribution by Wet Sieving (without Dispersant) Determination of Particle Size Distribution by the Pipette Method (with Dispersant) Determination of Particle Size Distribution by the Pipette Method (without Dispersant) Determination of Particle Size Distribution by the Hydrometer Method (with Dispersant) Determination of Particle Size Distribution by the Hydrometer Method (without Dispersant) Construction of a Continuous Particle Size Distribution Curve from the Results of Wet Sieving and Sedimentation Tests Determination of Organic Matter Content Determination of the Mass Loss on Ignition Determination of Total Sulphate Content of Soils and Sulphate Content of Groundwater and of Aqueous Soil Extracts by Gravimetric Method Determination of Water-soluble Chloride Content Determination of the pH Value

Testing Standard for Expanded Phase I Soil Tests in Geospec 3 (Contd) Standard methods Geospec 3 Test Method 10.1 Geospec 3 Test Method 10.2 Geospec 3 Test Method 10.3 Geospec 3 Test Method 10.4 Geospec 3 Test Method 10.5 Geospec 3 Test Method 10.6 Geospec 3 Test Method 10.7 Geospec 3 Test Method 10.8 Geospec 3 Test Method 11.1 Geospec 3 Test Method 11.2 Geospec 3 Test Method 11.3 Geospec 3 Test Method 11.4 Geospec 3 Test Method 12.1 Specific tests Determination of Dry Density/Moisture Content Relationship of Soils Containing Particles Which are Not Susceptible to Crushing (Using 1000 cc Mould and 2.5 kg Rammer) Determination of Dry Density/Moisture Content Relationship of Soils Containing Particles Which are Susceptible to Crushing (Using 1000 cc Mould and 2.5 kg Rammer) Determination of Dry Density/Moisture Content Relationship of Soils Containing Particles Which are Not Susceptible to Crushing (Using CBR Mould and 2.5 kg Rammer) Determination of Dry Density/Moisture Content Relationship of Soils Containing Particles Which are Susceptible to Crushing (Using CBR Mould and 2.5 kg Rammer) Determination of Dry Density/Moisture Content Relationship of Soils Containing Particles Which are Not Susceptible to Crushing (Using 1000 cc Mould and 4.5 kg Rammer) Determination of Dry Density/Moisture Content Relationship of Soils Containing Particles Which are Susceptible to Crushing (Using 1000 cc Mould and 4.5 kg Rammer) Determination of Dry Density/Moisture Content Relationship of Soils Containing Particles Which are Not Susceptible to Crushing (Using CBR Mould and 4.5 kg Rammer) Determination of Dry Density/Moisture Content Relationship of Soils Containing Particles Which are Susceptible to Crushing (Using CBR Mould and 4.5 kg Rammer) Determination of In-situ Bulk Density and In-situ Dry Density of Soils by Sand Replacement Method Suitable for Fine- and Medium-grained Soils (With Small pouring Cylinder) Determination of In-situ Bulk Density and In-situ Dry Density of Soils by Sand Replacement Method Suitable for Fine-, Mediumand Coarse-grained Soils (With Large Pouring Cylinder) Determination of In-situ Bulk Density and In-situ Dry Density of Soils by Nuclear Densometer Method Suitable for Fine- and Medium-grained Soils Determination of Relative Compaction of Fill Material Determination of the California Bearing Ratio (CBR)

(Rev. 5/2004)

Appendix B (PNAP 167) (APP-64) Testing Standard for Phase II Soil Tests in Geospec 3 Standard methods Geospec 3 Test Method 14.1 Geospec 3 Test Method 14.2 Geospec 3 Test Method 15.1 Geospec 3 Test Method 15.2 Geospec 3 Test Method 15.3 Geospec 3 Test Method 16.1 Geospec 3 Test Method 16.2 Specific tests The One-dimensional Consolidation Test The Isotropic Compression Test in a Triaxial Cell The Unconsolidated Undrained Triaxial Compression Test Without Pore Pressure Measurement The Isotropically Consolidated Undrained Triaxial Compression Test With Pore Pressure Measurement The Isotropically Consolidated Drained Triaxial Compression Test With Measurement of Volume Change The Direct Shear Test (Small Shear Box Apparatus) The Direct Shear Test (Large Shear Box Apparatus)

(5/2004)

Appendix C (PNAP 167) (APP-64) Phase I Soil Tests in accordance with GEO Report No. 36 Test Method GEO Report No. 36 Test 2.3.2A GEO Report No. 36 Test 2.3.2B GEO Report No. 36 Test 2.3.2C GEO Report No. 36 Test 2.4.3 GEO Report No. 36 Test 2.5.3 GEO Report No. 36 Test 2.9.2A GEO Report No. 36 Test 2.9.2B GEO Report No. 36 Test 2.9.4A GEO Report No. 36 Test 2.9.4B GEO Report No. 36 Test 2.9.5A GEO Report No. 36 Test 2.9.5B GEO Report No. 36 Test 2.9.6 GEO Report No. 36 Test 4.3.3A Test Description Determination of moisture content by oven-drying at 105C5C Determination of moisture content by oven-drying at 45C5C Comparative test for the determination of moisture content by oven-drying Determination of liquid limit by the cone penetrometer method Determination of plastic limit, plasticity index and liquidity index Determination of particle size distribution by wet sieving (with dispersant) Determination of particle size distribution by wet sieving (without dispersant) Determination of particle size distribution by the pipette method (with dispersant) Determination of particle size distribution by the pipette method (without dispersant) Determination of particle size distribution by the hydrometer method (with dispersant) Determination of particle size distribution by the hydrometer method (without dispersant) Construction of a continuous particle size distribution curve from the results of wet sieving and sedimentation tests Determination of the dry density/moisture content relationship of soils containing particles which are not susceptible to crushing (with 1000cc mould and 2.5kg rammer) Determination of the dry density/moisture content relationship of soils containing particles which are susceptible to crushing (with 1000cc mould and 2.5kg rammer) Equivalent Test Method in Geospec 3 Geospec 3 Test Method 5.2 Geospec 3 Test Method 5.1 Geospec 3 Test Method 5.3 Geospec 3 Test Method 6.1 & 6.2 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.1 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.2 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.3 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.4 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.5 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.6 Geospec 3 Test Method 8.7 Geospec 3 Test Method 10.1

GEO Report No. 36 Test 4.3.3B

Geospec 3 Test Method 10.2

Phase I Soil Tests in accordance with GEO Report No. 36 (Contd) Test Method Test Description Equivalent Test Method in Geospec 3 Geospec 3 Test Method 10.3

GEO Report No. 36 Determination of the dry density/moisture Test 4.3.4A content relationship of soils containing particles which are not susceptible to crushing (with CBR mould and 2.5kg rammer) GEO Report No. 36 Determination of the dry density/moisture Test 4.3.4B content relationship of soils containing particles which are susceptible to crushing (with CBR mould and 2.5kg rammer) GEO Report No. 36 Determination of the insitu bulk density and Test 9.2.1 insitu dry density of soil by the sand replacement method suitable for fine- and medium-grained soils (with small pouring cylinder) GEO Report No. 36 Determination of the insitu bulk density and Test 9.2.2 insitu dry density of soil by the sand replacement method suitable for fine-, medium- and coarse-grained soils (with large pouring cylinder) Notes : (1) (2)

Geospec 3 Test Method 10.4 Geospec 3 Test Method 11.1

Geospec 3 Test Method 11.2

The Guidelines for Laboratory General Requirements and Sample Preparation given in Appendix A of GEO Report No. 36 shall be adopted. Information on soil type and oven-drying temperature shall be provided to the laboratory for all tests that involve the determination of moisture content.

(5/2004)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-65 169

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Natural Lighting to Staircases Building (Planning) Regulation 40

Building (Planning) Regulation (B(P)R) 40 stipulates, inter alia, that a staircase in any building intended for common use by more than two tenants shall be provided with adequate natural lighting. 2. The adequacy of natural lighting for staircases depends on a number of factors including the size, number and location of windows, type of glass and design of the staircase. The following guidelines aim to assist in the design of staircases as satisfying the natural lighting requirement under B(P)R 40 : a. Clear glass should be used; b. The staircase window(s) for each storey should have an aggregate glass area of not less than one-tenth of the plan area within the staircase enclosure; c. For buildings not exceeding 12 storeys, staircase windows should face into an uncovered space complying with the "open air" requirement as defined under B(P)R 2(1); d. For buildings exceeding 12 storeys, staircase windows should face into an uncovered and unenclosed space with a base width of not less than 2.3m and a length at right angles to the base of not less than 4.5m (the full width of any adjoining service lane can be included); and e. Scissor staircases should be designed to ensure adequate and even distribution of natural lighting to each flight. The following arrangements would be acceptable but alternatives would be considered: i. windows in the end wall of a landing being centrally positioned and having a minimum width of 1.3m; and windows in the side wall of a landing or of any flight having a minimum width of 650mm, not less than two windows being provided for each storey and the separating wall between flights being reduced to ensure that the back flight has adequate light. /3. ..

ii.

-23. It is accepted that adequate artificial lighting with a backup emergency system is a viable alternative option for replacement of natural lighting. To allow greater flexibility in design without compromising safety, the Building Authority is prepared to waive the requirement for the provision of natural lighting under B(P)R 40 if he is satisfied with the following: (i) (ii) The staircase is provided with permanent artificial lighting having 30 lux minimum lighting level at floor level; The artificial lighting is backed up by an automatically activated emergency lighting system. Such emergency lighting system complies with the requirements set out in the Code of Practice for Minimum Fire Service Installations and Equipment and would provide a horizontal illuminance at floor level of not less than 2 lux in event of emergency; and Proper management is in place to ensure that the artificial lighting and backup emergency systems are well maintained and in effective working order.

(iii)

4. For the purpose of paragraph 3(iii), the BA would normally accept that a building would have proper management if the maintenance of the artificial lighting and backup emergency system is to be managed by a management company upon the occupation of the building, and that the requirement for the regular maintenance of the system is incorporated in the Deed of Mutual Covenant of the building.

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/20 (II) First issue November 1994 This revision March 2003 (AD/NB1) (General revision) Index under : Building (Planning) Regulation 40 Natural lighting to staircases Artificial lighting to staircase

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-66 170

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Metal Refuse Chutes at Construction Sites Temporary refuse chutes, assembled from old metal barrels, have been in common use at building construction sites. 2. Such installations at the external parts of buildings under construction are not satisfactory. The chutes can be a noise nuisance to residents in the neighbourhood. In particular, they are not safe. They are subject to the effects of weather and the constant impact of building debris. These conditions could affect the stability of the installations. 3. In the event of collapse, these metal chutes pose a hazard not only to the workers on site, but also to any passers-by. 4. You are requested to adopt other safer means of lowering and removing building debris at construction sites. Where refuse chutes are used, you should ensure that they are properly assembled, secured and installed. You should consider using chutes made of other materials of sufficient strength and installing them in internal areas of the site, so as to reduce the noise level. 5. Authorized persons and registered structural engineers have an important role in supervising building works and in ensuring construction site safety. Please ensure that proper safety measures are in place in the sites under your control. Please also help to bring home to contractors and developers the message about safety and environmental consideration. 6. A similar practice note has been issued to registered contractors.

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/ACT/13 First issued August 1994 (AD/D) Index under : Metal refuse chutes at construction sites

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-67 172

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Introduction

Energy Efficiency of Buildings Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation

Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation, which came into effect on 21 July 1995, imposes energy efficient requirements. It aims at reducing heat transfer through building envelope thus saving the electricity consumption for air-conditioning by requiring the external walls and roofs of a commercial or hotel building to be designed and constructed to have a suitable Overall Thermal Transfer Value (OTTV). The Regulation applies to building works in accordance with section 39 of the Buildings Ordinance. Review of OTTV Control 2. Recently, Buildings Department has completed a review of the OTTV control. This practice note has accordingly been revised to incorporate the recommendations made in the review. This revision will take effect on 17 July 2000 and is applicable to all new building projects for which building plans are submitted for the first time for approval. 3. As a result of the review, the amendments made to the Code of Practice for Overall Thermal Transfer Value in Buildings 1995 are : (a) in the case of a building tower, the OTTV should not exceed 30 W/m2 (previously 35 W/m2); and (b) in the case of a podium, the OTTV should not exceed 70 W/m2 (previously 80 W/m2). 4. The associated administrative arrangements have also been reviewed and revised. Details of these revised arrangements are given below. Procedure 5. It is possible that the design of the facade of a building may not have been finalised when building plans are first submitted. Accordingly, the Building Authority would accept that the first submission of building plans needs not be accompanied by the information and calculations as required by Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation 5. However, after the approval of building plans and prior to the application for consent to commence building works, submission of detailed OTTV calculations and information on the standard forms (Form OTTV 1 to 4) set out in the schedule to the OTTV Code is required under Regulation 10 of the Building (Administration) Regulations. 6. At the time of building plan submission or upon application for occupation permit as the case may be, the OTTVs of the external walls and roofs of the building and the shading coefficient of glass should be indicated on the building plans or record plans as relevant. /7.

-27. Upon application for Occupation Permit, the following OTTV documents together with the record plans are required to be submitted : (a) (b) (c) the finalised version of the OTTV report, including OTTV calculations; test certificates or other published specifications for the building materials used, such as glass used for fenestration and facade; and the OTTV Summary Sheet on a standard form in Appendix A.

Acceptance of Building Materials 8. If building materials other than those listed in the OTTV Code are used, their OTTV or equivalent should be obtained from reliable sources. It would facilitate processing of building plans if full background to the source of information and suitability for local conditions is detailed in the submission. Sunshading and Innovative Designs 9. Genuine sunshades used to assist in the reduction of the OTTV will not be counted for plot ratio and site coverage calculations or be regarded as obstructions to prescribed windows if they project 1.5m or less from external walls. Sunshades will not normally be allowed to project over streets under section 31(1) of the Buildings Ordinance, but exemptions may be considered in individual cases if special circumstances so justify. 10. The Building Authority can accept designs other than those stipulated in the Code of Practice for OTTV in Buildings provided that these designs are comparable or better in terms of energy efficiency. Innovative designs which aim at reducing OTTV would not be penalised in terms of plot ratio and site coverage if they could be demonstrated to be effective. 11. Authorized persons are encouraged to consult a Registered Professional Engineer in building services or mechanical discipline in assessing the design assumptions adopted in the evaluation of energy efficiency in buildings, particularly for innovative designs other than the method stipulated in the Code of Practice. A comprehensive approach to energy conservation produces better results. The services of a Registered Professional Engineer in these disciplines will contribute to this.

( C M LEUNG ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/LEG/22 First issue May 1995 This revision June 2000 (AD/SE) paras. 1 to 7 and Appendix A amended Index under : Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation Code of Practice for OTTV in Buildings Energy Efficiency, OTTV, Sunshading

Appendix A PNAP 172 OTTV Summary Sheet


Address : Building Type 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. Hotel Office (including industrial/office) Shops Others*, please specify : Registered Professional Engineers (Building Services/Mechanical) 2. Architect 3. Others, please specify : Podium 4. Cinema 5. Plant Rooms 6. Others m m m m window to wall ratio : m m

APP-67
BD Ref. No.

OTTV calculated by

Classification Designated Use

Tower 1. Office 2. Hotel Rooms 3. Others m m window to wall ratio :

1. Shops 2. Offices 3. Restaurants

No. of Storeys (excluding ground floor) Gross Floor Area Usable Floor Area Total External Wall Area (including windows) Total Window Area Total Skylight Area *Weighted Opaque Wall Average Window U-value Opaque Roof (W/m K) Skylight Glass Type Window Double Glazing External Shading

Glass Type Skylight

Doubling Glazing External Shading **Weighted Average Wall Absorpitivity Roof **Weighted Average Wall Density Roof Wall OTTV Roof Overall average Additional information/views on energy efficiency control :

= m W/m K W/m K W/m K W/m K Reflective, Area = m, SC = Tinted, Area = m, SC= Clear, Area = m, SC= Yes No Overhang Yes No Sidefin Yes No Reflective, Area = m, SC = Tinted, Area = m, SC= Clear, Area = m, SC= Yes No Yes No

VLT = VLT = VLT =

VLT = VLT = VLT =

= m W/m K W/m K W/m K W/m K Reflective, Area = m, SC = Tinted Area = m, SC= Clear, Area = m, SC= Yes No Overhang Yes No Sidefin Yes No Reflective, Area = m, SC = Tinted, Area = m, SC= Clear, Area = m, SC= Yes No Yes No

VLT = VLT = VLT =

VLT = VLT = VLT =

kg/m kg/m W/m W/m W/m

kg/m kg/m W/m W/m W/m

SC = Shading Coefficient

VLT = Visible Light Transmittance

*Other commercial buildings may include : department stores, places of public entertainment, places of public assembly, restaurants etc. **Weighted by area Note : 1. Please tick in the box as appropriate 2. Window and skylight data should represent the major proportion of its use in the development.

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-68 173

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Design and Construction of Cantilevered Reinforced Concrete Structures The structural stability of cantilevered reinforced concrete structures in particular those of pure slab type relies on their proper design, construction and maintenance. Furthermore, the fact that weathering may lead to the early degradation of material strength should be borne in mind when carrying out the design and construction of cantilevered members exposed to weathering[1]. Common examples of this type of structural elements are projecting structures located on the exteriors of buildings like canopies, balconies, bay windows, A/C hoods, A/C platforms, flowerbeds etc. Their collapse would have serious consequences. 2. This Practice Note gives guidance to Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers on the safe design and construction of cantilevered reinforced concrete structures. Appendix A gives guidelines on structural design, construction, drainage provision and site supervision for achieving the necessary safety standards. Appendix B and Appendix C provide recommended details for the arrangement of reinforcements for cantilevered slabs and beams respectively. Structural submissions conforming to these recommendations will be considered as complying with the performance requirements set out in Building (Construction) Regulation 4. The requirements on supervision, standards of workmanship and submission of construction reports will be the Building Authoritys conditions for approval of plans and consent to commence works.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BORD/23 First issue October 1994 Last revision May 2003 This revision November 2005 (AD/NB2) Generally revised and Appendix C added Index under : Cantilevered Structures Cantilevered Reinforced Concrete Structures

[1]

For the purpose of this practice note, cantilevered structures under permanent solid cover located at not greater than one storey height and of at least the same plan area as the structure may be considered as not exposed to weathering.

Guidance Notes on Design and Construction of Cantilevered Reinforced Concrete Structures General Requirements 1.

Appendix A (PNAP 173) (APP-68)

The structural design of cantilevered structures should satisfy the following requirements:(a) For cantilever span more than 1000 mm, a beam-and-slab type of arrangement should be used instead of pure slab cantilever where practicable. The span to overall depth of cantilevered beams or slabs should not be greater than 7 and the members should be of adequate size to satisfy both the structural strength and durability requirements. Superimposed loads due to finishes, parapets and waterproofing materials, and loads due to maintenance work and possible ponding resulting from malfunctioning of the drainage system should be accurately assessed and allowed for in the design. Cantilevered structures, especially those projecting over streets, should be detailed in such a manner that they may be demolished or replaced without affecting the safety and integrity of the main structure of the building.

(b)

(c)

(d)

2.

The construction of cantilevered structures should satisfy the following requirements:(a) All cantilevered structures should be cast monolithically with and at the same time as the directly supporting members. Construction joints should not be located along the external edge of the supporting members. In case this is unavoidable, any alternative construction method must be submitted for prior approval. Such method should ensure that the finished product would be able to attain a structural strength no less than that provided by monolithic construction, and that it would not invite ingress of water through the joint. Adequate bar spacers should be provided to maintain the position and alignment of the steel reinforcement. During concreting, adequate compaction should be given to ensure good quality concrete. Every endeavour should also be made to avoid steel reinforcement from being displaced or depressed. All props to the soffit of formwork for cantilevered structures should be maintained for at least 14 days after concreting.

(b) (c)

(d) 3.

The AP/RSE should provide the appropriate level of supervision and inspection on the construction of cantilevered structures so as to ensure compliance with
1

the approved plans. 4. Means to prevent accumulation of water should be provided to cantilevered structures exposed to weathering.[1] In this connection the following are to be observed:(a) (b) Effective waterproofing should be provided. A fall of not less than 1:75 should be laid. Wherever practicable, adequate drainage should be provided to drain the water away from the cantilevered structure. If for any reason, the water is designed to just cascade down from the edge of the cantilevered structure, the AP/RSE should first make sure that by so doing it will not create any nuisance to anyone in accordance with Building (Planning) Regulation 4(b). A continuous drip or groove should always be provided at the bottom edge of the cantilevered structure to keep the dripping water away. Where the cantilevered structure is not accessible for cleaning/maintenance, the maximum distance between the drainage outlets, if provided, should be not more than 5 m. Every endeavour should be made to avoid penetration or embedment of pipes in cantilevered structures, especially slab elements. If unavoidable, consideration must be given to any local reduction in structural strength affected by the surface drainage system or embedded service pipes and ducts. In this regard, you are reminded to make reference to PNAP 230 on the requirements and guidelines of embedment of water-borne pipes inside reinforced concrete beams and slabs.

(c)

(d)

Cantilevered Beams 5. The structural design of cantilevered beams should satisfy the following requirements:(a) (b) The overall depth at support should be at least 300mm. Top and bottom reinforcement should be securely held in position by stirrups with the top bars extended a minimum length of 45 times the bar diameter of the steel bar into the supporting columns, walls or the penultimate span of continuous beams or slabs if practical. Where support by cross beam cannot be avoided, the supporting beam and the adjacent internal slabs should be adequately designed and properly detailed for any internal moment, torsion, shear and axial force so induced. For cantilevered beams exposed to weathering [1] , the minimum cover to all reinforcement should not be less than 40mm.

(c)

For the purpose of this practice note, cantilevered structures under permanent solid cover located at not greater than one storey height and of at least the same plan area as the structure may be considered as not exposed to weathering.

[1]

Cantilevered Slabs 6. The structural design of cantilevered slabs should satisfy the following requirements:(a) The minimum overall thickness should be-(i) (ii) (iii) (b) 100 mm for span not greater than 500 mm; 125 mm for span greater than 500 mm but not greater than 750 mm; 150 mm for span greater than 750 mm.

Any wall supporting the cantilever slab, except that for very small span slabs like air-conditioner hoods, should be of sufficient thickness to provide the necessary rigidity. This is in addition to any other design consideration that is required for the wall itself. Cantilevered slabs should be reinforced with high yield steel bars in both faces and in both directions. Main reinforcement bars should be at least 10mm diameter and spacing should not be greater than 150 mm, and the steel area should not be less than 0.25% of the cross-sectional area of the structural concrete. The main reinforcement of cantilevered slabs should have a minimum anchorage length of 45 times the bar diameter of the steel bar and should be rigidly fixed to the reinforcement of the supporting members. For cantilevered slabs with drop at the supporting end, top main reinforcement bars of not greater than 16 mm in diameter should be used in order that an effective and proper anchorage into the supporting beams and internal slab can be developed. Reinforcement details should be drawn in a sufficiently large scale to indicate clearly the connections. Consideration and specific details should be provided for-(i) (ii) cantilevered slabs continuing around corners of buildings due to increase in slab area and a change in direction of the main bars; the side edge of cantilevered slabs where there is an additional load from return parapets running parallel to the cantilever span direction.

(c)

(d)

(e)

7.

The requirements set out in paragraph 6 above do not apply to in-fill slabs enclosed by edge beams, or slabs supported in such a way that they do not behave similar to cantilevered slabs. Cantilevered slabs exposed to weathering[1] should satisfy the following additional requirements:(a) The maximum crack width at the tension face should be limited to 0.1 mm when carrying out design check under the serviceability limit state or the stress of deformed high yield steel reinforcement used should not exceed 100 N/mm2 when checking the flexural tension under the

8.

working load condition. The minimum cover to all reinforcement at the exposed surface side of the slab should not be less than 40mm. (b) In addition, for cantilevered slabs with a span exceeding 750 mm, the AP/RSE, in conjunction with the registered general building contractor where appropriate, is required to submit a construction report upon completion of the works. A Form BA 14 confirming that the works have been carried out in accordance with the approved plans and are structurally safe should also be submitted.

9.

The construction report required under paragraph 8(b) should include the following: (a) an as-built plan showing -(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (b) the location and dimensions of the members of the cantilevered slab; the direction and gradient of the fall, where applicable; the location of the drainage outlets, where applicable; the thickness of screeding and finishes; the location and details of any construction joints; the grade of concrete and steel reinforcement; the diameter and spacing of steel reinforcement in the cantilevered slab; the date on which the concrete was cast; and the concrete cover of the steel reinforcement at critical positions, as measured by covermeter.

record photographs of the cantilevered slab and its supporting members showing -(i) (ii) the condition and arrangement of the in-position steel reinforcement prior to concreting; and the condition after concreting but before laying of the finishes and waterproofing materials.

(Rev. 11/2005)

Appendix B (PNAP 173) (APP-68)

(Rev. 11/2005)

Appendix C (PNAP 173) (APP-68)

-1-

Appendix C (PNAP 173) (APP-68)

(11/2005)
-2-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-69 175

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Conservation of Historic Buildings

When commissioned for demolition, redevelopment, alteration and addition and change of use proposals, you may encounter situations involving historic buildings, artefacts and relics. This practice note aims to advise you on the legislative requirements, help you understand your duty and seek your cooperation in the conservation of historic buildings. Building or Site Declared as Monument or Proposed Monument 2. Monuments and Proposed Monuments are declared under the Antiquities and Monuments Ordinance, Cap.53 by the Secretary for Development (SDEV) by notice in the Gazette. Section 6 of the Ordinance prohibits any work being carried out on such site without a permit issued by SDEV. 3. Accordingly, unless you have already obtained a permit under section 6 of Cap.53 and can produce a copy of such to the Buildings Department, plans for building works affecting a building or a site which has been declared a Monument or a Proposed Monument may be disapproved under section 16(1)(d) of the Buildings Ordinance (BO). 4. The updated list of declared Monuments and Proposed Monuments can be found on the website (http://www.amo.gov.hk/) of the Antiquities and Monuments Office (AMO) of the Leisure and Cultural Services Department. Building Listed as a Graded Building 5. The Antiquities Advisory Board will grade historic buildings from time to time on their historical and architectural merit to facilitate their preservation. These buildings are accorded Graded Buildings (Grade I, II or III) by the Board. The updated list of Graded Buildings can also be found on the website of the AMO (http://www.amo.gov.hk/en/built3.php). 6. While Graded Buildings do not enjoy statutory protection, the AMO would be notified of and invited to comment on building proposals or demolition applications affecting such buildings. The AMO may request you, as authorized person for the building works, to submit both cartographic and photographic records of the building and to salvage useful building materials before demolition. Please assist the AMO in this respect. Conservation of Historic Buildings and their Materials 7. The AMO is interested in obtaining historic building materials and construction information which could be used for the repair and restoration of other historic buildings. Property Services Branch of the Architectural Services Department also collects and stores such materials for their restoration works. /8. ....

- 2 8. To assist the AMO in such conservation efforts, all building plan submissions under the BO and notices for material change in the use of buildings under section 25 of the BO affecting buildings built before 1960 will also be referred to the AMO for their information. 9. When you are commissioned for a project involving building works in buildings of historical interest, you are invited to make early contact with the AMO to identify the heritage and historical values of the buildings and artefacts. Your co-operation would be much appreciated. Submissions and Enquiries 10. In support of the Governments heritage conservation work and to facilitate private sectors participation in heritage conservation, a dedicated Heritage Unit has been set up in the Buildings Department to process all building and structural plan submissions, involving alteration and addition works in and adaptive re-use of historic buildings, for approval under the BO. Submissions to be handled by the Heritage Unit include development projects involving declared Monuments or Proposed Monuments, Graded Buildings, historic buildings selected in the Revitalising Historic Buildings through Partnership Scheme launched by the Development Bureau, as well as redevelopment and revitalisation projects involving conservation and adaptive reuse of historic buildings. Enquiries on issues relating to heritage conservation and compliance with the requirements of the building regulations could also be referred to the Heritage Unit for advice through the pre-submission enquiry system as provided for in the PNAP 272.

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/LEG/17 (XI) First issue January 1995 This revision May 2009 (AD/NB1) (General revision) Index under : Antiquities and Monuments Ordinance Graded Buildings Historic Building Materials Monuments Proposed Monuments Conservation

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-70 176

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Use of Plastic Sheet to cover scaffolding outside buildings

It is obligatory to provide screens, fans, catch platforms or similar protective measures to prevent objects from falling outside the building boundary and to alleviate dust pollution under the law, viz : (a) (b) (c) Regulation 49(1) of the Construction Sites (Safety) Regulations, Cap 59; Regulation 3(2)(a) of the Building (Demolition Works) Regulations, Cap 123; and Section 4B(2) of the Summary Offences Ordinance, Cap 228.

2. Contractors often cover entirely the scaffolding erected around the walls of a vacant building under demolition or construction with polyvinyl (PVC) sheets. This practice is sometimes extended to occupied or partly occupied buildings under repair or renovation. The Director of Fire Services has expressed concern that the use of PVC sheets in these circumstances aggravates the spread of fire. 3. The Commissioner for Labour has advised that if not properly fixed, the use of sheeting can affect the stability of bamboo scaffolding during strong winds. Furthermore, there have been instances when PVC sheeting has obstructed the natural ventilation and lighting of occupied buildings under renovation. 4. You are advised therefore to take the following precautionary measures when plastic sheeting is used to cover scaffolding erected around the walls of buildings : (a) (b) (c) flame-retardant sheeting should be used; scaffolding should be reinforced to withstand strong winds; and obstruction to natural ventilation and lighting of occupied buildings under renovation by sheeting should be avoided as far as practicable. (Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority Ref : L/M 18-92 BD GR/ACT/11 First issued May 1995 Index under : Plastic Sheet Scaffolding

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-71 177

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Underground Cavern Development In 1988, Government commissioned a study on a number of potential uses of underground space (SPUN) : container port back-up facilities in the form of a container freight station and tractor and trailer park, oil and gas storage, sewage treatment works, refuse transfer station, warehousing, commercial, government, institution and community space. The study confirmed that the use of underground caverns is a viable alternative to construction above ground and could confer significant environmental benefit. 2. With the experience from the study and from local construction of deep basements, tunnels and caverns, we have developed some initial guidance on cavern construction : (a) Geoguide 4, "Guide to Cavern Engineering", published in March 1992, offers a recommended standard of good practice for the civil engineering aspects of rock cavern applications in Hong Kong. Chapter 11 of the Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines provides planning standards and guidelines for underground rock cavern development. "Guide to Fire Safety Design for Caverns 1994", published in late 1994, gives design guidelines on fire safety in underground caverns.

(b)

(c)

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/CC/172 First issued April 1995 (AD/SE, GGE) Index under : Underground caverns Underground construction

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-72 178

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Control of Blasting

Blasting in private building works is subject to control under the Buildings Ordinance (Cap 123) and Dangerous Goods Ordinance (Cap 295). Buildings Ordinance 2. Authorized persons/registered structural engineers/registered geotechnical engineers (APs/RSEs/RGEs) responsible for any building works or street works involving blasting should ensure that any blasting carried out will not adversely affect services, slopes, retaining walls, buildings and structures through ground vibrations or other effects. In the design and execution of blasting works, the APs/RSEs/RGEs should also ensure that adequate and necessary preventive, protective and precautionary measures are provided to prevent the works from causing injury to workers and the public, significant disruption to traffic, undue vibration and movement to existing structures and services, or undue nuisance to the public. 3. The geotechnical assessment submitted at the general building plan stage should identify if there is a need to carry out blasting for rock excavation and discuss its feasibility. If blasting is to be carried out as part of the site formation, excavation or foundation works, a blasting assessment prepared by a competent person and signed by the responsible RGE and/or RSE as appropriate should be submitted together with the relevant site formation, excavation and lateral support, or foundation plans. Such competent person should have at least 4 years of relevant experience in design and supervision of blasting works. The required contents of a blasting assessment are specified in Appendix A and the following should be indicated on the plans : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) proposed areas of blasting; geology, ground and groundwater conditions; locations of sensitive receivers [see item (a) of Appendix A]; details of control criteria; instrumentation and monitoring details; specific precautionary measures such as road closure, evacuation plan, restricted hours of blasting, etc; requirements for submission of regular reports and other related documents; and a note stating that the plan should be read in conjunction with the blasting assessment. /If ..

- 2 -

If the need for blasting is identified after the general building plan stage, the same requirements as aforesaid for the preparation of a blasting assessment and its submission, together with any relevant revised plans, are applicable. 4. The curricula vitae of the competent person who prepared the blasting assessment should be included in the submission. Generally, supervision by such competent person will be required to verify the assumptions in the blasting assessment during construction relating to blasting. Supervision Requirements for Blasting Works 5. The paragraphs below set out the supervision requirements that may be imposed under section 17 of the Buildings Ordinance (BO) as conditions for qualified supervision of blasting works. This is in addition to the site supervision required under the Technical Memorandum for Supervision Plans 2005 and relevant provisions of the BO. 6. For the supervision of the blasting works, a competent supervisor independent of the registered contractor should be appointed to assist the technically competent person grade T5 (TCP T5) in the RGE/RSEs stream in the supervision of the blasting works. This competent supervisor should have at least 4 years of relevant experience in design and supervision of blasting works. Where necessary, the Building Authority (BA) may impose a higher qualification/experience requirement taking into account the scale and complexity of the proposed blasting works and the risk involved. The competent person described in para. 3 above who meets the above necessary qualification/experience requirement can also be the competent supervisor for assisting the TCP 5 in the supervision of the blasting works. As an alternative to having a competent supervisor, if a person holds the qualification and experience of both the TCP T5 and the competent supervisor , he can take up the overall supervision of blasting works by himself. The curricula vitae of the proposed supervision personnel should be submitted to the BA for acceptance prior to commencement of the blasting works. 7. The RGE/RSE should include particular items related to the blasting works in the check lists of Specific Tasks for the TCPs, as required in the Code of Practice for Site Supervision 2005. Typical items related to blasting works are listed in Appendix B. Demolition Works 8. Blasting normally would not be adopted in the demolition of private building works due to its wide implications on the surroundings which, in general, are of high density developments. In the exceptional circumstances where explosives are to be used in demolition works, a blasting assessment, prepared by a competent person who should have at least 4 years of relevant experience in the design and supervision of blasting works and signed by the responsible RSE and RGE as appropriate, should be submitted with the relevant demolition plans. The requirements given in the Code of Practice for /Demolition ..

- 3 Demolition of Buildings issued by the Buildings Department should be followed. In the consideration for the protection of properties and the inhabitants that may be affected by the proposed blasting, and in conducting the blasting assessment to examine the effects on structures to be demolished and its surroundings as mentioned in the Code, the relevant items specified in Appendix A should be covered. Dangerous Goods Ordinance 9. Dangerous Goods (General) Regulation 46 stipulates that no person shall carry out any blasting without the permission of the Authority, i.e. the Commissioner of Mines who is the Director of Civil Engineering and Development. Where blasting is required, the registered contractor has to apply for a blasting permit from the Commissioner of Mines, who may impose conditions requiring the registered contractor to take effective preventive, protective and precautionary measures against the adverse effects of blasting, e.g. flyrock, vibrations and air-overpressure, to adopt suitable blasting designs and techniques, to comply with the control criteria, and to undertake the monitoring shown in the approved plans. Railway Structures and Operations 10. Guidelines for assessing the effects of blasting on the structures and operations of the Mass Transit Railway Corporation Limited and the Kowloon-Canton Railway Corporation are given in Practice Notes for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 77 and 279 respectively. The "General Specification for Civil Engineering Works (Hong Kong Government)" also specifies technical standards on blasting. This document is available for purchase from either the Publications Sales Section of the Information Services Department or the online Government Bookstore at http://bookstore.esdlife.com.

( CHEUNG Hau-wai ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/29 II First issue June 1995 (AD/LM and GGE/I) This revision April 2007 (AD/Support and DH(I)GEO/CEDD) (General revision to include RGE and site supervision requirement and Appendix B added) Index under : Blasting Control of Blasting

Appendix A (PNAP 178) (APP-72) Contents of a Blasting Assessment (a) Site plans clearly indicating the proposed areas of blasting and locations of all sensitive receivers including streets, structures, foundations, railways, public utilities, water mains, drains, sewers, gas mains and other services, geotechnical features such as slopes, retaining walls, boulders, tunnels, caverns, etc. that may be damaged or destabilized by the proposed blasting works. A report containing the results of a study, including on the topography, geology, ground, groundwater and surface water conditions, and the physical site constraints, sensitive receivers and site history. A report containing examination of the conditions of the sensitive receivers on and adjacent to the site. A report containing an assessment of the effects of blasting works to demonstrate that the proposed blasting would not cause any injury to persons or damage to property and sensitive receivers. Proposals of preventive measures to be carried out on sensitive receivers, if considered necessary. A list of the action limits to be specified for the implementation of blasting works, including blasting vibration limits and air-overpressure limits, etc. to ensure that the blasting works to be carried out would not cause any injury to persons, damage to sensitive receivers, significant disruption to traffic or undue nuisance to the public. The limits proposed should take into account the existing conditions of all sensitive receivers. The source of the limits and documentary evidence of consultation and agreement, where appropriate, with the key stakeholders (e.g. owners or maintenance agents) of the sensitive receivers should be provided. An outline of the blast design to demonstrate that the blasting works could be safely carried out and the proposed limits and any other constraints could be satisfied. A document setting out the safety management system to be employed, and the working procedures and sequences, where appropriate, for all blasting works. Particulars of site inspections, surveys and monitoring to be carried out to check and measure the effects of blasting, including plans showing the locations of the monitoring stations, the performance criteria and the action limits. Proposals of protective and precautionary measures to be taken, including any evacuation and closure of public areas (such as roads and other facilities) and warnings needed to protect sensitive receivers and safety of the public and workers.

(b)

(c) (d)

(e) (f)

(g) (h) (i)

(j)

-1-

(k)

Proposals of the arrangement for delivery of explosives to the site to demonstrate the practicability of completing the blasting works and the rock excavation needed within the construction period. If an on-site explosive store is considered necessary, a report containing an assessment of its feasibility and proposed arrangement.

(l)

(Rev. 4/2007)

-2-

Typical Items Related to Blasting Works for the Check List of Specific Tasks for the RSE/RGEs TCPs Specific Tasks for TCP T5 (with the support of the competent supervisor) (a) (b)

Appendix B (PNAP 178) (APP-72)

Carry out checking of the registered contractors blasting method statement. Check (including both document and site checks) and satisfy, for each blast, that the registered contractors blast design and precautionary measures comply with the plans approved by the Building Authority and the blasting permit requirements. Verify on site that the ground conditions and geology are as stated or assumed in the blasting assessment, and that the provisions in the method statement and the preventive, protective and precautionary measures are adequate for the conditions as encountered on site. Ensure that the preventive measures, if required, have been properly carried out prior to commencement of the blasting works. Ensure that protective and precautionary measures have been properly executed prior to each blast. Regularly monitor the conditions of all sensitive receivers and carry out reviews before and after each blast. Prepare regular reports with records of the condition of the site, sensitive receivers, adjacent grounds, structures and services etc. after each phase of blasting operation and completion of related works.

(c)

(d) (e) (f) (g)

Specific Tasks for TCP T3 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Inspect the construction of preventive works, if required, for the sensitive receivers. Inspect the provision and installation of all necessary protective and precautionary measures prior to each blast, in accordance with the blast design. Monitor the site operations and working methods to ensure that they meet the safety requirements set out in the blasting permit. Inspect the conditions of all sensitive receivers before and after each blast. Carry out and ensure the quality of monitoring for the sensitive receivers before and during blasting.

(4/2007)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-73 179

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Service Lanes Service lanes, formally known as scavenging lanes, are an essential component of the urban fabric. Historically, they provided the means of removing waste from dwellings but in effect also acted as essential fire-breaks. Today, these lanes are commonly incorporated into building designs to provide sources of lighting and ventilation and routes for access and escape. Additionally, established lanes often provide a convenient neighbourhood pattern of footpaths. 2. Rights-of-way 3. Before a private or partly private service lane can be used for a particular scheme to meet Buildings Ordinance requirements (such as lighting and ventilation, means of escape and means of access), the authorized person must demonstrate that either permanent or pertinent rights-of-way over the lane exist. The integrity of the lane must be ensured for all users of the proposed building. Means of Escape and Access 4. Where exit routes are required, they would not be acceptable if they discharge into a private or partly private service lane unless it can be demonstrated that the users of the proposed building would have unfettered rights-of-way over the lane. 5. A service lane, public or private, would not be acceptable as a means of escape and access if it is obstructed, incapable of improvement or obviously in a decaying state. Site Coverage and Plot Ratio 6. Where an abutting private lane is in the ownership of the developer but is not specifically required for any purpose under the Buildings Ordinance for the proposed scheme, the Building Authority will give favourable consideration to including the relevant area of such lane in site coverage and plot ratio calculations. Where the legal status of a lane has been clearly established by the existence of rights-of-way, it would be necessary to apply formally for a modification of Building (Planning) Regulation 23(2)(a). 7. When an area designated as a private lane has been included in site coverage and plot ratio calculations, it must on completion of the building works be free of any structures. The only exception is where such structures have been approved and taken into account in the calculations. 8. It is often in the interest of a developer as well as good urban planning to amalgamate sites. This can result in the extinguishment and diversion of existing lanes. Generally speaking, if a diverted lane is required only for a useful neighbourhood pattern and not specifically for a proposed development, then the Building Authority will give favourable consideration to including the relevant area of such lane in site coverage and plot ratio calculations. /9. Save This practice note advises on general issues concerning private service lanes.

-2-

Open Space 9. Save as provided for in Building (Planning) Regulation 28(3), the area of service lanes should be excluded from the open space requirements under Building (Planning) Regulation 25. This applies whether or not the area of lane is included in the site coverage and plot ratio calculations. Improvement and Surrender 10. Every opportunity should be taken to improve a substandard service lane. The long-term objective is that upon full development of abutting sites, a lane would be direct and have an unobstructed width of not less than 3 m. 11. Except in the circumstances prescribed, Building (Planning) Regulation 28 requires that every domestic building shall be provided with a suitable service lane at the rear or to its side. 12. Where improvement to a lane is desirable but the lane is not specifically required under the Buildings Ordinance for a proposed scheme, the Building Authority will consider granting appropriate plot ratio and site coverage concessions in return for the free surrender of such lane to Government. 13. When land is surrendered for lane widening, the owner must submit a plan and a written undertaking to surrender to Government free of all cost the area shown coloured on the plan and to pay for paving, channelling, sewering, drainage and (where appropriate) lighting. The area for surrender must be free of structures.

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority

Ref :

BD GP/BREG/P/17

First issued May 1995 This revision November 1995 (AD/D) Index under : B(P)R 23(2)(a) B(P)R 28 Means of Escape (Lanes) Plot Ratio Service Lanes Site Coverage

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-74 180

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Alkali-Aggregate Reaction in Reinforced Concrete Structures Reinforced concrete structures can suffer from alkali-aggregate reaction (AAR). 2. AAR is a chemical process in which alkalis, mainly from the cement, combine with certain types of minerals in the aggregate, when moisture is present. This reaction produces a gel that can absorb water and expand to cause cracking and disruption of the concrete. The cracks accelerate the corrosion of the reinforcement in the concrete. Moreover, reduction in the compressive strength of the concrete reduces the strength of the concrete members. 3. (a) (b) (c) The following factors are essential for AAR to occur in concrete: There must be reactive minerals present in the aggregate. There must be sufficient alkali in the concrete to react with the aggregates. There must be sufficient moisture available to enable the chemical reaction.

4. A range of minerals, including opal, tridymite, cristobalite, volcanic glasses, cryptocrystalline to microcrystalline quartz and poorly-crystalline quartz, have been reported by overseas researchers as capable of causing AAR. The occurrence of AAR depends on both the type and percentage by mass of reactive minerals present. 5. The alkalis in the concrete come mainly from the cement. An effective means of reducing the risk of AAR includes proper control on the amount of cement used in the concrete mix, use of a low alkali cement, and appropriate use of cement replacement such as pulverised fuel ash (PFA). 6. In 1992, a programme of studies on AAR was started by the Public Works Laboratories of the Hong Kong Government. These included tests on concrete cores obtained from suspected structures, as well as investigations on the AAR potential of aggregates from a number of local quarries. The investigations are still on-going and the long-term tests may take a few years to complete. However, in view of the potential risks in the event of AAR occurring in structures and the long duration required for the experimental work, specification items (Appendix A) have been introduced on all future Works Branch contracts. /cont'd....

- 2 7. To avoid the risk of AAR occurring, authorized persons / registered structural engineers should consider incorporating the specification clauses for the control of AAR in concrete into contracts for private development projects. In such cases, plans for approval should clearly indicate that the reactive alkali of concrete expressed as the equivalent sodium oxide per cubic metre of concrete should not exceed 3.0 kg when determined in accordance with the specification items given in Appendix A. 8. The authorized person or registered structural engineer should ensure that the concrete mix complies with the limit on reactive alkali by requiring the specification clauses to be complied with, unless he is in the opinion that the concrete element will not be subject to ingress of moisture throughout its design life.

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/7 BD GR/CC/132 First issued April 1995 (AD/SE) Index under : Concrete Alkali-Aggregate Reaction Aggregate

Model Specification Clauses for for the Control of Alkali-Aggregate Reaction in Concrete Control Measures

PNAP 180 Appendix A APP-74

1. Measures to control the occurrence of alkali-aggregate reaction (AAR) in concrete shall be submitted to the authorized persons / registered structural engineers (AP/RSE) for approval. In the absence of alternative proposals, such control shall be achieved by limiting the reactive alkali content of the concrete as described in clauses 2 to 4 below unless in the opinion of the AP/RSE the concrete element will not be subjected to moisture ingress throughout its design life. Limit on Reactive Alkali 2. The reactive alkali of concrete expressed as the equivalent sodium oxide per cubic metre of concrete shall not exceed 3.0 kg. Equivalent Sodium Oxide (Na2O) Content 3. The equivalent sodium oxide (Na 2 O) content of the concrete shall be determined in accordance with the following steps: (1) The equivalent Na2O shall be calculated by the expression Equivalent Na2O = A + B + C where A is the sum of the acid-soluble alkalis (expressed as equivalent Na2O) of cement, admixtures and water; B is equal to 1/6 the total alkalis of pulverised fuel ash (PFA) (expressed as equivalent Na2O); and C is equal to 0.76 times the chloride ion (Cl - ) of the aggregate. (2) The acid-soluble alkali content of the cement shall be determined in accordance with BS 4550:Part 2:1970 (excluding amendment AMD 7285, July 1992) and shall be taken as the average of the latest 25 daily determinations of equivalent sodium oxide plus twice the standard deviation of the results. The acid-soluble alkali content of admixtures shall be determined in accordance with BS 1881:Part 124:1988. /cont'd....

(3)

(4)

The acid-soluble alkali content of water shall be determined in accordance with American Public Health Association (APHA) (17ed. 1989) Sections 3500-K and 3500-Na. The total alkali content of the PFA shall be determined in accordance with BS 4550:Part 2:1970 (excluding amendment AMD 7285, July 1992) and shall be taken as the average of 25 weekly determinations plus twice the standard deviation of the results. The equivalent sodium oxide content of the coarse and fine aggregates shall be calculated from the quantity of chloride ion present which shall be measured in accordance with BS 812:Part 4:1976.

(5)

(6)

Test Certificates and Calculations 4. The following particulars of the concrete mix should be submitted by the concrete supplier to the AP/RSE: (1) (2) (3) HOKLAS-endorsed test certificates not older than six months giving the results of tests required in clauses 3 (2) to (6); Calculation of the reactive alkali of the proposed mix; and New HOKLAS-endorsed test certificates giving the results of tests required in clauses 3 (2) to (6) to be submitted at quarterly intervals together with any necessary further calculations to demonstrate that the mix continues to comply with the limit on reactive alkali.

Ref: PNAP 180 First issued April 1995

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-75 182

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Building (Planning) Regulations 41A, 41B and 41C Means of Access for Firefighting and Rescue in Buildings Building (Planning)(Amendment) Regulation 1995 amends the requirements on means of access for firefighting and rescue in buildings. Revised Requirements 2. Regulation 41B is revised to ensure that fireman's lifts shall be so designed and located that, in the event of a fire, firemen can have safe and unobstructed access to lifts and to the floors served by the lifts. 3. Regulation 41C is also revised to allow firemen to make better use of all facilities in a Firefighting and Rescue Stairway (FRS) in case of fire. In future, only fireman's lifts are to be installed in a FRS and the access stairway in a FRS shall serve all floors of a building. Application 4. The Amendment Regulation applies to building works in accordance with Buildings Ordinance section 39. By virtue of section 39(2), the Regulation does not apply to building works which are being carried out or have been consented to commence on or before 22 May 1995. Code of Practice 5. The Code of Practice for Means of Access for Firefighting and Rescue has been revised in the light of the Amendment Regulation. The revised Code is available for sale at the Government Publications Sales Centre.

(Helen C P Lai YU) Building Authority Ref : BD GP/BREG/P/31 First issued : May 1995 (AD/LM) Index under : Building (Planning) Regulation 41A, 41B & 41C Means of Access for Firefighting and Rescue in Buildings

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-76 183

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Keeping Buried Services out of Slopes

This gives guidelines on keeping buried services out of slopes and on dealing with cases where it is not possible to do so. These guidelines are not exhaustive and professional judgement must be exercised in all cases. Importance of keeping Buried Services out of Slopes 2. Persistent leakage of water from buried services not only causes nuisance, but can also be a serious risk to the stability of slopes and retaining walls. Water-carrying services including stormwater drains, sewers, water mains, catchwater channels and water tunnels are prone to leak. Other conduits such as telephone ducts, electric cable ducts or disused pipes can also transmit a significant amount of water into the ground : their potential effect on the stability of a slope or retaining wall should therefore not be disregarded. 3. As a long-term preventive measure, authorized persons/registered structural engineers (APs/RSEs) should keep buried services out of slopes in their designs as practicable. Otherwise, adequate provision should be made to cater for the case where it is impractical to do so. Routing of Buried Services away from Slopes 4. It is a poor engineering practice to route buried services close to the crest of a slope. As a general rule, buried services should not be placed in a slope nearer to the crest than a distance equal to its vertical height. Reference should be made to Section 9.7, Geotechnical Manual for Slopes in this regard. Resiting of Existing Buried Services in Slopes 5. Applying the same rule, consideration should be given to re-routing all existing buried services in existing slopes. Opportunities to re-route existing services may arise when existing slopes within or adjacent to a lot are being upgraded or when existing services are being relaid or repaired. Siting of Buried Services in the Crest Area 6. In cases where the siting of buried services outside the crest area is impractical, the slope should be designed to the factors of safety as given in Chapter 5 of Geotechnical Manual for Slopes, taking into account the effects of possible water leakage. Alternatively, other measures as detailed below should be considered in the design to minimize the effects of possible water leakage : /(a) laying ....

- 2 (a) laying the services on or above the ground surface -- Additional provisions as a result of their exposure should be made to ensure aesthetic acceptability as well as suitable protection against corrosion or damage. housing the services within a ducting system, sealed trench or sleeve drained to a suitable discharge point at a surface water drainage system or natural stream -- The discharge from the ducting system should be monitored regularly. Measures such as inspection chambers should be provided to allow access for monitoring. for water mains which have to be routed within the crest area, installing stop valves at each side of the slope -- This will enable any leakage to be easily controlled when spotted.

(b)

(c)

7. When the laying of services inside the crest area of a fill slope is unavoidable, the design should allow for differential settlement of the buried services and their ancillary facilities, especially after any leakage. 8. For those sewers and stormwater drains in fill slopes where differential settlement may be large, any breakage of the pipe itself or widening of pipe-joints will cause leakage. Rigid pipelines should, therefore, be avoided and flexible jointings with short pipe pieces should be provided to enhance the degree of flexibility along the pipeline. Non-brittle pipe materials should be considered to avoid shearing of the pipe if settlement occurs. Accurate as-built Record of Buried Services 9. To facilitate future maintenance and inspection of all newly constructed buried services, APs/RSEs should compile an accurate as-built record of the buried services. This should include updating of those building plans, drainage plans, site formation plans and water services plans submitted to government departments. Such information should be incorporated in the slope and retaining wall record plans referred to in PNAP 168. Copies should be distributed to the developers as well as the property owners or building managers who would take over the future maintenance of the buried services.

( Helen C P Lai YU ) Building Authority Ref : BD GR/CC/228 (II) First issued June 1995 (AD/S) Index under : Buried Services - keeping out of slopes

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-77 187

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Concrete 1987 Although the working stress method is recommended in the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Concrete 1987, registered structural engineers may use the limit state method recommended in the following standards, as appropriate to the type of concrete structure, as an alternative to the working stress method. In such cases, the requirements specified in paragraphs 3 to 10 below should apply. BS 8110: Part 1: 1985 including: Amendment (AMD 5917, May 1989) Amendment (AMD 6276, December 1989) Amendment (AMD 7583, March 1993) Amendment (AMD 7973, September 1993) Amendment (AMD 5914, May 1989) Amendment (AMD 5918, May 1989)

BS 8110: Part 2: 1985 including: BS 8110: Part 3: 1985 including: BS 5400: Part 4: 1990 BS 8007: 1987

2. It is not recommended to use BS 8110: Part 1: 1997 as this British Standard is considered at present not entirely appropriate for the design of concrete structures in Hong Kong in view of that some of the changes introduced therein are not compatible with the Hong Kong Construction Standard CS1: 1990 and local practices in the quality control of steel reinforcement. General Considerations 3. The recommendations given in the British Standards should be adopted only without prejudice to the requirements of the Building (Construction) Regulations and recommendations of any other Practice Notes for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers. 4. For the design of concrete bridges, some provisions of BS5400 are not relevant to Hong Kong conditions and should be substituted by the recommendations given in the Structures Design Manual for Highways and Railways prepared by the Highways Department. Design 5. The characteristic dead load, imposed load and wind load should be the dead load, imposed load and wind load calculated in accordance with the provisions of the Building (Construction) Regulations. /6. ..

-26. The characteristic strength of concrete should be the specified grade strength given in the Building (Construction) Regulations. Design should be based on the 28 day characteristic strength without adjustment in respect of the age of the concrete. Where it is proposed to use concrete of specified grade strength greater than 45MPa, a quality assurance proposal should be submitted together with preliminary test results to confirm that reliable and consistent concrete can be produced. 7. The short-term modulus of elasticity, creep, shrinkage and other properties of concrete should follow the specifications in the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Concrete 1987, instead of the British Standards. Additional Tests 8. In addition to the regular compressive tests on concrete cubes, concrete core samples should be taken from the finished structure and tested to verify that the specified grade strength of the concrete has been achieved. The coring and testing should be carried out in the following manner: (a) Frequency and location of coring. The authorized person/registered structural engineer should propose a coring scheme indicating the structural elements selected for coring, as well as the number, size and location of the concrete cores, taking into consideration the strength adequacy of the structural elements after coring. At least one set of representative samples should be taken on each of every three floors. The number of cores taken from each type of structural element proposed for coring should be determined from the volume of concrete cast and should not be less than three on the same floor. Size of the concrete cores. The diameter of the concrete cores should preferably be 150 mm for 40 mm aggregate and 100 mm for 20 mm aggregate or less, and must not be less than 75mm. The ratio of diameter to the maximum aggregate size should be not less than 3. The length of the test sample cut from the concrete core should be at least 95% of the diameter. Identification of the concrete cores. The supervisory personnel should mark and sign on the concrete cores to enable the testing laboratory to identify them clearly. He should also ensure that the delivery of the cores to the laboratory and the tests are properly carried out. Tests for compressive strength of concrete cores. Tests for compressive strength of concrete cores should be carried out in accordance with the method specified in CS1:1990, by a Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) accredited laboratory. /(e) ..

(b)

(c)

(d)

-3(e) Criteria for acceptance. The criteria for acceptance of the test are: (i) (ii) Concrete cores should not show evidence of segregation of individual materials. Concrete cores should not exhibit honeycombing which means interconnected voids arising from, for example, inadequate compaction or lack of mortar. For any set of cores representing a test location, the estimated in-situ cube strength of each core specimen should be at least 75% of the specified grade strength and the average estimated in-situ cube strength of the set should be at least 85% of the specified grade strength. In this respect, the estimated in-situ cube strength of each core specimen should be calculated in accordance with CS1:1990.

(iii)

Qualified Supervision 9. The authorized person/registered structural engineer should provide adequate supervision and inspection on the construction of the concrete works to ensure compliance with the approved plans. The sampling, making and curing of concrete test cubes and the drilling of core samples should be supervised by a technically competent person. The person supervising the drilling of core samples should be independent from the contractor. 10. The names and qualifications of the supervisory personnel representing the authorized person/registered structural engineer and the registered contractor respectively should be entered into an inspection log book. All inspections should be clearly recorded, with date and time of inspections and details of site activities. The log book should be kept at the site office and, when required, produced to the Building Authority for inspection.

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/CC/213 First issue October 1995 (AD/SE) This revision May 2003 (AD/NB2) Paragraph 1 re-written, new paragraph 2 added and paragraphs 4, 6 and 8(e)(ii) amended Index under : Concrete Limit State Design Criteria for acceptance for concrete coring test

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-78 188

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Occupation of New Buildings Buildings Ordinance section 21 This PNAP summarizes how the Building Authority (BA) processes an application for an occupation permit (OP). 2. By law the BA must process an application for an OP within 14 days. As time is of the essence, it is essential that the authorized person (AP) co-operates fully. Apart from ensuring that all building works are satisfactorily completed in accordance with the approved plans and in full compliance with the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations, the AP should ensure that the requisite certificates, record plans and schedules are submitted with the formal application (BA 13). Applications without the requisite certificates will be processed as far as practicable but if at all possible this should be avoided. 3. On receipt of an application, the Development Division building surveyor will arrange with the AP an early appointment for inspection. It is expected that in turn the AP will make the necessary arrangements with the registered general building contractor. 4. During an inspection all parts of the building works must be available for examination. If the inspection reveals that building works controlled under the Buildings Ordinance are blatantly incomplete, e.g. sanitary fitments or fire doors have not been installed, the application will be summarily refused. In such cases, a fresh application (BA 13) would have to be made. In serious cases, consideration would be given to instigating disciplinary proceedings under the Buildings Ordinance for prematurely certifying the building completed. 5. Plant and machinery, such as an extensive air conditioning installation, that has been required under the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations to be operational on completion of the building should be made available for inspection. Generally speaking, provided it is structurally safe to do so, there is no objection to plant and fixtures required by the users of the building being installed before an OP is issued. Such installations should not, however, unduly hamper inspection of the completed building works. 6. If the inspection reveals only minor matters to be rectified, the BA will accept the APs written confirmation and, when appropriate, photograhic proof that rectification has been made prior to the expiry of the 14-day period. This should, however, be submitted in good time to allow for preparation of the OP. 7. Refusals of applications will in the first instance be notified by fax; a formal letter will follow by post. In addition to the statutory grounds for refusal, other comments and observations may be included in additional paragraphs for information and any action deemed appropriate.

/8. Following

-2-

8. Following a refusal, except in the case of a premature application, a formal resubmission of an application (BA 13) is not required. On receipt of written notification from the AP that the refusal items have been rectified to his satisfaction, the BA will within 14 days carry out a reinspection (if required) and either issue the OP or again formally refuse the application. 9. Section 21 of the Buildings Ordinance details the statutory procedures required for the occupation of a new building. PNAP 53 and PNRC 25 provide information on the submission of amendment plans, record plans and schedules.

( CHOI Yu-leuk ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BORD/10 First issued August 1996 (AD/D) Index under : BO s21 Occupation Permits

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-79 189

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers GEOGUIDE 5 Guide to Slope Maintenance

This announces the publication of the second edition of GEOGUIDE 5 (Guide to Slope Maintenance) by the Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO) in 1998 which is available from the Government Publications Sales Centre. 2. Regular inspections and maintenance are essential to the continued stability of slopes and retaining walls. The GEOGUIDE 5 recommends standards of good practice for the maintenance of man-made slopes and retaining walls, also man-made features (eg surface cover and drains) provided to natural hillsides. The standards recommended should be adopted when specifying maintenance requirements in site formation submissions in pursuance of Building (Administration) Regulation 8(1)(bb)(E). 3. The GEOGUIDE 5 recommends that the designer of a slope or retaining wall should prepare a Maintenance Manual, to assist the owner(s) or parties required to maintain the land in understanding the maintenance requirements. It should include the information listed in Chapter 2 of GEOGUIDE 5. The requirement for submitting the Maintenance Manual at the certificate for completion (Form BA 14) stage should be specified in the site formation submission. 4. The Maintenance Manual should be submitted in duplicate together with the Form BA 14. Upon acknowledgement by the Building Authority, a copy of the Maintenance Manual will be returned to the authorized persons/registered structural engineers for onward transmission to the owner(s) or the parties for future maintenance of the development. 5. The second edition of GEOGUIDE 5 clarifies that the scope of the Engineer Inspections for Maintenance should include a review of previous Stability Assessment. 6. An abridged version of the GEOGUIDE 5 (Layman's Guide to Slope Maintenance - Second Edition) may be obtained free from District Offices or by writing to Chief Geotechnical Engineer/Slope Safety of the GEO.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/GEO/11 (III) First issue January 1996 This revision April 1999 (AD/LM, GGE) Index under : GEOGUIDE 5 Slopes - maintenance manual Maintenance manual - slopes

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-80

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorised Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

192

Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996 Requirements for fire resisting construction for buildings are laid down in Part XV of the Building (Construction) Regulations. The Building Authority announced guidance on compliance with these requirements by publishing, in 1990, a Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction (FRC Code). This Code has recently been revised in the light of experience in implementation of the Code since 1990. The revised Code (Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996) is available for sale at the Government Publication Centre. Revised Requirements 2. The revised Code has clarified a number of anomalies and grey areas in the existing Code, upgraded standards on the design of some building components and streamlined duplications in the FRC Code and the Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire. Application 3. The revised FRC Code shall be effective on 1 August 1996. The requirements therein do not apply to the buildings or building works which are being carried out or have been consented to commence on or before 1 August 1996. Suggestions 4. welcome. This Code will be reviewed regularly. Any suggestion for improving it is

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority Ref. BD GP/BREG/C/19/L (VI) BD GP/LEG/6 PNAP 163

First issued (April 1996) (AD/LM) Index under : Fire Resisting Construction, Code of Practice for

[SBS LEG\PRA-NOTE]

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-81 194

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Places of Public Entertainment (Amendment) Regulation 1996 and Associated Legislative Amendments The Places of Public Entertainment (Amendment) Regulation 1996, which came into operation on 28.6.96, revises the principal Regulation by removing most of the safety requirements to other Ordinances/Regulations. The amended Regulation now focusses on licensing procedures. 2. Matters concerning the design, planning and construction of places of public entertainment in the principal Regulation have been transferred to the following:(a) Building (Construction) (Amendment) Regulation 1996 This Regulation introduces a definition of cinema as well as provisions to regulate the construction of protective barriers provided at the outer edge of any upper tier in a place of public entertainment. (b) Building (Planning) (Amendment) Regulation 1996 This Regulation adds a new Part VIA to regulate the situation, planning, design and other matters relevant to a place of public entertainment. (c) Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996 (MOE Code) Part III of the Code contains requirements on means of escape for places of public entertainment. These requirements are transferred from the repealed Places of Public Entertainment Regulations. Part of the content of Practice Note for Authorized Persons 54 has also been incorporated in the Code. 3. The Places of Public Entertainment (Amendment) Regulation 1996 and associated legislative amendments as mentioned in paragraphs 2(a) and (b) above and Part III of the MOE Code apply to building works in accordance with Buildings Ordinance section 39(2). By virtue of section 39(2), these Regulations and Part III of MOE Code do not apply to building works which are being carried out or have been consented to commence on or before 28.6.96. /4. A PNAP.....

-2-

4.

A practice note for the revised MOE Code will be issued separately.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref.

BD GP/LEG/2/L(V) PNAP 54

First issued (June 1996) (AD/LM) Index under: Cinemas Places of Public Entertainment Regulations

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-82 195

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996

Requirements for means of escape for buildings are laid down in section 41(1) of the Building (Planning) Regulations. The Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire (MOE Code) provides guidance on the compliance with these requirements. 2. The MOE Code has been reviewed recently. The revised Code (Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in case of Fire 1996) has been published and is available for sale at the Government Publication Centre. The purpose of this Practice Note is to explain the revised requirements and the application of the revised Code. Revised Requirements 3. The revised Code has clarified a number of anomalies and grey areas in the existing Code, upgraded standards on the design of some building components and streamlined duplications in the MOE Code and the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction. A new Part III is also added to deal with means of escape requirements for places of public entertainment. Application 4. The revised MOE Code shall come into operation on 1.12.96 except for the following :(a) (b) Part III of the new MOE Code has been effective on 28.6.96 (PNAP 194 refers). For buildings or building works which are being carried out or for which consent to commence has been given on or before 1.12.96, the earlier edition of the MOE Code may be used as the basis for providing the facilities.

5. The Building Authority acknowledges that there may be difficulties in the adoption of the Fire Engineering Approach and in the application of the new code to existing buildings in certain situations. Further guidelines may be issued. /Suggestions ......

-2-

Suggestions 6. This Code will be reviewed regularly. Any suggestion for improving it is welcome.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref.

BD GP/LEG/6/A(VI) PNAP 163, 192 & 194

First issued (June 1996) (AD/LM) Index under: Means of Escape, Code of Practice for

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-83 199

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Amendments and clarification to Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996 I refer to the issue of the revised Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996 which has become effective on 1 August 1996. The following corrigenda therein are required:(i) (ii) On page 9, in the fourth line of paragraph 7.2, "but in no case less than 2 hours should be deleted. On page 18, at the end of paragraph 17.2, the following diagram should be added :

FIRE DOOR TO BE KEPT CLOSED


(iii)

In Table C on page 24, the concrete cover to all reinforcement required to provide 2 hrs. FRP to continuous floors and landings of solid reinforced concrete construction should read "25 mm" instead of "40 mm". On page 14 in the fourth line, add with an FRP as described in (iii) above after the word located. On page 32 in the fifth line from the bottom, replace fixed light; with fixed light with FRP FRPe;.

(iv) (v)

2. The corrigenda and clarification announced in this practice note will be incorporated in future editions of the Code of Practice.

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/19/L (VII) PNAP 163 Last issue August 1996 (AD/LM) This issue August 1999 (para. 1(iv) & (v) added) (AD/D) Index under : Fire resisting Construction, Code of Practice for

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-84 201

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Access Facilities for Telecommunications and Broadcasting Services Introduction The world is undergoing a technological revolution and entering the Information Age. Hong Kong is well placed to reap the benefits and maintain our competitive edge in this new era. It is the Government's policy objective to develop Hong Kong into a telecommunications, broadcasting and Internet hub in the Asia Pacific region. 2. To enable occupiers of a building to gain access to the full range of quality broadcasting, telecommunications and Internet services, the Telecommunications Authority has, under section 14 of the Telecommunications Ordinance, granted authorization to fixed telecommunications network services operators and fixed carrier licensees (hereafter referred to as the Network Operators) to place and maintain telecommunications and broadcasting facilities and cables in the common parts of buildings in private ownership. New Network Operators may be licensed from time to time to provide new telecommunications and broadcasting services. 3. In order to accommodate the telecommunications and broadcasting facilities and cables in buildings, Regulation 28A of the Building (Planning) Regulations (B(P)R) requires the provision of access facilities for telecommunications and broadcasting services in every commercial building, industrial building, residential building (other than a building for residence of a single family) and hotel building in accordance with the design requirements specified by the Building Authority. 4. As there are a number of Network Operators who will provide telecommunications and broadcasting services, it is advisable to consolidate the requirements of access facilities for telecommunications and broadcasting from all the Network Operators during the building planning stage and appoint more than one Network Operator to install block wiring cables in new buildings. The list of Network Operators is given in the Annex to the Code of Practice for the Provision of Access Facilities in Buildings for the Supply of Telecommunications and Broadcasting Services (CoP) issued by the Office of the Telecommunications Authority (OFTA), which can be downloaded from OFTAs web site at http://www.ofta.gov.hk. Access Facilities for Telecommunications and Broadcasting Services 5. Pursuant to B(P)R 28A, the design requirements for access facilities for telecommunications and broadcasting services to be provided in buildings are specified in paragraphs 6 to 9 below. 6. The number and size of lead-in ducts, Telecommunications and Broadcasting (TBE) Rooms and vertical riser slots shall be provided in accordance with the requirements specified in Appendix A. /7. ..

-2-

7. The lead-in ducts shall be properly sealed up to guard against the ingress of water and gases and the sealing materials should be of a type that can be easily removed by the Network Operators. 8. The TBE Room should be placed at a location not susceptible to flooding. For development comprising of separate tower blocks on top of a commercial podium, separate TBE Rooms to serve each tower block and the commercial podium respectively should be provided. 9. In addition, the TBE Room should also comply with the following requirements :(i) (ii) the room should be linked up with the vertical block wiring system of the buildings; no water pipes, sewage pipes, water drainage, water sprinklers, high voltage power supply (exceeding 600V between phase and earth for three-phase, or 1,000V for single-phase, or 1,500V dc) cables, power transformers should be installed inside the TBE Rooms; sufficient lighting, electricity supply and ventilation should be provided; separate telecommunications earth electrode should be provided; and minimum clear height as stipulated in Appendix A should be provided.

(iii) (iv) (v)

10. A schematic diagram of the arrangement of the access facilities is attached at Appendix B for general reference. 11. All the new requirements set out in this practice note shall apply to new or major revision general building plans approved on or after 1 November 2006. For the avoidance of doubt, new or major revision general building plans approved before 1 November 2006 may continue to adopt the requirements set out in the practice note issued in September 2000.

( CHEUNG Hau-wai ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BREG/P/37 First issue November 1997 Last revision September 2000 This revision June 2006 (AD/NB1) Generally revamped Index under : Access Facilities for Telecommunications and Broadcasting Services

Requirements of Access Facilities for Telecommunications and Broadcasting Services


OFFICE/COMMERCIAL, INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS AND SHOPPING ARCADES Usable floor space1, ( 1000 m2) 2 2 < 4 4 < 12 12 < 24 No. of lead-in duct 2 3 3 4 Inside diameter of lead-in duct (mm) 100 100 100 100 Minimum Area of TBE Room (m2) 0 22 42 51 required under B(P)R 28A Maximum Area of TBE Room (m2) 10 28 53 64 that may be exempted under B(P)R 23(3)(b) Clear Height of TBE Room (m) 3 3 3 3 Vertical riser (mm) 100 100 300 200 300 200 400 200 No. of vertical riser slot 2 2 2 2 RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS No. of flats in a block, N No. of lead-in duct Inside diameter of lead-in duct (mm) Minimum Area of TBE Room (m2) required under B(P)R 28A Maximum Area of TBE Room (m2) that may be exempted under B(P)R 23(3)(b) Clear Height of TBE Room (m) Vertical riser (mm) No. of vertical riser slot HOTELS No. of rooms, N No. of lead-in duct Inside diameter of lead-in duct (mm) Minimum Area of TBE Room (m2) required under B(P)R 28A Maximum Area of TBE Room (m2) that may be exempted under B(P)R 23(3)(b) Clear Height of TBE Room (m) Vertical riser (mm) No. of vertical riser slot N5 2 100 0 4 2.8 75 75 1 N 200 3 100 24 30 3 200 200 1 5 < N 50 3 100 7 9 2.8 200 100 1 50 < N 100 3 100 21 27 2.8 200 100 1 24 < 48 4 100 61 77 3 400 200 2 48 < 72 8 100 79 99 3 600 250 2 72 < 96 8 100 88 111 3 650 250 2 96 < 120 8 100 107 134 3 750 250 2 750 < N 1000 4 100 43 54 3 300 200 2

Appendix A (PNAP 201) (APP-84)


120 < 144 8 100 113 142 3 900 250 2 1000 < N 1500 4 100 48 60 3 400 200 2 1000 < N 1200 3 100 37 47 3 400 200 2

100 < N 250 3 100 24 31 2.8 200 200 1 400 < N 600 3 100 26 33 3 300 200 2

250 < N 500 4 100 29 37 2.8 300 200 1 600 < N 800 3 100 28 36 3 300 200 2

500 < N 750 4 100 39 49 2.8 300 200 2

200 < N 400 3 100 24 30 3 300 200 1

800 < N 1000 3 100 35 44 3 400 200 2

Note 1 : Usable floor space has the same meaning assigned to it in section 2(1) of the Building (Planning) Regulations (Rev. 6/2006)

Appendix B (PNAP 201) (APP-84)

General Schematic Arrangement of Access Facilities

Telecom closet

Telecom. closet

TV

TV

2/F

TV

TV

1/F
T

TBE Room
(Headroom: 2.8m or 3m min)

G/F
(TBE Room may be located on other floors so long as it is in an area not susceptible to flooding)

LEAD-IN DUCTS

Legend :

Telephone socket

Concealed conduit 25mm dia typical for telephone 32mm dia typical for TV

(Not to Scale)

TV

TV socket Distribution case

Vertical riser/ horizontal trunking

Notes :
1. 2. 3.

The size of TBE Room should conform to Table in Appendix A The construction of TBE Room should comply with the Building (Construction) Regulations The Network Operators should seal all the lead-in ducts after laying the underground cables.

(Rev. 6/2006)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-85 202

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Application of the Revised Fire Safety Codes

The Building Authority has updated and revised the three codes of practices relating to fire safety in buildings. These codes are : Code of Practice for Means of Access for Fire fighting and Rescue 1995 Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996 Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996

Application of the revised Codes 2. This practice note provides guidance on the application of the revised codes in situations not explicitly stated in the relevant Ordinances or Regulations :(i) Alterations and additions in existing buildings Generally only the areas affected by the proposed alteration and addition works (including shared exits) will need to comply with the requirements of the revised codes. The remaining parts of the building unaffected by the proposed works need not follow the revised codes. (ii) Licencing of restaurants Similar to (i) above only the areas in a building subject to a new licence application will need to comply with the requirements of the revised codes. (iii) Consent for works shown on plans approved prior to effective date of the revised Codes There is generally no objection to issue consent to commence building works shown on plans approved prior to the respective effective dates of the revised codes, provided that a consent application is made within two years of the date of approval and the application is in order in all other aspects. /(iv) ..... 1

(iv)

Occupancy factor Buildings Department will have no objection in principle to the assessment of population in a submission of plans by using head counts in the premises where alteration works are proposed or in comparable premises, provided that the authorized person could demonstrate that the comparables are suitable for use in the circumstances of the submission. In this regard, the following considerations should be noted : (a) Every building is unique. There must be sufficient demonstration that the location, management, patronage, class, type and age of buildings etc. are similar; and For the design of a new building, it may be in the developers interest to use prescriptive value to assess population such that there will be sufficient margin to cater for future alterations and changes.

(b)

Fire Engineering Approach 2. The three codes of practice recently revised by the Building Authority contain provisions for the adoption of Fire Engineering Approach as an alternative to complying with the prescriptive provisions. Guidelines on the administrative procedures for making submissions to the Building Authority based on Fire Engineering Approach will be issued separately.

( CHOI Yu-leuk ) Building Authority

Ref First issued Index under

: : :

BD GP/PREG/P/36 October 1996 (AD/LM) MOA FRC MOE Fire engineering approach

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-86 203

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Non-loadbearing Partition Walls

The construction and demolition of non-loadbearing partition walls are operations frequently involved in construction process, in particular for alterations and additions works. Although these walls are not structural elements, it is necessary for authorized persons (APs) and registered structural engineers (RSEs) to ensure that the design and construction of the works achieve the required performance standard. 2. In the light of the observation in a study of an accident involving collapse of non-loadbearing partition wall, this practice note intends to give guidance to enhance public safety in respect of works involving non-loadbearing partition walls. Design and Construction of Non-loadbearing Partition Walls 3. In the design and construction of non-loadbearing partition walls, APs and RSEs should ensure that all factors which may affect the stiffness and stability of these walls such as slenderness, supports and restraints, are taken into account. Their design and construction should be carried out in accordance with relevant standards and codes of practice. In this respect, PNAP 140 should be referred to. Demolition of Non-loadbearing Partition Walls 4. When non-loadbearing partition walls are to be demolished, APs and RSEs should ensure that : appropriate precautionary measures are provided as site situation demands; the works are carried out by experienced workers; adequate supervision is provided throughout the demolition period.

In this connection, attention should also be drawn to PNAP 71.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BOP/33 First issued October 1996 (AD/D, AD/SE) Index under : Non-loadbearing Partition Wall Partition Wall

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-87

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

204

Guide to Fire Engineering Approach This practice note provides guidance on fire engineering approach for the design of new buildings or alteration and addition works in existing buildings to meet the fire safety objectives and performance requirements of Building (Construction) Regulation 90, Building (Planning) Regulations 41, 41A, 41B & 41C and as an alternative to the prescriptive requirements set out in the three Codes of Practice for Means of Escape, Means of Access for Firefighting and Rescue and Fire Resisting Construction, covering fire safety in buildings. Objectives 2. Fire engineering design offers a flexible alternative where it is impracticable to comply with prescriptive provisions in the Codes, especially when designing for special or large and complex buildings or alteration and addition works in existing buildings. The aim is to provide for an overall level of safety that is equivalent to that which would result if fire safety was achieved through full compliance with the prescriptive provisions of the relevant codes of practice. The acceptability of fire engineering approach is recognised in paragraph 3 of the Codes. Fire engineering design provides a framework for practitioners to demonstrate that the performance requirements of legislation are met, or in some cases bettered, even though some of the design solutions adopted fall outside or short of the prescriptive provisions in the Codes when additional fire safety measures are proposed to compensate for the deviation or shortfall. 3. To achieve this objective it is important to understand the performance requirements and the prescriptive provisions that are required as a minimum to comply with the legislation. If the design being considered is not substantially different from the prescriptive provisions or can be readily accommodated by adopting conservative assumptions, it may simply be a case of demonstrating like-for-like substitution or equivalence with prescriptive provisions and fire safety objectives without having to embark on a full fire safety strategy. However, practical test may be required where necessary to demonstrate the equivalence by practitioners. 4. The performance requirements of the legislation that have to be addressed in the fire engineering design, and re-expressed in terms of objectives, are as follows : (a) (b) (c) Given the function and purpose of the building or installation, the design should not present an unacceptable risk of a fire developing and spreading. Occupants should have time to reach a place of (temporary and/or permanent) safety without being dangerously affected by heat or smoke from a fire. A fire should not spread to adjacent property. /(d) A fire ....

-2(d) (e) (f) A fire (and smoke) should not spread beyond the compartment from which the fire originates. Firefighting personnel should be able to gain access and mount firefighting and rescue operations without undue risk to their health and safety. The stability, insulation and structural integrity of the building should be ensured in a fire of specified intensity and duration.

Design Methodology 5. One prevailing method of fire engineering design is based on making predictions of likely outcomes in the event of a fire and selecting appropriate fire safety system components to achieve the required objectives. This is a deterministic method of fire-safety engineering which combines assessment of both risk and hazard. It has been applied to special or unique buildings such as airport terminals, railway stations, convention and exhibition centres, aircraft hangars, stadiums, etc. where the prescriptive requirements of the building regulations are often not appropriate. Application of this method is designed to provide a level of fire safety equivalent to that expected in the legislation. Demonstrating equivalence to the prescriptive provisions is paramount to the acceptance of this method. 6. Risk assessment is introduced in expectation of a fire development, and system performance is based on various fire scenarios. Fire engineering is not sufficiently developed, at least for the time being, to provide simple methods of quantifying the overall fire safety of a building. Hong Kong, moreover, currently lacks local statistical information to support the establishment of appropriate risk factors to cover the range of indigenous building types. Quantitative risk assessment and large-scale fire tests, on the other hand, can only be undertaken for special buildings and installations. 7. Hazard analysis follows the traditional engineering approach based on defined fire loads and demonstrating the ability to resist such loads. It is often assisted by fire models and computational methods which are already established overseas and can offer a more certain indication of achieved safety. Provided the hazards are identified it is usually possible to devise strategies for their management or design solutions which will ensure reasonable safety of the occupants, and the protection of essential emergency plant and equipment. 8. Equivalence can also be readily demonstrated by deterministic means - equal performance between the designed system and what is expected under full compliance with the regulations i.e. the outcome under a given fire scenario should be similar for either the complying system or the alternative being proposed.

/9. Design Procedures .....

-3Design Procedures 9. The flow chart shown in the Appendix outlines the major steps to be followed in the fire engineering design of a building. The design procedure is essentially a process to analyse the likely effects of a fire given the worst likely location and time of ignition. Knowledge of the fire loads, the number and location of occupants and the fire protection features is essential for assessing whether the performance criteria are met. The first two steps are to determine the geometry, construction and use of the building and to establish performance requirements. The third step is to identify deviations from the prescriptive provisions and to propose alternatives to address the deficiency. 10. The following steps revolve around scenario analysis, considering all possible scenarios. Some parts of the analysis can possibly be quantified with numbers, but much of the analysis requires subjective judgement as to the likely movement and consequences of a fire and the likely location and movement of people. If the performance criteria are not met, then either the building geometry or the fire protection features must be modified until satisfactory performance is achieved. This process must be repeated for all possible fire scenarios. Fire Safety Strategy Report 11. The compilation of a fire safety strategy report is the most effective way of identifying and setting out the tactics for the fire safety design of a building. Contents of the report may be set out as follows with some sections assuming a greater or lesser degree of importance depending on the particular project : (a) (b) (c) Introduction : sets out the overall objectives of the fire strategy and the parameters of the report. Nature of the problems should be stated. Description of the development : describes the intended function of the building or project; outlining special features and inter-relationship with other properties. Sources of Information : lists the codes, legislation and guidance documents used in the compilation of the report and the features which are based on fire engineering principles. Means of Escape : establishes the objectives of the means of escape philosophy and, if necessary, refers to escape times and extended travel distances, behaviour, reaction and way finding pattern of the occupants. Design fires : in complex buildings, where necessary, establishes the design fire size by calculation of fire load and type so that the effect of fire and smoke can be assessed. This is particularly important when considering smoke extract calculations and the effect of heat on the building structure.

(d)

(e)

/(f) Smoke .....

-4(f) Smoke control : describes the purpose of smoke control system where required to maintain clear layer height and to limit temperatures to keep escape routes safe and clear, and to provide indication on the toxicity of gases. Fire spread control : states the combustibility of wall and ceiling linings, furnishings, the integrity rating of structure and compartment walls, the control of the rate of spread of fire, the resistance of the effect of a fire and the capacity of fire containing. This section would also contain details of compartment size and external fire spread with due regard to the insulation, stability and integrity of the building. Structural Performance : predicts the thermal response and structural response of fire resisting elements at elevated temperatures and determines their equivalent fire resistance ratings; attention should also be given to the structural safety of adjacent buildings due to heat radiation near the site boundary. Sprinkler system : where sprinklers are proposed, states the hazard classification, water supplies, extent of coverage and system standard; identifies special features such as fast response sprinklers used in areas of smoke control. Alarm system : describes the type and extent of the alarm system; for example type and coverage of fire detectors, manual call points, communication of alarm, technical features of the system, position of panels. Where the alarm system is also used to activate dampers, pressurise stairs, or send a signal to the Fire Services Communication Centre, suitable references will be made. First-aid firefighting : describes the provisions of first-aid firefighting equipment e.g. hosereels and portable fire extinguishers available to the occupants of the building. Facilities for firefighting personnel : describes the facilities which should be made available to the firefighting appliance and personnel including access, and sometimes water supplies for firefighting, firefighting and rescue staircases, firemans lift, fire control centre/panel, smoke clearance and point of assembly. Emergency lighting and signs : outlines the standards and operating principles.

(g)

(h)

(i)

(j)

(k)

(l)

(m)

/(n) Role .....

-5(n) Role of management : defines clearly the management role and states clearly the arrangements that could ensure the continued maintenance of any fire protection system. This is an important element of the fire safety strategy which should be clearly defined. Management may play an active part in minimizing the outbreak of fire by restricting smoking, ensuring good housekeeping and security. Management will also be responsible for ensuring that maintenance and testing procedures are in place to ensure that the fire systems within the building will respond to a fire.

The report should contain calculations, sketches and diagrams to support the conclusions and aims of the report. Detailed information should include smoke filling, design fire and egress calculations where these are appropriate. Consultation 12. It is important that practitioners consider the implications of fire safety on the building design at an early stage and establish a consultative procedure with the Buildings Department and Fire Services Department so that the fire safety objectives can be agreed between the parties at the outset. In this connection, the Buildings Department and Fire Services Department should be approached prior to submission of building plans for agreement in principle to any fire engineering design being considered. 13. As yet there is no accreditation of fire engineers, authorized persons (APs) meanwhile must assume the pivotal role in the consultative procedures when the fire strategy and fire engineering design is being developed. Practitioners from other disciplines are expected, however, to provide their specialist input as well. References 14. The range of overseas codes and standards applicable to fire safety is constantly increasing and individual publications are frequently amended or revised. Although practitioners may not have all relevant information readily to hand, they should be aware of these publications. Product data and articles in fire safety journals, also help keep practitioners up-todate with new developments in fire safety matters. Various standard documents are available describing fire engineering approaches to design such as the draft British Standard, the Australian Code, NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) and SFPE (Society of Fire Protection Engineer) Handbooks. These documents provide specific guidance on fire load, smoke control, egress from buildings for specialised occupancies, equations and relationships, calculation methods along with valuable data for use in the development of the case to demonstrate adequacy.

15. This .....

-615. This practice note cannot possibly outline all the fire engineering design technology required for use on every specific building. Rather, it simply outlines one recommended framework for fire engineering design activities. As fire engineering approach is new to both the practitioners and the authorities, this practice note would serve as an initial guideline. In the longer run, we need to develop fire safety standards (e.g. safe evacuation time, tenability level of exit routes, etc.) and develop control over tools (e.g. computer modules) for predicting risks or demonstrating compliance and over the service of professionals (e.g. fire engineers). This guideline will be reviewed regularly. Any suggestion for improvement is welcome.

( CHOI Yu-leuk ) Building Authority

Ref First issued Index under

: : :

BD GP/BREG/P/36 (March 1998) (AD/LM) Fire Engineering Approach

-7-

Determine geometry, construction and use of building

PNAP 204 Appendix APP-87 Establish minimun prescriptive performance requirements to comply

Design complies with Codes ? (MOE, MOA & FRC) NO Identify non-compliance; Propose alternative/substitutes and demonstrate equivalence

YES

Design Agreed NO Determine fire scenario

YES

Establish maximum likely number of occupants, their locations and behavioural reaction

Identify certain fire protection features

Carry out fire engineering analysis rationale Modify fire safety features Acceptable performance NO Accept design YES

Appendix : Overview of Fire Engineering Design

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-88 205

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Code of Practice on Inspection and Maintenance of Water Carrying Services Affecting Slopes

This Practice Note announces the publication of the 'Code of Practice on Inspection and Maintenance of Water Carrying Services Affecting Slopes' by the Works Branch. It is now available for sale from the Government Publications Centre. 2. The Code of Practice gives guidance on the inspection and maintenance of buried water-carrying services affecting slopes. It puts together relevant notes and guidelines to form a comprehensive document for the use of Government Departments, professionals, contractors and building managers. The Code of Practice focuses its guidelines on the following aspects : (a) (b) (c) Planning for an effective inspection and maintenance programme; Examining available options for detecting, inspecting and repairing buried services affecting slope; and Recommendations for permanent measures to minimize impacts of leakage from buried services on slope safety.

3. Under Buildings Ordinance section 27C, the Building Authority may require a building owner to carry out investigation and any repair work to buried water-carrying services laid in or near a slope. Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Contractors should make reference to this Code of Practice when appointed in respect of the design, construction and/or maintenance of buried services so to assure safety of slopes in their vicinity. 4. This Practice Note is to be read in conjunction with PNAP 168. A similar practice note has been issued to Registered Contractors.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/CC/234 First issue November 1996 (AD/S) Index under : Code of Practice on Inspection & Maintenance of water carrying services affecting slopes. Water carrying services affecting slopes.

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-89

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

207

Provision of Better Lift Service Introduction The lift service in a building has been the subject of complaints from time to time. The Building Authority (BA) accepts that occupants of the building may have legitimate cause for concern in some cases. This practice note introduces guidelines on the provision of lifts in buildings for domestic and office use with a view to enhancing standards of lift services, thereby improving the quality of life for the occupants of domestic and office buildings. Background 2. Areas of lifts and the lift shafts in a building are measured as gross floor areas (GFA) under Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(a). 3. Except for firemans lifts and those required to be provided for people with a disability, no requirements and dimensions are spelt out in the Buildings Ordinance and regulations to enable an assessment to be made as to the adequacy of a lift service. To maximize on the usable floor area of a building, the practice has been quite common that only the minimum area is allowed for the provision of lifts, occasionally at the expense of comfort and convenience of occupants of the building. The BA considers that there is room for improvement in this area. Quality of Lift Service 4. In general, the quality of lift service depends on a number of factors including the number and size of the lifts provided, their handling capacity, travelling time and waiting time. Criteria for Exemption 5. The BA acknowledges that improvement in lift provisions in private developments should be encouraged. Having regard to the effects of increasing building density, the BA will allow the GFA of lift shafts provided over and above the average standard of those currently provided in buildings to be excluded from GFA calculations. 6. Taking into account the average areas of lift shaft in domestic/ composite and office buildings, the BA will, upon application and on the merits of each case, exempt the following from gross floor area calculation subject to the criteria specified in paragraph 7: / Lifts ..

-2-

Lifts serving domestic accommodation in domestic/composite buildings including hotels (a) For domestic and composite buildings including hotel buildings, the area of lift shaft over and above 2.5% of the total GFA may be exempted provided that the total lift shaft area exempted should in no case be in excess of 3.5% of the total GFA of the proposed building, i.e. if the lift shaft area is more than 6% of the total GFA, then the maximum exempted area will be 3.5% of the total GFA. Lifts serving office accommodation in office or office/commercial buildings with GFA of the office floors less than 10,000 m2 (b) For office and office/commercial buildings, the area of lift shaft over and above 5% of the total GFA for office use 1 may be exempted provided that the total lift shaft area exempted should in no case be in excess of 3% of the total GFA for office use, i.e. if the lift shaft area is more than 8% of the total GFA for office use, then the maximum exempted area will be 3% of the total GFA for office use. Lifts serving office accommodation in office or office/commercial buildings with GFA of the office floors equal to or more than 10,000 m2 (c) Subject to (d) below, the area of lift shaft over and above 3.5% of the total GFA for office use may be exempted provided that the total lift shaft area exempted should in no case be in excess of 2.5% of the total GFA for office use, i.e. if the lift shaft area is more than 6% of the total GFA for office use, then the maximum exempted area will be 2.5% of the total GFA for office use. For buildings with GFA between 10,000 m2 and 12,000 m2 for office use, a maximum concession area of 300 m2 may be allowed.

(d)

7. Modification for exclusion of lift shaft area from GFA calculation will only be considered if the following criteria are met: (a) the internal area of each lift car and lift shaft for domestic or composite building is not less than 1.82m2 and 4.12m2 respectively; /(b) the ..

includes use and facilities ancillary to office accommodation but excludes other commercial use in the case of office/ commercial building

-3-

(b) (c)

the internal area of each lift car and lift shaft serving the office accommodation is not less than 2.1m2 and 4.4 m2 respectively; the application is accompanied by an assessment from a registered lift engineer (means a person whose name is included in the register under section 5 of the Lifts and Escalators (Safety) Ordinance (Cap. 327)) or a registered professional engineer (means a person whose name is included in the register under section 7 of the Engineers Registration Ordinance (Cap. 409)) in the building services discipline certifying that, according to international codes, the lift service to be provided is above the acceptance level of service in terms of handling capacity and waiting time and that there is adequate maneuvering space for the carrying out of maintenance works.

Application 8. The exemption in para. 5 to 7 are applicable to building plans for new projects, and major revisions of building plans. Buildings already issued with occupation permits will not be considered for concessions. 9. For approved projects not under construction, there is no objection to amendment plans to be submitted to make improvement to the lift service and apply for the exemption. 10. For new projects on which building works are in progress, an application for concession may also be considered if it can be established that an enhanced standard of lift service has been incorporated in the building under construction. 11. The rules on concessions in this practice note are also applicable to projects under development in phases. For the avoidance of doubt, completed phases will not be considered and there should not be transfer of GFA between any completed phases and other phases yet to be completed. An example illustrating the concessions in phased development is at Appendix A.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

-4-

Ref. : GP/BREG/P/35 (II) First issue August 1997 Last revision September 2000 This revision May 2006 (AD/Support) Index under : Lift car and shaft Exclusion from GFA calculations

An Example Illustrating Concessions for a Phased Development I. The Site (a) Site area : 10,000m PR :5 Total domestic gross floor areas (GFA) : 50,000 m For development in 3 phases :

Appendix A (PNAP 207) (APP-89)

(b)

Phase I already completed with an occupation permit issued; Phase II is now under construction; and Phase III has general building plans approved but no building works have commenced.

II.

Position on plot ratio and GFA (a) Phase I GFA shown on approved plans and completed : 10,000m Lift shaft areas shown on approved plans and included as GFA: 7% of the GFA or 700m. The lift shaft areas are to remain as accountable GFA for plot ratio calculation ie no concession is allowable under this PNAP Plot ratio and accountable GFA left for Phase II & Phase III are 4 and 40,000mrespectively.

(b)

Phase II GFA shown on approved plans : 25,000m Lift shaft areas shown on approved plans and included as GFA: 6% of the GFA of Phase II or 1,500m Conditions in para. 10 of this PNAP are satisfied Phase II exemption area = 1,500m - 25,000 x 2.5% = 875m* (not exceeding 3.5% of the total GFA of Phase II) GFA used and accountable for Phase II = 25,000m - 875m = 24,125m Plot ratio and accountable GFA left for Phase III are 1.5875 and 15,875m respectively. /(c) ..
-1-

(c)

Phase III GFA shown on approved plans : 15,000m Lift shaft areas shown on approved plans and included as GFA: 5.5% of the GFA of Phase III or 825m Phase III exemption area = 825m-15,000 x 2.5% = 450m*(not exceeding 3.5% of the total GFA of Phase III) GFA accountable for plot ratio calculation = 15,000m- 450m = 14,550m Concessions available for Phase III = 875m(from Phase II) + 450m or 1,325m Overall GFA = 10,000m (Phase I) + 24,125m (Phase II) + 14,550m (Phase III) + 1,325m (concessions) = 50,000m (plot ratio = 5 - not exceeding permissible)

The concession will only be considered if the criteria in paragraphs 7 & 10 of the PNAP are met. The concessions given in Phase II may be transferred to Phase III.

-2-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-90 208

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Buildings Ordinance section 18(6) Authority to Enter Buildings General Section 18(1) of the Buildings Ordinance authorizes the erection of shoring which is necessary for specified purposes and section 18(6) of the Buildings Ordinance empowers the Building Authority to authorize entry to buildings in connection with such shoring. 2. This practice note describes the application and authorization procedures and emphasizes the rights of those affected by the shoring. Application 3. Before making an application to the Building Authority for an authorisation under section 18 of the Buildings Ordinance Authorised Person/Registered Structural Engineer should ensure that there is no other way of providing precautionary measures than to erect shoring inside the adjacent buildings, and also that he has failed in obtaining the consent from the owners and occupants of the adjacent buildings for such shoring work despite having taken all reasonable steps. 4. Applications for authorization should be made in writing to the Building Authority and should contain the following information : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Name of applicant; HKID/Passport/Business Registration Certificate Number of applicant; Full address and lot number of the building to be entered; Purpose(s) for which the authorization is required; Justification to demonstrate that the erection of shoring inside the adjacent building(s) is the only possible means of precautionary measures; Name of any agent to be authorized under section 18(6)(b) of the Buildings Ordinance; and Registration certificate number if applicant or agent is a registered contractor. / Authorization ....

(f) (g)

-2-

Authorization 5. Having been satisfied that there is no alternative way of providing support to the adjacent buildings the Building Authority will issue the written authorisation, normally within 2 weeks of receipt of an application containing all the necessary information. A copy of the authorisation shall be posted in a conspicuous position on the building to which it relates. Damage and Claims for Compensation 6. It should be noted that sections 18(4) and 18(5) of the Buildings Ordinance contain provisions for the repair of any damage caused by or resulting from the erection, maintenance or dismantling of the shoring and for the occupier or any other person to be compensated for any loss or damage. Section 18A of the Buildings Ordinance allows any occupier or other person who has suffered such loss or damage to apply to the Lands Tribunal to hear and determine any dispute relating to compensation. I expect that all these statutory provisions are followed where appropriate and the rights of all persons affected are respected. 7. PNAP 71 contains information relating to shoring for demolition works.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BORD/76 First issued June 1997 (AD/D) Index under : Authority to Enter Buildings Buildings Ordinance section 18(6) Shoring

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-91 209

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Maintenance and Replacement Works of Lift Installations According to paragraph 11.2 of the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996, a door provided at a lift landing to give access to the car of a lift should have a fire resistance period (FRP) of not less than 1 hour with regard to integrity. In order to provide adequate resistance to the spread of fire, a landing door should normally remain in a closed position unless a lift car stops at the floor of the landing door. 2. For maintenance or replacement works of lift installations, it is understandable that some landing doors would need to be kept open or taken down before reinstatement. However, in the course of such works, it is necessary to observe the fire safety requirements for protecting the integrity of lift shafts in order to inhibit the spread of fire between floor compartments through the lift shafts and openings. These requirements are set out in the Appendix. 3. Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers are requested to observe these requirements and to bring them to the attention of all concerned in carrying out maintenance or replacement works of the lift installations under their supervision. The requirements will be incorporated into the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction issued by the Building Authority in due course. 4. A similar practice note has been issued to Registered Contractors.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GR/ACT/19/L First issued : July 1997 (AD/LM) Index under : FRC Code Lift Installations - Maintenance/Replacement Works

Appendix Fire resisting construction requirements for maintenance and replacement works of lift installations (a) Subject to para. (b) below, all landing doors should remain in a closed position in the course of maintenance or replacement works of lift installations. Where landing doors need to be kept open for the works, normally no more than one such door in a lift shaft should be in an opened position at any one time. The door opening, other than the one at which the lift car is levelled with the floor landing, is to be attended by lift workers. If the works necessitate more than one door in a lift shaft to be opened at the same time, the following additional conditions should be observed : (i) the maximum number of landing doors to be kept open at the same time is three; and no hot works or welding operations will be carried out.

(b)

(ii) (c)

Where landing doors are to be taken down, removal of more than one landing doors in a lift shaft at any one time should be avoided. If more than one landing doors are to be removed at any one time, the door openings should be protected by temporary hoarding having an FRP of not less than one hour. Openings in the hoarding are not allowed except small openings for ventilation of the lift shaft and access doors to the lift shaft. Each ventilation opening should not exceed 5,500mm2 in area and should be located at the upper portion of the hoarding. The number of such openings should be limited to two per liftway, subject to a maximum of four in the hoarding. Access door in the hoarding should have the same FRP as the hoarding. Such door should be self-closing and provided with locking device to prevent unauthorized access. The locking device should be so arranged that it can be readily opened from the inside without the use of a key. Temporary hoarding to enclose a lift shaft should not be erected to cause, as far as reasonably practicable, any obstruction or reduction in width of any escape route. Any temporary works including scaffoldings, formworks, plankings and struttings etc. erected inside a lift shaft during maintenance or replacement works should be constructed of non-combustible materials. Arrangements should be made to ensure that all temporary openings during maintenance or replacement works are protected by either having all opened lift landing doors returned to the closed position or enclosing such openings properly with fire resisting hoarding before leaving unattended any unfinished works during lunch breaks or at the end of a days work.

(d)

(e)

(f)

(g)

(h)

(i)

(j)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-92 210

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Amendments and Clarification to Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996

This practice note is to announce the following amendments to paragraph 14(3)(b) of the Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996 in order to clarify the interpretation relating to travel distance involving dead-end situation : The original paragraph 14(3)(b) should be deleted and substituted by Where the direction of travel from an exit door of a room to a staircase or a point of discharge to a street or to an open area at ground level complying with paragraph 8.2, as the case may be, is possible in one direction only (i.e. dead-end), no point of a room should be more than 18m (i.e. the sum of direct distance and travel distance) from an exit or from a point, from which travel in different directions to 2 or more exits is available. In the latter case, the maximum distance to one of the exits should not exceed the limitations on direct distance and travel distance stipulated in paragraph 14. 2. Code. The above amendments would be incorporated in the next reprint of the

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/LEG/6/A (VII) First issued : August 1997 (AD/LM) Index under : Code of Practice for, Means of Escape

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-93 211

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Planning and Design of Drainage Works This practice note sets out the Building Authoritys requirements as regards the planning and design of common drains for new buildings. Introduction 2. In the course of carrying out drainage repair and maintenance, difficulties have often been encountered in obtaining access to both the underground drains and above ground drainage pipes which run under/inside private premises such as shops (in particular restaurants and restaurant kitchens) and domestic flats. Both investigation and repair works, which may necessitate entry into private premises, opening up of floor slabs, and trench excavations, will cause much inconvenience to occupants. In the worst cases, the premises may have to be closed to effect the repair works. Improvement 3. In order to obviate such access difficulties and to facilitate the future maintenance of common drains, I shall require under section 28(1) of the Buildings Ordinance that the following be complied with: (a) Except drains in car-parking floors, all common underground drains for all new developments shall run in a space or land which is sterilized or otherwise designated as common area of the development; Where internal common soil and waste stacks are proposed in residential buildings not intended for single ownership, such stacks shall be located in the common area of the development. Where pipe-ducts or pipe wells are proposed to house common soil and waste stacks, they shall satisfy the following criteria respectively. (I) Pipe Ducts (i) (ii) These pipe-ducts shall be accessible from a common area; An unobstructed working space, of not less than 700 mm in front of the pipes, shall be provided for maintenance and repair of the pipeworks.

(b)

(iii) The size of doors or panels providing access to the pipe-ducts shall not be less than 600 mm by 2000 mm. /(II) ..

-2(II) Pipe Wells (i) The size of pipe well shall not be less than 1200 mm x 1500 mm. No opening will be allowed in a pipe well other than access points for inspection and maintenance, which shall be from common areas. Access points shall be provided to the pipe well at not more than 21 storeys apart.

(ii)

(iii) Cat ladder with proper guard rings shall be installed in the full height of the pipe well for inspection and maintenance purposes. (iv) Grating platforms shall be provided at intervals of not more than 4 floors. (v) The size of opening at every intermediate access point shall not be less than 600 mm wide by 2000 mm high. Such opening shall be protected by a door having a FRP not less than half of the enclosure wall.

(vi) A ventilation opening having a minimum net area of 1/10th of the horizontal area of the pipe well shall be provided at both the top and bottom of the pipe well. The area of pipe ducts and pipe wells could be exempted from plot ratio/gross floor area calculations. Open pipe wells may also be exempted from site coverage calculations. A sample illustration of the design of a pipe well is attached at Appendix A for general reference. (c) The lowest level of re-entrants and light wells housing external soil and waste stacks shall be designated as common areas and such areas shall be provided with adequate access which could be in the form of cat-ladder where necessary, for carrying out maintenance work and cleansing; For residential premises other than single family residence, no pipeworks shall protrude into the private premises of the floor below; Except for buildings not more than three storeys high, a separate stack, connected direct to a manhole, shall be provided to serve for the sanitary fitments at the floor, which is at the same level as the bottom of the waste/foul water stack; The nominal diameter of every soil pipe from water closet fitments or slop sinks shall be not less than the diameter of the outlet of any of the fitments it serves; and /(g) ..

(d)

(e)

(f)

-3(g) Soil and wastewater pipes shall only have bends when a change in direction is unavoidable. The radius of the bends at the bottom of stacks shall under no circumstances be less than four times the radius of the stack measured from the centerline whenever practicably possible, but under no circumstances be less than 200 mm measured from the centerline.

4. With immediate effect, all newly submitted drainage plans which do not comply with the requirement of paragraph 3(a) may be disapproved under section 16(1)(d) and 28(1) of the Buildings Ordinance. All new drainage plans after 1 September 2004 shall comply with all the requirements set out in paragraphs 3(a) to (g). 5. To provide flexibility in the design of pipeworks to satisfy the requirement set out in paragraph 3(d) above, the Building Authority is prepared to consider an application for modification of Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulation 25(1) to permit the total length of pipeworks from a bathtub or shower tray to a trap up to 750 mm at a minimum gradient of 1:40. 6. Reference shall also be made to PNAP 218 on the facilities for the maintenance of external building drainage pipes. Consideration for separate pipes in zones for high rise buildings shall also be made in the design stage for future maintenance and repair. 7. While the requirement set out in paragraph 3(d) does not apply to non-domestic premises, authorized persons are encouraged to adopt the same arrangement, wherever possible, for drainage pipes in such premises.

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority

Ref. :

BD GP/BORD/21 (III)

First issue August 1997 Last revision June 1999 (AD/D) This revision May 2004 (AD/NB1) (general revision) Index under : Drainage works

(APP-93)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-94 212

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Fire Safety (Commercial Premises) Ordinance, Cap. 502 Introduction The Fire Safety (Commercial Premises) Ordinance (the FS(CP)O) and its amendment Ordinance came into operation on 2 May 1997 and 1 June 1998 respectively. The purpose of the FS(CP)O is to provide better protection from the risk of fire for occupants and users of, and visitors to, prescribed commercial premises and specified commercial buildings, by upgrading the premises or buildings to current fire safety standards. Owners/occupiers of such premises or buildings are required to improve the fire safety measures including the fire service installations and equipment as well as the fire safety construction of the premises/buildings. Application Prescribed Commercial Premises (PCP) 2. if: (a) A building or part of a building is PCP under the scope of the FS(CP)O the building or part is used, or is proposed to be used, for carrying on any of the following commercial activities: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) AND (b) the total floor area of the building or part exceeds 230m2. banking (other than merchant banking); conduct of off-course betting; conduct of a jewelry or goldsmiths business on premises that have a security area; use as a supermarket, hypermarket or department store; use as a shopping arcade;

3. For the purpose of calculating the floor area of the PCP in paragraph 2(b) above, reference should be made to Sections 3(3) to 3(6) of the FS(CP)O. Appendix A illustrates some examples on demarcation of total floor area of shopping arcades. If difficulty is encountered in ascertaining whether certain commercial premises falls within the purview of the FS(CP)O, AP/RSE may approach the Fire Safety Section of the Buildings Department for clarification. /Specified ..

-2-

Specified Commercial Buildings (SCB) 4. (a) A building is a SCB under the scope of the FS(CP)O if: the building was constructed to be used or is being used for the purposes of office, business, trade or any entertainment; AND (b) (c) with plans of its building works first submitted to the Building Authority for his approval on or before 1 March 1987; or constructed on or before 1 March 1987 where no plans of its building works were submitted on or before that date to the Building Authority for approval.

Fire Safety Measures 5. All or any of the following fire safety measures for a SCB or PCP may need to be complied with to the current standards: (a) Construction requirements for the provision of: (i) (ii) (iii) adequate means of escape from the premises or building in the event of fire; adequate means of access to the premises or building to facilitate access for firefighting and rescue; measures to inhibit the spread of fire and to ensure the integrity of the structure of the building or part of the building where the premises are located.

(b)

Fire service installations and equipment requirements for the provision of: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) automatic sprinkler system; automatic cut-off devices for a mechanical ventilation system; emergency lighting; manual fire alarms; portable fire extinguishers; fire hydrant and hose reel system; the requirements specified in the Code of Practice for Minimum Fire Service Installations and Equipment 1994. /Construction ..

-3-

Construction Requirements 6. In relation to the construction requirements mentioned in paragraph 5(a) above, the scope of requirements is listed in Schedule 2 and Schedule 5 of the FS(CP)O for PCP and SCB respectively. The corresponding detailed requirements are set out in the following codes of practice: Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996; Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996; and Code of Practice for Means of Access for Firefighting and Rescue 1995.

Enforcement Authority 7. (a) For the purpose of the FS(CP)O: The Director of Buildings is the enforcement authority for the provision of fire safety measures in the planning, design and construction of the premises/buildings; and The Director of Fire Services is the enforcement authority for the provision of fire service installations or equipment in the premises/buildings.

(b)

Fire Safety Section 8. The Fire Safety Section headed by the Chief Building Surveyor/Fire Safety is set up in the Buildings Department to administer the FS(CP)O in respect of the construction requirements. Directions and Orders 9. Under sections 5(1) or 5(1)(A) of the FS(CP)O, the Director of Buildings may serve on the owner of PCP a fire safety direction (FSDn) or the owner of a SCB a fire safety improvement direction (FSIDn) directing the owner to comply with all or any of the requirements specified in Schedule 2 or 5 of the Ordinance. 10. Upon conviction of the offence of failure to comply with a FSDn or FSIDn, the Director of Buildings may, under section 6(1) of the FS(CP)O, apply to a magistrate to make a fire safety compliance order or a fire safety improvement compliance order for PCP or a SCB respectively directing the owner to comply with all or any of the requirements specified in the FSDn or FSIDn to which the offence is related. /Difficulties ..

-4-

Difficulties in Complying with Construction Requirements 11. Whilst it is important to provide better fire safety standards to PCP or a SCB, the Director of Buildings recognizes that in some situations there may be practical difficulties in providing the construction items as specified in paragraph 6 above. In cases of genuine difficulties, the Director of Buildings is prepared to consider owners alternative improvement measures based on fire safety engineering principles, which will equally achieve the primary objectives of the FS(CP)O. Submission of Plans for Approval 12. Where non-exempted building works are proposed either to voluntarily comply with the FS(CP)O or to satisfy the requirements of a FSDn or a FSIDn, an application for approval under the Buildings Ordinance should be made in the usual manner. However, for such applications, three instead of two sets of plans showing fire service installations and equipment are required by the Fire Services Department for processing. 13. No fee will be charged under Building (Administration) Regulation 42 if the proposals are entirely for improving the fire safety measures of the existing premises or building pursuant to the requirements of the FSDn or FSIDn.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref.: BD/FS/OA/165 First issue August 1997 This revision October 2007 (AD/EB2) general revision to include SCB Index under : Fire Safety (Commercial Premises) Ordinance Specified Commercial Buildings Prescribed Commercial Premises Prescribed Commercial Activities Fire Safety Direction Fire Safety Improvement Direction

APP-94

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-95 213

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Sale Offices and Show Flats on Construction Sites There is an increasing tendency that developers wish to operate sale offices and exhibit show flats on construction sites well before the new buildings are completed and certified for occupation. Since sale offices and show flats, which are open to the general public, are incompatible with construction works, for the sake of public safety, the following principles must be observed: (a) No part of any new building, whether still under construction or substantially completed, should be occupied and used as a sale office or a show flat without a temporary occupation permit. No temporary building within a construction site should be occupied and used as a sale office or a show flat without a temporary building permit and a temporary occupation permit for that purpose.

(b)

2. In considering applications for such temporary occupation and usage, the Building Authority has to be satisfied that (a) (b) (c) the premises intended to be occupied and used as a sale office or a show flat is structurally suitable for the purpose; the premises is adequately segregated from the rest of the construction works in terms of fire resisting construction; there is available adequate independent and protected means of access and escape to and from the premises with direct connection with a street; and the premises is provided with adequate fire service installations to the satisfaction of the Director of Fire Services;

(d)

3. In permitting such temporary occupation and usage, the Building Authority may, depending on the circumstances, impose suitable conditions(a) (b) (c) to limit the period within which the premises may be so occupied and used; to restrict the number of persons to be accommodated at any one time; and if necessary, to require the partial or total suspension of building works on the construction site during the period of such occupation and use. / 4. Any ...

-2-

4. Any violation of the above requirements or conditions may be liable to revocation of the temporary occupation permit and prosecution under section 40(1) and (5) of the Buildings Ordinance. 5. Authorised persons should take note of the above principles and when making an application for such occupation and usage they should submit sufficient information to justify viability in terms of paragraph 2 above and specify the period therefor and the expected number of persons to be accommodated.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BORD/10 (III) First issued August 1997 (AD/D) Index under : Sale offices Show flats TOP

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-96 214

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Contractors Registration Sections 8, 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 8E and 8F of the Buildings Ordinance (BO) govern the current contractors registration system. The prime objective of the system is to ensure that only contractors who are able to perform their duties and responsibilities in a competent manner as well as fully conversant with the relevant statutory requirements and the current building control system are registered and allowed to carry out building works and street works. Registers of General Building Contractors and Specialist Contractors 2. Under section 8A of the BO, there are two contractors registers, namely the general building contractors register and the specialist contractors register, being kept by the Building Authority (BA). In respect of the specialist contractors register, sub-registers of different categories of specialized works are maintained. 3. The names of the contractors in the registers are published annually in the Gazette. Relevant registration particulars of the contractors, including the name of the contractor, the name of its Authorized Signatory as referred to in paragraph 9(a) below, its registration number and the expiry date of its registration are also posted on the Buildings Department website. Categories of Specialized Works 4. Section 8A(2) of the BO empowers the BA to designate by notice in the Gazette categories of building works as specialised works that are required to be carried out by registered specialist contractors (RSC). Currently, there are five categories of works designated as specialized works. They are: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Demolition works; Foundation works; Ground investigation field works; Site formation works; and Ventilation works.

Scope of Works 5. Registered general building contractors (RGBC) may carry out general building works and street works which do not include any specialized works in the designated categories while RSC may only carry out specialized works in their corresponding categories in the sub-registers in which they have been entered. /6. ...

-26. A building owner is required to appoint contractors from the appropriate register corresponding to the category of building works to be carried out. The scope of works of RGBC and that of RSC in the demolition, foundation, ground investigation field works, site formation and ventilation categories are detailed at Appendix A. 7. To facilitate the operation of the construction industry, certain building works are permitted to be carried out by more than one category of contractors. Detailed guidelines are also provided at Appendix A. Requirements for Registration 8. Under Section 8B(2) of the BO, an applicant for registration as an RGBC or RSC must satisfy the BA on the following aspects: (a) if it is a corporation, the adequacy of its management structure; (b) the appropriate experience and qualifications of its personnel; (c) its ability to have access to plant and resources; and (d) the ability of the person appointed to act for the applicant for the purposes of the BO to understand building works and street works through relevant experience and a general knowledge of the basic statutory requirements. Authorized Signatory, Technical Director and Other Officer 9. In considering each application, the BA is to have regard to the qualifications, competence and experience of the following key personnel of the applicant: (a) a minimum of one person appointed by the applicant to act for the applicant for the purposes of the BO, hereinafter referred to as an Authorized Signatory (AS); (b) for a corporation a minimum of one director from the board of directors of the applicant, hereinafter referred to as a Technical Director (TD) who is authorized by the board to: (i) (ii) (iii) have access to plant and resources; provide technical and financial support for the execution of building works and street works; and make decisions for the company and supervise the AS and other personnel /for ..

-3for the purpose of ensuring that the works are carried out in accordance with the BO; and (c) for a corporation which appoints a director who does not possess the required qualification or experience as TD to manage the carrying out of building works and street works - an Other Officer (OO) or an AS authorized by the board of directors to assist the TD. 10. In addition to the above key personnel, the applicant is also required to demonstrate that it has employed appropriate qualified staff to assist the applicant and the above key personnel to execute, manage and supervise the building works and street works. Persons Eligible to be the AS, TD or OO 11. applicant: The following persons are eligible to become the AS and TD of the

(a) If the applicant is an individual, the applicant is the only person eligible to act as the AS. (b) If the applicant is a partnership, any partner appointed by all the other partners is eligible to act as the AS. (c) If the applicant is a corporation, a suitable person appointed by the board of directors is eligible to act as the AS, whereas the TD must be a director appointed under the Companies Ordinance and appointed by the board of directors to perform the role as TD. 12. A person is permitted to take up the roles of the AS as well as the TD of a corporation at the same time provided that he meets the requirements of both the AS and TD. 13. If an OO is required, he is permitted to assist one TD only. In such case, the AS is not permitted to take up the role of an OO. Appointment of AS/TD/OO for Registered Contractors 14. To ensure that adequate supervision and proper management are provided for carrying out of building works and street works and to avoid possible situations of conflict of interest, persons who have been accepted by the BA as the AS/TD/OO for a registered contractor will not be accepted as the AS/TD/OO for another contractor simultaneously for its registration, except under the special sharing arrangement for holding and subsidiary companies. /Contractors ..

-4Contractors Registration Committee 15. Contractors Registration Committees (CRC) are independent bodies appointed by the BA under Section 8 of the BO. The function of a CRC is to assist the BA in considering applications for inclusion in the contractors registers by: (a) examining the qualifications of applicants; (b) inquiring as the CRC considers necessary to ascertain whether an applicant has the relevant experience; (c) conducting interviews with the applicants and their key personnel; and (d) advising the BA to accept, defer or reject applications for inclusion in the relevant register. 16. Under section 8B(10) of the BO, the BA must not include the name of an applicant in the register of general building contractors or specialist contractors unless the relevant CRC so recommends. Besides, the BA may seek advice from the relevant CRC in respect of applications for addition of AS/TD/OO to a registered contractor. 17. In processing applications for renewal and restoration of names to the registers, the BA may also seek advice from the relevant CRC under section 8C(4) and section 8D(3) respectively of the BO. Composition of a CRC 18. Under Section 8(3) of the BO, a CRC appointed to assist the BA in considering applications for inclusion in the register of general building contractors shall consist of: (a) the BAs representative; (b) 3 persons, 1 of whom is nominated by each of the Architects Registration Board (ARB), the Engineers Registration Board (ERB) and the Surveyors Registration Board (SRB) from the lists of authorized persons (AP), registered structural engineers (RSE) and registered geotechnical engineers (RGE); (c) 3 persons nominated by The Hong Kong Construction Association Ltd.; (d) 1 person nominated by The Hong Kong E & M Contractors Association Limited; and (e) 1 person selected by the BA from among persons nominated by such bodies as the BA may think fit. /19. ..

-519. Under Section 8(3A) of the BO, a CRC appointed to assist the BA in considering applications for inclusion in the register of specialist contractors shall consist of: (a) the BAs representative; (b) 3 persons, 1 of whom is nominated by each of the ARB, the ERB and the SRB from the lists of AP, RSE and RGE; (c) 3 persons nominated by The Hong Kong Construction Association Ltd.; and (d) 2 persons selected by the BA from among persons nominated by such bodies as the BA may think fit. 20. Under section 8(6) of the BO, the members of the committee will elect the Chairman from the members of the committee other than the BAs representative. Application Procedures and Requirements 21. Details of the application procedures and requirements for inclusion of names in the contractor registers, renewal and restoration of registration are provided in Practice Note for Registered Contractors 38.

( CHEUNG Hau-wai ) Building Authority

Ref. : REG/RC/13/3 First issue November 1997 (AD/LM) Last revision December 2004 (AD/Support) This revision June 2007 (AD/Support) - Paragraphs 8(c), 9(c) and 14 amended. Index under : BO s8 Contractors Registration Contractors Registration Committee Scope of Works for Contractors

Appendix A (PNAP 214) (APP-96) Scope of Works of Registered General Building Contractors and Registered Specialist Contractors Registered General Building Contractor (RGBC) The RGBC is qualified under the BO to carry out any building works and street works which are not designated by the BA as a category of specialized works. Registered Specialist Contractor in the Demolition Works Category (RSC(D)) 2. All demolition works to which the Building (Demolition Works) Regulations apply are specialized works of the demolition works category unless all the following circumstances exist: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) The building to be demolished is not in Scheduled Area Number 1. No part of the building to be demolished exceeds 10m above adjacent ground. No structural element to be demolished has a clear span exceeding 6m or a cantilever span exceeding 1m. No part of the building to be demolished is in pre-stressed concrete construction. No part of the building to be demolished is an earth-retaining structure with retaining height exceeding 1.5m. There are no other buildings within 5m from the building to be demolished.

Registered Specialist Contractor in the Foundation Works Category (RSC(F)) 3. All foundation works, except where the penetration depth of the foundation element does not exceed 3 m, are specialized works of the foundation works category. Registered Specialist Contractor in the Ground Investigation Field Works Category (RSC(GIFW)) 4. (a) The scope of works for RSC(GIFW) is as follows: all exploratory drilling, boring, excavation and probing of land for obtaining information on ground conditions, and includes /the .. -1-

Appendix A (PNAP 214) (APP-96) the installation of instrument, sampling, field testing in boreholes, and any other associated site operations; (b) (c) pre-drilling for foundation works; proof-drilling for cast-in-place concrete foundation, mini-piles and socketed H-piles; and field testing of ground, the loading capacity of which has been improved by ground treatment.

(d)

5. The following list of works, not exhaustive, are examples of works which are required to be undertaken by RSC (GIFW): Types of Works Excavation Boreholes Details of Works Trial pits, trial trenches, slope surface stripping. Hand auger boring, corehole drilling, light cable percussion boring, rotary open hole drilling, rotary core drilling. Disturbed samples, U76 samples, U100 samples, split barrel standard penetration test samples, thin-walled piston samples, continuous soil and rock samples, rotary core samples, Mazier samples, block samples, groundwater samples and vibro-coring. Installation of instruments e.g. piezometers, standpipes, tensiometers, piezometer buckets, inclinometers, extensometers. Standard penetration test, vane shear test, permeability tests, packer (water absorption) test, plate test, pressuremeter test, borehole discontinuity survey (impression packer survey) and cone penetration test. Pre-drilling to determine rockhead level, core-drilling to verify quality of founding stratum. Field testing to verify load carrying capacity of treated ground.

Sampling

Instrumentation

Field Testing in Boreholes

Cast-in-Place Concrete Foundation Ground Treatment

Registered Specialist Contractor in the Site Formation Works Category (RSC(SF)) 6. All site formation works are specialized works of the site formation category, unless all the following circumstances exist: (a) The maximum gradient across the lot from boundary to boundary is not more than 15 degrees. /(b) .. -2-

(b) (c) (d)

Appendix A (PNAP 214) (APP-96) The overall gradient of an area bounded by lines 10m outside the lot boundary in any direction is less than 15 degrees. There is no slope within the area 10m outside the lot boundary steeper than 30 degrees or higher than 1.5m. There is no retaining wall or terrace wall, either within the lot or within the area 10m outside the lot, which is higher than 1.5m. No retaining walls or terrace walls higher than 1.5m are to be constructed. No slopes steeper than 30 degrees nor higher than 1.5m are to be constructed. The combined height of retaining wall and slope to be constructed does not exceed 1.5m.

(e) (f) (g)

Registered Specialist Contractor in the Ventilation Works Category (RSC(V)) 7. All ventilating system works to which the Building (Ventilating Systems) Regulations apply are specialized works under the ventilation category. Works Which May be Carried out by More Than One Category of Contractors 8. It is difficult to give an exhaustive or absolute demarcation among the scope of works of different categories of contractors. Whether the contractors in a category possess the recognized competence, experience, expertise, plant and resources in carrying out the proposed works should be the primary consideration of the AP/RSE/RGE. Additional guidelines in paragraph 10 below are provided for reference. 9. In situations not covered by any of the published guidelines and when unique site characteristics call for special consideration, the AP/RSE/RGE of the proposed works are expected to make professional judgment according to the aforesaid principles on the selection of the appropriate category of contractors. Should such circumstances arise, the BA will consider proposals from the AP/RSE/RGE on a case by case basis. 10. Additional guidelines on the demarcation of different scope of works among categories of contractors are as follows: (a) Temporary Works RGBC, RSC(F), RSC(SF) and RSC(D) may generally carry out temporary works which are associated with the execution /of .. -3-

Appendix A (PNAP 214) (APP-96) of the respective types of general building works and specialist works. These temporary works include hoarding, covered walkways, sheet piling, soldier piling, pipe piling, shoring, rock filled slopes for demolition, protective and precautionary measures. (b) Pile Cap Works Pile cap works may be carried out either by RGBC or RSC(F). These contractors may also carry out the associated temporary works, such as excavation and lateral support works, which are necessary for the construction of the pile caps. (c) Basement Works Excavation for basements, construction of basement walls, slabs and drains, which do not form part of pile caps fall within the scope of works of the RGBC. (d) Foundation Works Diaphragm walls should be carried out by RSC(F) when the penetration depth exceeds 3m. The penetration depths of foundation elements are generally measured from the ground level which may be existing or newly formed. Spread footing and raft foundation works may be carried out by either RSC(F) or RGBC. (e) Landscape and Street Works On grade roads, streets, landscape features, etc., should generally be carried out by RGBC. Such works which do not involve the construction of a roof or foundation, and drains associated with landscape works in the periphery of buildings not forming part of the permanent drains of buildings may also be carried out by RSC(SF). (f) Retaining Structures Retaining structures involving diaphragm walls, bore-piles, caissons or other foundation works, excluding those mentioned in paragraph 10(a) above should be carried out by RSC(F). Appendix B of PNAP 66 stipulates that mini piles are not to take lateral loads and therefore not commonly used in site formation works. Its construction could be up to 400mm /diameter .. -4-

Appendix A (PNAP 214) (APP-96) diameter and should therefore be carried out by RSC(F) or if less than 3m deep, by RGBC but not RSC(SF). (g) Dredging Works The general meaning of dredging in construction involves taking up of mud from sea or riverbeds that should generally be classified as site formation works. If the said works fall within the scope of works as set out in paragraph 6 above, it should be carried out by RSC(SF), otherwise, it should be carried out by RGBC. (h) Reclamation Works Reclamation works usually involves the forming of land, construction of seawalls or retaining structures and should be considered as site formation works to be carried out by RSC(SF). (i) Trial Pit Works Trial pit works should normally be carried out by RSC(GIFW). Other registered contractors except RSC(V) may also carry out such works if the trial pits are excavated solely for the following purposes: (i) (ii) (iii) exposing existing shallow foundations; locating utilities, installations; underground structures and

verifying the density of the backfill soil behind retaining structures (Note: insitu-density test has to be carried out by a laboratory which is accredited by the Hong Kong Accreditation Service for performing such test); and other studies not involving the investigation of ground conditions or soil/rock descriptions, e.g. archaeological studies.

(iv)

(Rev. 12/2004)

-5-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-97 215

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Consent Procedures for Building Works and Street Works Introduction This practice note provides guidelines on consent application. Fast Track Application 2. BD has put in place a system for fast-track processing of application for consent to commence works from the Building Authority (BA) for certain building works and street works. The procedures aim to facilitate building development by reducing the number of times authorized persons (AP), registered structural engineers (RSE) and registered geotechnical engineers (RGE) are required to submit consent applications. 3. The procedures for securing the BAs consent to the commencement of building works and street works are laid down in the Buildings Ordinance (BO) and the Building (Administration) Regulations (B(A)R). With the implementation of the fast-track processing of consent application, there are now two sets of procedures : The normal procedure This is applicable to all building works and street works. It should be followed for all Type I works and if so opted by an AP or RSE, for Type II works; and The fast-track procedure This is only applicable to Type II works.

Classification of works 4. For the purposes of this practice note and the administration of section 14(1)(b) of the BO and regulation 31 and 33 of the B(A)R, building works and street works are classified into two types: (a) Type I works refers to all the works, which have not been issued with a first consent of the BA. In this context, a first consent means the BAs consent granted for the first time for the works. It does not include the BAs consent required for the works shown on amendment plans, but include major revisions or amendment plans containing material deviations, approved subsequently; and Type II works refers to the works for which the BA has given approval and a first consent, in respect of which an amendment to plans already approved is proposed. It excludes major revisions or amendment plans containing material deviations to the plans previously approved. /5. .

(b)

-2

5. An AP, RSE or RGE wishing to take advantage of the fast-track procedures should mark clearly on the lower right-hand corner of his plans the following statement : The works shown on these plans are Type II works (curtain wall works, for example) in respect of which consent is applied for the purpose of Fast Track consent application under regulation 33 of the Building (Administration) Regulations. 6. It is the responsibility of an AP, an RSE and an RGE to consider thoroughly and ensure whether the works are Type I or Type II. Where the BA does not accept the classification indicated on a plan, he may, by invoking section 16(3)(a) or (b) of the BO, refuse to grant consent under the new procedures. 7. The new procedures have the obvious advantage of allowing for technical and minor adjustments to be made to the works without suspending the works on site. For any works to qualify as Type II works, it is essential that consent should have already been obtained earlier for the works. 8. To facilitate the operation of the consent application system, APs, RSEs and RGEs are requested to adopt the following terminology for differentiating the different types of building works or street works: Demolition works Ground investigation works Site formation works Slope/retaining wall works Excavation and lateral support works Foundation works Cap/footing/basement works Superstructure works Curtain wall works/cladding works Alteration and addition works Street or access road works

Drainage ..

-3

Note :

Drainage works Tunnel works General building works (i.e., works shown on general building plans, often synonymous with superstructure works)

More detailed description may be added in brackets after the above terms as necessary, e.g. Excavation and Lateral Support Works (Sheet Piles) and Site Formation Works (Phase I).

Normal procedures 9. The normal procedures require separate applications to be made for the BAs approval of plans and consent for commencement of the approved works. These procedures should be followed in respect of all Type I works and where an AP, RSE or RGE so chooses, in respect of any Type II works. Fast-track procedures 10. The fast-track procedures operate on the principle that approval and consent are given at the same time in respect of Type II works. It follows, therefore, that the consent given is limited to what is shown on the plans approved. If approval of other types of plans are required, e.g., corresponding structural amendment plans, the works, for which approval and consent have been given, should not be executed on site until approval of the structural amendment plans have been obtained together with the consent for the structural amendment works. 11. The procedures to be followed are as follows : Step 1 : Statement in accordance with paragraph 5 above is made by an AP, RSE or RGE on the plans for Type II works submitted in the application for approval and consent at the same time. If the plans cannot be approved, the disapproval of the plans and the refusal to give consent are issued to the AP, RSE or RGE at the same time. If the plans can be approved, approval and consent will be given at the same time with the required consent notice in respect of the works so approved and consented to. The BA expects the AP, the RSE and the RGE to ensure that the works so approved and consented to are compatible with all previously approved plans and that all conditions imposed are complied with. /Step 4 ..

Step 2 :

Step 3 :

-4

Step 4 :

If the plans can be approved but consent cannot be given, the plans will be approved and a notification of refusal of consent issued. In the circumstances the AP, RSE or RGE should follow the normal procedures for securing consent for the approved amendment works. For any subsequent submission of amendment plans, Step 3 or Step 4 as appropriate will be taken.

Step 5 : Specified Forms

12. In lieu of the specified form BA8, a statement in accordance with paragraph 5 above will be accepted for the purpose of application for consent for Type II works. Sanctions 13. APs, RSEs and RGEs wishing to take advantage of the fast track procedures for the Type II works should ensure that all necessary consents are obtained and all requirements are met prior to the commencement of the works. In this regard, APs, RSEs and RGEs are reminded of the sanctions contained in sections 7 and 40 of the BO. Validity of Plans 14. While the BO does not prescribe a validity period of approved plans, section 16(3)(d) of the BO does provide the BA with the opportunity to review any plans that are approved more than 2 years ago upon the application for consent to commence works. The BA will invoke section 16(3)(d) of the BO to refuse consent if the building works or street works shown on the approved plans do not comply with the current standards specified in the BO and allied regulations. However, section 16(3)(d) of the BO will not be invoked to enforce approved or draft outline zoning plans introduced under the Town Planning Ordinance after the approval of the building plans. Application of New Regulations 15. Section 39(2) of the BO provides that if any building works or street works are being carried out or consent to their commencement has been given before the coming into operation of any new regulation, the provisions of the law prior to the new regulation shall apply to such works. In this connection, if the building works or street works required under a new regulation are not shown on any plans that have been approved within a period of 2 years at the time of application for first consent to commence works, the BA may invoke section 16(3)(a) of the BO to refuse the consent application on the ground that the BA has not received and given his approval to all the plans prescribed by regulations. In cases where section 16(3)(a) of the BO is not invoked to refuse the application for first consent, such as in the case where plans incorporating the required building works or street works have been approved but not conforming to the standards specified in the new regulations, the AP, RSE or RGE is responsible to ensure that the building works or street works to be carried out comply with the standards set out in the new regulations pursuant to the provisions of section /39(2) of

-5

39(2) of the BO. In such cases, the AP/RSE/RGE should submit amended plans for approval as necessary, before application for an occupation permit. If the building works or street works carried out do not comply with the new regulation, the application for occupation permit may be refused under section 21(6) of the BO.

( CHEUNG Hau-wai ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/OM/5/3 BD GR/1-50/43/0 First issue November 1997 This revision December 2005 (AD/NB1) (General revision) Index under : Consent Consent procedures Type I works Type II works Validity of plans Application of new regulations BO s.39(2)

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-98

Lighting and Ventilation for Bathrooms and Lavatories in Domestic Buildings To promote the cause of environmental protection, the argument has often been made that flexibility should be allowed in administering Building (Planning) Regulation 36 in relation to windows for bathrooms and lavatories in domestic buildings. The Building Authority takes a sympathetic view on this argument having regard to advances in ventilation technology and the need for greater freedom in the design of buildings. 2. The Building Authority will give favourable consideration to an application for modification of Building (Planning) Regulation 36 in respect of bathrooms and lavatories where the following criteria are met : The room is part of a unit of accommodation for domestic use; The room is of a reasonable size; and The modification to be granted is unlikely to result in standards of public health and safety being compromised. 3. Upon the grant of a modification of the Regulation, the Building Authority will impose the following conditions : a) a system of artificial lighting and mechanical ventilation producing 5 air changes per hour is in operation at any time when the room is in use. The change of air shall be with the outside of the building and to achieve this, the use of ventilation ducting provided with access for cleaning is acceptable; there is permanent ventilation to the open air, the external air or with another room which is provided with a window meeting the area requirement for the combined windows. The permanent ventilation may be in the form of a vent duct with access for cleaning, an aperture in a wall or a door suitably located and permanently open or protected with lourves having a minimum size of 1/20 of the floor area of the room; unless demountable or replaceable vent duct is used, at least one access door or panel of minimum size 150 x 225mm (for vent duct of size 150 x 150 mm or above), or 100 x 225 mm (for vent /duct

b)

c)

- 2 -

duct of size under 150 x 150 mm) shall be provided for every 4 metres of the vent duct at easily accessible location and at the change of direction, adjacent to turning vanes or adjacent to dampers; and d) the requirements of Building (Planning) Regulation 35A and Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-27 on water heating are compiled with, where applicable.

In order to maintain the vent duct in hygienic condition, the vent duct should preferably be inspected and cleaned annually. Application 4. For the avoidance of doubt, this practice note is applicable to bathrooms and lavatories in the domestic part of new buildings only, ie buildings or part thereof in other uses and all existing buildings may not rely on this practice note for exemption from complying with the statutory requirements. Further review 5. The arrangements announced in this practice note will be kept under review and, if necessary or appropriate, revisions may be introduced.

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority

Ref. : GP/BREG/P/18 (IV) This PNAP is previous known as PNAP 219 First issue December 1997 Last revision : March 2000 This revision : February 2010 (AD/NB1) (para. 3 amended)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-99 220

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Flushing Volume for Flushing Cisterns Current Requirements Regulation 19 of the Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulations (Drainage Regulations) requires flushing cisterns of watercloset fitments to have a discharge between 9 and 14 litres. Under the current Waterworks Regulations, flushing cisterns shall be of the valveless syphonic type and the flushing volume shall be within the range of 7.5 and 15 litres. Relaxation 2. With the application of modern technology in the design of water closet flushing system, the effectiveness of flushing can be maintained with a reduced discharge. Therefore, to conserve our valuable water resources, both the Building Authority (BA) and Water Authority would have no objection to relaxing the use of syphonic flushing cisterns with discharge less than that required by the current regulations provided that the associated toilet bowls are compatible with the cisterns and the syphonic action is sufficient for the wastes in the toilet bowls to be cleared effectively by a single flush. 3. On your confirmation that the effectiveness of the flushing would not be affected, the BA is prepared to modify regulation 19 of the Drainage Regulations on minimum discharge for individual water closet flushing system.

( C M LEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/SF/1(II)

First issue May 2000 (AD/D)

Index under : B(SSFPBWL)R 19 Flushing volume Flushing cistern

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-100

Practice Note for Authorized Persons 222 and Registered Structural Engineers ___________________________________________________________________________ Buildings Department

Structural Plans of Glass Reinforced Polyester (GRP) Water Tanks

Water tanks constructed in glass reinforced polyester (abbreviated as GRP) are building works subject to control under the Buildings Ordinance. This practice note gives guidelines on the preparation of plans showing structural details of these GRP water tanks and the related test requirements.

Special Aspects of GRP 2. Compared with a traditional structural material such as mild steel, the high strength and low stiffness of GRP laminates means that structural design will be influenced more strongly by stiffness than strength. Furthermore, in service conditions, the long-term performance of a load-bearing GRP component can be adversely affected by several factors including the creep properties and the environment. Appropriate allowance for these factors should therefore be made in design to avoid premature failure.

Plans Submission 3. Except for small GRP water tanks where separate guidelines are given in paragraph 7, the following particulars are required to be included in the structural plans submitted for approval : (a) (b) reference to design standards; material specifications (e.g. material types, relevant compliance standards and mechanical properties etc); general arrangement showing the maximum designed capacity, the principal dimensions and thicknesses; fabrication details of the major structural components; fixing arrangements and details of the tank supports.

(c)

(d) (e)

Design calculations are also required to be submitted to substantiate the structural adequacy and integrity of the water tank and the base support.

/Contd.....

Quality Control

4. The following documents are required to be submitted prior to consent application for the commencement of GRP water tank installation works : (a) test reports issued by a recognised laboratory/organization to substantiate the mechanical properties of the fibre glass panel and its ability to withstand 6 times the design hydrostatic pressure; and manufacturers quality control details of the production of fibre glass panels and fabrication of the GRP tank.

(b)

Performance Tests 5. Performance tests are required to be carried out upon completion of the GRP water tank to satisfy the following requirements. The water tank shall be filled with water up to the overflow level at ambient temperature for the testings: (a) Leakage tests - The assembled water tank should be tested to demonstrate that there will be no visible sign of leakage after standing for at least 48 hours. Deflection test - The assembled water tank should be tested to satisfy that the deflection of the sides and bottom of the tank shall not exceed 1.0% of the depth of the tank and 10mm respectively after maintaining the full water load for at least 2 hours.

(b)

6. Upon satisfactory completion of the tests, the test reports should be submitted to the Building Authority appended with a statement signed by the Authorized Person/Registered Structural Engineer who prepared the plans to confirm that the water tank works have been carried out to satisfy the above-mentioned performance requirements.

Small GRP Water Tank 7. For GRP water tanks with a volume capacity and height dimension not 3 exceeding 8m and 2m respectively, requirements described in paragraphs 3 to 5 above would normally not be required. However, the following particulars should be included in the structural plans submitted for approval : (a) (b) (c) Location, principal dimensions, capacity and weight of the water tank; Reference to design standards and material specification of the tank; and Fixing arrangements and details, with calculations substantiating the structural adequacy of the tank supports.

/Contd.....

8. For indoor GRP water tanks with a volume capacity and water head not 3 exceeding 4m and 1.2m respectively, only item (a) in paragraph 7 above needs to be included in the structural plans submitted for approval together with calculations substantiating the structural adequacy of the floor structure supporting the water tank.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref : BD GP/BREG/C/32 First issue March 1998 (AD/SE) Index under : Glass reinforced polyester water tank Water tanks - glass reinforced polyester

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-101 223

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Podium Height Restriction under Building (Planning) Regulation 20(3)

Building (Planning) Regulation 20(3) restricts the full site coverage of nondomestic podium to a height of 15 meters. The Building Authority (BA) has been requested, from time to time, to consider applications for relaxation of the height restriction under the Regulation. This practice note provides advice as to how the BA may deal with such applications. Criteria and Examples 2. The BA will take into account the functional requirements, site constraints, the impact on the environment, public interest and the likelihood of abuse in considering applications for relaxation of the height restriction on podiums. 3. by the BA : The following are examples of which favourable consideration may be given

buildings in which a public transport terminus or facility of a similar nature is provided; the increase in podium height of the proposed building would give a better aesthetic or environmental effect; buildings of special design or use; buildings subjected to special requirements as to floor height under lease conditions. Where modification of the Regulation is given, the following general rules

4. will apply :

not more than 4 storeys are accommodated in a podium; and the podium height is not more than 20 meters from the ground level.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority Ref : GP/BREG/P/2 First issued : April, 1998 (AD/D) Index under : B(P)R 23(3) Podium height

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-102

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Superstructure Works Measures for Public Safety

224

Introduction Although the general site safety situation has been improved after the setting up of the Site Monitoring Section, the number of incidents of falling objects from buildings under construction remains high. Such incidents have highlighted the need to enhance precautionary measures at construction sites where superstructure works are being carried out, to better protect the public from falling objects. General Requirements 2. A properly built and maintained hoarding/covered walkway is always required to protect the public near building sites. General guidance on the provision of such structure can be found in PNAP 75. 3. Additional protection for the public near building sites undergoing superstructure works, except where the condition in paragraph 4(a) or (b) applies, should include the following precautionary measures : During Erection of the Structural Frame of a Building (a) ----Proper protection and safe passage for the public must be provided at all times by the erection and maintenance of suitable hoardings, covered walkways and gantry, and catch platform. Reference could be made to paragraph 22 to 24 of PNAP 71 for their general design requirements. An example of hoarding, covered walkways and gantry, and catch platform is also given in Appendix B of the same PNAP. Protective Screen on the Facade of a Building (b) The building under construction should be provided on its facade with a screen consisting of two layers (with overlaps, and fixed to scaffold at regular intervals): an inner net of heavy duty nylon netting with thread diameter of not less than 3.5 mm and a maximum centre to centre spacing of 50 mm, and an outer net of fine nylon netting. However, in order not to impede the smooth operation of the construction programme, the double layer netting may be removed locally during the installation of external cladding/curtain wall.

4. The above additional preventive measures are not required if a building under construction is: (a) (b) under 30 metres in height, or set back from the site boundary such that an inclined projection plane from the top outer edge of the building at 10 degree from the vertical does not go beyond the site boundary at ground level.

Alteration and Addition Works and Concrete Repair Works 5. Where any alteration and addition works or concrete repair works are carried out at the external walls of an existing building, adequate protection and precautionary measures should be provided to ensure site and public safety, In this respect, reference could be made to Guidelines for the Removal of Typical Unauthorized Building Works and General Maintenance of External Walls on general safety requirements published by the Buildings Department. Additional precautionary measures and suitable working procedures specific to individual Alteration and Addition Works should also be provided as and when necessary.

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BORD/71 First issue May 1998 February 2003 (AD/NB2) This revision July 2005 (AD/NB2) (Paragraph 3(a) and 5 amended, Appendix A deleted) Index under : Superstructure Works

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-103 227

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Structures On Grade on Newly Reclaimed Land Structures on grade such as floor slabs, partitions, fence walls, ancillary structures, underground utilities and drainage laid on newly reclaimed land are liable to significant subsidence due to long-term consolidation of underlying compressible material. For the purpose of this practice note, any land of which the reclamation is completed within 7 years counting back from the first day of submission of the foundation plan is considered as newly reclaimed land. Plans Submission 2. The following design rules are recommended for the design of different types of structures on grade on newly reclaimed land:(a) The lowest floor slabs within the building envelope, except for the circumstances stated below, should be designed as suspended slabs so as to eliminate the need for costly repair due to settlement. The problem with partitions could also be resolved once they are rested on suspended slabs. Under the following circumstances, floor slabs may be designed as on-grade: (i) (ii) (b) The floor slab is used for car parking, loading and unloading, vehicular ramp or pedestrian pavement; or The floor slab is directly above a raft pile cap.

Owing to the relative ease of reconstructing fence walls, landscaping structures, lightweight covered walkway that have been damaged by the effects of settlements, they may be designed as on-grade structures instead of being supported on structural members provided the effect of settlement will not cause the said structures to pose a hazard to life or property. The foundations of the ancillary structures detached from main building such as transformer rooms, pump house etc. should be carried down through the reclaimed materials to firm stratum and the lowest floor slabs should be designed as suspended. Underground utilities and drainage underneath a building should be designed to be either supported from the suspended floors or directly supported on pile caps. The pipe connection at the interface between the structurally supported portion and on-grade portion of pipes should be designed to accommodate differential settlement due to the subsidence of the latter. /(e) Where .

(c)

(d)

-2(e) Where open-cut method of excavation is proposed for raft pile cap construction and where space allows, a rockfill plug around the pile cap shall be provided to mitigate the migration of soil into the void that may be formed underneath the cap due to long term ground consolidation. The suggested details for the rockfill plug are enclosed in Appendix A. Where unusually excessive settlement is anticipated, appropriate measures to minimize the migration of soil into the void should be duly considered and provided for.

3. Where it is intended not to follow the above design recommendations, the problem of differential and total settlement affecting structures on grade should be fully taken into consideration in their designs. In this connection, a detailed assessment of the time-related total and differential settlement (including predicted time-settlement curves) and a proposal for necessary measures to overcome or accommodate the problem are required to be included in your site formation, superstructure and drainage plans as necessary where structures on grade are proposed on newly reclaimed land. Settlement Records and Previous Settlement Assessments 4. If a detailed assessment of settlements of site on newly reclaimed land is to be conducted, reference could be made to settlement measurements collected during the reclamation period. Such data should only serve as reference to the historical settlement characteristics of the site and building professionals should make their site-specific ground investigation, assessment and design works to overcome their anticipated settlement problems. The settlement assessment by the consultant engaged for the reclamation project could also be made available to building professionals. They should be regarded as supplementary information for site specific assessment and design works. The historical settlement record and settlement assessment for government reclamation, if available, can be obtained from the Territory Development Department (TDD) or the Civil Engineering Department (CED) or other departments, depending on which department undertook the reclamation projects for the site. 5. The provision of the historical settlement records and settlement assessment by TDD, CED or other departments does not and cannot absolve an authorized person and his appointed consultant from the responsibilities which they must assume for their site investigation, monitoring, assessment and design works. The user of the reference material should accept and understand that no warranty is expressed or implied by the parties who supplied or prepared such information on the accuracy or the reliability of the historical data and assessments by the government departments and consultants. Settlement Monitoring 6. When the alternative approach outlined in paragraph 3 above is adopted, the Building Authority may invoke Section 17(1)(6)(ca) of the Buildings Ordinance requiring continuous settlement monitoring (through instrumentation) throughout the construction period and the submission of a report reviewing the assessment of settlement. This is to ensure the reliability of the time-settlement relationship estimated at the design stage. /Maintenance .

-3Maintenance Implication 7. Where long-term settlement is allowed for in the design of structures on grade, i.e. for structures in paragraphs 2(a)(i), 2(b), 2(d) and 3 above, the authorized person should alert the developer of the long-term consequential maintenance implications resulting from such a design and advise him to inform any prospective buyers who may have to bear such maintenance costs for their properties in the longterm future. Application 8. For the purpose of plan submissions, this practice note will take immediate effect except for those building developments for which the application of consent for the foundation works has been submitted on or before 15 May 1999. However, the requirement in paragraph 7 regarding alerting the developer of the longterm consequential maintenance implications and advising him to inform prospective buyers will apply to all building developments for which occupation permit has not been issued. 9. For the avoidance of doubt, the main structure of a building and its foundations should be properly designed and constructed to take care of the effects of long-term consolidation of any underlying compressible material. In general, all such foundations should comply with the requirements of Part VI of the Building (Construction) Regulations on foundations.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BORD/32 (III) First issue April 1999 (AD/D & AD/SE) Index under: Newly Reclaimed Land Guidelines for Processing Submission Involving Structures on grade Settlement of Newly Reclaimed Land

-4-

APP-103

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-104 229

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Exclusion of Floor Areas for Recreational Use Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 116 advises in its para. 21 that certain recreational facilities aimed to benefit the residents and occupants generally may be considered for exclusion from gross floor area (GFA) calculations by modification of Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(a) on a case-by-case basis. Reference may be made to Appendix A for those active recreational facilities which are commonly accepted for exclusion from GFA calculations. The passive and ancillary facilities in the said Appendix may also be accepted provided their sizes are commensurate with the use appropriate to the development. 2. This practice note gives guidance on the requirements and conditions for considering and granting of modification under Section 42 of the Buildings Ordinance. Application 3. All applications for exclusion of floor areas for recreational use from GFA calculations must be accompanied by information substantiating the need for the areas with justification on overall size of the facilities, the headroom requirements and the mix of the various facilities as well as how the recreational facilities will be operated and controlled to ensure their exclusive use by the owners and residents including their bona fide visitors. The substantiation should include a proposal on how the facilities would be supported and sustained financially. The Building Authority would not, however, expect that the gross floor area of such facilities to exceed 5% of the domestic gross floor area in normal circumstances. However, some active recreational facilities (e.g. indoor swimming pool and multi-purpose ball court) are very space consuming when these facilities are provided a more relaxed percentage may be allowed depending on the special circumstances of the case. For avoidance of doubt, while a kitchen of reasonable size ancillary to the recreational activities at development sites without any commercial floor space, in relatively remote areas may be considered upon application, commercial undertakings are not qualified for exclusion from gross floor area calculation. Open-sided covered landscaped areas/children play areas provided under the footprint of the domestic tower would not be subject to the 5% limitation. 4. As a pre-requisite for giving approval of plans, the developer of a proposed development is required to submit a letter of undertaking designating the recreational facilities as a common area in a Deed of Mutual Covenant with details of the use and location clearly indicated and binding and enforceable terms and conditions included for the control, operation, financial support and maintenance of the facilities. Any subsequent amendments affecting the recreational facilities must be accompanied with a revised undertaking and layout plan. /Exemption ..

-2Exemption 5. Exemption from GFA calculations will be effected by way of a modification of the relevant Building (Planning) Regulations. As a condition of the modification, the Building Authority will require the developers undertaking to be registered in the Land Registry before the submission of application for occupation permit. A further condition will be imposed to the effect that the recreational area should be for the exclusive use of the owners and residents and their bona fide visitors only as indicated on the approved plans and such area shall not be used for any purpose or by any other persons without the prior consent of the Building Authority. 6. It is important for authorized persons to note that an occupation permit will not be issued unless there is evidence indicating that the relevant undertaking and layout plan are registered in the Land Registry. Developers should also remind purchasers that the Building Authority will prosecute for contravention of the conditions of exemption.

( C M LEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BORD/48 (II) First issue January 1999 This revision September 2000 (AD/NB1) (paras. 1, 3, 5, 6 & Appendix A amended) Index under: Gross Floor Area Calculation Gross Floor Area Exclusion Recreational Facilities

Appendix A PNAP 229 APP-104 Recreational Facilities Commonly Accepted for Exclusion from GFA Calculations

Facilities which are commonly accepted Active facilities : Swimming pool Multi-purpose ball court/Squash court Basketball court/Football court Tennis court/Badminton court Children play area Games room Indoor golf room Table-tennis room Fitness room Gymnasium Weight training/Aerobic/Exercise room Bowling alley Skating rink Volleyball court Passive facilities : Sitting area/lounge Billiard room Sauna/Spa facilities Reading room/Study room/Library Function room Computer/video game room Music room/Karaoke room

Ancillary Facilities which may be accepted, depending on the size and relationship with main functions

Club house management office Club house staff room Snack bar and pantry First-aid room Pantry and mini-bar (not exceeding 10m2) Kitchen (not exceeding 15 m2) for sites without any commercial floor space.

This revision September 2000

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-105 230

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Water Seepage

Water seepage has been a cause for concern to a number of Government departments including the Buildings Department (BD). Causes of seepage are many and varied but one of the common sources of seepage relates to water-borne piping embedded in the concrete members of a building. 2. The problems associated with water seepage caused by embedded water-borne piping are complex and difficult to resolve for the following reasons : (i) The party affected (lower floor) is normally not the one who created the problem (upper floor), therefore co-operation is usually not forthcoming. If common areas are involved, multiple ownership status of such areas further complicates the problem; It is difficult to locate the defective sections of water-borne piping for repair, as water leaks and finds its path of least resistance through cracks and ducts; and Even if such defective sections are accurately identified, the breaking up of structural elements for repair is costly and disruptive to the occupiers, which would discourage them from co-operating.

(ii)

(iii)

3. Regulation 3 of the Building (Construction) Regulations (B(C)Rs) stipulates that all materials used in any building works shall be of a suitable nature and quality for the purposes for which they are used; adequately mixed or prepared; and applied, used or fixed so as to perform adequately the functions for which they are designed. Regulations 34, 38, 41 and 48 of the B(C)Rs also require external walls, roofs, kitchen and bathroom walls and floors to be protected against penetration of moisture or water. Authorized Persons (AP), Registered Structural Engineers (RSE) and Registered General Building Contractors (RGBC) are therefore reminded to ensure that the design and construction of their buildings meet the above performance requirements and are structurally safe. 4. Water seepage arising from embedded piping causes not only nuisance but also deterioration to the structural member of a building if unattended for a prolonged period. To cure the problem at source, you are strongly advised to design the routing of all water-borne piping off structural elements to facilitate the indispensable need for repair and replacement of such piping during the design life of the building, which would normally outlast the design life of the piping. The huge benefit to the consumers and the public that this will bring about in terms of easy maintenance of the building for its entire design life will certainly outweigh the efforts you, as AP and RSE, have to make at the design stage of a building project. /5. ..

-25. To ensure the long-term integrity of all structural elements and also to avoid sanitary nuisance arising from water seepage, you are required to state explicitly in the drainage plans that no water-borne piping, other than that specified in paragraph 2 of the guidelines at Appendix A, will be embedded in structural elements. If despite my advice you still decide to embed any section of such piping in any structural elements, you will be required to submit for my consideration details showing the routing of all water-borne pipes when you apply for approval of drainage plans and to justify to my entire satisfaction how you would achieve the above objective of ensuring the long-term integrity of such structural elements and preventing water seepage arising from the embedded pipes. Omission of such routing details, or the justification of such omission as the case may be, would result in disapproval of plans under Section 16(1)(i) of the Buildings Ordinance. This is applicable to all new building projects for which building plans are submitted for the first time for approval. 6. To assist designers to route water-borne pipes off structural elements, the Building Authority is prepared to grant modification to permit genuine pipe ducts designed in accordance with Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 211 in new buildings to be excluded from gross floor area calculation. Prevention of Water Seepage in New Buildings 7. Your attention is also drawn to the importance of preventing water seepage from other sources. To ensure the building quality and compliance with the performance requirements stipulated in the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations, AP and RSE should pay special attention to the choice of material, design and specification, workmanship and supervision. 8. According to the past records, roof, external wall, window, bathroom, kitchen, plumbing and drainage pipes, car park floor and basement are areas which are susceptible to water seepage if not carefully designed and well attended to during the course of construction. AP and RSE are therefore advised to take steps to prevent water seepage in these areas and to specify appropriate waterproofing measures to these areas in their design. 9. You may wish to note that BD has issued Guidelines on Prevention of Water Seepage in New Buildings for general reference. General 10. contractors. A practice note on the same subject has been issued to registered

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority

-3-

Ref. : BD GR/1-55/173 BD GP/BORD/92 BD GP/BREG/P/9 (III) First issue October 1999 Last revision March 2000 This revision March 2005 (AD/NB1) Paras 4, 5, 6 & Appendix A amended and paras 3, 7 to 10 added Index under : Water seepage Water-borne piping embedded in structural elements

Appendix A (PNAP 230) (APP-105) Guidelines on Embedment of Water-borne Pipes 1. In general, embedment of water-borne pipes in structural members, other than those specified in paragraph 2, would not be permitted within columns, slabs, structural walls, beams, transfer plates, pile caps and footings. Water-borne pipes piercing through the following structural members may be permitted where it is demonstrated that no adverse effect will be caused to the performance of the structural members and, where the pipes are easily accessible for maintenance : (a) (b) Vertical pipes piercing through structural slabs, transfer plates; and Horizontal pipes piercing through beams, columns or structural walls.

2.

In this regard, for the sake of easy replacement, pipe sleeves should preferably be cast into the structural elements for the pipes to pass through. 3. In the context of para. 2, no adverse effect may be assumed in the following circumstances : (a) Vertical pipes piercing through r.c. floor slabs, transfer plates :(i) The size of a hole formed is not greater than 150mm in diameter or the minimum bar spacing of the slab in either direction, whichever is the less and no main reinforcement is severed to make way for the hole; and Trimming bars not less than the size of the main reinforcement of the slab are provided around the hole.

(ii) (b)

Horizontal pipes piercing through r.c. beams :(i) (ii) (iii) The size of a hole formed is not greater than 150mm in diameter or 1/3 the depth of the beam, whichever is the less; The hole is formed at the neutral axis of the beam section; Vertical and horizontal trimming bars not less than 16mm in diameter are provided around the hole and at each side of the beam; and No shear reinforcement is severed to make way for the hole.

(iv)

-1-

(c)

Horizontal pipes piercing through structural walls :(i) The size of a hole formed is not greater than 150mm in diameter or the minimum bar spacing of the vertical reinforcement of the wall, whichever is the less; and Vertical and horizontal trimming bars of size of not less than the vertical reinforcement bars of the wall are provided around the hole and at both side of the wall.

(ii)

(Rev. 3/2005)

-2-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-106 231

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Fire Resisting Construction Kitchens in Restaurants A kitchen in a restaurant may be regarded as ancillary accommodation to the restaurant for the purpose of assessing the fire resisting construction requirements. Such kitchen, for the purpose of Part XV of the Building (Construction) Regulations, should comply with the following requirements : (a) The kitchen should be enclosed by walls having an FRP of not less than 1 hour and any opening in the enclosure should be defended by a door having an FRP of not less than 1/2 hour; and A protected lobby should be provided between each door of the kitchen and any escape route from the main building; and/or the dining area of the restaurant where the kitchen has a usable floor area exceeding 45 m2 and the door opens onto an exit route of the dining area.

(b)

2. Subject to compliance of para. 17.1 of the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction (FRC Code), hold-open device for the doors of the kitchen may be installed. 3. The requirements in para. 1 will be incorporated in the next edition of the FRC Code. In the meantime, para. 6 of the Code may be taken with the benefit of the clarification given in this practice note.

( CHOI Yu-leuk ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/19/L (VII) First issue October 1998 (AD/D) Index under : Kitchen attached to restaurant FRC - kitchen

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-107 232

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Precautionary Measures for Construction Sites From time to time, construction activities cause damage to adjoining properties and nuisance to the public. 2. This practice note serves as a reminder of the need to provide necessary protective and precautionary measures to minimize adverse effect on adjoining buildings and nuisance to general public. 3. While the precautionary measures required for a particular site depend on its special circumstances, attention should be paid to the following types of works : a) b) c) d) e) Demolition works; Dewatering in foundation and basement excavation; Lateral support for excavation; Pouring of concrete against walls of adjoining buildings; Structural works.

4. General advice on the above works can be found in Practice Notes for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 71, 74, 81, 148 and 224 as well as the Draft Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings. 5. In addition, your attention is also drawn to PNAP 144 on the control of environmental nuisance.

( CHOI Yu-leuk ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GR/ACT/20 First issue December 1998 (AD/D) Index under : Precautionary measures for construction works Protective measures

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-108 233

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorised Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Dedication of Land/Area for Use as Public Passage Purpose This practice note sets out the general guidelines on proposals to dedicate land or area within a building for use as public passage and the concessions which the Building Authority (BA) may grant upon acceptance of such dedication. Dedications 2. The BA has the discretionary power to grant concessions in the form of exemption of certain floor areas from the gross floor area (GFA) calculations and in the form of additional plot ratio and site coverage in exchange for dedication of land or area for use as public passage. Proposals for dedication usually fall into one of the following two categories:(i) Dedication of set back area at street level for the purpose of public passage The permitted site coverage and plot ratio for the building may be exceeded to an extent calculated in accordance with Building (Planning) Regulations (B(P)R). The maximum additional plot ratio thus approvable is five times the area so dedicated or 20% of the permissible plot ratio, whichever is the less. In addition, the BA may exempt areas accepted as dedicated for use as public passage from GFA calculations. (ii) Dedication of an area within or through a building at ground level or other floor levels for public passage The BA may in return for this type of dedication allow the concessions by way of granting modifications of the relevant B(P)R provisions. The extent of the concessions, which may be granted by the BA according to individual merits, ranges from exempting the dedicated area from GFA calculations to allowing bonus plot ratio and site coverage for the development. Normally the bonus site coverage, if allowed, will be equivalent to the extent calculated in accordance with B(P)R 22(1). The maximum bonus plot ratio, in terms of additional GFA, generally will be at multiples of the dedicated area (five times for dedicated area at ground level and two times for areas at other floor levels) subject to the total bonus in return for the dedication not to exceed 20% of the permissible plot ratio with the dedicated area being exempted from accountable GFA. / General

-2General Guidelines 3. To provide a greater degree of certainty to authorized persons and developers when they submit applications for concessions in return for dedication of land or area within a building for use as public passage, the following guidelines on the provision of public passages are provided for general reference. 4. B(P)R 22(2) provides for additional plot ratio and site coverage in return for surrender for the purpose of street widening. Hence public passages intended for street widening shown on town plans or other street improvement plans would be considered in the context of B(P)R 22. 5. Where bonus plot ratio and site coverage are given in return for dedication of land for public passage, the resultant development intensity shall not exceed the restrictions, if any, stipulated in the statutory town plan unless otherwise provided in the said plan. 6. The Building Authority may accept dedication of land or area within a building for public passage if such dedication will lead to: (a) (b) alleviation of congestion problems of vehicular or pedestrian traffic on public roads or walkways; linkage with a footbridge/subway or proposed footbridge/ subway which is or will be readily accessible to and used by the general public, and such linkage would significantly enhance public safety or convenience; improvement of road safety or significant enhancement of public convenience; or provision of suitable greenery compatible with the use of the proposed public passageway.

(c) (d)

7. All applications for dedication should be accompanied by suitable justification to demonstrate that there is a genuine need by the public for such dedication and the dedicated areas are reasonable in the circumstances to cater for the need. In general, upon acceptance of a proposed dedication of land or area within a building for public passage as desirable, the BA may exempt such land or area from GFA calculations. However, bonus plot ratio and site coverage for the development will only be allowed if such dedication is considered to be essential by government, taking into account alternative public passages available in the vicinity. 8. Where the dedicated area within a building serves both the public and the users of the building, the amount of exempted GFA and/or bonus GFA will be assessed by taking into account the proportion of traffic generated by the public and the users of the building. / Display

-3Display of Notices 9. In all cases, the responsibility for the provision, maintenance and repair of the dedication areas will rest with the building owners. For greater transparency, notices advising the public of the dedication of the area for use as public passage, the opening hours of such a public passage and the party responsible for the management of the area should be displayed in conspicuous locations of the area to the satisfaction of the BA. Such responsibility for the display of notices, maintenance and repair will be made a condition of dedication. Deed of Dedication 10. A temporary occupation permit or an occupation permit will not be issued before the execution of a Deed of Dedication incorporating all the relevant terms and conditions and until all these terms and conditions have been fullfilled. APs should remind their clients for early preparation and execution of the required Deed.

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority

Ref: BD GP/BREG/P/3(III) First issue November 1999 Last revision December 2002 This revision June 2003 (AD/NB1) (General revision) Index under: Dedication B(P)Reg 22

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-109 234

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Geotechnical Manual for Slopes Guidance on Interpretation and Updating Government publications of interest to the building industry are promulgated in the list of publications in PNAP 115, among which is the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes. 2. The Geotechnical Manual for Slopes provides guidance on the standards of good practice that should be adopted for the investigation, design, construction and maintenance of slopes and site formation works in Hong Kong. The first edition of the Manual was published in draft form in November 1979 and the second edition was published in May 1984. 3. Over the years since its publication, the second edition of the Manual has become the consensus guidance document in the areas of investigation, design, construction and maintenance of slopes and site formation works. However, there have also been advances in local practice, and separate guidance documents have been prepared to supplement the Manual. These have made some parts of the Manual obsolete and more guidance is needed on the interpretation of the Manual. It is the purpose of this practice note to provide such guidance, which is given in Appendix A of this practice note.

(CHOI Yu-leuk) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GR/GEO/11(III) First issue June 1999 (AD/SE, AD(G)/HKI) Index under : Geotechnical Manual for Slopes

Appendix A (PNAP 234) (APP-109) GUIDANCE ON INTERPRETATION OF GEOTECHNICAL MANUAL FOR SLOPES

1. 2. 2.1.

This Appendix provides guidance on, and clarification of, the interpretation of some aspects of the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes (2nd Edition). TERMINOLOGY The use of the term risk in the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes (Manual) to mean consequence in the event of failure has led to some misunderstanding. For this reason, the term risk shall be replaced by consequence. This is consistent with international usage. The two types of consequence classification of slope failure given in Tables 5.2 and 5.3 of the Manual shall be referred to as consequence-to-life and economic consequence respectively. The descriptive terms high, low and negligible are intended to reflect the likely relative severity of the failure consequence, but these have also resulted in misconceptions. To avoid possible confusion, the three categories of consequence-to-life shall be denoted as Categories 1, 2 and 3 respectively instead of high, low and negligible. For the same reason, a new system is also adopted to denote the different categories of economic consequence. The three categories of economic consequence shall be denoted as Categories A, B and C respectively instead of high, low and negligible. A combined notation shall now be used to indicate both the consequenceto-life and the economic consequence of a feature. For example, a Category 2A feature refers to one having the second highest consequenceto-life and the highest economic consequence in the new three-tier classification system. CONSEQUENCE-TO-LIFE CATEGORIES The recommended minimum safety factors for slopes given in Tables 5.1 and 5.4 of the Manual are related to assessed consequence-to-life categories. Because of the change in terminologies (see section 2), these Tables shall be replaced by Tables 1 and 2 in this Appendix respectively. The consequence-to-life category reflects the severity in terms of loss of life in the event of failure. Table 5.2 of the Manual, which gives typical examples of each consequence-to-life category, shall be replaced by Table 3 in this Appendix.

2.2.

2.3.

3. 3.1.

-1-

3.2.

In determining the consequence-to-life category of a slope, the designer should use his own professional judgement in assessing the severity in terms of loss of life in the event of failure in each particular case, giving due consideration to the types of buildings and facilities that may be threatened, and how the buildings and facilities would be affected in the event of slope failure. In assessing the effects of a slope failure on buildings and facilities, account should be taken of such factors as possible mechanisms and scale of failure, site conditions, proximity of the buildings and facilities to the slope and their likely density of occupation and frequency of usage in the event of failure, travel distance of the landslip debris, resistance of the buildings and facilities to debris impact and vulnerability of occupants and users. Examples (1) and (2) of Table 3 refer to situations where the buildings or facilities lie within the expected travel distance of the landslip debris, and hence the severity in terms of loss of life is high, and the consequence-tolife category is 1. No examples are given in the Table on situations where the buildings or facilities are located further away from the slopes. Following the consequence-to-life definition given in the Manual, where the buildings or facilities lie beyond the expected travel distance of the debris and the severity in terms of loss of life in the event of failure is less, the consequence-to-life category may be downgraded to 2. Where the buildings or facilities lie beyond the possible extreme limit of landslip debris, the consequence-to-life category may be taken as 3. Similar considerations apply to buildings and facilities located behind the slope crest with respect to the expected and the possible extreme limits of the area affected by the landslip. In consequence-to-life classification for the purposes of slope design and stability assessment, bus shelters or similar sheltered public waiting areas shall be regarded as occupied buildings (example 1 in Table 3). ECONOMIC CONSEQUENCE CATEGORIES Table 5.3 of the Manual, which gives typical examples of each economic consequence category, shall be replaced by Table 4 in this Appendix. Although Table 1 recommends the minimum safety factors for slopes for different economic consequences, the choice of safety factors against economic loss is a decision which must be made by the owner upon the advice of the designer. In advising the owners, the designer should decide for himself the degree of economic consequence and should balance the potential economic consequence in the event of a failure against the increased construction costs required to achieve a higher factor of safety.

3.3.

3.4.

4. 4.1. 4.2.

-2-

5. 5.1.

SAFETY FACTORS FOR EXISTING SLOPES The minimum safety factors recommended in Table 2 may be used for the stability assessment of and design of modifications to any existing slope which is associated with new works, as long as rigorous geological and geotechnical investigations are conducted (which should include a thorough examination of slope maintenance history, groundwater records, rainfall records and any slope monitoring records) and there is sufficient knowledge of the geology, groundwater and performance history of the slope. Under these conditions, Table 2 can be used for stability assessment for known changes in imposed loadings, and for the design of remedial or preventive works, including slope flattening, improvements to surface and subsurface drainage, and the installation of support measures. As Section 5.2.2 of the Manual indicates, the designer is able to adopt with confidence a lower factor of safety for an existing slope because he has the benefit of the performance history and other information that is not available for the design of a new slope. This does not imply that the standards of safety deemed to be acceptable for existing slopes are lower than those recommended for new slopes. Reference should be made to the attached note (see Annex 1 of this Appendix) on discussion of the philosophy of this approach by Malone (1985). There will often be instances, however, where particular circumstances (such as lack of adequate groundwater and rainfall records) will lead the designer to adopt, for remedial and preventive works, the standards specified for new slopes. SAFETY FACTORS FOR TEMPORARY WORKS Section 5.2.4 of the Manual shall be replaced by the following. The safety factors required for the design of temporary works (i.e. works undertaken during construction which are not part of the permanent works) shall be the same as those for permanent new works (Table 1), but with due regard for the conditions which are likely to exist during the life of the temporary works. In some cases, for example, the consequence-to-life category during construction may be classified as 2 or 3, compared with consequence-to-life category 1 once the buildings are completed and occupied. RELIABILITY OF SLOPE DESIGN The reliability of slope design is discussed in Section 5.3.6 of the Manual and should be considered in deciding on the minimum safety factor to be adopted.

5.2.

6. 6.1. 6.2.

7. 7.1.

-3-

7.2.

Different design solutions, e.g. open-cuttings and cuttings with structural support, have different levels of uncertainties associated with the various components of investigation, design and construction. They will have different reliability indices (hence different levels of safety) even if the assessed factor of safety is the same. In order to have a meaningful comparison of options, a higher minimum safety factor needs to be adopted for the solution with a lower reliability index than the solution with a higher index. COMPACTION OF NEW FILL SLOPES The design and construction of new fill slopes are governed by sections 5.5.1 and 9.5 of the Manual respectively. It should be noted that in some exceptional cases, such as fill forming a large platform that will not support structures, the requirement for a compacted density of 95% of maximum dry density (GEO, 1996b) can be relaxed to 90% for the interior of the platform. This may be done provided that the fill at formation level and the fill forming the peripheral slopes is compacted to 95% of maximum dry density for a vertical thickness of at least 1.5 metres and 3 metres respectively. Please note that Figure 9.1 of the Manual illustrates only one of many configurations which can be adopted. In any case, it is good engineering practice to provide adequate subsurface drainage to avoid build-up of groundwater pressure at the rear of the less permeable peripheral slopes. Fill in reclamations, or behind retaining structures and in other small areas of flat land, does not generally need to meet compaction requirements for slope stability reasons. It is therefore for the designer to determine the compaction requirements based on other criteria. TREATMENT OF EXISTING FILL SLOPES Section 5.5.2 of the Manual defines the standard treatment of existing loose fill slopes by recompaction of the surface fill to a vertical depth of 3 metres. This treatment does not need to be prescribed, however, if : (a) a fill slope is of consequence-to-life category 3, (b) the fill slope is judged to be too small to pose a significant hazard, or (Note. The size of a fill slope which may be regarded as too small to pose a significant hazard would depend on the distance to and the type of the facilities being affected, the topography of the ground below the slope, the liquefaction potential of the fill body, etc. Professional judgement should be exercised in individual cases in determining the size of a fill slope which could be considered as such.)

8. 8.1.

8.2.

9. 9.1.

-4-

(c) the fill slope has a cover of mature vegetation which is beneficial to the stability of the slope, and where there is a reasonable alternative engineering solution. 9.2. Reference should be made to the Report on the Slope Failures at Sau Mau Ping (Government of Hong Kong, 1977) for background on the standard treatment of existing fill slopes as recommended in the Manual. SUPERSEDED CHAPTERS/SECTIONS The following Chapters/Sections of the Manual are no longer applicable, having been superseded by later publications : (a) Chapter 1 and Section 2.3.3 are superseded by the Geological Survey Maps and Memoirs and Geoguide 3 (GCO, 1988). (b) Chapter 2 (except Section 2.3.3), Section 3.5 and 10.2 are superseded by Geoguide 2 (GCO, 1987). (c) Section 4.6 is superseded by GEO Publication No. 1/93 (GEO, 1993a). (d) Chapter 7 (except the parts relevant to the design of remedial or preventive works to existing gravity retaining walls as given in Section 7.3.3) is superseded by Geoguide 1 (GEO, 1993b), GCO Publication No. 1/90 (GCO, 1990) and GEO Circular No. 6/96 (GEO, 1996a). (e) Chapter 11 is superseded by Geoguide 5 (GEO, 1998). (f) References to BS 1377:1975 concerning Phase 1 tests described in Works Branch Technical Circular 6/94 are replaced by GEO Report No. 36 (GEO, 1996b). (g) The Hong Kong Bibliography referred to in the Manual is the Bibliography on Geology and Geotechnical Engineering of Hong Kong (Brand, 1984). This has been superseded by GEO Report No. 50 (GEO, 1996c). 11. LIST OF RELATED DOCUMENTS (a) Geotechnical Control Office (1984). Geotechnical Manual for Slopes. (Second Edition). Geotechnical Control Office, Hong Kong, 295 p. (b) Geotechnical Control Office (1987). Guide to Site Investigation (Geoguide 2). Geotechnical Control Office, Hong Kong, 359 p. (c) Geotechnical Control Office (1988). Guide to Rock and Soil Descriptions (Geoguide 3). Geotechnical Control Office, Hong Kong, 186 p. -5-

10. 10.1.

(d) Geotechnical Control Office (1990). Review of Design Methods for Excavations (GCO Publication No. 1/90). Geotechnical Control Office, Hong Kong, 192 p. (e) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1993a). Review of Granular and Geotextile Filters (GEO Publication No. 1/93). Geotechnical Engineering Office, Hong Kong, 131 p. (f) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1993b). Guide to Retaining Wall Design (Geoguide 1). (Second Edition). Geotechnical Engineering Office, Hong Kong, 258 p. (g) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1995b). Recommendations Arising from the Review of the Risk-to-life Categorisation System of the GCO (1984). Geotechnical Engineering Office, Hong Kong, GCC Paper No. 295. (h) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1996a). Guidelines for Assessment of Old Masonry Retaining Walls in Detailed Studies and for Action to be Taken on Private Walls. Geotechnical Engineering Office, Hong Kong, GEO Circular No. 6/96. (i) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1996b). Methods of Test for Soils in Hong Kong for Civil Engineering Purpose (Phase 1 Tests) (GEO Report No. 36). Geotechnical Engineering Office, Hong Kong, 90 p. (j) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1996c). Bibliography on the Geology and Geotechnical Engineering of Hong Kong to March 1996 (GEO Report No. 50). Geotechnical Engineering Office, Hong Kong, 111 p. (k) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1997). Control of Compaction of New Fill Slopes. Geotechnical Engineering Office, Hong Kong, GEO Circular No. 5. (l) Geotechnical Engineering Office (1998). Guide to Slope Maintenance (Geoguide 5). (Second Edition). Geotechnical Engineering Office, Hong Kong, 91 p. (m) Government of Hong Kong (1977). Report on the Slope Failures at Sau Mau Ping, August 1976. Hong Kong Government Printer, 104 p. plus 8 drgs. (n) Malone, A.W. (1985). Factor of Safety and Reliability of Design of Cuttings in Hong Kong (Oral Discussion). Proceedings of the Eleventh International Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, San Francisco, vol. 5, pp 2647. (o) Works Branch (1994). Soil Testing Standard (Phase 1 Tests). Works Branch Technical Circular No. 6/94. -6-

Table 1 - Recommended Minimum Factors of Safety for New Slopes for a Ten-year Return
Period Rainfall CONSEQUENCE-TO-LIFE Category 1 Category 2 Category 3

ECONOMIC CONSEQUENCE Category A 1.4 1.4 1.4

Category B

1.4

1.2

1.2

Category C

1.4

1.2

>1.0

Notes : (1)

In addition to a minimum factor of safety of 1.4 for a ten-year return period rainfall, a slope in the consequence-to-life category 1 should have a factor of safety of at least 1.1 for the predicted worst groundwater conditions. The factors of safety given in this Table are recommended minimum values. Higher factors of safety might be warranted in particular situations in respect of loss of life and economic loss.

(2)

-7-

Table 2 - Recommended Minimum Factors of Safety for the Stability Assessment of Existing Slopes and for Design of Remedial or Preventive Works to Slopes for a Ten-year Return Period Rainfall

Consequence-to-life

Category 1

Category 2

Category 3

Recommended Minimum Factor of Safety Against Loss of Life for a Ten-year Return Period Rainfall

1.2

1.1

>1.0

Notes:

(1) These factors of safety are appropriate only where rigorous geological and geotechnical studies have been carried out, where the slope has been standing for a considerable time, and where the loading conditions, the groundwater regime and the basic form of the modified slope remain substantially the same as those of the existing slope. (2) The factors of safety given in this Table are recommended minimum values. Higher factors of safety might be warranted in particular situations in respect of loss of life and economic loss. (3) Should the back-analysis approach be adopted for the design of remedial or preventive works, it may be assumed that the existing slope had a minimum factor of safety of 1.0 for the worst known loading and groundwater conditions. (4) For a failed or distressed slope, the causes of the failure or distress must be specifically identified and taken into account in the design of the remedial works.

-8-

Table 3 - Typical Examples of Slope Failures in Each Consequence-to-life Category

CONSEQUENCE-TO-LIFE+ EXAMPLES Category 1* Category 2* Category 3*

(1) Failures affecting occupied buildings (e.g. residential, educational, commercial or industrial buildings, bus shelters#, railway platforms). (2) Failures affecting dangerous goods. buildings storing

(3) Failures affecting heavily used open spaces and recreational facilities (e.g. sitting-out areas, playgrounds, car parks). (4) Failures affecting roads with high vehicular or pedestrian traffic density. (5) Failures affecting public waiting areas (e.g. bus stops#, petrol stations). (6) Failures affecting country parks and lightly used open-air recreation areas. (7) Failures affecting roads with low traffic density. (8) Failures affecting storage compounds (non-dangerous goods).

Item added in 1995 to clarify the intention of the consequence categories. + Prior to March 1996, "Consequence-to-life" was referred to as "Risk-to-life". * Prior to March 1996, "Category 1", "Category 2" and "Category 3" were referred to as "High", "Low" and "Negligible" respectively. # In the context of this Table, bus shelters are those with a cover that shelters people waiting there from direct sunlight or rainfall, while bus stops are those without such a cover.

-9-

Table 4 - Typical Examples of Slope Failures in Each Economic Consequence Category

ECONOMIC CONSEQUENCE+ EXAMPLES Category A* Category B* Category C*

(1) (2)

Failures affecting buildings, which could cause excessive structural damage. Failures affecting essential services# which could cause loss of that service for an extended period. Failures affecting rural or urban trunk roads or roads of strategic importance. Failures affecting essential services# which could cause loss of that service for a short period. Failures affecting rural (A) or primary distributor roads which are not sole accesses. Failures affecting open-air car parks. Failures affecting rural (B), feeder, district distributor and local distributor roads which are not sole accesses. Failures affecting country parks.

(3) (4)

(5)

(6) (7)

(8)

+ * #

Prior to March 1996, "Economic Consequence" was referred to as "Economic Risk". Prior to March 1996, "Category A", "Category B" and "Category C" were referred to as "High", "Low" and "Negligible" respectively. Essential services are those that serve a district and are with no or very inferior alternatives. Examples are mass transit facilities and trunk utility services.

- 10 -

ANNEX 1 FACTOR OF SAFETY AND RELIABILITY OF DESIGN OF CUTTINGS IN HONG KONG (ORAL DISCUSSION) BY MALONE (1985) This contribution is about the stability factors of safety which are used in Hong Kong in the design calculations for cuttings in the weathered mantle of slopes. Most landslides in cuttings occur during intense rainstorms, hence groundwater conditions assumed in stability calculations correspond to an extreme rainfall condition. Lower factors of safety are used when rarer rainfall conditions are assumed. Factor of safety is also tied to consequences of failure, the following minimum values being stipulated in the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes for the 10year return period rainfall case (Geotechnical Control Office, 1984): 1.4 1.2 > 1.0 high risk to life low risk to life negligible risk to life

It is understood that the value 1.4 was chosen as this value is often used for the slopes of large earthfill dams. The Geotechnical Manual for Slopes also makes some recommendations on the stability calculation model to be employed and the method of measurement of the input parameters for the calculation. However, this falls short of the complete specification that would be needed to guarantee a consistent standard of safety between cases with equal calculated values of factor of safety. Alternatively, standard of safety can be expressed as probability of failure, and this can, in principle, be calculated by regarding the parameters as random variables. In considering the application of probabilistic approaches to cutting design in Hong Kong conditions, it is helpful to examine the three principal sources of uncertainty in the design calculation: the selection of trial slip surfaces, groundwater conditions and shear strength. Selection of Trial Slip Surfaces Under Humid Subtropical climatic conditions igneous rock masses adjacent to the surface of slopes can weather to give a complex pattern of fresh corestones and matrix material in various states of decomposition. The simplification of such geological complexity into a 2-D layered model, one surface of which represents a sloping rockhead, often results in trial slip surfaces being positioned unrealistically. Selection of Groundwater Conditions The phreatic surface corresponding to a design rainstorm is usually modelled at a fixed head above this imaginary sloping rockhead surface, or above the dry season phreatic surface if higher, without benefit of piezometric observations of storm response. In reality a more complex hydrogeological system exists, better modelled as 2 or more interacting inclined aquifers (Geotechnical Control Office, 1982). Local - 11 -

geological effects like flow in natural pipes in steep slopes, or partial occlusion by dykes, can be important, as can local leakage from water services in steeply sloping urban areas. Hence design data ought to be obtained by extrapolation of measured seasonal and storm piezometric response within the aquifer of interest at the site of the proposed cutting. Selection of Shear Strength Parameters The mass shear strength will depend on the disposition of core-stones, but it is conventional to rely in design on laboratory measurements of matrix shear strength. The shear strength of decomposed granite in particular will vary markedly with the state of decomposition, which ought therefore to be quantitatively defined, but rarely is. The consolidated undrained compression test with pore water pressure measurement is conventional, but this does not reproduce the stress path followed in an element of soil adjacent to a slip plane as failure is approached. Existing Slopes and More Reliable Design It is in the analysis of existing slopes that practice in Hong Kong has come under most scrutiny, because preventive works are often very costly and very inconvenient. It has been generally agreed that lower factors of safety may be adopted for existing slopes, whilst maintaining the same adequately low probability of failure. This can be achieved at the cost of greater reliability, as is well illustrated by the case history presented by Lambe in the First Terzaghi Oration (Lambe, 1985 fig. 21). The opportunity to adopt lower factors of safety in Hong Kong has recently been introduced for the analysis of existing cuttings which have withstood extreme rainstorms, in cases where values of the parameters in the calculation model are known more reliably. Thus, for assessment of the stability of existing slopes, seasonal and storm piezometric response can be measured in the prototype, and storm seepage and runoff observed. The actual geology can be determined in inspection trenches. Foundations of adjacent structures can be examined, input geometry can be based on topographic survey and soil densities can be measured in situ. For design calculations which utilize this more reliable data a minimum factor of safety of 1.2 is stipulated in the Geotechnical Manual for Slopes for the high risk to life case. References Geotechnical Control Office (1982). Mid-levels Study: Report on Geology, Hydrology and Soil Properties. Geotechnical Control Office, Hong Kong, 265 p. plus 54 drgs. Geotechnical Control Office (1984). Geotechnical Manual for Slopes (second edition). Geotechnical Control Office, Hong Kong, 295 p. Lambe, T.W. (1985). The First Terzaghi Oration: Amuay landslides. Proceedings of the 11th International Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, San Francisco, Golden Jubilee Volume, pp 137-158. (6/99) - 12 -

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-110
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

235

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Protective Barriers The prime function of a protective barrier is to prevent persons or objects from passing through or toppling over onto an adjacent lower level. Building (Construction) Regulation 8 and Building (Planning) Regulation 3A prescribe the layout of protective barriers. In all circumstances, a protective barrier should have a height not less than 1.1m and the lowest 150mm of the barrier should be built solid. Any gap or opening in the barrier should be so constructed as to inhibit the passage of particles more than 100mm in its smallest dimension. Structural Design Requirements 2. Structural details of protective barriers should be submitted to the Building Authority for approval. Protective barriers should be designed to resist the imposed loads as prescribed in Table 3 of Building (Construction) Regulation 17. The minimum design imposed loads for protective barriers to restrict or control the movement of persons and for vehicle barriers are stipulated in Building (Construction) Regulation 17(3) and 17(4) respectively. Protective barriers subjected to wind loads, shall be designed to resist the more stringent of either the required imposed load or the design wind loads as prescribed in the Code of Practice for Wind Effects, Hong Kong 1983. The structural design should comply with the laws of mechanics, recognised engineering principles and recognised codes of practice such as BS 6180 Barriers in and about buildings. Glass Protective Barriers 3. Recommendations on the salient aspects of the design and construction of protective barriers involving the use of glass are given in Appendix A. Typical clamping detail for free-standing glass protective barriers are shown in Appendix B. Site Supervision 4. The construction of protective barriers should be supervised by a suitably qualified person to ensure that the works are carried out in accordance with the plans approved and the required standards are complied with. (C M LEUNG) Building Authority Ref : BD GR/CC/121/2 First issue : September 2000 Index under : Protective Barriers

Appendix A PNAP 235 APP-110 Recommendations on the Salient Aspects of the Design and Construction of Glass Protective Barriers Types of Glass for Protective Barriers 1. Glass types considered suitable for use in protective barriers are as follows : (a) Laminated glass is a safety glass suitable for protective barriers where the glass is fully framed. It is subject to measures being taken to ensure the glass edges are protected from direct exposure to moisture and compressive forces that can cause delamination. Tempered glass is a safety glass suitable for protective barriers where the glass is fully or partially framed or is free-standing. The configuration of any opening in this type of glass should be agreed with the manufacturer and the fabricator. Due to the possibility of spontaneous breakage in tempered glass, AP/RSE should ensure that an acceptable method of quality control (such as infrared photography, laser photography or heat soaking) has been adopted in order to prevent the debris of glass formed due to the spontaneous breakage of tempered glass from falling to the lower levels.

(b)

Fixing of Glass 2. Contact between glass and any other hard substance with a hardness equivalent to or greater than the hardness of glass should be prevented. Neoprene gaskets or other glazing materials should be used with frame systems. Where bolted connections are used, it is essential to ensure that the glass does not come into direct contact with bolt or the clamping plates. Proper bushing material shall be used in which its hardness shall be less than that of the glass material. The use of setting blocks and distance piece to support and locate glass panels may be in accordance with BS 6262 Code of Practice for glazing for buildings. Other standards may also be accepted if the equivalent performance can be demonstrated.

Protective Barrier with Glass Infill Panels 3. The main frame of the barrier (viz. handrail and baluster) is designed to withstand all loads applied to the handrail and the glass is used to form the infill panels. The glass in no way provides any support to the main frame and to the handrail.

/4. ..

-24. Recommended dimensions for glass infill panels are given below : (a) For fully framed or two-edged framed infill panels, the frame section should give a minimum of 15 mm edge cover to the glass. The frame section and its connections to the main frame should be capable of withstanding the design load transferred through the glass. For clipped infill panel, the clips should be positioned around the periphery of infill panel, at a maximum spacing of 600 mm. Each clip should be not less than 50 mm in length and give a minimum depth of cover to the glass of 25 mm. The clips and their connections to the main frame should be capable of withstanding the design load transferred through the glass. For point bolted supports, tempered glass should be used and the position of the connectors should not allow the glass to undergo reverse curvature effects, as these could lead to enormous stress concentration at bolted connections. There should be clamping plates and gaskets on both sides of the glass that provide a minimum of 50 mm diameter cover to the glass. Where the length of a glass panel is greater than the span between the bolted connectors, giving rise to a cantilevered portion of the panel, the length of the cantilevered portion should be less than one-quarter of the span between the bolted connectors. The fixing of the bolted connectors to the main frame should be capable of withstanding the design load transferred through the glass. Under the design loads, the barrier should be designed such that the relative in-plane movement of the bolted connections in the same panel is not greater than 2 mm.

(b)

(c)

Free-standing Glass Protective Barrier 5. The glass is designed to withstand all design loads. When the barrier is subjected to a loading derived from the most unfavourable combination of wind load and imposed loads for places of assembly and panic barriers, the maximum horizontal displacement at the handrail level of the barrier should not exceed 50 mm. In case the free-standing glass barrier has a continuous run of 2 panels of glass or more and is designed as a panic barrier, the top rail should be attached to the glass in such a manner, that, should a glass panel fracture, the top rail would bridge over the failed glass, remained stable under yield stress conditions and capable of resisting the designed imposed loads for panic barriers applied across the resulting gap without causing structural failure or yielding of the protective barrier system. Continuous fixing is recommendation for fixing the handrail to the glass, since individual fixing points may introduce unacceptable stress concentrations at the glass panel.

6.

7.

/8. ..

-38. It is preferable to use continuous bottom fixing clamps for free-standing glass protective barrier. Such clamps on each side of the glass should have a minimum of 100 mm wide and be made of metal of minimum thickness of 12 mm. The clamps should be continuous for the entire length of the glass panel and have a maximum bolt spacing of 500 mm. Other clamping methods may also be used provided that such clamping methods may provide effective clamping over the length of the glass panel. Where a clamping system that does not rely on bolts is used, the depth over which the clamping force operates should not be less than 75 mm, unless specific tests have been carried out to prove the integrity of the system in resisting its design loads. Appendix B illustrates the typical clamping detail for free-standing glass protective barriers.

Impact Resistance of Glass for Protective Barriers 9. Glass to be used for protective barriers should comply with the impact test requirements for safety glazing materials given in recognised testing standards such as ANSI Z 97.1 Safety performance specifications and methods of testing for safety glazing material used in buildings or BS 6206 Impact performance requirements for flat safety glass and safety plastics for use in buildings. The type of glass for protective barriers should achieve impact resistance not inferior to the impact grade class A to BS 6206 when the free path (or the unhindered distance a body can travel in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the protective barrier) is greater than 1500 mm. In this connection, test certificates on the glass material to prove its impact resistance should be submitted to the Building Authority for consideration. The designer should select materials that will not break when the protective barrier is subjected to the normal design loads that may be applied and will not be penetrated when subjected to the appropriate impact test loads.

Workmanship Control 10. Every glass panel should be visually inspected to ensure that it is free from visual defects before installation. Supervision of the installation of all fixings used to connect the glass to handrails, balustrades or frames should be provided to ensure that they have been constructed in accordance with the approved plans. Apart from glass and fixings, the sealant and handrail should also be inspected. Special attention should be paid to the installation of free-standing glass protective barriers to ensure that the recommended installation procedures are strictly followed.

Ref : BD GR/CC/121/2 First issue : September 2000

APP-110

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-111 236

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Design of Car Parks and Loading/Unloading Facilities Facilities for the parking of cars are often shown on plans submitted for approval under the Buildings Ordinance. These plans may also be required for submission to other authorities, eg Director of Lands and Commissioner for Transport to ascertain if their requirements are met. 2. The Building Authority (BA) takes the view that car parks and all ancillary works and facilities should be properly designed to provide an acceptable standard of convenience and safety to users of the car parks. The BA also makes the point that all building plans prepared by authorized persons (APs) and approved by him are such that the plans should reflect a general duty of care in preparing and approving the plans; should be correct in matters of fact; should conform generally to standards commonly known and accepted; and should not be misleading or causing confusion as to compliance with standards, whether or not governed by the Buildings Ordinance.

3. To assist APs in meeting the above objective, a set of general guidelines is given at Appendix A. In case where full compliance with the desirable standard is difficult due to physical constraints or other relevant considerations, the APs may use the minimum standard shown in Appendix A or may propose alternative acceptable standards. In such circumstances, APs are advised to demonstrate with swept paths and other design data that safety of and convenience to users of the car parks will not be compromised. Absolute minimum standard will only be accepted under exceptional circumstances and with full justifications. 4. When building plans showing car-parking facilities are received, the BA may check the following essential aspects of the plans :(a) the dimensions of spaces for the parking of cars and lorries, the loading and unloading bays and the run-ins and run-outs; /(b) .....

-2-

(b) (c)

the gradients, curve radius of ramps, swept paths and the turning circles at critical locations; and any general notes shown on the plans as to whether and what guidelines or standards have been observed.

In cases where compliance with the requirements is difficult due to physical constraints or other relevant considerations, the BA may take a flexible approach provided that traffic safety is not compromised. In this connection, APs are advised to highlight deviations and provide justification for such deviations. 5. Where a claim is made under Building (Planning) Regulation 23(3)(b) for exclusion from gross floor area calculation , the BA would need to be satisfied as to the design of the car parks before the exclusion is considered. In case the car parks are already included in the gross floor area, the BA will not take any item of deviations from the standards shown in Appendix A as a ground for disapproval of plans. The BA will advise on such deviations separately and APs are expected to rectify the deviations in subsequent plan submissions. 6. For the avoidance of doubt, the Commissioner for Transport (C for T) will continue to provide advice on carparking proposals from the point of view of road safety, traffic management, planning of transport infrastructure, public transport operation and regulatory functions of public roads. The C for T will pay particular attention to run-ins and run-outs and the adjacent layout design in private building projects. The BA will assume the general responsibility of ascertaining compliance with standards of car parks and ancillary works and facilities.

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/BOP/6 (IX) First issue March 2000 This revision February 2009 (AD/NB1) (Para.2, 3,5, 6 and Appendix A revised) Index under : Car parks Layout of car parks Ramp and gradient of car parks Car park aisles

Appendix A (PNAP 236) (APP-111) Guidelines on Layout of Car Parks and Loading and Unloading Spaces and Geometry of Access Roads, Ramps and Driveways Layout of Car Parks and Loading/Unloading Spaces The dimensions produced below incorporate current guidelines on parking and loading/unloading areas as stipulated in Table 11, Chapter 8 of the Hong Kong Planning Standard Guidelines (HKPSG) and Transport Departments latest requirements. Reference can be made to the latest edition of stall dimensions of car parks and loading/unloading spaces of the HKPSG posted on the Planning Department's website : http://www.pland.gov.hk/tech_doc/hkpsg/english/ch8/ch8_table11.htm Table 1 Car Parks and Loading/Unloading Spaces Stall Dimensions for Car Length (m) Parks & Loading/Unloading Bays Motorcycles 2.4 (min. 2 m) Private Cars and Taxis 5 Coaches and Buses 12 Light Goods Vehicles 7 Medium/Heavy Goods Vehicles 11 Container Vehicles 16 Light Buses 8 Car-parks for Persons with a 5 Disability Car Park Aisles Parking Angle (a) Private Cars, and Taxis (one-way) 0o 30 o 45 o 60o 70 o 80 o 90 o 90 o (two-way aisle) 45 o 90 o Width (m) 1 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3 3.5 Min. Clear Headroom (m) 2.4 2.4 3.8 3.6 4.7 4.7 3.3 2.4

(b) Light Goods Vehicles (one-way)

Aisle Width (m) Desirable Minimum 3 3 3.6 4.2 4.7 5.3 6 5.5 (absolute min.5.0 m) 7.5 6.0 (absolute min.5.5 m) 7 10 -

-1-

(c) Medium/Heavy Goods Vehicles (one-way)

(d) Container Vehicles (one-way)

45 o 90 o 90 o (two-way aisle) 45 o 90 o

8 12 16 11 16

10 10 -

General guidelines on the design of car-parks and loading/unloading bays are as follows : (i) Run-ins for cycle and motor vehicle should be separated whenever possible. Cycle parking areas should be located at ground floor near the entrance, segregated from other vehicles parking spaces and grouped together. Ground floor shops/workshops/offices should be readily accessible to loading and unloading areas. It is desirable that the loading and unloading activities will not affect pedestrian or vehicular traffic outside or inside the developments. Parking layout should be designed with adequate clear visibility such that the conflict of a vehicle emerging from a ramp and another vehicle reversing into or leaving a parking lot is minimized. Goods vehicles are loaded and unloaded from the rear and perpendicular loading bays are most commonly arranged. A space of approximately one goods vehicle length should be reserved in front of the loading bay for reverse manoeuvring. The hammerhead design is recommended for loading/unloading bays. The swept path of the manoeuvre of the goods vehicles into and out of the bay should be indicated on the plans. Where there is severe constraint, a turn-table should be provided. Parking layout should be designed such that a vehicle may be parked in one distinct manoeuvre without reversals of the steering lock. Appropriate traffic signs and road markings should be provided.

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)

(v) (vi)

(vii) Swept path analysis should be conducted to check the circulation and adequacy of turning areas whenever necessary. (viii) (ix) Parking spaces for motor cycles should be grouped together and at a location away from the run-in. Where space for bicycles is provided in buildings where there is no commercial element, the cycle parks should preferably be located near the residential entrance lobby, and there should be total segregation of the bicycle from other vehicles.

-2-

(x)

Car-parks for persons with a disability should be designed to the standards set out in the latest Design Manual, Barrier Free Access, which is posted on the Buildings Departments website:http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/code/e_bfa.htm

Access Roads/Driveways 2. For private access roads and streets within the development, the requirements specified in the Building (Private Streets and Access Roads) Regulations should be followed. Table 2 gives general guidelines on access roads and driveways: Table 2 - Access Roads/Driveways Driveways Width for Straight Sections Desirable Width Minimum Width Absolute Min. (m) (m) Width (m) Residential Area One-way 5.5 4.0 3.0 (private cars only) Two-way 7.3 5.5 5.0 (private cars only) Industrial Area One-way 6.0 5.5 3.5 & Area of Mixed Two-way 10.5 7.3 6.0 Usage Gradient Desirable Maximum Absolute Maximum Straight Ramp For Private 1:10 1:7 1:6 Cars For Goods 1:10 1:8 Vehicles Helical For Private 1:12.5 1:8 Cars For Goods 1:12.5 1:10 Vehicles Vertical All Vertical clearances for structures over driveway and Clearance Vehicles that part of pavement within 600mm of its outer edge should be 5.1 m (min.) Horizontal All Horizontal clearance should be 500 mm. If Clearance Vehicles impracticable, clearance from railing and posts for signs should not be less than 200 mm. Widening of Access Roads/Driveways on Bends Width of Access Roads/ Driveways 6 m or less Permitted Radius of Curve at Centre Line Less than 18 m 18 m to 24 m inclusive Over 24 m
-3-

Min. Widening Required. (m) 1.2 1.0 0.6

More than 6 m

Less than 18 m 18 m to 24 m inclusive Over 24 m

1.0 0.6 0.3

General guidelines on the design of access roads/driveways are as follows: (i) The minimum vertical clearance of 5.1m is applicable to access roads/driveways intended for all types of vehicles. In case access roads/driveways are limited for certain type of vehicles, a lowered minimum vertical clearance could be considered.

Ramps in Multi-Storey Car Park (for Cars, Taxis and Light Goods Vehicles) 3. Ramps in multi-storey car park should be designed with reference to the following requirements in Table 3 : Table 3 - Ramps in Multi-Storey Car Park (for Private cars and Taxis) Ramps in Multi-storey Car Parks (for Private cars and Taxis) Min. Width (between Straight Ramps Helical Ramps kerbs) One-way 3.0 m 3.65 m Two-way 6.0 m (with no central kerb) (min. 5.5 m) Max. Gradient See Gradient in Access Roads/Driveways Horizontal Clearance For Straight Ramps 300 mm from structures For Helical Ramps 600 mm Minimum Curve For Straight Ramps 5.5 m (min. inner radius at bends) Radius For Helical Ramps 9.0 m (min. outer radius) (one-way) General guidelines on the design of ramps are as follows : (i) (ii) The use of two-way ramps in a multi-storey car park is not recommended. Ramps should be designed without conflict points at both ends, e.g. no pedestrian crossings and junctions at both ends of a ramp.

(iii) At the upper end of ramps, adequate clear visibility should be provided to minimize conflicts of movements of vehicles at the upper floor and the approach ramp. (iv) The design standards for straight and helical ramps are applicable to carparks for private cars and taxis and should be modified to suit other vehicle types.

(Rev. 2/2009)
-4-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-112 238

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Disposal of Condensation from Air-Conditioning Units Provision of Air-conditioning With the improvement of living standard, air-conditioning (AC) has become one of the basic necessities in both domestic and commercial premises. Authorized persons are encouraged to take into account the modern day expectation and make suitable provisions for accommodating AC systems when designing new buildings. 2. An AC system may take the form of either a central plant, or a split or room type unit. The former type is usually housed in a plant room whereas the latter two types are mounted on the peripheral of a building envelope. Problem 3. In recent years, numerous complaints concerning nuisance caused by the dripping of condensation from AC units mounted on the peripheral of buildings have been made by public. The problem lies in the lack of a proper system for the disposal of condensation. Improvement 4. The Building Authority takes the view that proper disposal system for the drainage of the condensation should be provided as part of the drainage system of a building. You are, therefore, requested to indicate the same in your drainage submission for any AC hoods or platforms proposed in a development, failing which the plans will be disapproved under section 28(1) of the Buildings Ordinance.

( C M LEUNG ) Building Authority Ref : BD GP/BREG/VS/2(II) BD GP/BORD/92 First issue March 2000 Index Under : Condensation from air-conditioner Drainage disposal for air-conditioner

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-113 241

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Lighting and Ventilation of rooms used for habitation or as an office or kitchen Under Building (Planning) Regulation (B(P)Reg) 31 no prescribed window required under B(P)Reg 30 shall be deemed to face external air unless: (a) (b) it faces into a street; or it faces into a rectangular horizontal plane (RHP) which is uncovered, unobstructed and of minimum dimensions stipulated in B(P)Reg 31(2); and it is so placed such that inclined planes protruding from the RHP at a position where the RHP intersects with the window sill or the lot boundary, as the case may be, are not obstructed by any building.

(c)

2. In recent years there is a tendency for developers to build tall residential buildings and consequently the authorized persons for such proposals often find it difficult to comply with all the requirements. To allow flexibility in the planning and design of buildings without compromising the safety and health of the occupants, the Building Authority is prepared to modify the requirements on horizontal and vertical planes if the following criteria are met:(a) Prescribed windows for office or habitation (i) The room is provided with a window facing a RHP complying with the minimum dimensions stipulated in B(P)Reg 31(2); The RHP has a longitudinal dimension of not less than 30m; and There is ample open space for free flow of air with a minimum clear distance between buildings not less than 4.5m wide.

(ii) (iii)

(b)

Windows for kitchen (i) (ii) Mechanical ventilation such as exhaust fan is provided; and The required windows face directly into the open air, which is defined in Regulation 2 of the Building (Planning) Regulations. / 3. A window ..

-23. A window not meeting the full requirement of prescribed windows under B(P)Reg 31(2) would be acceptable if the window when angled at not more than 15o from the external wall, meets the prescriptive requirements. 4. Windows for office and rooms for habitation, which do not comply with the requirements in B(P)Reg 31(2) or the criteria set out in para. 2(a) above, are also acceptable if it can be proved that the performance of such windows is not inferior to those meeting the prescriptive requirements of the regulation. 5. The Buildings Department is currently conducting a consultancy study on the provision of lighting and ventilation in buildings. Therefore, the above flexible application of the B(P)Reg 31 should only be taken as an interim measure. We would need to review this practice note upon the completion of the consultancy study.

( C M LEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref : BD GP/BREG/P/42 BD GP/BREG/P/18 (IV) First issue May 2000 This revision September 2001 (AD/NB1) - paras 2 amended and paras 3 and 4 rewritten Index under : Lighting and ventilation Prescribed window

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-114

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

245

Waste Minimization Provision of Fitments and Fittings in New Buildings It has been suggested, arising from reports of sanitary fitments and other fixtures/fittings in new buildings being discarded upon occupation, that requirements for the provision of such fitments and fittings prior to completion of new buildings should not be insisted upon to reduce waste. 2. A working group (WG) comprising government officials and representatives of the building industry has studied the issue. A survey has indicated that the problem of carting away of sanitary fitments/fittings required under the building regulations in newly completed private buildings is not significant. The WG has also identified the following concerns if the requisite fitments/fittings are not provided at the time of completion of a new building : (a) construction waste generated from fitting out works carried out by individual contractors while a new building is under occupation; chaotic condition arising from individual owners engaging their own contractor for the fitting out works; and the practicality of testing plumbing and drainage system without fitments for compliance with regulation.

(b) (c)

3. The WG is of the view that the basic sanitary fitments required under the building regulations should be installed prior to the issue of an occupation permit. The WG, however, has also recommended that modification of the relevant building regulation be considered to permit certain sanitary fitments be not installed at the time of issuing an occupation permit on merits of individual case. The Building Authority has accepted the recommendation and will favourably consider giving a modification of Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulations in the following circumstances : (a) premises such as restaurants and hotels for which extensive renovation and fitting out of the required sanitary fitting by a restaurant or hotel operator will only be carried out after the issue of the occupation permit and in the process any sanitary fitting installed prior to the issue of an occupation permit would be dismantled in the course of such renovation work; a developer has offered to provide fittings to individual purchasers choices. /4..

(b)

-24. AP wishing to take advantage of the circumstances set out in para 3 should provide details on the extent of the sanitary fitments and fittings to be installed after the issue of the occupation permit in the application for modification together with an undertaking to the effect that :(a) (b) the outstanding fitments and fittings will be installed prior to the actual occupation of the relevant part of the premises; the outstanding fitments and fittings will be installed in accordance with the provisions of the Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulations and the requirements of the Water Authority; the outstanding fitments and fittings will be installed under his supervision by the registered general building contractor who will employ a licenced plumber for the carrying out of the plumbing works; and Water Authority will be notified via the submission of standard form WW046 available in the office of Water Authority for the installation of the outstanding plumbing fittings.

(c)

(d)

5. The survey also shows that some doors, floor finishes and partitions are taken out and are replaced by owners of new flats. You may therefore wish to offer more choices of colour schemes, door types and floor finish patterns for potential purchasers of buildings.

(C M LEUNG) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/RC/2 BD GP/BREG/SF/1 (II) First issued July 2000 This revision December 2000 (AD/NB1) (para 4 amended) Index under : Sanitary Fitments Fittings and Fixtures

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-115

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

246

Performance Review Item 6(g)(ii) in Column B, Section 17(1) of the Buildings Ordinance Background There is an inherent difficulty in forecasting the precise subsurface conditions from site investigation conducted before the carrying out of geotechnical works. Regular review and verification of the design assumptions are generally required for geotechnical works. In certain areas where the geology and the subsurface conditions are complex, it will be necessary to further require the submission of a properly documented performance review to ensure that the conditions encountered during and after works are not materially different from those assumed in the design. Also, in recent years, unconventional engineering schemes have become more common in private developments. These unprecedented designs need to be closely supervised and monitored during construction. Therefore, there is a need for a review to be carried out during the course of the construction to verify the geotechnical design assumption and to monitor the performance of the completed works for certain cases. Against this background, item 6(g) in Column B of Section 17(1) of the Buildings Ordinance (BO) requires a performance review in respect of certain works outside the scheduled areas. Implementation 2. The BA may impose, as a condition of giving approval or consent to the commencement of building works, for specific sites the requirement for a performance review. Examples of sites where the requirement may be imposed are given in paragraph 3 below. Where a performance review is required, there should be sufficient demonstration that the building works have been adequately inspected and monitored in the course of construction and that the geotechnical design assumptions upon which the building works have been based are valid. It should also include a review of the ground conditions revealed during the course of construction, and contain evidence to demonstrate that any consequential changes in the design have been undertaken and plans suitably amended and approved. The performance review should be submitted to the satisfaction of the BA prior to application for an occupation permit or a temporary occupation permit, otherwise the application may be refused under section 21(6) (f) of the BO.

/3.

-2-

3. Sites where requirements for performance review will likely be imposed, in addition to sites in Area Numbers 1, 2, and 4 of the Scheduled Areas, are grouped in the following three categories: (i) Geological conditions need to be verified during construction This applies to developments on or adjacent to slopes which have a history of significant continuous ground movements either prior to or during the site formation stage. This also applies to sites where abnormal geological weakness (such as unfavourably oriented persistent layer of weak and relatively impermeable kaolinitic clay in altered or weathered rocks) has been identified. (ii) Groundwater regime will be adversely affected This applies to developments on sloping ground in which the groundwater regime is susceptible to damming effects of congested foundations below the groundwater level or cutoff by bored pile walls or diaphragm walls. Examples are developments downslope of Scheduled Area No.1 (the Mid-levels scheduled area), and developments in the hilly terrain of Hong Kong Island and the foothills of Kowloon. (iii) Unconventional design Examples include: Sites with retaining walls of retained height exceeding 15m or excavations in reclaimed land. Sites which rely on horizontal drains to achieve large drawdown of groundwater table in order to improve hillside stability or sites which rely on the installation of a permanent underground drainage system to effect groundwater drawdown to prevent buoyancy of a deep basement. Sites involving works the design of which has adopted technologies that have been developed locally or overseas and not tried in Hong Kong before. These works need to be carefully assessed and monitored to check if the performance is acceptable under local conditions.

-3-

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BORD/A/41 BD GP/BORD/75 First issue September 2000 This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD) (Paras.1, 2 & 3 amended, para.4 deleted) Index under : Performance Review

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-116

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Aluminium Windows

248

Introduction Aluminium windows have become popular in new developments and as replacement of steel windows in existing buildings. Recent incidents of failure of aluminium windows, however, have aroused safety concern as falling of a dislodged casement from a height can be catastrophic in densely populated areas. 2. Building (Construction) Regulation 3 stipulates that materials used in any building works or street works shall be of a suitable nature and quality for the purposes for which they are used; adequately mixed or prepared; and applied, used or fixed so as to perform adequately the functions for which they are designed. Obviously such requirement is applicable to aluminium windows to be installed in any buildings. This practice note specifies requirements on the design and installation of aluminium windows and on the prevention of water seepage. Compliance with the design and installation requirements of aluminium windows described in para. 3 to 7 of this PNAP will be accepted by the Building Authority (BA) as meeting the provisions of Building (Construction) Regulation 3. Any deviations from these requirements have to be separately substantiated for acceptance. Design and Installation Requirements 3. For large windows falling within the criteria stipulated in Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers (PNAP) 239, their structural design should be submitted to the BA for approval in accordance with the requirements laid down therein. For other windows, Authorized Persons (AP) and Registered Structural Engineers (RSE) should ensure that they are properly designed and installed to meet the performance requirements and the safety standards in the Building (Construction) Regulations whilst Registered Contractors should have experienced and skilled supervisors and workers as well as suitable quality assurance procedures in place to ensure the proper installation of the windows. Some relevant standards, specifications and codes of practice on materials, design and installation of aluminium windows are given in Appendix A for reference and information. AP and RSE could also make reference to other national or international standards. 4. Window members, transoms and mullions together with the glass panes should be of adequate size and strength taking into consideration the location, height and orientation of the windows. Window frames should be securely and rigidly fixed in place to window openings in walls. Where fixing lugs are adopted, they shall be of stainless steel or hot dip galvanized steel having a minimum material thickness of 1.5mm and be placed at 300mm centres maximum. Where a spacing greater than 300mm is proposed, the AP/RSE should satisfy that the performance of the windows including structural stability and waterproofing would not be compromised. Adequate site supervision should be provided to check that all the fixing lugs are properly fixed. /5. ..

-2-

5. All structural members of a window section shall have a minimum aluminium thickness of 2mm and the depth of the mullion section shall not be less than 38mm. Particular attention shall be paid to the fixing details of the hinges. All hinges and fastening mechanisms adopted in the installation shall be able to withstand the positive and negative pressures due to the designed wind conditions when the window is closed and shall be of adequate size and strength commensurate with the size of the window. 6. To ensure the strength and rigidity of side hung casement windows as well as the safety of the occupants operating the casements, the maximum width of the sash should be 700mm. 7. Where 4-bar hinges are adopted, reference should be made to the Guidelines on Fixing of 4-bar Hinges at Appendix B. Cleaning 8. Corrosive agent should not be used for the cleaning of external walls and windows of buildings upon the completion of building works unless it is thoroughly washed with clean water immediately after application. Window Stay 9. Suitably designed window stay can minimize the effect of strong wind on the durability of hinges and casements. Water Seepage 10. Besides safety consideration, water leakage from windows poses undue nuisance to the occupants. AP and RSE are reminded to bear this in mind when detailing window design and contractors are reminded that poor workmanship is a major cause of the problem. Reference may be made to the Guidelines on Prevention of Water Seepage in New Buildings issued by the Buildings Department in March 2005. 11. In order to ensure the durability of windows, it is recommended that the top member of a window frame should have a built-in projecting fin with a drip nose to prevent water ingress into the window frame/casement so as to minimize the possibility of corrosion due to accumulation of water. A typical section of the projecting fin is at Appendix C. Water Tightness Test 12. It is advisable to perform field water test on the installed aluminium window to ensure water tightness and quality of the completed window unit. Some national standard testing methods are given in Appendix D for reference. /General ..

-3-

General 13. A similar practice note has been issued to Registered Contractors.

( CHEUNG Hau-wai ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BORD/105 (II) BD GP/BREG/P/38 (II) First issue July 2001 Last revision March 2005 This revision March 2006 (AD/NB1) paras 2, 3, 5, 12 and Appendix B amended, paras 6, 8, 9, 11 and Appendix C & D added Index under : Aluminium Windows Windows Water Seepage

Appendix A (PNAP 248) (APP-116) Standards and Codes of Practice On Aluminium Window in Building Works The various standards and codes of practice on aluminium window in building works as listed below are intended to provide reference information for the purpose of specifying materials and design for aluminium windows and the lists are not exhaustive. BS EN ISO 1461 BS 952: Part 1 BS 1161 BS 1449: Part 2 BS 1470 BS 1471 BS 1474 BS 1615 BS 3111 BS 3987 BS 4479 BS 4873 BS 5889 BS 6105 BS 6262 BS 6375: Part 1 and Part 2 BS 8118 CP 3012 PD 6484 : Hot dip galvanizing : Glass for glazing : Aluminium alloy sections for structural purposes : Stainless and heat resisting steel plate, sheet and strip : Aluminium plate, sheet and strip : Aluminium drawn tube : Aluminium bars and extrusions : Anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium and its alloys : Stainless steel fasteners : Anodic oxidation coatings on wrought aluminium : Recommendations for the design of metal articles that are to be coated : Aluminium alloy windows : Sealants : Corrosion-resistant stainless steel fasteners : Code of Practice for glazing for buildings : Performance of windows : Structural use of aluminium : Cleaning and preparation of metal surfaces : Commentary on corrosion at bimetallic contacts and its alleviation

2. AP and RSE may also make reference to other national or international standards and specifications.

(3/2005)

Appendix B (PNAP 248) (APP-116) Guidelines on Fixing of 4-bar Hinges 4-bar hinges shall be manufactured from stainless steel with adjustable friction shoe, and all stainless steel bars of the hinge shall have a minimum thickness of 2.5mm. For better corrosion resistance, stainless steel rivets/screws shall be used for the fixing of hinges and aluminium rivets shall not be used as they tend to corrode. At least 3 Nos. of 4.8mm diameter stainless steel rivets or 5mm diameter stainless steel screws shall be used to fix each bottom and top bars of the hinge to the window frame and the openable sash. 2. As stainless steel hinges and rivets/screws are used in aluminium window installation, due consideration and measures should be taken to prevent contact between dissimilar metals. 3. To provide sufficient anchorage for the stainless steel rivet or screw to fasten the hinge to the window frame and the openable sash, a positive mechanical fixing, for example by inserting a stainless steel or hot dip galvanized steel plate or bar/angle of not less than 3mm thick inside the section to provide sufficient threads for the screw(s) shall be adopted. A typical example of this arrangement is at Annex I. As an alternative, the window sections for fixing the hinge may be thickened locally to not less than 5mm. A typical example is at Annex II. When insertion of an extra piece of stainless steel or hot dip galvanized steel bar/angle inside the section or local thickening to 5mm is not adopted, the thickness of aluminium sections for fixing the 4-bar hinge shall be substantiated by calculations that it could provide sufficient anchorage for the stainless steel rivet or screw. 4. The length of the 4-bar hinge should be at least 60% of the width of the side hung casement window.

(Rev. 3/2006)

Annex I to Appendix B (PNAP 248) (APP-116)

WIDTH OF WINDOW SASH 700mm

S.S. PLATE/BAR (AT LOCATIONS A, B, C)

ELEVATION

SECTION X-X SIDE HUNG WINDOW WITH S.S. PLATE/BAR AND ALUMINIUM ANGLE INSERTED FOR FIXING SCREWS

E D

LENGTH

60% OF WIDTH OF WINDOW SASH

A, B, C, E, F LOCATION FOR SCREW TO WINDOW FRAME/SASH (LOCAL THICKENING BY S.S. PLATE/BAR) D LOCATION FOR SCREW TO WINDOW SASH (LOCAL THICKENING BY ANGLE)

(Rev. 3/2006)

Annex II to Appendix B (PNAP 248) (APP-116)

5 mm

(3/2005)

5 mm

Appendix C (PNAP 248) (APP-116)

ELEVATION

S.S. 4-BAR HINGE

PROJECTING FIN WITH DRIP NOSE WINDOW FRAME WINDOW SASH

SECTION Y-Y TOP MEMBER OF WINDOW FRAME WITH BUILT-IN PROJECTING FIN

(3/2006)

Appendix D (PNAP 248) (APP-116) Standard ASTM E330 Description Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential Standard Test Method for Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors for Water Penetration using Dynamic Pressure Specification for Field Check of Metal Shop Fronts, Curtain Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage Specifications for Field Check of Water and Air Leakage Through Installed Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Air Pressure Difference.

ASTM E331

ASTM E547

AAMA 501.1 AAMA 501.2 AAMA 501.3

(3/2006)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-117 249

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Structural Requirements for Alteration and Addition Works in Existing Buildings Alteration and Addition (A&A) works to existing buildings involve, among others, the design of new structural works and/or the checking of structural adequacy of the existing construction. This practice note gives guidance on the structural aspects of A&A submissions. Condition of Existing Structural Elements 2. All submissions of structural plans for A&A works should be accompanied by an assessment on the structural viability of the proposal. To satisfy himself/herself that a proposal is viable in the context of structural stability, the appointed authorized person (AP) or, if appropriate, the registered structural engineer (RSE) should inspect the condition of the existing structural elements affected by the works. Wherever possible, site photographs clearly showing all affected structural elements should be submitted for reference and record purposes. Design of New Works 3. All new structural elements in the A&A works should be designed in accordance with the current Building Regulations and relevant codes of practice. In submitting the structural plans for the A&A proposal, you should include, if appropriate, results of any tests that you have carried out for ascertaining the structural condition of existing elements likely to be affected by the works and any planned remedial works, if required. Structural Adequacy of Existing Works 4. The structural adequacy of an existing building or part thereof, as may be affected by proposed A&A works may, subject to the following requirements, be checked according to the then prevailing Building Regulations and codes of practice to which they were designed: (a) Wind Calculations In the case of A&A works involving: i. partial or total removal of existing major wind resisting walls or frames, which would result in a reduction in their stiffness by 5% or more, or ii. the extension of building dimensions which would result in an increase of 10% or more of the wind exposure areas of a building, the structural adequacy of the building due to wind should be checked based on the current wind code. /(b) .....

-2-

(b)

Imposed Loads in Storage Areas When existing floors used for storage purposes are affected, their structural adequacy should be checked using the minimum imposed loads stipulated in the current Building (Construction) Regulations.

(c)

Shear in Flat Slabs When flat slabs, which were originally designed based on working stress method, are structurally altered or subject to any additional load, the shearing stresses in the slabs should be checked using the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Concrete - 1987.

Details of Existing Structural Elements 5. For the purpose of paragraph 4 above, AP/RSE should have knowledge of the structural details of existing members. These details are available from the original approved plans. In a case where the original approved plans are not available, justifications on your design by means of a comparison of the effects of new and original loading, bending moments and shear forces of the structural members may be accepted. If necessary, opening up of the affected structural elements to ascertain the amount of reinforcement and concrete strength should be performed. According to paragraph 6 of PNAP 121, reinforcement details of the structural members in the existing building affected by the A&A works, when available, should be shown on drawings. Fire Resistance 6. PNAPs 202 and 231 provide guidance on the application of the codes of practice relating to fire safety.

(C M LEUNG) Building Authority

Ref.: BD SED/T/48 First issue December 2000 (AD/NB2) Index under: Structural A&A Works Structural requirements Alteration and Addition Works in Existing Buildings

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-118 251

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorised Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Testing of Building Materials Authorized Persons (APs) and Registered Structural Engineers (RSEs) may be approached from time to time for advice on the acceptability of building materials and proprietary fire resisting products. This practice note sets out the Building Authoritys position which may be of assistance to APs and RSEs in preparing advice to manufacturers, suppliers, registered general building contractors, registered specialist contractors and building owners. 2. Under the Buildings Ordinance (BO), APs, RSEs and registered contractors (RC) have responsibilities to supervise building works including the selection and application of building materials/products and to certify compliance with relevant provisions of the BO upon completion of works. In this connection, it should be noted that the BO contains no provision whereby the Building Authority may issue a certificate, a test or assessment report with respect to these materials/products. The Building Authority takes the position, therefore, of relying on APs, RSEs and independent laboratories for testing for compliance with standards and for certification. For certification of the building materials/products used and their compliance with standards, upon completion of works, please refer to PNAP 53. 3. The Building Authority will recognize those laboratories accredited by the Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) or by other laboratory accreditation bodies which have reached mutual recognition agreements/arrangements with HOKLAS. You may find such laboratory accreditation bodies at the web site of the Hong Kong Accreditation Service http://www.info.gov.hk/itc/eng/quality/hkas/hkas.shtml. You should ensure that the tests conducted by an accredited laboratory are within its scope of accreditation. 4. The following list of materials/products, which is not exhaustive, would normally be required to be tested by accredited laboratories as mentioned in paragraph 3: (a) Concrete cube and core; (b) Steel reinforcement (c) Reinforcement splices/couplers; (d) Curtain wall systems; and (e) Fire resisting products. /Proprietary ..

-2Proprietary Fire Resisting Products 5. In establishing the acceptability of proprietary fire resisting products, reference should be made to the performance standards as laid down in Building (Construction) Regulation 90 and the current Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction issued by the Building Authority. This is of particular relevance to compartment walls, protective cover to structural steel, fire resisting doors and other building materials for use in fire resisting construction. 6. As to compliance with the above requirements, reliance can also be placed on a test or assessment report prepared by an accredited laboratory as mentioned in paragraph 3 above. The Building Authority will rely on APs or RSEs to ensure that the test or assessment reports are prepared by accredited laboratories and that the reports are still within their validity period. Assessing Organizations 7. At present there are 3 assessing organizations, which are not accredited laboratories but are recognized for assessment, on the list of recognized laboratories/assessing organizations compiled by the Building Authority and promulgated in the letter dated 25 July 1994 to all APs, RSEs and RCs. They are: (a) Building Research Establishment (UK), (b) International Fire Consultants Ltd. (UK) {limited to assessment reports endorsed by Mr Peter E Jackman} and (c) Warrington Fire Research Consultants (UK). 8. With the issue of this practice note, the list described in paragraph 7 above will cease to have effect. However the assessment reports on fire resisting products prepared by the 3 organizations above will continue to be acceptable until further notice.

( C M LEUNG ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/BM/5(2)(II) First issue October 2001 (AD/Support)

Index under : HOKLAS List of testing laboratories Material testing

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-119

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

253

Stair-well and Open Wells In School and Other Buildings Used by Youngsters A student fell six floors to death through the stairwell in a school building. The Coroner, when recording a death by accident at the death enquiry, recommended that staircases with open well should be avoided in new school buildings. 2. Authorized Persons (APs) are advised to take into consideration as far as practicable the Coroners recommendation when designing new school buildings and other premises for use by children and youngsters. Where open wells or stair-wells are accessible to students or youngsters, APs should evaluate if undue hazard would be created through either proper or improper usage and provide additional safety measures, such as safety nets or higher railing, where appropriate. Compliance with Regulations 3. APs are reminded that buildings with open stairwell should be provided with adequate protective measures. In addition to the provision of handrail satisfying paragraph 17.6 of the Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996 and paragraph 8 of the Third Schedule of the Building (Planning) Regulations, APs should ensure that the height of the balustrade is not less than 1100mm as required by Building (Construction) Regulation 8. 4. Suitable protective barriers should also be provided to other locations where there is a difference in levels greater than 600 mm.

( C M LEUNG ) Building Authority Ref : BD GP/LEG/26 (III) First issue May 2001 (AD/NB1)

Index under : protective barrier stairwell open well

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-120 255

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Concrete Batching Plant

Background Concrete Batching Plants (CBP) were originally located within construction sites for supply of concrete for on-site construction activities. Such CBP were commonly considered to be machinery and equipment and did not in the circumstances fall into the definition of 'building' under the Buildings Ordinance (BO). Over time, some CBP have evolved to become bigger, and others sited in urban areas, near buildings and public thoroughfares. 2. From time to time, Authorized Persons (AP) and Registered Structural Engineers (RSE) exercise their professional judgment in determining whether to submit plans of CBPs to the Building Authority (BA) for approval. Buildings Department (BD) also advises, in response to specific enquiries, on the need for submission of plans for approval. Building Works 3. What constitutes a building and therefore becomes subject to the application of the BO is a question of degree and circumstances, including any risk they may pose to public safety. The BA is of the view that CBP fixed to and founded on the ground, connected to a utility supply and with a control room, are buildings under the BO. Hence approval and consent are required prior to their erection. Requirements 4. Taking into account the growing concern on the public safety posed by contemporary CBP 1 , the BA takes the following position on CBP: New CBP (a) For new CBP including associated structures such as cement, sand and aggregate handling facilities, building plans prepared by AP and RSE should be submitted to the BA for approval in accordance with the BO and regulations (including compliance with the town plan) before they are erected. For the common type of CBP shown on Appendix A, BA is prepared to process applications for approval and consent simultaneously upon request and such applications will be dealt with as outlined in Appendix B; /(b) ..
1

Contemporary CBP may comprise, inter alia, washing-out pits, elevators, conveyor belts, ground hoppers, mixing drums, workspaces and offices, silos, water-tanks, storage areas/tanks, structural supports including foundations

-2(b) An occupation permit or a temporary occupation permit shall be applied for, depending on the requirements of the operator or nature of the site, upon satisfactory completion of works in accordance with the provisions of the BO and regulations; and (c) Enforcement action under the BO in accordance with the prevailing policy for the control of unauthorized building works will be taken against new CBP and associated structures erected after 31 March 2002 without prior approval and consent. Existing CBP (d) Action against existing CBP erected prior to 1 May 2002 will not be taken if their structural safety can be demonstrated through submission of satisfactory appraisal reports by a RSE by 30 October 2002 and such plant is properly maintained. This notwithstanding, other government departments may still initiate enforcement actions against individual CBP which fails to comply with the relevant provisions under applicable Ordinances, or respective land use requirements. 5. In the longer term, we will explore the feasibility of setting up a statutory system for self-certification of CBP with a total silo capacity less than 50 tonnes and having an overall height less than 15 m.

(C M Leung) Building Authority

Ref.: GP/BORD/73 (II) First Issue March 2002 (AD/NB1, AD/NB2) Index under: Concrete Batching Plant

Appendix A (PNAP 255) (APP-120)

(3/2002)

Appendix B (PNAP 255) (APP-120) In respect of those type of CBP's as shown in Appendix A (the number of production lines may vary) the following arrangements under the BO will be accepted: New CBP Requirements for Fire Resisting Construction (FRC) will be waived provided no part of the CBP is within 1800mm of the site boundary other than a sea wall and the gross floor area (GFA) of the control room does not exceed 30m per production line. Water storage tanks and settlement pits will normally be allowed up to the site boundary without FRC requirements. Means of escape (MOE) requirements will be waived provided that the GFA of the control room does not exceed 30m per production line and the number of personnel in it does not exceed 5 per production line. The clear width of any staircase access to the control room should be not less than 750mm clear with a handrail each side and with a going not exceeding 45. Requirements under Building (Planning) Regulation 72 in respect of the identified control room will be waived if the above criteria are met. The above waiver on FRC, MOE and Building (Planning) Regulation 72 requirements are subject to the following conditions (i) (ii) the number of production lines does not exceed 4 and the total GFA of all control rooms does not exceed 100 m2.

If drainage connections or discharges off-site are made any requirements of Drainage Services Department and Environmental Protection Department must be met. Drainage details may be included on the general building plan submission. Plot ratio and site coverage calculations may exclude conveyor belts, but not their supporting structures. Plot ratio calculations based on the site coverage area may be accepted subject to extra office floors and the like at other levels being included.

Rearrangement of layout of CBP Submissions in respect of minor alteration to the plant layout, after issue of an Occupation Permit or Temporary Occupation Permit involving a conveyor belt support and associated hopper, will be processed within 30 days. /Relocation .. -1-

Relocation of an approved CBP Relocation of an approved CBP to a new site will be subject to a new 60-day submission, however the original structural calculations may be used subject to reassessment for wind load and ground conditions by a RSE. The structural submission will be processed within 30 days provided the site is similar in all respects to the existing site and satisfies all the requirements as stipulated in Appendix C. The general building plan submission will also be processed within 30 days provided referral to other departments (except FSD) is not required. (Practice Note for Authorised Persons and Registered Structural Engineer No 99 is relevant.)

Existing unapproved CBPs In respect of existing unapproved CBP's the structural justification required for its stability and integrity will be restricted to basic details of the main structural components and by at least one trial pit in respect of the existing foundations together with an appraisal and inspection report on the existing conditions of all the structural elements and member connections and certification by a RSE for their fitness for use.

Relocation of existing unapproved CBP Relocation of an existing unapproved CBP to a new site will be dealt with as a new 60-day submission. In respect of the above ground structural elements justification should be by way of laboratory tests etc together with an appraisal and inspection report on the existing conditions of all the structural elements and certification by a RSE for their fitness for re-use.

Non Typical CBP If the plant contains features or accommodation which are not in a typical batching plant, or cannot meet the waiver requirements, the proposal for the whole plant will be processed in the same manner as for an ordinary building.

(3/2002) -2-

Appendix C (PNAP 255) (APP-120) Requirements for 30-day processing of structural submissions in respect of 'Relocation of an approved CBP' (A) Superstructure RSE is to certify the following during the plan submission :(i) the structural framing plans, members and connection details are the same as the approved plans dated _______________ under the reference of BD ______________. the structural calculations, including the method of analysis, wind load, dead load, live load and material design stresses and the relevant standards submitted for the approved plans mentioned above have been reviewed and found to be equally applicable to the new CBP now proposed.

(ii)

(B)

Foundations RSE is to certify the following during the plan submission :(i) the foundation plans showing the foundation system, allowable bearing pressure, type, layout and details are the same as the approved plans dated _____________ under the reference of BD _____________. the structural calculations for the foundation details including the method of analysis, loadings and material design stresses and the relevant standards submitted for the approved plan mentioned above have been reviewed in conjunction with the site investigation report for the CBP now proposed, and are found to be equally applicable to the new CBP now proposed.

(ii)

(C)

Referrals of Supertructure and Foundation Plans The RSE is to certify that the new CBP proposal does not involve or affect the followings and hence referral to each of the organisation is not required. Does proposal involve or affect the following? Schedule Area No. 1, 2 or 4 Schedule Area No. 3 or MTR Protection Area Referral to each of the relevant organisation Geotechnical Engineering Office Mass Transit Railway Corporation

/Schedule .. -1-

Schedule Area No. 5

(a) Geotechnical Engineering Office; and (b) Drainage Services Department Geotechnical Engineering Office Drainage Services Department or Project Manager, Territory Development Department for New Territory area Railway Division, Highways Department Light Rail Division, Kowloon Canton Railway Corporation (a) Lands Department; and (b) Highways Department Highways Department Technical Services Division, Civil Engineering Department (a) Marine Department; and (b) Technical Services Division, Civil Engineering Department

Slopes/Retaining Structures/Deep excavation/disused tunnel Culvert, nullah, stream course

Kowloon Canton Railway route protection area or proposed rail routes Light Rail Transit Structures to be erected in, over, under or upon street Highway Structures Sea walls, adjacent to sea front Reclamation, piers

Public drainage Water mains

Drainage Services Department Water Supplies Department

(3/2002) -2-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-121

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

257

Amendment to Code of Practice for Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996 (MOE Code) Paragraph 14.5(e) of MOE Code stipulates that a vision panel is required in a room, other than a toilet, from which the only exit route is through another room. 2. To provide greater flexibility in design, the requirement for a vision panel may be substituted by alternative provisions, such as a fire alarm system audible in the room, which may serve to alert persons in the inner room of any danger from fire or smoke. 3. For avoidance of doubt, paragraph 14(5) does not apply to habitable room with means of escape through living/dinning room or kitchen in domestic flats.

( C M LEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/LEG/6/A (VII) First issue June 2001 (AD/NB1) Index under : Inner Room MOE Code Vision Panel

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-122 258

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Provision of Sky Garden in Refuge Floor Introduction Further to the promulgation of incentives in Joint Practice Note No. 1 to promote the provision of communal sky gardens for environmental enhancement, Buildings Department has examined, in consultation with Fire Services Department (FSD), the possibility of incorporating such gardens in refuge floors. Requirements 2. Having examined all relevant matters, the Building Authority (BA) is prepared to accept the incorporation of communal sky gardens in refuge floors subject to compliance with all the following conditions: (a) Requirements on refuge floors specified in paragraph 21 of the Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire and paragraph 18 of the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction, except those special provisions mentioned below, are complied with. In assessing the net area for refuge and the minimum dimension of the area for refuge, no account should be taken of the space occupied by any planters, equipment and furniture in the refuge floor; All garden furniture and equipment in the refuge floor are firmly fixed; All furniture, equipment and rubbish bins are made of noncombustible materials, and are so sited that they will not obstruct the exit routes and lift openings. Rubbish bins, where provided, are fitted with self-closing lids; The garden is not to be used for activities involving the use of naked fire e.g. barbecuing. A notice to this effect should be posted at prominent locations at the garden; and Other criteria applicable to communal sky gardens specified in the Joint Practice Note No. 1 are complied with.

(b) (c)

(d)

(e) Lift Access

3. Where sky gardens are incorporated in refuge floors, relaxation on the restriction to provide lift door openings onto such floors may be granted subject to the following: /(a) ..

-2(a) The lift landing doors should open onto a protected lobby with doors having an FRP of not less than 1 hour and walls having an FRP of not less than 2 hours; and The lift operation is arranged in such a manner that the landing doors at the refuge floor, other than those for firemans lifts, will be automatically locked when the fire alarm is on.

(b)

Drencher System 4. Where a drencher system is required at external wall openings, FSD may waive such requirement if the circumstances so justified on the merits of individual cases. FSD welcomes any enquiries on this prior to formal submission of plans. Plants 5. While live plants are unlikely to pose undue fire risk, the use of artificial plants/soil should be avoided where possible. Where in use, the authorized person should advise the management to ensure that such artificial plants/soil are noncombustible and do not emit toxic gases in case of fire. 6. A maintenance and management manual for the landscape works should be made available for end-users to safeguard public hygiene and safety of the sky garden. Early Consultation 7. The BA may impose additional requirements depending on the special circumstances of individual cases. Authorized persons proposing sky gardens in refuge floors with very special design are advised to make early enquiries.

( C M LEUNG ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GP/LEG/6(II) First issued December 2001 (AD/NB1) Index under : Communal Sky Garden Refuge Floor

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized APP-123 Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

260

Alternative Designs Paragraph 12.3 of the Code of Practice for Fire Resistance Construction 1996 (FRC Code) Paragraph 12.3 of the FRC Code stipulates that the external wall of a building at any floor should be separated from the external wall at the floor next below by a spandrel not less than 900 mm in height. 2. Where a 900 mm vertical separation cannot be provided due to design constraints, a horizontal apron having a projected width of 900 mm would be accepted as an alternative option. 3. In view of the relatively low fire risk associated with ventilated balconies, the Building Authority is prepared to waive the requirements in para 12.3(a) of the FRC Code for balconies which are open on at least two sides. For avoidance of doubt, the remainder of the unit has to comply with the full requirements in the paragraph for fire separation.

( C M LEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref.: BD GP/BREG/C/19/L (VII) First issue October 2001 (AD/NB1)

Index under: Spandrel Fire Separation for balcony Balcony fire separation

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-124

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Streets for Site Classification

263

The permitted site coverage and plot ratio for a building to be erected on a site is determined according to the class of the site, which in turn depends on the number of streets not less than 4.5m wide that the site abuts. 2. The following guidelines provide assistance in determining what constitutes a street for the purpose of site classification: (a) For a piece of land to be considered as a street, it must have the characteristics of a street. Apart from being a passageway, provision of access as a street, other relevant factors such as the presence of any street lighting, paving and drainage would also be taken into consideration. Land designated as public amenity areas such as open car parks, public open spaces, and topographical features such as nullahs, sea, and the like is not considered as a street for the purpose of site classification. Where there is a physical separation of a site from a street by an intervening strip of land, whether the site can be considered as abutting on that street for the purpose of site classification will depend upon the function, status and ownership of the intervening land.

(b)

(c)

3. Apart from constituting a street itself, a street has to meet certain criteria before it can be regarded as a street for the purpose of site classification. The Building (Planning) (Amendment) Regulation 2005 (the Amendment Regulation), which will come into operation on 31 December 2005, introduces a new regulation 18A setting out such criteria. A class A site, class B site or class C site is defined under B(P)R 18A(1) according to the number of specified street not less than 4.5m wide that the site abuts. A street is to be regarded as a specified street if any of the following circumstances exists with respect to the street: (a) The street is vested in Government and maintained by the Highways Department (regulation 18A(3)(a)(i)). This refers to public streets like Nathan Road or Kings Road. If an authorized person has doubt on whether a street is maintained by the Highways Department or not, he may consult the Highways Department directly. /(b)

-2-

(b)

The street is on land held under the same Government lease as the site, and under the terms of the lease, the lessee has to surrender (when required to do so) the land on which the street is situated to the Government (regulation 18A(3)(a)(ii)). This refers to private streets required to be formed within a lot under lease. The developer or the authorized person shall submit a copy of the land grant or lease documents to substantiate compliance with the requirement for including the subject private street for site classification. The street is required to be constructed on unleased Government land by the lessee of the Government lease under which the site is held pursuant to the terms of that lease (regulation 18A(3)(a)(iii)). The developer or the authorized person shall submit a copy of the land grant or lease documents to substantiate compliance with the requirement for including the subject street for site classification. The street is on land over which the owner of the site is expressly granted, by or by virtue of an instrument, a right of way exercisable at all times (regulation 18A(3)(a)(iv)). A private street not belonging to the owner of the site under consideration will be accepted for site classification only if a right of way over the street is expressly granted to the owner. A public passage not falling within (a) or (c) above will not be accepted for site classification unless the developer is expressly granted with a right of way over the passage. The developer or the authorized person shall submit a copy of the instrument or deed of right of way to substantiate compliance with the requirement for including the subject street for site classification. The street is on land held by the owner of the site under a Government lease (regulation 18A(3)(a)(v)). This refers to a private street which is owned by the owner of the site, irrespective of the site and the street being held under the same lease or not. The developer or the authorized person shall submit evidence indicating that the street will remain as a street for the lifetime of the development. This could take the form of an undertaking registered in the Land Registry to the effect that such street will be assigned as common area for all owners of the development.

(c)

(d)

(e)

/(f)

-3-

(f)

If one or more of the circumstances mentioned in (a) to (e) above exist with respect to different parts of the street, and these parts together constitute the street, such street will also be considered as specified street (regulation 18A(3)(b)). If these parts are separated by intervening strips of land that do not meet any of the above circumstances, each of these parts will be considered as a separate specified street.

4. If a specified street for site classification is not an existing one and has to be constructed, it should be completed before the occupation permit for the building on the site is issued. If such street has not been completed by the time an occupation permit is applied for, the Building Authority would refuse to issue the occupation permit under section 21(6)(a) of the Buildings Ordinance (BO). In addition, the specified street so created should remain as a street insofar as the buildings relying on it for attaining the site coverage and plot ratio exist. Any subsequent proposal to build over or extinguish such street would result in contravention of the provisions of the BO and such proposal would be disapproved under section 16(1)(d) of the BO.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority Ref.: BD GP/BORD/80 (VI) First issue October 2001 (AD/NB1) This revision November 2005 (AD/Support, AD/NB1) totally revamped Index under: Street Private street Site classification Specified street

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-125

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

266

Level Difference for Floor Adjoining External Ground Level or Flat Roof Regulations 35 and 49(1) of the Building (Construction) Regulations (B(C)Rs) require that the level of an internal floor shall not be less than 150 mm above the level of the external ground or adjoining flat roof. The objective of these requirements is to prevent the ingress of rainwater. 2. These requirements can generally be catered for at the design stage by allowing sufficient difference in level between the internal floor and the external ground or adjoining flat roof. However, there could be cases where authorized persons wish to depart from the prescribed requirements due to special circumstances of their cases or as a result of the unique nature of their designs. In such circumstances, the Building Authority (BA) is prepared to consider granting exemption from the above regulations to allow flexibility in design if means to guard against the ingress of water to the inside of the building are provided to the satisfaction of the BA. 3. Each application for exemption or modification of Regulations 35 or 49(1) of the B(C)Rs will be considered on its own merits. The BA, however, will give favourable consideration to the following design criteria: (a) Provision of additional drainage channels, each with at least 2 no. of drainage outlets; and (b) Provision of a fall, not less than 1:80, on the flat roof or external ground sloping away from the adjoining internal/usable floor area. 4. In the event that the above measures cannot be implemented for whatever reason, the provision of a kerb, with water proofing construction, at the access point having a total height of 150mm above the adjoining roof or external ground may also be considered.

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/C/23 (VII)

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority

First issue December 2001 (AD/NB1) This revision January 2005 paras 1 and 2 amended and paras 3 and 4 added Index under : External ground Flat Roof Roof B(C)R 35 B(C)R 49(1)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized APP-126 Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Plans for Signboards

269

Introduction Erection of signboards, inclusive of display surfaces and fixings thereof, which are solely for the purpose of displaying any advertisement, making any announcement or notification, or displaying any visual image or other information, are building works subject to the control of the Buildings Ordinance (BO). To curb the proliferation of large unauthorized signboards, the Building Authority (BA) takes prompt enforcement action to effect removal of unauthorized signboards in accordance with the enforcement policy against unauthorized building works. At the same time, to facilitate the erection of signboards legally to comply with the required safety and health standards, the BA has introduced a fast-track processing service for applications to erect signboards. This practice note provides details of such service and requirements for the erection of signboards. Fast-track Processing 2. The fast-track processing system is applicable to alteration and addition (A&A) plans for signboards. Signboard proposals associated with new developments will be processed in the usual manner. Under this system, the authorized person (AP) and the registered structural engineer (RSE) are required to ensure and certify that the provisions of the BO and the requirements of the relevant government departments for the erection of signboards are complied with. The AP should submit a minimum of 9 sets of plans with a certificate (Appendix A) and a checklist (Appendix B) to the Buildings Department (BD) for centralized processing. BD will refer the plans to the relevant government departments as follows :(a) (b) For all cases, to the relevant District Lands Officer, Lands Department; For proposed signboards erected on rooftop subject to height restriction under the Outline Zoning Plan (OZP) or facing the harbour, to the relevant District Planning Officer, Planning Department; For proposed signboards projecting over a public street, to :(i) Transport Department Regional Chief Traffic Engineer, Traffic Engineering Division Highways Department (1) Chief Highway Engineer of the relevant Regional Office; (2) Senior Landscape Architect/Landscape Unit;

(c)

(ii)

-2(3) Chief Highway Engineer/Bridges & Structures and (4) Chief Engineer/Lighting. (d) For proposed signboards which do not project over a public street but facing on-coming traffic, to Regional Chief Traffic Engineer, Traffic Engineering Division, Transport Department.

3. In addition, for proposed illuminated signboards facing the harbour or illuminated signboards adjacent to the Hong Kong International Airport or signboards in the proximity of MTR/railway protection areas, the AP shall submit additional sets of plans as required in Part 2 of Appendix B to facilitate referral. 4. Signboards should be structurally adequate and securely fixed to the parent building. It is therefore desirable for building professionals to provide where appropriate anchorages for signboards at the design and construction stages of new buildings. Such anchorages, if proposed, should be shown on plans for approval. 5. Provided that sufficient information as specified in the following paragraphs have been submitted, the building and structural A&A plans will be processed within 30 days of the date of submission to BD. However, cases involving unconventional signboards, which may require consideration by the Building Committee of BD, or submissions not conforming to the relevant requirements as specified in this practice note will not be included in the fast-track processing system. In the case of the latter, the AP will be advised of the position within 14 days of receipt of the submission. 6. To further streamline the vetting process, application for consent to the commencement of the works may also be submitted together with the plan submission for concurrent processing. In this connection, the relevant criteria and procedures for concurrent applications for approval and consent stipulated in PNAP 272 shall apply. 7. Taking into account the nature of the works, a site safety supervision plan is not required. However, the AP, RSE and registered general building contractor (RGBC) should ensure that sufficient measures to protect public safety are provided during the course of works. Building Plans Submission 8. Under the fast-track processing system for A&A plans, the following details, information and supporting documents should be provided in the building plan submission where applicable: (a) Details of the proposed signboard including materials of the supporting framework and the display surface thereof, showing full dimensions, height, projection from lot boundary and over street, horizontal and vertical clearances from ground or street

-3and relative positions of adjacent signboards within 5 metres; (b) (c) (d) (e) Plans, sections and elevations of the parent building and the proposed signboard 1 ; Proposed ties including guy wires and struts; Widths of the carriageway and pavement; Position of any adjacent highway structure, tramway cable, street lighting, street furniture, existing tree, traffic signal, traffic sign, traffic surveillance camera and traffic management facilities; An assessment demonstrating that the parent and adjoining buildings will not be adversely affected with regard to the following aspects: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (g) (h) (i) (j) provision of lighting and ventilation and open space; fire-resisting construction; means of escape; and means of access for fire-fighting and rescue;

(f)

Sequence and procedures for carrying out the works (for concurrent application of consent); Precautionary measures for the protection of the public (for concurrent application of consent); Details of proposed illumination and lighting (for road, marine or aviation safety consideration); and Photographs showing clearly the building faade, the condition of supporting structural elements, the abutting street and signboards in the vicinity.

Structural Plans and Calculations 9. The following plans and supporting documents/information are required to be submitted under the fast-track processing system for A&A plans: (a) Structural plan containing : (i) (ii) layout of the signboard supporting frame and its fixings; layout of the structural frame of the part of the parent building where the signboard is affixed to;

Contents of advertisement need not be shown.

-4(iii) typical connections and supporting fixing details, including details of fixing of the display surface to the signboard supporting frame and fixing of supporting frame to the parent building; and design standard(s), material and workmanship specification adopted for the proposed signboard structural works and the display surfaces.

(iv)

(b) (c)

Supporting calculations for structural works in item (a) above. In addition to the above, depending on the type, size and location of the signboard, the following additional information/assessments may be required to be submitted : (i) Signboards Projecting from External Wall (Projecting Signboards) Additional information/assessments that are required to be submitted are indicated in the table below:Area of signboard(2) Information/Assessment Required 10 m <10 m2 Case A Checking of the adequacy of the structural elements of the parent building affected by the proposed work Relevant structural information of the part of the parent building supporting the signboard Assessment of the effect of the proposed work on the overall stability of the building Case B
2

Yes

Yes

NR

Yes

Yes

NR

When the area of the new signboard(s) 10% of the wind exposure area of a building, normal to the wind direction that is under consideration

NR Not required to be submitted. However, for buildings with any visible dilapidation or defect, an assessment of the structural integrity of supporting members of the existing parent building including insitu verification of structural strength and site photographs should be submitted to BA for reference and record purpose.

In the table above: Case A refers to a signboard that is not affixed to the parent building at floor slab levels or when any of the floor slabs to which the signboard is affixed is of pure cantilevered slab construction.

-5-

Case B refers to a signboard that is affixed to the parent building at floor slab levels only and where the floors are not of pure cantilevered slab construction.
(2)

Area of signboard has the same meaning as that depicted in Annexes 1 & 2 of Appendix G.

(ii)

Signboards cladded in parallel to the external wall (Wall Signboards) Wall signboards are signboards that project not more than 600 mm from and with no part extending laterally beyond the external wall. For signboards that fall into this category, irrespective of their frontal surface area, additional information/assessments that are required to be submitted are shown in the table below:Information/Assessment Required Checking of the adequacy of the structural elements of the parent building affected by the proposed work Relevant structural information of the part of the parent building supporting the signboard Assessment of the effect of the proposed work on the overall stability of the building Case C Case D

NR

Yes

NR

Yes

NR

NR

NR Not required to be submitted. However, for buildings with any visible dilapidation or defect, an assessment of the structural integrity of supporting members of the existing parent building including insitu verification of structural strength and site photographs should be submitted to BA for reference and record purpose.

In the table above: Case C refers to the part of wall signboard that is affixed to load-bearing walls or columns. Case D refers to the part of wall signboard that is affixed to edge beams or pure cantilevered slabs. (iii) Other Types of Signboards For signboards other than the above two categories and for those erected at other locations including roof top or standing alone, structural assessments that are required

-6to be submitted should be in accordance with PNAP 249. Detailed construction requirements are set out in Appendix C. Exemption under Section 31(1) of the Buildings Ordinance 10. Where the proposed building works project over a street, an exemption of section 31(1) of the BO may be granted upon application provided that: (a) (b) the BA is satisfied that the works are to be constructed in a suitable location and at an appropriate height; and the design is acceptable to the relevant departments, other than Lands Department which will consider the plan submission separately.

Approval of Plans 11. Under the fast-track processing system for A&A plans, the BA will place emphasis on the APs certification as mentioned in paragraph 2 above and take into account any advice given by the Commissioner for Transport, the Director of Highways and the Director of Planning. The AP should certify compliance with the requirements of the Fire Services Department, the Transport Department and the Highways Department as set out in Appendices D to F respectively. The positional and dimensional requirements for the signboards are specified in Appendix G. 12. For submissions not adopting the fast-track processing system, paragraph 10 on exemption under section 31(1) of the Buildings Ordinance, Appendix C on construction requirements and Appendix G on positional and dimensional requirements are equally applicable. APs and RSEs are also advised to make reference to other Appendices on the requirements of other government departments as appropriate. Accountability for Gross Floor Area/Site Coverage 13. Signboards situating within lot boundaries will generally not be accountable for gross floor area, but will be accounted for site coverage unless its dimensions and extent of projection comply with the requirements laid down in Appendix G. Furthermore, the thickness of wall sign will always be measured from the external faade. Compliance with Lease Conditions and other Enactment 14. The approval given by the BA should not be deemed to confer any title to land or to act as a waiver of any term in any lease or licence pursuant to section 14(2) of the BO. It is therefore necessary to seek separately the consent of the relevant building owners or Owners Corporation, as the case may be, for the erection of signboards. It may also be necessary to seek the permission of the

-7District Lands Officer, Lands Department under the lease conditions, particularly for projection over government land. In this connection, the requirements of the Lands Department at Appendix H should be observed. The AP should consult other relevant authorities and ensure compliance with their requirements. In this regard, a list of other legislation relating to signboard is attached at Appendix I for general reference. Sanctions 15. APs and RSEs wishing to take advantage of the fast-track processing procedures should ensure that the above submission requirements are fully met. The BA will take a serious view on any misrepresentation in the plan submissions or misconduct in the carrying out of the works. APs and RSEs are strongly reminded of their statutory duties under section 4 of the BO and the sanctions under sections 7 and 40 thereof.

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority

Ref : BD GP/BOP/39 (IV) First issue May 2003 This revision Apr 2009 (AD/NB1 & AD/NB2) - Paras 1, 2, 8, 9, 10, 12 & 13 and Appendices A, B, C, D, E, F, G & I amended Index under : Fast track processing Signboards Signs Signboard anchorage

Request for Fast-track Processing of Alteration and Addition Plans for Signboard and Self-certification by Authorized Person and Registered Structural Engineer To the Building Authority

Appendix A (PNAP 269) (APP-126)

Part A (to be certified by AP) In accordance with PNAP 269, I hereby request for fast-track processing of the plans (drwg no. _________________ to __________________) submitted for the proposed signboard to be erected at _______________________________________________________. 2. I undertake to comply with the provisions of the BO and I certify that the proposed building works do not adversely affect the parent and adjoining buildings with regard to the following aspects: Fire safety means of access for fire fighting and rescue, means of escape in case of fire, fire resisting construction Health and environment lighting, ventilation, open space 3.

I also certify that the following requirements are fully complied with : Requirements of the Fire Services Department as specified in Appendix D to PNAP 269 Requirements of the Transport Department as specified in Appendix E to PNAP 269 Requirements of the Highways Department as specified in Appendix F to PNAP 269 Requirements on the projection, clearance and location as specified in Appendix G to PNAP 269 The height restriction controlled under the Hong Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions) Ordinance The height restriction under the Outline Zoning Plan Requirements of the other relevant authorities i.e. MTRC Ltd., Marine Department, Civil Aviation Department

Date_________________ Signature of Authorized Person

(Name in full) Certificate of Registration No. : Date of expiry of registration : -1-

Part B (to be certified by RSE) 4. I certify that the structural requirements as specified in Appendix C to PNAP 269 are fully complied with.

Date_________________ Signature of RSE

(Name in full) Certificate of Registration No. : Date of expiry of registration : 5*. A Form BA 8A applying for your consent to the commencement and carrying out of the works mentioned in paragraph 1 above is enclosed.

Tick box as appropriate * Delete where inapplicable (Rev. 4/2009) -2-

Check List on Documents to be Included in A&A Plan Submission for Signboard


PART 1 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED

Appendix B (PNAP 269) (APP-126)

Yes 2 sets of signed and coloured plans, calculations and supporting documents to BD 1 set of plans with development schedule to DLO, Lands Department 1 set of plans to DPO, Planning Department for signboard erected on rooftop subject to height restriction under the OZP or signboard facing the harbour 1 set of plans to the Chief Traffic Engineer, Transport Department for signboard projecting over a public street or for signboard facing on-coming traffic 4 sets of plans to the Highways Department for signboard projecting over a public street (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Chief Highway Engineer; Senior Landscape Architect/Landscape Unit; Chief Highway Engineer/Bridges & Structures and Chief Engineer/Lighting

No/NA

Request Form for Fast-Track Processing and Self-Certification Form BA 4 (Appointment of AP/RSE) Form BA 5 (Application for approval) Form BA 6 (Stability Certificate of AP/RSE) Form BA8 (Application for consent to the commencement and carrying out of building works) Form BA 16 (Application for modification/exemption) (e.g. BO s.31(1))

Site photographs showing the building facades and the vicinity Name and address of the Owners Corporation and/or the management company

PART 2 ADDITIONAL SETS OF PLANS FOR REFERRAL TO RELEVANT AUTHORITIES


Does proposal involve or affect the following?
Scheduled Area No. 3, MTR Protection Area & Work Sites (PNAP 77) or KCR Protection Area & Work Sites (PNAP 279) Proposed rail routes Light Rail Transit Railway route or reserves Illuminated signboards facing the harbour Illuminated signboards International Airport near Hong Kong

Relevant Authorities
Mass Transit Railway Corporation Ltd

Yes

No

Railway Division, Highways Department Light Rail Division, Mass Railway Corporation Ltd Marine Department Civil Aviation Department Civil Aviation Department (e.g. Antiquities and Monuments Office, Leisure & Cultural Services Department) Transit

Others (e.g. Monuments or Graded Buildings)

(Rev. 4/2009)

Appendix C (PNAP 269) (APP-126) Construction Requirements for Signboards

Structural Requirements A. Design

General 1. 2. The signboard display surface and its fixing shall form part of the signboard structure. All signboards should, except as stated in paragraphs 3 and 4 below, be fixed to approved structural members of building and should in no case be fixed to or supported by unauthorized structures. No signboard should be affixed to or take support from another signboard. Regardless of the size of signboards, canopy shall not be used as structural supporting members for any part of the signboard or its supporting frame. Subject to paragraph 9(c) of this practice note, projecting structures/balconies shall not be used as structural supporting members for any part of the signboard or its supporting frame. The structural adequacy of the signboard inclusive of its supporting frame, display surface and its fixings should be justified with structural calculations. The determination of dead loads, wind loads and imposed loads should be in accordance with the Building (Construction) Regulations. Full design wind pressure should be adopted for the design of signboard supporting frame. The signboard and parts thereof should be capable of sustaining the most adverse combination of dead, wind and imposed loads. A structural assessment should also be made to ensure that there are no adverse effects to the overall stability of the parent building for those projecting signboards with an area equal to or greater than 10% of the wind exposure area of the building, normal to the wind direction that is under consideration. Reference should be made to the current edition of the Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong for the effect of the wind load on the structural analysis of the supporting frame, display surface and fixing of signboards. The allowable permissible stresses of materials to be used for the design of the supporting frame and display surface materials may be increased by 25% due solely to wind loading.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7.

8.

-1-

Supporting frames 9. Supporting frames of the signboard shall be fixed to structural elements of building in such a way that it will not impair the structural integrity or behaviour of the supporting structural members. The fixing so provided should not overstress the signboard and should be able to safely sustain and transmit all loading including wind load acting upon the signboard. The supporting structural members of building to which the signboard is to be fixed should be structurally sound. The assessment of the structural integrity of such members including insitu verification of structural strength and site photographs should be submitted for reference and record purposes except for those smaller signboards as stated in paragraph 9(c) of this practice note. The supporting frames of the signboard should be structurally tied to provide for adequate lateral stability. Guy wires should not be treated as structural members of the supporting frame. Through bolts should be used in place of anchor bolts whenever practical for fixing of signboards.

10.

11.

12.

Display surfaces and their fixings 13. The display surface of the signboard shall be fixed to the supporting frame in such a way that it will not impair its structural integrity or behaviour. The fixing so provided should not overstress both the display surface materials and the supporting frame. The fixings should be able to safely sustain and transmit all loading including wind load acting on the display surface. Vinyl is a commonly used material for display surfaces of signbaords. The design information for the vinyl display surface materials should comprise the dimensions of the display surface; the elongation properties, the breaking strength, the adhesive strength and unit weight of the vinyl materials; the tensile capacity and spacing of the ties respectively. With respect to the allowable tensile resistances of these vinyl materials and ties, which are solely used for display purpose, a factor of safety of 2 is considered sufficient. A wind load of 70% of the design wind pressure as given in the Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004 could be adopted for checking the structural adequacy of the vinyl display surface material as well as its fixings, whereas full design wind pressure should be adopted for the design of other display surfaces including Light Emitting Diode (LED) display board.

14.

15.

-2-

B.

Materials & Workmanship

General 16. Materials used for the construction of signboards shall be of such quality and grade as specified for building works in the Building (Construction) Regulations. Bi-metallic corrosion should be avoided at any time during the service life. The following minimum corrosion protection to structural steelwork should be provided:(a) Blast cleaning or wire-brushing should be used to ensure that the surface is free of rust, mill scales and harmful materials such as oil and paint; and Protective coating of primers, undercoat and finish coat of paint should be applied to the cleaned surface immediately in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

17. 18.

(b)

Supporting frames 19. All structural steel used should have a minimum yield strength 250 MPa and possess such chemical compositions and mechanical properties as specified in recognized standards. All connections by welding should be carried out by qualified welders. All welded connections and electrodes should comply with recognized standards. Anchor bolts, if used, should be preferably of stainless steel and mechanical types. Installation of anchor bolts shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. At least one of each type of anchor bolts being used should be tested on site by pull-out test up to 1.5 times the safe tensile capacity of the bolts. The tested anchor bolts should not show any signs of separation, plastic deformation or deleterious effects. The records of pull-out test should be submitted upon completion of works. Structural steelwork to be covered up with external cladding shall be clean, free from grease, loose rust and scale. They should be corrosion protected before being cladded.

20. 21.

22.

Display surfaces and their fixings 23. All materials of the display surface and its fixings should have adequate mechanical strength. For vinyl display surface material, it should also be verified with valid manufacturers certificate.

-3-

24.

Vinyl display surface materials are usually joined together with adhesives to form a large surface area for display purpose. The adhesion should be carried out in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. All design material properties should be verified with design specifications as recommended by the manufacturer. Erection Precautionary measures should be taken during the erection of the signboards and the display surfaces by the provision of adequate temporary shoring, platform or otherwise, to prevent, so far as is practicable, the accidental collapse or falling down of any part of the signboard and its supporting frame, which may endanger any person and traffic or cause any hindrance or disturbance to the pedestrian and/or vehicular traffic flow underneath. The erection of the signboard including the fabrication and installation of the fixing, supporting frame and display surface of the signboard should be carried out by Registered General Building Contractor. A typical elevation showing the fixing of the vinyl display surface is given in Annex 1 and 2 to this Appendix. Maintenance (for advice only) All signboards should be properly maintained at all times. After completion of erection, maintenance manuals should be issued to owners of signboards to undertake the maintenance inspections of signboards after typhoon and annually. The following should be included in the manuals: (a) Maintenance inspections should be carried out by skilled and experienced persons on the supporting members of parent building and every component of signboard including its supporting frame, display surface and fixing; Worn and torn characters forming the inscription should be replaced; Broken and/or detached parts of display surfaces should be repaired or replaced; Dangling and loose fluorescent tubes or other lighting installations should be taken down and replaced with new ones securely plugged in; Loose electrical wires/installations should be re-connected to the circuit; Heavily corroded steel sections should be replaced; Slightly corroded steel sections should be cleaned before re-painting, all damaged paint surfaces after erection should be repaired in accordance with manufacturers recommendations;

25.

C. 26.

27.

D. 28.

(b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

-4-

(h)

Fractured, buckled or missing members of the steel frames shall be replaced; Dislocated, detached or heavily corroded fixing bolts should be replaced; Slightly corroded fixing bolts should be thoroughly cleaned and re-painted with anti-corrosion paint, e.g. zinc-rich primer; and The signboard and its associated structures should be removed when it is no longer required. The removal should be carried out by a competent and experienced contractor and adequate precautionary measures should be taken to prevent accidental collapse or falling down of any part of signboard and its associated structures.

(i) (j)

(k)

Fire Safety Requirements 29 The supporting frame of the signboard should be made of non-combustible material. The display surface of the signboard and its fixings should be made of metal, aluminium, non-breakable glass or any other materials that are non-combustible and non-brittle materials. Where they are not made of non-combustible materials, the requirements specified in the following paragraphs should be complied with. Plastics (including vinyl) and LED display boards should have a surface spread of flame characteristic of not worse than Class 2 determined in accordance with BS 476 : Part 7 : 1997. Wood, wood laminates and fibreboard should have a surface spread of flame characteristic of not worse than Class 3 determined in accordance with BS 476 : Part 7 : 1997 and be protected in accordance with BS 5268. For display surface or fixing materials which are not non-combustible and not covered in paragraphs 31 and 32 above, the acceptability of such materials for the display and fixing purposes would be considered on the merit of each case upon submission of their material specifications and test reports relating to the reactions of the materials to fire, such as flame spread characteristics. Where paints and inks are applied to the surfaces of materials which are not non-combustible, e.g. acrylics, the resulting surface should have a spread of flame characteristic of not worse than that of the underlying substrate. Without prejudice to any requirement on provision of natural lighting or ventilation, where the display surface or its fixings of a wall signboard is not made of non-combustible material, any external wall opening behind the signboard should be protected by fixed light or blocked up by material having a fire resistance period of not less than that required for the elements of -5-

30

31

32

33

34

35

construction of the floor where the external wall opening is located. In this situation, the non-combustible infill required under paragraph 12.2 of the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996 can be dispensed with. 36 Materials tested or conforming to other standards or criteria may be accepted if they can be shown to achieve the performance requirements set out in Building (Construction) Regulation 90.

(Rev. 4/2009)

-6-

Annex 1 to Appendix C (PNAP 269) (APP-126) (Page 1 of 2)

Annex 1 to Appendix C (PNAP 269) (APP-126) (Page 2 of 2)

Annex 2 to Appendix C (PNAP 269)


(APP-126)

Appendix D (PNAP 269) (APP-126) Fire Services Departments Requirement 1. A signboard if projecting over a street shall have a minimum horizontal clearance of not less than 4.5m from central divider, adjacent highway structures or pavement curb at the opposite side whichever is nearer to the signboard. A signboard shall have a minimum headroom clearance of 5.8m if projecting over a carriageway and shall have a minimum vertical clearance of 5m above the elevated road level of any adjacent highway structure. Two adjacent projecting signboards shall have a minimum lateral clearance of 2.4m. No signboard shall be allowed within this lateral clearance at a level higher or lower than the two signboards. Signboards erected from the opposite sides of a street shall not project within 1.5m from the geometrical centerline of the street. Guy wires tied to secure signboards shall not run laterally or diagonally on either side of signboards to minimize the possible obstruction to access to upper floors by fire services ladders. No neon light tubing, electrical circuits or lamps shall be installed on woodwork or other combustible material. The transformer, neon light tubing and other parts of high voltage circuit shall be located out of reach of the public. No roof exit shall be obstructed by the signboard or any of the steelwork used in the construction of the signboard. A signboard shall not cause any obstruction to openable windows. If obstruction to such windows is unavoidable, then approval has to be sought from the Building Authority. The Firemans Switch of an approved type shall be situated in a conspicuous position, not more than 3m but not less than 2.5m from ground level. It shall either be as nearly as possible vertically below the sign or near the main entrance to the building, where appropriate. Notwithstanding this, it shall be positioned at a point out of reach of the general public. Where more than one Firemans Switch is installed on any one building, such switches shall be clearly marked to distinguish one from another. The ON and OFF position of the Firemans Switch shall be conventional (i.e. push upward OFF; push downward ON).

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

The switch is to be affixed on a board approximately 300mm long by 250mm wide, which is painted white and edged with a 50mm red border. The inscription NEON SIGN-FIREMANS SWITCH in English is to be painted on the top and - in Chinese at the bottom of the board in black. The switch is to be positioned in the middle of the board. Precautionary measures should be taken to prevent the sparks generated from electric welding in the process of erecting signboards from igniting nearby combustibles.

13.

(Rev. 4/2009)

Appendix E (PNAP 269) (APP-126) Transport Departments Requirement

1.

Signboards shall not be erected on or above expressways except with the written permission of the Commissioner for Transport under Regulation 15 of the Road Traffic (Expressways) Regulations. Signboards, in general, should not be erected over roads with speed limit 70 km/h or above. The illumination, colours and shape of signboards shall not be such that they could be confused with traffic signs including all traffic management facilities, such as traffic lights, direction signs, variable message signs, etc. Signboards shall not be located too close to traffic signs so as to avoid causing confusion. Signboards shall not obstruct traffic signs, traffic lights, traffic surveillance cameras and transport information systems/ variable message signs or affect the operation and safety of transport facilities. If necessary, relevant parties should be consulted, for example, if CCTVs are likely to be affected/obstructed, Transport Department should be consulted. TV screens and any signboards or lighting that change or show moving images shall not be located such that they may cause distraction to drivers. The Transport Department should be consulted regarding installation, erection or alteration of any such signboards that will be visible to drivers of motor vehicles. Signboards shall not be erected at locations which require road users' full concentration such as junctions, roundabouts and pedestrian crossing points or at locations where the signs may impede already restricted visibility such as at horizontal and vertical curves.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

(Rev. 4/2009)

Appendix F (PNAP 269) (APP-126) Highways Departments Requirements

1.

Signboards and its associated supports and guy wires shall not be fixed to or cause obstruction to street lighting, traffic signs/signals, highway structures, trees, street furniture etc. and shall not obstruct the maintenance operations of the same. In case of doubt, Highways Department must be consulted. No signboard shall be erected above expressway and trunk roads. A minimum clearance of 2m to highway structures and 3m to street lighting should be maintained in order to avoid obstruction to maintenance access. In order not to affect the illumination of the street lights, any proposed signboard should not encroach into the space bounded by the main beams from the lantern of an adjacent street light which are about 72o from the vertical, i.e. an angle of cone of 144o. The AP is required to carry out a site visit/survey to ascertain the as-surveyed location of any lamp post which is required for verification of vertical clearance provided and its compliance with the above requirement.

2.

3.

(Rev. 4/2009)

Appendix G (PNAP 269) (APP-126) Positional and Dimensional Requirements for Signboards 1. 2. 3. No part of a signboard shall obstruct or reduce the width of the means of escape of a building. No part of a signboard shall obstruct or reduce the required natural lighting and ventilation or open space provided to a building. No part of a signboard shall project more than 4.2m from an external wall of a building or within 1.5m from the centre line of a street, whichever is the less. In this connection, the outer wall of a projecting structure from the building shall not be regarded as an external wall. The thickness of a projecting signboard shall not be more than 600mm. For a wall signboard with the display surface parallel to the external wall, it shall not project more than 600mm from the building faade or 600 mm from the lot boundary whichever is the less. All parts of a projecting signboard (including its supporting structure but excluding structural members solely for preventing lateral movement of the signboard) shall be contained within a prescribed prism. Prescribed prism means a virtual rectangular prism of which the area of the largest planar surface is 40m2 and the smallest dimension is 600mm. Some illustrations of calculating the rectangular planar area of the prescribed prism are shown in Annex 1. Projecting signboards within the same projecting vertical plane from a building shall have an aggregate rectangular planar area of not more than 40 m2. Where one or more signboards are erected in the same vertical plane of a building, the aggregate of the vertical height of the signboards shall not be more than 20m (Annex 2). No signboard shall rest on or attach to a canopy. The minimum vertical clearances above ground are : Position Over pavement Over carriageway Over pedestrian streets Over tramway Minimum Clearance 3.5 m with minimum 1 m clear distance from the curb or the carriageway 5.8 m 5.8 m 7m
-1-

4.

5.

6.

7. 8.

9. Any part of a projecting signboard including supporting frames and lateral struts shall have a minimum distance of 2.4m, measured laterally and throughout the height of the building, from any other projecting signboard. 10. Two signboards erected from the opposite side of a street shall have a horizontal minimum clear distance of 3m. No signboard shall obstruct or affect any trees.

11.

The above requirements are diagrammatically shown in Annex 3.

(Rev. 4/2009)

-2-

Annex 1 to Appendix G (PNAP 269) (APP-126)

Signboard contained within the prescribed prism:Rectangular planar area = 40m2 (MAX) (Area shown dotted) Thickness = 600mm (MAX)

Signboard contained within the prescribed prism:Rectangular planar area = 40m2 (MAX) (Area shown dotted) Thickness = 600mm (MAX)

Annex 2 to Appendix G (PNAP 269) (APP-126)

Area 1
(Rectangular planar area)

Area 2
(Rectangular planar area)

Area 3
(Rectangular planar area)

4.2m (MAX)

Area 1 + Area 2 + Area 3 40m2 a + b + c 20m

Annex 3 to Appendix G (PNAP 269) (APP-126)

40m (MAX )
2

Appendix H (PNAP 269) (APP-126) Lands Departments Requirement

1.

A development schedule under the lease conditions should be accompanied with the building plans submission. The building plan should clearly show the lot boundary and whether the proposed signboard would protrude over the Government land. The AP should indicate in the submission the name of the signboard owner and the name of the property owner in which the signboard is to be erected. Further information such as photographs showing the proposed location of signboards and the Deed of Mutual Covenant of the property concerned may be required depending on individual cases.

2.

3.

4.

(5/2003)

Appendix I (PNAP 269) (APP-126) Other Legislation Affecting Erection of Signboards

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Building Management Ordinance, Cap 344 Control of Obscene and Indecent Article Ordinance, Cap 390 Country Parks Ordinance, Cap 208 and Special Areas Regulations Land (Miscellaneous Provisions) Ordinance, Cap 28 Electricity Ordinance, Cap 406 Fire Services Ordinance, Cap 95 Hong Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions) Ordinance, Cap 301 Public Health & Municipal Services Ordinance, Cap 132 Public Lighting Ordinance, Cap 105 Road Traffic Ordinance, Cap 374 Shipping and Port Control Ordinance, Cap 313 Smoking (Public Health) Ordinance, Cap 371 Summary Offences Ordinance, Cap 228 Undesirable Medical Advertisements Ordinance, Cap 231 Air Navigation (Hong Kong) Order 1995, Cap 448C

(Rev. 4/2009)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-127 273

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Contractors Sheds Introduction Contractors sheds are often required by site personnel in building sites for use as site office, storage room, staff room or canteen. In accordance with Building (Planning) Regulation 53, permits from the Building Authority (BA) are required for the erection of such sheds. 2. The need for professional input for the design and construction of the sheds depends on the size and scale of such sheds. Self Regulation 3. To promote self-discipline and to facilitate the development process, the BA is prepared to issue a permit for the erection of a contractors shed within a building site based on the certification, by a registered general building contractor (RGBC), a registered specialist contractor (RSC) or by an authorized person (AP) and registered structural engineer (RSE), as to compliance with the requirements of the Buildings Ordinance, according to the circumstances of the case. Self Regulation by Contractor 4. For contractors sheds complying with the criteria set out in Appendix A, such sheds may be certified by a RGBC or RSC. Contractors adopting this option should complete Parts I and II of Form BA18 and submit to the BA the same together with details of the proposed contractor's sheds. Self Regulation by AP/RSE 5. For contractors sheds within the cartilage of the building site which do not meet the criteria set out in Appendix A, they may be certified by an AP and a RSE, who may or may not be the AP or RSE appointed for the building site. Applicants should arrange to complete Parts I and III of Form BA18 and submit the same together with supporting structural documents comparable to those specified in Building (Administration) Regulations (B(A)R) 8(1)(d) and (i). Where the contractors shed is sited at a location with geotechnical concern (Item (c) of Appendix A is relevant), geotechnical documents prepared by a registered geotechnical engineer to a standard comparable to the requirements set out in B(A)R 8(1)(bb) should also be submitted to demonstrate that the shed will not affect or be affected by the nearby slope or retaining structures. /Issue ..

-2Issue of Permit 6. The BA will issue a permit upon receipt of an application incorporating the required information and documents. While the BA will carry out audit checks by examining in details some applications selected at random, the RGBC, RSC, AP or RSE should ensure that the sheds, when constructed, are structurally stable and safe for use. 7. When renewal of a contractors shed(s) permit is required, an application in writing should be made to the BA with the following documents : (a) the original Form BD 108; and (b) a written confirmation from the RGBC/RSC/AP/RSE that the previous certification on Form BA18 remains valid for the extended period under application. General Advice on Contractors Sheds 8. For a contractors shed sited over a hoarding or covered walkway, a permit will not be issued if the support of the shed is dependent on the structure of the hoarding/covered walkway or if any of its support obstructs the clear width of the hoarding/covered walkway. 9. If a contractors shed is constructed of combustible material, it should be located at least 3m from any other adjoining buildings or site boundary and such space should be kept clear. 10. All contractors sheds should be provided with adequate fire safety provisions in accordance with the requirements set out in Appendix B.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority Ref : BD GP/BREG/P/16 (IV) First issue November 2002 This revision October 2007 (AD/NB1) para 5 and Form BA18 revised Index under : Building (Planning) Regulation Part VII Building (Planning) Regulation Part IX Contractors Shed Hoardings, Covered walkways and Gantries

Appendix A (PNAP 273) (APP-127) Criteria for Contractors Sheds that could be certified by RGBC/RSC a) b) c) The contractors shed is of single storey with storey height less than 3m and with floor area less than 230 m2; The base of the contractors shed from the ground level, if stilted above ground, does not exceed 1.5m; The proposed shed does not pose any geotechnical concern in that (i) (ii) The maximum gradient across the site for erection of shed is not more than 15. The overall gradient of an area bounded by lines 10m outside the footprint of the shed in any direction is less than 15.

(iii) There is no slope within the area 10m outside the footprint of the shed steeper than 30 or higher than 1.5m. (iv) There is no retaining wall or terrace wall higher than 1.5 m either within the site for erection of shed or within the area 10m outside the footprint of the shed.

d)

The contractors shed is not sited (i) (ii) on a cantilevered structure; or above a hoarding or covered walkway; and

e)

The contractors shed is located within the boundaries of the building site and is not readily accessible to the general public.

(11/2002)

Appendix B (PNAP 273) (APP-127) Fire Safety Requirements for Contractors Sheds Shed Design Shed(s) to be certified by registered contractors Single-storey less than 230 m2 Shed(s) to be certified by AP/RSE Structure exceeding one storey and less than 230 m2 (i) One 4.5 kg CO2 or 9-litre water type fire extinguisher at each entrance. (ii) At least one open staircase to be provided. Single-storey in excess of 230 m2 (iii) One 4.5 kg CO2 or 9-litre water type fire extinguisher at each entrance. (iv) Access for fire engine to be provided to reach 30m travel distance from the shed. Other designs; or non-compliance with Fire Safety Requirements in this table for the above structures Fire Services Department to formulate requirements on a case-by-case basis. One 4.5 kg CO2 or 9-litre water type fire extinguisher at each entrance. Fire Safety Requirements

Note : Travel distance within the shed should comply with the Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996.

(11/2002)

Form BA 18 BUILDINGS ORDINANCE (Chapter 123) BUILDING (PLANNING) REGULATIONS Regulation 53 __________ Application for permit to erect a contractors shed
Part I Date__________________ To the Building Authority In accordance with the provisions of regulation 53 of the Building (Planning) Regulation, *I/we (name in full) ______________________________________________ (Chinese) _____________________________, *registered general building contractor/registered specialist contractor in the ** ________________________ category of (address) ________________________________________________________________________________________________ hereby apply for a permit to erect contractors shed(s) as shown in the accompanying plans, in connection with building works to be carried out at (address of site) _____________________________________________________________ (Lot No.) _________________________________ (your Ref. No. _______________________________). 2. *I/we hereby supply the following information for your consideration : (a) The situation, dimensions layout and construction of the shed are as shown on the accompanying plans. (b) The estimated time for which the shed is required is ________________________ year(s)/month(s). (c) The intended use of the shed is _________________________________________. (d) The number of persons to be accommodated for habitation is _________________. (e) Provision of latrine/*water-closet/*kitchen accommodation is as follows : __________________________________________________________________

Name of the person appointed to act for the registered contractor for the above works : ________________________

Signature : ________________________ Certificate of Registration No. : ________________________ Date of expiry of registration : ________________________ * ** Delete whichever is inapplicable Enter the name of the sub-register for the category of specialized work /Part II ..

-2-

Part II Date ____________________ To the Building Authority *I/we (name in full) _____________________________________________________________________ (Chinese) ___________________________________, *registered general building contractor/registered specialist contractor of (address) _____________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________ hereby confirm that the contractors shed(s), complying with the criteria set out in Appendix A of PNAP 273, at the captioned construction site will be constructed under *my/our supervision in accordance with the plan(s) prepared by me/us ___________________________________________________________________________________________ or under my supervision or direction and will be maintained by me/us. 2. *I/we confirm in my/our opinion that the shed(s), when built, *is/are structurally safe and fit for use until

_______________________________.

Name of the person appointed to act for the registered contractor for the above works : ________________________

Signature : ________________________ Certificate of Registration No. : ________________________ Date of expiry of registration : ________________________

Delete whichever is inapplicable

/*Part III(a) ..

-3-

*Part III(a) Date ______________________ To the Building Authority I (name in full) ________________________________________________________________________, (Chinese) _____________________________________, authorized person, hereby CERTIFY that (i) the structural details and calculations as defined under Building (Administration) regulation 12 (3) & (4) and (ii) the fire safety provisions* for the contractors shed(s) at the captioned construction site are prepared by me or under my supervision or direction. *2. I also CERTIFY that the geotechnical documents accompanied with this submission is prepared by a

registered geotechnical engineer and the proposed contractors shed(s) will not affect or be affected by the nearby slopes or retaining structures. 3. I also confirm that in my opinion the shed(s), when built in accordance with the submitted plans, *is/are

structurally safe and fit for use until _______________________________.

Signature : ___________________________ Certificate of Registration No. : ___________________________ Date of expiry of registration : ___________________________

Delete whichever is inapplicable

/*Part III(b) ..

-4-

*Part III(b) Date ______________________ To the Building Authority I (name in full) _________________________________________________________________________ (Chinese) _____________________________, registered structural engineer, hereby CERTIFY that the structural details and calculations for the contractors shed(s) at the captioned construction site are prepared by me. 2. I also CERTIFY that in my opinion the shed(s) when built in accordance with the submitted plans are

structurally safe and fit for use until __________________________.

Signature : __________________________ Certificate of Registration No. : __________________________ Date of expiry of registration : __________________________ Part III(c) 4. *I/we (name in full) _____________________________________________________________________

(Chinese) ______________________________, *registered general building contractor/registered specialist contractor of (address) ______________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________ hereby confirm that the contractors shed(s) at the captioned construction site will be constructed under *my/our supervision in accordance with the plan(s).

Name of the person appointed to act for the registered contractor for the above works : __________________________

Signature : __________________________ Certificate of Registration No. : __________________________ Date of expiry of registration : __________________________ * Delete whichever is inapplicable

(Rev. 10/2007)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-128

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

274

Geotechnical Design Information Geotechnical design submissions involve the preparation of geotechnical plans and geotechnical reports. The submissions are ever increasing in complexity and volume. The employment of sophisticated geotechnical computer programs for design is common. To facilitate expeditious processing of submissions, it is important to maintain focus on the key issues throughout the design process and to organize the geotechnical plans, design reports and calculations clearly and systematically. Preparing for a Geotechnical Design 2. Intensive developments in the urban areas and on hillsides have brought about various geotechnical stability issues with public safety concerns. To satisfactorily address these concerns, geotechnical designs should be carried out through a careful process with due attention given to every aspect of the design elements and the uncertainties involved. Standards and recommended good practice should be followed to ensure compliance with the current safety requirements. Reference can be made to Technical Guidance Note (TGN) No. 1 which contains a list of guidance documents being used by the Geotechnical Engineering Office as de facto geotechnical standards. The TGN can be found at the Civil Engineering and Development Department website http://www.cedd.gov.hk/. 3. The geotechnical feasibility of a development project should be examined at the general building plan stage and should be addressed if the site meets one or more of the criteria for submission of a geotechnical assessment for compliance with Building (Administration) Regulations (B(A)R) 8(1)(ba). The purpose of a geotechnical assessment is to identify at an early stage any fundamental geotechnical constraints that could affect the development and to adequately assess the geotechnical feasibility of the project. The criteria for submission and the essential contents of a geotechnical assessment are given in PNAP 78. 4. The importance of ground investigation for a geotechnical design cannot be overstressed. It is always a good practice to first formulate a preliminary geological model based on existing information obtained from a thorough desk study. The ground investigation fieldwork should then be planned with the objective of refining and confirming the geological model and the parameters to be used in the design, and identifying the various uncertainties involved as far as possible. Guidance on the execution of ground investigations is given in PNAP 132.

/5. ..

-2Geotechnical Design, Reports and Plans 5. Design plans are intended to define the scope of proposed works and to demonstrate their feasibility and adequacy. The proposed works shall be designed and constructed so that during construction and thereafter there is an adequate margin of safety of the works and the remainder of the site. Furthermore, the carrying out of such works shall not render inadequate the margin of safety of, or impair the stability of, or cause damage to adjacent ground and facilities. 6. All accompanying geotechnical design reports should contain an executive summary to highlight the key elements of the design and the key issues addressed, which serves as an explanatory guide to the submission. The report must, inter alia, contain a schedule of geotechnical design assumptions and parameters adopted. Clear justifications with relevant supporting documents (e.g. ground investigation reports, laboratory testing results, groundwater monitoring data, etc.) should be provided in the report regarding the choice of parameters and design assumptions. 7. It is a good practice to incorporate provisions for design reviews during construction such that the key design assumptions can be validated or design modifications can be made if changes in design parameters are found necessary. This is particularly important for sites with complex subsurface conditions, or involving unconventional engineering schemes. Guidance on this aspect is given in PNAP 246. 8. It is often noted that many of the plans submitted do not comply with the requirements stipulated in the related B(A)R and Building (Construction) Regulations (B(C)R), thus resulting in delay in subsequent processing. The proposed works shall be clearly differentiated from existing works (B(A)R 14 refers). The plans shall be prepared to clearly show the mutual effects between the proposed works and the existing conditions of the site. Attention should also be given in the preparation of plans to avoid some common deficiencies such as inaccurate site survey data, insufficient safety precautions (e.g. temporary support to adjacent ground or precautionary measures for heavy rainfall), unclear construction sequence, discrepancies between plans and design reports and insufficient detailing. Geotechnical Requirements for Site Formation Plans and Other Types of Plans 9. The preparation of site formation plans and associated designs and reports shall adhere closely to the requirements as specified in B(A)R 8(1)(bb). Guidance on site formation filling work is provided in PNAP 55. 10. Excavation and lateral support plans often contain significant geotechnical contents. The requirements for preparing the design, reports and plan are clearly spelt out in B(A)R 8(1)(bc) and PNAP 148. Guidance on information to be submitted with the excavation and lateral support plans relating to dewatering in basement excavations is provided in PNAP 74. /11. ..

-311. Developments in Scheduled Area No. 1 (Mid-levels Scheduled Area) and foundation works in Scheduled Area Nos. 2 and 4 (North West New Territories and Ma On Shan Scheduled Areas) are subject to additional geotechnical control. The geotechnical requirements and information to be submitted for such developments are given in PNAP 85 and PNAP 161 respectively. Furthermore, the administrative procedures and general guidance for developments in the Designated Area of Northshore Lantau are given in PNAP 283. 12. The design and construction of foundations in the vicinity of geotechnical features or on sloping ground requires careful geotechnical consideration to ensure that the works will not induce adverse effects (e.g. damming effects on the groundwater regime, additional loading or vibration effects onto the ground, etc.) to the adjacent ground so as to be in compliance with B(C)R 23. B(A)R 8(1)(d) spells out what needs to be included in a foundation plan. 13. Where an existing building which provides support to the adjacent ground is to be demolished, due consideration should be given to ensure that the stability of the adjacent ground is not adversely affected. Demolition debris shall not be stockpiled in the vicinity of any geotechnical features. The requirements for preparing the plans in respect of the demolition works of such structure are provided in B(A)R 8(3)& (4) and PNAP 71. Use of Geotechnical Computer Programs in Submissions to BA 14. All calculations contained in geotechnical design reports for submission to BA should be properly indexed and arranged in a logical sequence. The calculations should show clearly the sections analysed, the geological and hydrogeological model and soil parameters used. In the case that the calculations are performed by a pre-accepted geotechnical computer program (PNAP 79), the following essential information should be included. (i) The name, version, developers name/identification, BD reference number and validity period of the computer program used; The scope of application of the program which is accepted by BD and a list of the limitations in application; The justifications on the simulation of the problems by the mathematical models used in the computer program; Assumptions made and justifications on parameters used in the computer model e.g. material properties, boundary conditions etc; The preparation of the input data from the ground conditions;

(ii) (iii) (iv)

(v)

/(vi)..

-4(vi) Summary of salient output results e.g. factors of safety of slopes and retaining walls under critical ground conditions, design envelopes of moment, shear, displacement of lateral support systems for excavations, ground displacement; and

(vii) The interpretation and application of the computer output in the design. 15. The Registered Geotechnical Engineer (RGE) is required to complete the standard proforma in Appendix A and include it in the submission.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref. :

BD GR/OA/71/1 BD GP/BORD/75 (Paras. 2, 11, 15 & Appendix A amended)

First issue January 2003 This revision December 2005 (AD/Sup, DH(I)/CEDD) Index under : Geotechnical Design Information Getotechnical Computer Programs

Appendix A (PNAP 274) (APP-128) Geotechnical Computer Program Statement

BD file ref. no. : Address of site : Registered Geotechnical Engineer : ..... Geotechnical computer programs used :Program Name BD Ref. No.

(1).G.. (2).G.. (3).G.. Above programs were used to analyse the following designs ( insert the appropriate number from table in brackets) :( ( ( ( ) Earth-retaining Structures ) Excavation and Lateral Support Works ) Slope Works ) Others (please specify) .............................

I confirm that I am responsible for executing the geotechnical computer programs in respect of the above designs. The information about the geotechnical computer programs is also enclosed in pursuance of paragraph 14 of PNAP 274. Signature of RGE : Date : .. & Full name (in block letters) : .... Certificate of Registration No. : Expiry date : ....
* Delete whichever is inapplicable

(Rev. 12/2005)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-129

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

275

Use of Recycled Aggregates in Concrete Introduction To reduce the pressure on the demand of public filling and landfill capacity, one of the means of resource conservation and waste minimization is to recycle hard and inert construction and demolition (C&D) materials, such as broken rock and concrete, into aggregates and put them into good use. This PNAP sets out the technical guidelines for using recycled aggregates in prescribed mix concrete of specified grade strength of 20P and designed mix concrete of specified grade strengths of 25D to 35D. Technical Guidelines 2. The technical guidelines for prescribed mix concrete (20P) with 100% recycled aggregate is given in Appendix A, and that for designed mix concrete (25D to 35D) with 20% recycled aggregate is given in Appendix B to this PNAP. 3. The above technical guidelines have made reference to the technical specifications developed by the Standing Committee on Concrete Technology (SCCT) and Highways Department which were based on internationally recognized standards and results of laboratory tests done locally. They have been promulgated amongst works departments under Works Bureau Technical Circular No. 12/2002. 4. Concrete producers in Hong Kong are also well aware of the Technical Circular through their Concrete Producers Associations meetings with SCCT during the whole process of specifications development. Applications 5. Prescribed mix concrete of specified grade strength of 20P with 100% recycled aggregate should only be used for minor structural or non-structural works in accordance with Building (Construction) Regulation 60(1). They may include, for examples, on-grade slabs, blinding layer, U-channels/stepped channels, bedding and haunching for pipe works, concrete footings for posts and fences, and mass concrete fill which does not sustain appreciable loading. /6. ..

-2-

6. Designed mix concrete of specified grade strengths of 25D to 35D with a maximum of 20% recycled aggregates may be used for the following applications that do not have major structural concern: (a) concrete or reinforced concrete landscape features such as planters and planter walls, fence walls, mass concrete walls and footings for supporting landscape features; (b) manholes and sand traps except manholes for foul water, grease traps and petrol interceptors where leakage of contaminated liquid to surrounding soil is undesirable; and (c) carriageway pavement or overlay, reinforced concrete infill walls and mass concrete under footings or rafts. 7. Concrete with recycled aggregates must not be used in liquid-retaining structures, pre-stressed concrete structures, transfer structures or hanger structures. Exemption 8. The use of recycled aggregates in concrete and the technical guidelines given in Appendices A and B would deviate from the relevant provisions of Building (Construction) Regulation 51 on the structural use of concrete. However, applications for modifications or exemptions under section 42 of the Buildings Ordinance would normally be given provided that: (a) the proposed applications fall in with those given under paragraphs 5 and/or 6 above; and (b) corresponding technical guidelines given in Appendices A and/or B are strictly complied with. 9. Where an Authorized Person or Registered Structural Engineer intends to use concrete with recycled aggregates in building works, he/she should state it clearly on the plan that contains general structural specifications and in the Part I structural calculations. Reference should be made to PNAP 121 in this respect. The Authorized Person or Registered Structural Engineer should also make a statement on the plan that /the ..

-3-

the proposed use of concrete with recycled aggregates shall strictly comply with the technical guidelines given in Appendices A and/or B to this PNAP. The scope of the works involving the use of recycled aggregates should also be indicated on the relevant structural layout and detail plans. 10. Other requirements governing the use of concrete in structures shall also be applied in concrete with recycled aggregates. Implementation 11. The use of recycled aggregates in concrete is at its initial stage of implementation. Civil Engineering Department is commissioning a pilot recycling plant at Tuen Mun Area 38 with a view to supplying recycled aggregates to a number of public works projects earmarked for such purpose. The plant has been in operation since July 2002.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref: BD GP/BREG/RC/4 III First Issue February 2003 (AD/NB2)

Index under: Recycled aggregates C and D Waste Reduction

Technical Guidelines for Prescribed Mix Concrete with 100% Recycled Coarse Aggregates Scope This technical guidelines is only applicable to prescribed mix concrete of specified grade strength of 20P. Concrete with 100% recycled coarse aggregates shall only be used for minor structural or non- structural works in accordance with Building (Construction) Regulation 60(1). Concrete shall comply with the relevant provisions of Building (Construction) Regulations on prescribed mix concrete. Recycled Coarse Aggregates shall be produced by crushing old concrete and shall meet the requirements in Table 1. Fine aggregates shall be within the limits of grading M in BS 882. Fine aggregate derived concrete shall not be used. Grading from recycled

Appendix A (PNAP 275) (APP-129)

Applications

General Requirements Recycled Coarse Aggregates Fine Aggregates

The grading of the coarse aggregates shall comply with the limits of Table 3 of BS 882:1992 for single-sized 20 mm and 10 mm aggregates. Concrete shall be mixed in the following proportions: Ordinary Portland Cement Fine Aggregates 20 mm Coarse Aggregates 10 mm Coarse Aggregates : : : : 100 kg 180 kg 180 kg 90 kg

Mix Proportions

Workability

Recycled coarse aggregates have to be thoroughly wetted before being used. The concrete shall have a slump of 75 mm when it is ready to be compacted to its final position.
-1-

Test Cubes

The sampling rate, making, curing and testing of concrete shall comply with Building (Construction) Regulations requirements.

Minimum Strength

The minimum concrete cube strength shall be 14 MPa and 20 MPa at 7 and 28 days respectively. Laboratory trials shall be conducted to confirm that the strength requirement can be met before the prescribed mix is used in the works. The 28-day strength of each of the 3 cubes in the trial shall not be less than 26 MPa. Table 1

Trials

Mandatory Requirements Minimum dry particle density (kg/m3) Maximum water absorption Maximum content of wood and other material less dense than water Maximum content of other foreign materials (e.g. metals, plastics, clay lumps, asphalt and tar, glass etc) Maximum fines Maximum content of sand (<4mm) (% m/m) Maximum content of sulphate (% m/m) Flakiness index 10% fines test Grading Maximum Chloride content

Limits 2000 10% 0.5%

Testing Method BS 812: Part 2 BS 812: Part 2 Manual sorting in accordance with BRE Digest 433

1%

4% 5% 1% 40% 100 kN Table 3 of BS 882: 1992 Table 7 of BS 882 0.05% by mass of chloride ion of combined aggregate

BS 812: Section 103.1 BS 812: Section 103.1 BS 812: Part 118 BS 812: Section 105.1 BS 812: Part 111

(2/2003)
-2-

Appendix B (PNAP 275) (APP-129) Technical Guidelines for Designed Mix Concrete with 20% Recycled Coarse Aggregates Scope This technical guidelines is only applicable to designed mix concrete of specified grade strength of 25D to 35D. Concrete with 20% recycled coarse aggregates may be used for applications specified in this PNAP. This type of concrete must not be used in liquid-retaining structures or pre-stressed concrete. Concrete shall comply with the relevant provisions of Building (Construction) Regulations on designed mix concrete. Only ordinary Portland cement to BS 12 shall be used. Coarse aggregates shall consist of 80% natural mineral aggregates as defined in the Building (Construction) Regulation 51. Recycled Coarse Aggregates shall be produced by crushing old concrete and shall meet the requirements in Table 1. Tests on recycled aggregates from a particular source shall be carried out at weekly intervals to check compliance with Table 1. Fine Aggregates Fine aggregate shall comply with the Building (Construction) Regulation 51. Fine aggregate recycled from old concrete shall not be used. Grading The grading of the coarse aggregates shall comply with the limits of Table 3 of BS 882:1992 for single-sized 20 mm and 10 mm aggregates.

Applications

General Requirements Cementitious Material Coarse Aggregates

-1-

Workability

Recycled

coarse

aggregates

have

to

be

thoroughly wetted before being used. The concrete shall have a minimum slump of 75 mm when it is ready to be compacted to its final position. Laboratory Mix Trials and Plant Trials Before any concrete is produced for use in the works, laboratory trials and plant trials must be performed in accordance with Appendix C.

Compliance Criteria Compliance criteria shall be those given in (laboratory trials & Appendix C. plant trials) Concrete Batching Recycled coarse aggregates have to be stored in separate stockpiles or silos to prevent inadvertent mixing with natural aggregates. A separate compartment must be provided for recycled coarse aggregates in the batching plant. Acceptance Criteria for Compressive Strength Concrete shall be tested in accordance with Building (Construction) Regulation 58 for compliance with the specified grade strength set out in Building (Construction) Regulation 59.

-2-

Table 1 Mandatory Requirements Minimum dry 3 density (kg/m ) particle 2000 10% 0.5% Limits Testing Method BS 812: Part 2 BS 812: Part 2 Manual sorting in accordance with BRE Digest 433

Maximum water absorption Maximum content of wood and other material less dense than water Maximum content of other foreign materials (e.g. metals, plastics, clay lumps, asphalt and tar, glass etc) Maximum fines Maximum content of sand (<4mm) (% m/m) Maximum content sulphate (% m/m) Flakiness index 10% fines test Grading Maximum Chloride Content of

1%

4% 5% 1% 40% 100 kN Table 3 of BS 882: 1992 Table 7 of BS 882 0.05% by mass of chloride ion of combined aggregate

BS 812: Section 103.1 BS 812: Section 103.1 BS 812: Part 118 BS 812: Section 105.1 BS 812: Part 111

(2/2003)

-3-

Appendix C (PNAP 275) (APP-129) Laboratory Mix Trials and Plant Trials for Designed Mix Concrete with 20% Recycled Coarse Aggregates Laboratory Mix Trials 1. Laboratory Mix Trials shall be made in the laboratory using the mix designs and constituents proposed to be used. 2. Laboratory Mix Trials shall be carried out in accordance with Section 11 of CS1. Three separate batches shall be made, each of sufficient size to provide samples for two slump tests and to make six 150mm test cubes. 3. Two slump tests in accordance with CS1 shall be performed on separate specimens from each batch of Laboratory Trial Mix concrete. 4. Six 150mm test cubes shall be made from each batch of Laboratory Trial Mix concrete, stored, cured and tested for compressive strength at 28 days in accordance with CS1. Plant Trials 1. Plant Trials shall be made using the plant or plants proposed and the mix designs and constituents proposed to be used. 2. One batch of concrete of a proposed designed mix shall be made on each of three days in each plant proposed to be used. The batch shall be at least 60% of the mixers nominal capacity. If the concrete is batched in a central plant and mixed in a truck mixer, three different truck mixers shall be used. 3. Three samples of concrete shall be provided from each batch at approximately 1/6, 1/2 and 5/6 of the discharge from the mixer. Each sample shall be of sufficient size to perform a slump test and make two 150mm test cubes. The method of sampling shall be as stated as in CS1. 4. Each sample taken in accordance with item (3) above shall be tested to determine its slump value in accordance with CS1. 5. Two 150mm test cubes shall be made from each sample taken in accordance item (3) above and stored, cured and tested to determine the compressive strength at 28 days in accordance with CS1.

-1-

Compliance Criteria: Laboratory Mix Trials

1. When test data relating to the proposed plant or plants show that the plant standard deviation exceeds 5MPa, or in the absence of acceptable data, the results of tests on Laboratory Mix Trial concrete shall comply with the following requirements: (a) The average of the six slump values shall be within 20mm or 25%, whichever is the greater, of the design slump value. (b) The average compressive strength at 28 days of the 18 test cubes shall exceed the Grade strength by at least 12MPa and the compressive strength of each individual test cube shall exceed the Grade strength by at least 6MPa. 2. When test data relating to the proposed plant or plants show that the plant standard deviation does not exceed 5MPa and the data are considered acceptable, the results of tests on Laboratory Mix Trial concrete shall comply with the following requirements: (a) The average of the six slump values shall be within 20mm or 25%, whichever is the greater, of the design slump value. (b) The average compressive strength at 28 days of the 18 test cubes shall exceed the Grade strength by at least 8MPa and the compressive strength of each individual test cube shall exceed the Grade strength by at least 2MPa.

Compliance Criteria: Plant Trials

The results of tests on concrete taken from Plant Trials shall comply with the following requirements: (a) (b) The average of the nine slump values shall be within 20mm or 25%, whichever is the greater, of the designed slump value. The range of the three slump values for each batch of concrete shall not exceed 20% of the average of the three slump values for that batch. The average compressive strength at 28 days of the 18 test cubes shall exceed the Grade strength by at least 10MPa and the compressive strength of each individual test cube shall exceed the Grade strength by at least 4MPa. The range of the compressive strength of the six test cubes from each batch of concrete shall not exceed 20% of the average compressive strength of the six test cubes from that batch.

(c)

(d)

(2/2003)
-2-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-130 278

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Lighting and Ventilation Requirements Performance-based Approach The Buildings Department has commissioned a consultancy study to review the standards of the lighting and ventilation requirements in buildings. Based on the findings of the consultancy study, the Building Authority (BA) is prepared to accept the following alternative performance standards on the provision of natural lighting and ventilation in habitable rooms and domestic kitchens for the purpose of Building (Planning) Regulations (B(P)Reg.) 30, 31 and 32: a) Natural Lighting Room of domestic building Habitable Room Kitchen b) Natural Ventilation Room of domestic building Habitable Room Kitchen Air Change per Hour (ACH) 1.5 (natural means) 1.5 (natural means) plus 5 (mechanical means) Vertical Daylight Factor (VDF) 1 (measurement taken on the centre of the window pane) 8% 4%

2. The BA would accept proposals based on the above standards on a trial basis for 2 years. With immediate effect, applications to modify the prescriptive requirements set out in B(P)Reg. 30, 31 & 32 will be accepted if the above performance standards are met. The Authorized Persons (APs) may demonstrate compliance using any suitably verified and scientifically validated methods. To assist APs in adopting the above performance-based approach in design, guidelines for a simplified assessment method and guidance notes on validation of lighting simulation are given in Appendices A and B respectively. /3. ..

"Vertical Daylight Factor" means the ratio in percentage of the total amount of illuminance falling onto a vertical surface of a building to the instantaneous horizontal illuminance from a complete hemisphere of sky excluding direct sunlight. It takes into account light coming from the sky directly and from reflected light of surrounding buildings and the ground both above and below the horizon.

-23. The BA has no objection to accepting the design of a project partly based on the prescriptive requirements and partly based on the performance standards set out in paragraph 1. For the purpose of B(P) Reg 31(2), the base may be measured at an angle not more than 15o from the external wall. 4. A review on the application of the new alternative performance standards will be conducted at the end of the trial period at which time the need for any refinement to the standards and replacement of the current prescriptive regulations would be considered. 5. Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers No. 241 will not be applied to new building proposals or major revision proposals submitted after 15 March 2004.

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority

Ref : BD GP/BREG/P/42 BD GP/BREG/P/18/1(E) (IV) BD GP/BREG/P/18/1(G) (II) First issue December 2003 (AD/NB1) This revision June 2005 (AD/NB1) para. 2 amended, para 2.3, window position at Diagram D and Tables 1 & 2 of Appendix A amended, Appendix B added Index under : Lighting and ventilation Ventilation and lighting

GUIDE ON THE ADOPTION OF PERFORMANCE STANDARDS PART I 1. Introduction

Appendix A (PNAP 278) (APP-130)

1.1 This guide gives guidance on how the performance requirements on natural lighting and ventilation in buildings may be met. 2. Performance Requirements

2.1 The BA recognizes that a performance-based approach to the provision of natural lighting and ventilation in buildings is an acceptable alternative option in satisfying the health and safety requirements. The BA will accept a proposal meeting the following performance standards as an acceptable practice in fulfilling the requirements of B(P)Reg. 30, 31 & 32: a) Natural Lighting Room of domestic building Habitable Room Kitchen b) Natural Ventilation Room of domestic building Habitable Room Kitchen Air Change per Hour (ACH) 1.5 (natural means ) 1.5 (natural means ) plus 5 (mechanical means) Vertical Daylight Factor (VDF) (measurement taken on the centre of the window pane) 8% 4%

2.2 The performance standards are deemed to be met if it can be proved that the provision of window(s) meets the simplified test on natural lighting requirements stipulated in Part II and the ventilation requirements stipulated in Part III. 2.3 There are a number of assessment tools available in the market for assessment of the performance of lighting in buildings. Consideration for acceptance will be given if the validity and appropriateness of the tools are substantiated to the satisfaction of the BA. In this respect, guidance notes on validation are at Appendix B. 3. Interpretation Centre line of street is half distance of the 2 opposite lot boundaries with a street in between.
-1-

Cross ventilation means the situation in which outdoor air can flow from the window opening(s) in the front half of the room (the primary opening), through the room, and out via the other window opening(s) located in the rear half of the room (the secondary opening) which is not located on the same plane of the primary opening(s). "Height of facade", when used in relation to the natural lighting and ventilation requirements, means the height of a building measured from the top of the window head at the lowermost storey in which the window is provided to the top of the parapet of the main roof of the building. "Illuminance" means the amount of light falling on a surface. "Open air" has the same meaning as defined in Regulation 2 of the B(P)Reg. Primary opening means any window opening which is located in or within 1.5 m from end of the external wall where the window locates and satisfying the natural lighting requirements stipulated under the B(P)Reg or in Paragraph 2.1(a). Secondary opening means any window opening which is located at an external wall, other than that defined for the primary opening, in the rear half of the room and facing open air. "Vertical Daylight Factor" means the ratio in percentage of the total amount of illuminance falling onto a vertical surface of a building to the instantaneous horizontal illuminance from a complete hemisphere of sky excluding direct sunlight. It takes into account light coming from the sky directly and from reflected light of surrounding buildings and the ground both above and below the horizon. "Window sill", when used in relation to the window for achieving natural lighting and ventilation, means the lowermost level of the glazing in the room for which the window is provided. PART II 4. Provision of Natural Lighting Whilst there are a number of assessment tools available in the market for assessment of the performance of lighting in buildings, the BA will accept the "Unobstructed Vision Area" method as a reliable way to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements. For other assessment tools such as computer simulation software, consideration for acceptance will also be given if the validity and appropriateness of the tools proposed are substantiated to the satisfaction of the BA.

-2-

The Unobstructed Vision Area Method 4.2 The Unobstructed Vision Area (UVA) method is scientifically developed with respect to the following: Daylight in Hong Kong a) The amount of light receivable at the surface of a building facade is related to the extent of its exposure to the natural environment. Most of the natural light for windows of lower floors in the dense, high-rise development comes from reflected light of the surrounding surfaces. The amount of this reflected light is dependent on how well these surrounding surfaces are illuminated (which are in turn dependent on both site and building layouts) and the reflectance of these surfaces. Moreover, most useful light entering the glazing into building interiors comes from a cone of light 100 degrees centered to the normal of the glazing.

b)

Simplified, Performance-based Method c) The above physical phenomena could be simplified and twodimensionally proportioned to an aggregated horizontal open area (UVA) in front of the window that effectively contributes to the daylight performance. The higher the height of facade is, the larger the UVA is required. Larger glazing area could also be accounted for scientifically in the calculation of UVA requirement to allow further design flexibility.

d)

4.3 The principles of the Unobstructed Vision Area Method are as follows: a) the unobstructed vision area of a window is the unobstructed area bounded by a cone with the horizontal angle measuring 100 degree up to both edges of the window glazing pane, symmetrical and perpendicular to the window plane (see Diagram A). For the purpose of measurement of the unobstructed vision area, the currently accepted amenity features including drying racks, small projecting air-conditioner platforms or hoods and window eaves protruding onto the unobstructed vision area may be disregarded if the size of these features is not excessive; the maximum length of the cone of the unobstructed vision area is equal to the height of facade in which the window is provided (see Diagram B);

b)

-3-

Diagram A : Measurement of the cone of UVA from both edges of window pane

C L Figure 1 Figure 2

C L

UVA

UVA

L = 50o
(max)

R = 50o
(max) h

L = 50o
(max)

R = 50o
(max) h

width of effective window glazing pane

width of effective window glazing pane

UVA = unobstructed vision area h = maximum length of the cone = height of facade = L + R = 100o

Figure 3

C L

Figure 4

C L

UVA

UVA

L = 50o
(max)

R = 50o
(max) h

L = 50o
(max)

R= 50o
(max) h

width of effective window glazing pane

width of effective window glazing pane

Figure 3 & 4 help to explain how the UVA is drawn when there is an obstruction

-4-

Diagram B : Measurement of height of facade and unobstructed vision area


Top of parapet wall on main roof of the building

h
w = window h = height of facade = maximum length of the cone Remarks : Using h1 is not right for the example above. Typically it should go to the top of the parapet of the main roof of the building

window head

h
w

cross section

-5-

c) the unobstructed vision area bounded by the cone shall be measured up to the lot boundary only unless such boundary adjoins a street in which case the full width of the street bounded by the cone may also be counted for the calculation of the unobstructed vision area. d) where the unobstructed vision area bounded by the cone protrudes beyond the common lot boundary or the centre line of the street as shown in Diagram C, a multiplying factor of 4 can be applied to this sector (i.e. C1) of cone but the resultant unobstructed vision area should not in any case exceed the unobstructed vision area of this sector of the cone that can be measured up to the height of the faade (i.e. C1 + C2).

Diagram C : Measurement of unobstructed vision area with the cone protruding beyond the site boundary
C L

Height of Facade

B. C2 (within Adjoining Lot or Street)

C1

A. UVA facing building 50o 50o Common Lot Boundary or Center Line of Street UVA facing lot boundary

WINDOW 1

UVA of WINDOW 1 = A + B + ( C1 x 4 ) or A + B + C1 + C2 whichever is the less

-6-

e)

where the highest point of the adjacent structure within the same site fronting the window does not sustain a vertical obstruction of more than 30 degree, the area on top of that structure within the cone may be counted for the calculation of the unobstructed vision area (see Diagram D); and

Diagram D : Measurement of unobstructed vision area on top of building obstructing the cone

w = window If 30o space over building obstructing the cone can be counted for the unobstructed vision area calculation

area on top of podium structure within the cone can be counted for UVA calculation

w
cross section

< 30o

Adjacent building within the same site

f)

for a room requiring more than one window to comply with the minimum day-lighting requirement, the total room area can be considered as an amalgamation of subdivision rooms separated by notional partitions and each of which is provided with a window that satisfies the respective minimum day-lighting requirement corresponding to the area of each subdivision (see Diagram E).

-7-

Diagram E : Measurement of unobstructed vision area for a room requiring more than one window
adjoining wall of the same building overlapping area can be included in the calculation of UVA1 and UVA2 respectively

C L

C L

UVA1

UVA2

= 100o
h

= 100o

W1

W2 Notional partition wall

area 'A1'

area 'A2'

area of W1 10% of area A1 area of W2 10% of area A2 UVA1 and UVA2 Respective minimum UVA requirement in table 1 & 2 h = Height of facade

4.4

No window in the building shall, for the purpose of paragraph 4.1, be counted for the calculation of unobstructed vision area unlessa) b) c) it faces into a space which is uncovered and not bounded on the side opposite the window by any obstruction of the building; the top of the window is at least 2m above the floor level; and the superficial area of glass in the window or the aggregate superficial area of glass in the windows (calculated from width of effective window glazing pane), as the case may be, shall not be less than 10% of the
-8-

usable floor area of the room in which the window or windows are located. 4.5 Where the aggregate superficial area of glass in the window or windows (i.e. actual glazing area excluding window frames) is equal to 10%, 15% or 20% of the usable floor area of the room, the total unobstructed vision area shall not be less than the corresponding area shown in Table 1 and Table 2 according to respective use and the height of faade in which the window or windows is provided. Table 1 Unobstructed Vision Area Requirement for Habitable Room (8% VDF)
Height of faade (m) 10 or below 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 or above Minimum UVA (s.m.) Glazing Area: 10% of UFA Glazing Area: 15% of UFA 50 30 100 100 250 200 400 300 600 500 900 700 1,200 900 1,600 1,200 2,000 1,500 2,400 1,800 2,900 2,200 3,500 2,600 4,100 3,100 4,800 3,600 5,400 4,100 6,200 4,600 7,000 5,200 7,800 5,900 8,700 6,500 9,600 7,200 Glazing Area: 20% of UFA 20 60 150 200 400 500 700 900 1,100 1,300 1,600 1,900 2,200 2,600 3,000 3,400 3,800 4,300 4,700 5,200

Table 2 Unobstructed Vision Area Requirement for Domestic Kitchen (4% VDF)
Height of faade (m) 10 or below 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 or above Glazing Area: 10% of UFA 20 60 150 200 400 500 700 900 1,100 1,300 1,600 1,900 2,200 2,600 3,000 3,400 3,800 4,300 4,700 5,200 Minimum UVA (s.m.) Glazing Area: 15% of UFA 15 40 100 200 300 400 500 700 900 1,000 1,300 1,500 1,700 2,000 2,300 2,600 2,900 3,300 3,700 4,000 Glazing Area: 20% of UFA 10 30 70 100 200 300 400 500 700 800 1,000 1,200 1,400 1,600 1,800 2,000 2,300 2,600 2,900 3,200

Notes: (i)

In the case of the height of faade lies within the ranges shown in the table, the unobstructed vision area should be derived from interpolation method.

-9-

4.6

Where the aggregate superficial area of glass in the window or windows lies within the range between 10% to 15% or 15% to 20% of the usable floor area of the room, the Building Authority would accept interpolation of the area fallen within the range shown in Table 1 and Table 2 according to respective use. For the window area greater than 20% of the usable floor area of the room, the total unobstructed vision area shall not be less than the area required for 20% of the usable floor area of the room shown in Table 1 and Table 2, as the case may be.

PART III 5. Ventilation

5.1 The BA would accept a room used for habitation or as a kitchen to have met the performance standard of ventilation if the following conditions are satisfied:a) b) c) The area of the primary opening(s) provided in the room is not less than one sixteenth of the usable floor area of the room; The primary opening(s) face into a clear and unobstructed area complying with at least the open air requirement; and in the case of kitchen, 5 ACH mechanical ventilation is provided in addition to the requirements in (a) and (b) above.

There are a number of assessment tools available in the market for assessment of the performance of ventilation in buildings such as Computational Fluid Dynamic (CFD) tools. Consideration for acceptance will be given if the validity and appropriateness of the tools are substantiated to the satisfaction of the BA. 5.2 For the purpose of assessing the sizes of the primary and secondary openings for ventilation, the effective area of the primary and secondary openings, irrespective of the height of the window head and window sill is counted.

- 10 -

5.3

The arrangement of window openings is illustrated in Diagram F

Diagram F : Openable window for ventilation


C L C L

Unobstructed Vision Area

Unobstructed Vision Area

100o
A: minimum 1.5m

B:minimum 1.5m C:maximum 1.5m

100o
A: minimum 1.5m


Height of Faade

= accountable as primary opening(s) - aggregate size shall not be less than one-sixteenth of the usable floor area of the room
A : Minimum distance of a corner window from the external wall should be 1.5m B : Minimum distance of a window from opposite external wall should be 1.5m C : Maximum distance of any part of window should not be larger than 1.5m from end of the external wall

6.

Cross Ventilation

6.1 Where cross ventilation is provided, the requirements on the openable area of the window and the restriction as set out in B(P)Reg. 32 on the depth of the room are relaxed as follows (see Diagram G):a) b) c) the aggregate size of the primary opening(s) shall not be less than 2% of the usable floor area of the room; the aggregate size of the secondary opening(s) shall not be less than 2% of the usable floor area of the room; and the depth of the room from the primary opening may be extended to a maximum of 12 m.
- 11 -

Diagram G : Openable window for ventilation when cross-ventilation is provided

C L

C L

Unobstructed Vision Area

Unobstructed Vision Area

100o
minimum 1.5m maximum 1.5m

100o
minimum 1.5m


P1

P2

P3

minimum 1.5m

P2 P1 P3

Height of Faade

S1

S1

= accountable as primary or secondary opening = not accountable as primary opening for the purpose of cross ventilation.
= secondary opening(s) in rear half of the room accepted for the purpose of cross ventilation only when the primary opening(s) is not located on the same plane of the secondary opening(s). - the respective aggregate sizes of the primary and secondary openings shall not be less than 2% of the usable floor area of the room.

(Rev. 6/2005)
- 12 -

Appendix B (PNAP 278) (APP-130) GUIDANCE NOTES ON VALIDATION OF LIGHTING SIMULATION SOFTWARE

1.

Introduction These notes give guidance on the validation of lighting simulation software for assessing the performance of natural lighting in buildings. As computational lighting simulation is a complicated science, APs may wish to consult a specialist in lighting design.

2.

Computational Lighting Simulation

2.1 The BA accepts computational lighting simulation for the assessment of the performance of natural lighting in buildings. The BA will accept such a proposal provided that the software is validated and the simulation is properly conducted. For avoidance of doubt, the currently accepted amenity features including drying racks, small projecting air-conditioner platforms or hoods and window eaves protruding onto the unobstructed vision area may be disregarded if the size of these features is not excessive. 2.2 APs should attend to the following 4 important criteria in carrying out a lighting simulation test: (i) (ii) The accuracy of the Global Illumination Model of the software, which determines how well the software cater for the characteristics of the sky. The accuracy of the Local Illumination Model of the software, which determines how well the software cater for inter-reflections between objects in the model. The accuracy of the Geometric description of the simulated scenes, which requires the geometric input to the simulation software, is representative of the scenes to be test. The accuracy of the Material description of the simulated scenes, which requires the material reflectance of the surfaces of the geometry, is appropriately set.

(iii)

(iv)

-1-

3.

Approach of Validation Standard 3D Model and Datum

3.1 For the purpose of validating the software, a Standard 3D model is built as the geometrical input of the test and 62 selected points are defined on the model, which together form the Datum of the validation test. Details of the assembly are provided at Annex 1. An overview of the Standard 3D model and the distribution of Datum points on the Standard 3D model are at Figure 1 and Figure 2 of Annex 1 respectively. 3.2 Up to 2 different materials reflectance may be set, one for ALL vertical surfaces and another for ALL horizontal surfaces. Alternatively, a single setting of reflectance may be used for all surfaces. As part of the submission, the material reflectance(s) set should be reported. 3.3 There are total 62 points (23 on horizontal surfaces and 39 on vertical surfaces) where the simulated results of the Standard 3D model should be reported and compared with the Datum. Using the software to be validated with particular settings, the results of all the 62 points on the Standard 3D model must not be more than the Datum. Simulated results of the Daylight Factor (DF) and Vertical Daylight Factor (VDF) of say 12.459% could be rounded off to whole number (i.e.12%). Likewise, 12.501% should be rounded off to 13%. Details of the Datum values are provided at Annex 2. 4. Validation Test To demonstrate that the software is validated for use, the APs should submit the following document to BA for approval: (i) The name and version of the software to be validated. The name, country of origin and contact details of the vendor including mail address, telephone number, fax number, email and website address must be attached. A folder containing the generic simulation file(s) with the 3D model, and all files and detail settings necessary to reproduce the simulation results independently and without making reference to the APs. A note stating the Material Reflectance of the Standard 3D model used. Only up to 2 material reflectance settings may be used: one for the ground horizontal surface, the other for all vertical surfaces.

(ii)

(iii)

-2-

(iv)

A print out of DF and VDF of ALL 62 points as defined in The Datum that are generated by the software to be validated. And a statement that the 62 values obtained with the software to be validated, using the settings and geometry as defined, is UNDER the respective values of the Datum.

5.0 Guide on creating an Accurate Geometric Model 5.1 Once the software is validated for use, the AP should ensure the accurate building of the geometry file of the design. An example is shown in Annex 3. Apart from the building to be tested, the surrounding wall should be constructed according to the following guidelines (refer to Annex 3 for reference):(i) The building to be tested and all buildings within the same site must be accurately modeled.

(ii) A closed surrounding wall is to be built surrounding the site, in such a way that no gap is possible. This surrounding wall should be made up of two parts: from ground to height W and from height W to height H. This wall is to represent reasonably the surrounding conditions of the test site. (iii) Height W is the equivalent height of the faade area of all immediate buildings when compressed to fill the entire length of the site boundary. The surrounding wall up to this height W is solid. This portion of the wall represents the main bulk of the buildings on the test site. (iv) Height H will be the average height of buildings used to work out height W. The wall between W and H should be perforated with slots. Vertical slots equal to 1/5 (or 20%) the area of the surrounding wall W to H may be inserted. The void portions of the slots are to be between 10 to 15 meters wide exact dimension to be worked out evenly across the boundary. The slotted wall represents closely the cityscape immediately in front and beyond the test site. This portion of the wall captures the gaps of tower buildings around the site. (v) The minimum perpendicular dimension from own site boundary to the edge of all the immediate tower blocks facing the same boundary on its own site should be defined. Assume the average dimension be A meter. For example, if there are 3 immediate tower blocks, A will be the average of their minimum distance from the boundary. The minimum distance should be taken from the walls of the buildings.
-3-

(vi) The surrounding wall towards that boundary could be positioned A into the neighbours boundary. This literally assumes that if the test building is set back from its own site boundary, a mutually respected situation could be established from the surrounding buildings on the other side of the boundary. (vii) The design could also take advantage of long and straight roads leading out of the test site. The open end of roads leading out could be capped (closed) reasonably at a distance 5 times the height of the surrounding walls. 5.2 The surrounding walls proposed here is a simplified method to re-create reasonable surroundings for the test site. The heights and positions of the surrounding wall facing various orientations of the test site are to be determined independently. 6.0 Guide on Material Description The AP should use the reflectance they had set when the software was originally validated for the scene they are going to test. Only 2 reflectance should be used, one for all ground horizontal surfaces and another for all building vertical surfaces including the top horizontal surfaces of any podium. 7.0 Performance Standard for Natural Lighting 7.1 No window in a building shall be take into account unless: (a) it faces into a space which is uncovered and not bounded on the side opposite the window by any obstruction of the building; and the top of the window is at least 2m above the floor level.

(b)

7.2 Under PNAP 278, 8% VDF and 4% VDF should be made available on the vertical surface of the windows of habitable room and kitchen respectively when the aggregate superficial area of glass in a window (i.e. actual glazing area excluding window frames) is 10% of the usable floor area of the room. If larger window size is used, the following table could be used for the purpose of simulation:

-4-

Required VDF Glazing area (% of UFA) Habitable room Kitchen 7.3

VDF 8% or more

VDF 6% or more

VDF 5% or more

VDF 4% or more

VDF 3% or more

10%

15%

20% 10% 15%

The maximum glazing area is limited to 20% and 15% for habitable room and kitchen respectively. Therefore, for example, VDF of habitable room cannot be less than 5%. Extrapolation beyond the limit (VDF 5% for habitable room or VDF 3% for kitchen) is not possible. The required glazing area could be interpolated from the table. For example, the simulation results show that the window is receiving 7.5% VDF. The glazing area needed is therefore 11.25% or larger.

7.4

8.0 Daylight Software Some software are currently available in the market for daylight studies. Details are provided at Annex 4 for reference.

-5-

Annex 1 (PNAP 278) (APP-130) The Standard 3D Model 1. The Standard 3D model is assembled with 1 unit by 1 unit cube. 34 units wide, 44 units high and 8 units deep. It is therefore

Figure 1: An overview of the Standard 3D model

-6-

Figure 2: Distribution of Datum points on the Standard 3D model 2. Figure 2 shows distribution of datum points on the Standard 3D model: (i) Datum points 1-16: Within it there are 16 slots at the bottom (Front Elevation in Figure 2). They are 1 unit wide, 2, 4, 6 and 8 units high, and 2, 4, 6 and 8 units deep. -The 4 deepest slots (8 unit deep) puncture the base of the overall model and thus could be seen from below.

-7-

Holes of the Standard 3D model Figure 3 (ii) Datum points 17-36: On top of the slots, there are 20 holes (Figure 3 refers). The holes on the right are 3 units deep, whilst the ones on the left are 6 units deep. The largest hole is 4x4 unit in size, whilst the smallest hole is 1x1 unit in size. The rest of the holes follow the logic ranging from 1x1 to 1x4, and 1x4 to 4x4.

Streets and Buildings of the Standard 3D model Figure 4


-8-

(iii) Datum points 37-42: There are three horizontal slots on top of the holes (Figure 4 refers). They represent street conditions. They are all 1 unit high, and 2, 4 and 6 unit deep respectively. (iv) Datum points 43-58: On top of the slots are 2 housing layouts (Figure 4 refers). The one on the right is 3 units deep, and the one on the left is 6 units deep. The cruciform blocks are all 1+1+1 unit in plan. (v) Datum points 59-62: The four vertical external surfaces of the model (Plan and Side Elevation in Figure 2). 3. The Standard 3D should ideally have all the surfaces join perfectly (that is to say, there is no gap between the surfaces used to build the model). Typically the use of solid model is the best way to guarantee that. If surface CAD modeler is used (e.g. AutoCAD), the operator must exercise extra care in building the model. The reason for perfectly aligned model is to prevent light leak through the gaps. Moreover, some software is known to behave strangely when surfaces intercept each other. The plan, sections and elevations of the Standard 3D model is shown in Figure 5.

4.

-9-

Plan and Sections and elevation of the Standard 3D model Figure 5

- 10 -

Annex 2 (PNAP 278) The Datum The Datum values are shown in the following table: Datum point 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Hole Hole Slot Slot Slot Key description Slot Detail description 1x1x 2 deep 1x1x 4 deep 1x1x 6 deep 1x1x 8 deep 1x2x 2 deep 1x2x 4 deep 1x2x 6 deep 1x2x 8 deep 1x4x 2 deep 1x4x 4 deep 1x4x 6 deep 1x4x 8 deep 1x6x 2 deep 1x6x 4 deep 1x6x 6 deep 1x6x 8 deep 1x1x3 deep 1x2x3 deep 1x3x3 deep 1x4x3 deep 2x2x3 deep 2x3x3 deep 2x4x3 deep 3x3x3 deep 3x4x3 deep 4x4x3 deep 1x1x6 deep 1x2x6 deep 1x3x6 deep 1x4x6 deep 2x2x6 deep
- 11 -

(APP-130)

DF or VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF DF DF DF DF DF DF DF DF DF DF DF DF DF DF DF

Datum (%) 22 21 21 20 14 12 12 11 12 8 8 7 10 6 5 5 6 10 13 15 18 24 28 32 38 45 2 4 5 6 7

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 Note : Building (anti-clockwise) Building (anti- clockwise) Middle of Street

2x3x6 deep 2x4x6 deep 3x3x6 deep 3x4x6 deep 4x4x6 deep 1x2 deep 1x4 deep 1x6 deep 1x2 deep 1x4 deep 1x6 deep Surface 1 x 3 deep (H facing 3 blks) Surface 2 x 3 deep (V facing 3 blks) Surface 3 x 3 deep Surface 4 x 3 deep Surface 5 x 3 deep Surface 6 x 3 deep Surface 7 x 3 deep Surface 8 x 3 deep Surface 1 x 6 deep (H facing 3 blks) Surface 2 x 6 deep (V facing 3 blks) Surface 3 x 6 deep Surface 4 x 6 deep Surface 5 x 6 deep Surface 6 x 6 deep Surface 7 x 6 deep Surface 8 x 6 deep External surfaces Surface 1 Surface 2 Surface 3 Surface 4 DF Daylight Factor VDF Vertical Daylight Factor

DF DF DF DF DF DF DF DF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF VDF

8 10 11 14 18 30 16 11 10 4 2 13 13 22 20 18 19 14 19 5 5 12 8 9 9 5 9 40 40 40 40

- 12 -

Annex 3 (PNAP 278) (APP-130) Geometric Model Example to illustrate the construction of surrounding walls To determine the position of the surrounding walls of the test site

Setback of surrounding wall (example for elevation A) Factor A1 Factor A2 Setback A = setback of tower block 1 = setback of tower block 2 = average of A1 + A2

Extent of surrounding wall to close the street (example for elevation A) Factor H1 = height of tower block 1 from street level Factor H2 = height of tower block 2 from street level Factor H = average of H1 & H2 Factor L1 = actual distance from site to cross road Extent L = L1 + setback A, or H x 5, whichever the less

Figure 1: The Setting Out of Surrounding Walls

- 13 -

To determine the heights of the surrounding walls facing the boundary of the test site

Base of surrounding wall (example for elevation A) Height of Podium W = sum of area of elevation of Block 1 and Block 2 divided by width of site

Height of perforated wall H = average of H1 & H2 Figure 2: The Height of surrounding walls (Elevation A)

(Left) Looking at the test site from a certain direction parallel to the boundary, two immediate buildings (including their podiums) are to be taken into account. (Middle) The elevation areas of the buildings (area of Block 1 and area of Block 2), calculated parallel to the boundary, will be summed. This total area will from the height (W) of an equivalent sized rectangle occupying the whole length of the test site facing that boundary. This represents the solid base of the surrounding walls facing that directing of the boundary. Height W1, W2, W3 and so on for walls facing other directions of the test boundary could be similarly worked out. (Right) On top of this solid wall should be placed a slotted wall. This represents possible light from gaps between tower buildings. The slot wall has a rhythm of 1:4:1:4 and so on. When scaled to real dimension, the void portion of the wall should be between 10 to 15 meters. The exact dimension will be worked out evenly across that portion of the boundary. The total height of this wall (W+H) is equal to the average height of the two immediate buildings used to work out H just now.

- 14 -

Annex 4 (PNAP 278) Daylight Software (APP-130)

Some of the currently available software in the market for daylight studies are listed below for reference. For avoidance of doubt, their accuracy should be verified and the software should be validated before adapted for simulation. ADELINE Daylighting, lighting, commercial buildings AG123 Lighting, daylighting, rendering, roadway BSim2002 Building simulation, energy, daylight, thermal analysis, indoor climate Building Design Advisor Design, daylighting, energy performance, prototypes, case studies, commercial buildings DAYSIM Annual daylight simulations, electric lighting energy use, lighting controls Ecotect Environmental design, environmental analysis, conceptual design, validation; solar control, overshadowing, thermal design and analysis, heating and cooling loads, prevailing winds, natural and artificial lighting, life cycle assessment, life cycle costing, scheduling, geometric and statistical acoustic analysis FLUCS Illumination, daylighting LESODIAL Daylighting, early design stage, user-friendliness Lightscape Daylighting, luminance LumenMicro Daylighting, lighting, solar design, luminaries RADIANCE Lighting, daylighting, rendering SKYVISION Skylight, light well, fenestration, glazing, optical characteristics, daylighting. SuperLite Daylighting, lighting, residential and commercial buildings The Lightswitch Wizard Annual daylight simulations, electric lighting energy use, lighting controls (6/2005)
- 15 -

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized APP-132 Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

280

Site Coverage and Open Space Provision This practice note describes the factors that the Building Authority (BA) may take into account in considering applications for flexibility in determining site coverage and open space provision to facilitate innovative design. 2. From time to time, the Buildings Department (BD) has received enquiries from the building industry regarding the application of the site coverage and open space provisions under the Building (Planning) Regulations [B(P)R] to allow for greater flexibility in the design of buildings. To facilitate innovative building designs, the BA is in principle prepared to consider applications for more flexible application of the requirements under B(P)R 20 & 25 and modify the provisions thereof, on a case by case basis. 3. In considering such applications on the ground of setting back a building for its full height from a site boundary abutting on a street, the BA will take into account the following factors (a) whether the setback of the building is of an area not less than 8% of the site area for non-domestic buildings and not less than 18% of the site area for domestic buildings. For a composite building, the non-domestic and domestic portion of the building should illustrate the required setback of 8% and 18% respectively; whether the building is set back at a length of not less than half of the frontage and not less than 10m long or the full frontage for site with frontage less than 10m in length; whether there will be satisfactory arrangements for the control and maintenance of the setback area and any resultant flat roofs and covered areas; whether the setback area, properly landscaped and/or paved, is open, uncovered and without any permanent building structures other than the landscaped features and perforated boundary walls; whether the setback will contribute to improving the street environment; and whether the setback area excludes areas dedicated or surrendered for public passage under B(P)R 22. /4. ..

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e) (f)

-24. If the answers to the questions in paragraph 3(a) to (f) are all positive, the BA is prepared to consider allowing the site coverage of a building at different levels to vary according to the height of the level within the percentages at Appendices A (for domestic buildings 1 ) and B (for non-domestic buildings 2 ). For this purpose, provided that the total covered area 3 of the building(s) on the site does not exceed 63% of the site area (for a domestic building1) and 80% of the site area or the percentage shown at Appendix B whichever is the greater (for a non-domestic building2), the following areas may be excluded from the assessment: (a) unexcavated or backfilled area at a particular level underneath the footprint of a non-domestic or domestic building on a sloping site (example at Appendix C); open-sided covered areas of non-domestic buildings qualified as green features under Joint Practice Notes 1 and 2, designated as common areas accessible by all occupants of the building(s) and without any commercial activities.

(b)

5. Notwithstanding the above, the specific site coverage control as specified in the statutory town plans, if any, must be observed in the design of building development. Where lease modification is required for the implementation of any approved building design in pursuance of the flexibility provided above, premium may be payable upon the granting of such modification. In this regard, the Practice Note being separately issued on this subject by the Lands Department is relevant and the procedures set out therein should be followed.

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/BREG/P/2 BD GR/CONS/25 January 2004 (AD/NB1)

First issue

Index under : Site coverage Open space


1 2 3

Domestic building includes the domestic part of a composite building. Non-domestic building includes the non-domestic part of a composite building. total covered area is the portion of the site covered by building(s) or in simple terms, the footprint of the shadow cast vertically down onto a site. It shall include the features exempted from site coverage calculation under Joint Practice Notes 1 & 2 but exclude the projections under Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 68.

Appendix A (PNAP 280) (APP-132) Permitted site coverage for domestic buildings at specific height Height of a level of a building in metres from street level Not exceeding 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 over 61 (1/2004)

Percentage site coverage 63 62 60 59 58 56 55 54 53 53 52 51 50 50 49 49 48 48 48 47 47 46 46 45 45 44 44 43 43 43 42 42 42 42 42 41 41 41 40

Appendix B (PNAP 280) (APP-132) Permitted site coverage for non-domestic buildings at specific height Height of a level of a building in metres from street level Not exceeding 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 over 61 (1/2004) Percentage site coverage 92 91 91 90 90 89 88 88 87 86 86 85 85 84 83 83 82 81 80 80 79 78 77 77 76 75 74 73 73 72 71 70 69 68 68 67 66 65 65

Appendix C (PNAP 280) (APP-132) Example illustrating assessment of site coverage at a particular level of a building on a sloping site

FLAT ROOF OTHER THAN MAIN ROOF FOR ENJOYMENT OF THE RESIDENTS

Unexcavated or backfilled area at a particular level excluded from site coverage assessment Total covered area not to exceed : domestic building : 63% of site area; or non-domestic building : 80% of the site area or the percentage shown at Appendix B whichever is the greater

(1/2004)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-133 282

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Cast Iron Pipes for Drainage Works

Cast iron (C.I.) pipes in some existing buildings have presented premature rusting, leakage and corroded metal fixing supports. This is unsatisfactory from public safety, health and environmental hygiene point of view. The following guidelines are provided for authorised persons in specifying the quality and choice of C.I. pipes in their projects: (a) All pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with the relevant British Standards Specifications or other equivalent standards. (For example, BS 416:Part 1 or BS EN877 for C.I. pipes for above-ground drains; BS 437 or BS 4622 for underground system and above-ground drains larger than 150mm diameter.) The pipes and fittings should be suitably coated internally and externally to prevent corrosion. When cold applied bitumen-based coating is proposed, the coating material should comply with BS 3416 or other equivalent international standards. External coating should contain anti-corrosion inhibitors, normally used on metallic structures; The C.I. pipes should be in a state to permit the application of additional external finishing coatings; and Corrosion-resistant fixings such as stainless steel brackets and connections or similar corrosion-resistant fixing supports should be used. The fixings should be properly anchored into solid wall.

(b)

(c) (d)

2. For approval of drainage plans after 1 November 2004, the Building Authority will require, under section 28(1) of the Buildings Ordinance, C.I. pipes to comply with the above requirements. Such pipes will also need to be included in the Schedule of Building Materials and Products under Practice Note to Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 53 when applying for occupation permit.

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority Ref : BD GP/BREG/SF/1 (III) First issue November 2003 (AD/NB1) Index under : Cast iron drainage pipes Drainage works cast iron pipes

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-134 283

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Development in the Designated Area of Northshore Lantau Background Hong Kong Geological Survey Sheet Report No. 6, published by the Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO) of the then Civil Engineering Department in July 2002, provides information on the geology of Tung Chung and Northshore Lantau Island. Other information on the geology of the area, including previous geological studies as well as relevant onshore and marine ground investigation data, is available for inspection in the Geotechnical Information Unit of the Civil Engineering Library. 2. The Northshore Lantau area is underlain mainly by medium-grained granite, intruded by numerous rhyolite dykes. However, the following complex geological conditions are known to exist within the area: (i) metasedimentary rocks (comprising marble, metasandstone and metasiltstone) that are subject to dissolution and give rise to cavities, cavity-fill deposits and residual soils (these geological terms are described in detail in the appendix to Hong Kong Geological Survey Sheet Report No. 6); soft or loose or weakly lithified superficial deposits that occupy depressions in the subcrop surface, most of which lie directly above or adjacent to metasedimentary rocks; and anomalously deep, or steeply inclined, rockhead in igneous rocks.

(ii)

(iii)

3. The complex geology can have significant effects on foundation design and construction in terms of both development costs and construction programme, owing to the practical difficulties associated with the installation of long piles through the difficult ground conditions. In two extreme cases, this has led to the abandonment of planned residential tower blocks at the Tung Chung New Town reclamation at sites where the existence of cavity-fill deposits and a deep, and locally steeply dipping, rockhead rendered the foundation works too costly, time consuming and difficult to build. /4. ..

-2-

4. The nature of the problem suggests that there is scope for optimization of foundation design, given adequate ground investigation. In some cases, foundations might prove to be so costly that adjustment of the layout of the development or site abandonment is warranted. It is therefore considered necessary to adopt special measures for developments within the Designated Area in order to ensure that deep foundations in the area are properly designed and constructed. Boundary of Designated Area 5. The affected area is referred to as the Designated Area of Northshore Lantau. The plan illustrating the extent of the Designated Area is available for inspection in the Geotechnical Information Unit of the Civil Engineering Library. A small-scale location plan of the Designated Area is shown in Appendix A. Administrative Procedures and General Guidance Ground Investigation (GI) 6. Authorized Persons (APs) / Registered Geotechnical Engineers (RGEs) should follow the administrative procedures including supervision requirements for the GI works in accordance with the Code of Practice for Site Supervision. In addition, the GEO will provide useful advice/information on geological conditions in the Designated Area to facilitate development. APs/RGEs are strongly encouraged to seek advice/comments from the Chief Geotechnical Engineer/Mainland West of the GEO on their GI proposals within the Designated Area before commencement of the GI works. 7. GI for a site within the Designated Area is best carried out in stages and must be adequate to allow an assessment of whether the ground conditions will effect the proposed development. Some deep drillholes will be required for this purpose. It is also advisable to carry out the initial stages of the GI prior to the finalization of general building plans for the site because, in certain circumstances, adjustments to the locations of certain structures may be the most economical means of dealing with serious geotechnical problems posed by difficult ground conditions. Design and Construction of Deep Foundations 8. The following documents shall be submitted with the foundation plans for buildings works in the Designated Area: (i) (ii) an explanatory guide to the submission; a report containing the results of ground investigation including details of the equipment and procedures used; /(iii)

-3-

(iii)

a report containing critical examination and interpretation of (ii) above, a schedule of the geotechnical design assumptions, discussion of anticipated geotechnical problems and containing geotechnical requirements for the design and construction of the foundation works including testing, inspecting and maintenance requirements; and design calculations for foundation works.

(iv)

9. General guidance on the design and construction of piled foundation works is given in PNAP 66 and the Code of Practice for Foundations. 10. The AP/RSE/RGE shall arrange for supervision of the foundation works in the Designated Area as specified in the Code of Practice for Site Supervision. Geotechnical Information 11. Technical guidance on foundation works in the Designated Area of Northshore Lantau is given in GEO Technical Guidance Note No. 12, which is available on the Civil Engineering and Development Department website (www.cedd.gov.hk). Ground investigation works shall be carried out in accordance with the standards and provisions set down in the latest editions of Guide to Site Investigation and other GEO technical guidance documents as may become available from time to time. Furthermore, a review of the principles and practice related to the design and construction of piles in Hong Kong is provided in GEO Publication No. 1/96.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BORD/A/15 (IV) First issue January 2004 This revision February 2006

[AD/NB2 and Deputy Head of GEO (Island)] (Paras 6 & 10 amended to include RGE)

Index under : Designated Area

Appendix A (PNAP 283) (APP-134)

THE DESIGNATED AREA OF NORTHSHORE LANTAU

(1/2004)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-135

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

284

Quality Supervision of Soil Nailing Works Introduction The use of soil nails for upgrading existing slopes and in forming new slopes is becoming very common in Hong Kong. Close supervision and timely design review during construction are essential to ensure the quality of the soil nailing works. 2. A soil nail, when constructed, is buried in the ground, and its built quality is not readily visible. There is a need to put in place reliable procedures for the supervision, testing and certification for acceptance of the soil nailing works during construction to ensure the quality of the works. This practice note promulgates the supervision, testing and certification requirements at various stages of soil nailing works and specifies the criteria for acceptance of the works. 3. Reference may be made to the Particular Specifications and standard drawings for soil nailing works as well as guidance notes and checklists for their supervision that are used by the Civil Engineering and Development Department (CEDD) of the HKSAR Government under the LPM Programme which can be found on the CEDD website <http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/>. GEO (2003) # , which can also be downloaded from the CEDD website, gives guidance on nondestructive testing of soil nail length. These documents may be used as a guide for private development projects. Buildability of Soil Nails 4. In designing soil nails, the designer should give due consideration to the buildability of the soil nails to ensure that the designs are practical and could be built. For long nails, say with length exceeding 20m, there is a higher chance of encountering loose or permeable ground, or buried stream course, leading to difficulties in construction. Examples include collapses of soil or rock along the drillhole (which may obstruct the insertion of the nail reinforcement assembly), and high grout loss. Grout quality may also be difficult to ensure as the length of nail increases. For cases where long nails are proposed or where the ground or groundwater conditions are likely to be adverse to soil nail construction, the Registered Geotechnical Engineer (RGE) may be required to undertake an assessment of buildability and the effects of soil nail installation on the existing ground and groundwater conditions, based on a site trial, prior to carrying out the soil nailing works. The site trial may be incorporated in and should include the pull-out tests of soil nails where possible. Soil nails for site trials and pull-out tests should be installed and tested prior to the installation of working soil nails. /5. ..
#

GEO (2003). Non-destructive Tests for Determining the Lengths of Installed Steel Soil Nails. GEO Report No. 133, Geotechnical Engineering Office, Civil Engineering and Development Department, the Government of the HKSAR, 54p. (This can be downloaded from the CEDD website <http://www.cedd.gov.hk/eng/publications/geo_reports/geo_rpt133.htm>.)

-2-

5. Examples of ground conditions that may present difficulties for soil nail construction include loose fill or colluvium, rockfill, presence of soil pipes, buried stream courses, rock mass with open discontinuities and fractures, alternating zones of soil and rock. The installation of soil nails in areas with groundwater flow will pose particular difficulties. The hole drilled may be more susceptible to collapse than dry ground and the quality of the grout may also be in doubt. Suitable measures, e.g. groundwater drainage, may have to be incorporated to facilitate installation of soil nails. Particular Requirements for Approval of Plans 6. The RGE is required to include the following particulars in the site formation submission for approval by the Building Authority: (i) (ii) (iii) Details of the site trial, if required, to confirm the buildability of the soil nails, including its locations. Procedure adopted for the pull-out tests. Methodology and details of the proposed nondestructive test (NDT) for verifying the length of installed soil nails, with suitable provisions incorporated to allow the test to be carried out.

Quality Supervision Requirements for Soil Nailing Works 7. The details of the quality supervision requirements for soil nailing works, the minimum qualification and experience required for site supervisors for soil nailing works and the details of non-destructive testing of installed soil nails are provided in the Technical Memorandum for Supervision Plans and the Code of Practice for Site Supervision.

( H W CHUENG ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/1-150/33 First issue October 2003 This revision February 2006 [AD/NB2 and Deputy Head of GEO (Island)] (Paragraphs 4 & 6 amended to include RGE, paragraph 6(iii) revised, original paragraphs 7 to 18 and App A & B deleted, new paragraph 7 added.) Index under : Soil Nails Soil Nailing Works

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-136 288

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Building (Planning) Regulation 41D Emergency Vehicular Access

Application With the coming into operation of the Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 2004 on 31 December 2004, the new Regulation 41D of the Building (Planning) Regulations (B(P)R) requires the provision of emergency vehicular access (EVA) to all new buildings. 2. By virtue of section 39(2) of the Buildings Ordinance, Regulation 41D does not apply to building works which are being carried out or consent to the commencement of which has been given as at 31 December 2004. In general, building works may refer to foundation works of the proposal. Code of Practice 3. Pursuant to B(P)R 41D(2), the design and construction of an EVA shall be in accordance with such requirements as may be specified by the Building Authority from time to time. Such requirements are currently specified in Part VI of the Code of Practice for Means of Access for Fire-fighting and Rescue (the MOA Code). Any proposed EVA that meets the requirements in the MOA Code will be accepted as complying with the provisions of B(P)R 41D. EVA Plan 4. On general building plan submissions, it is necessary to demonstrate compliance of the EVA requirements. The EVA should be clearly designated by including a separate EVA plan with relevant notes. The EVA plan should be provided with the following information: (a) Extent and alignment of EVA (to be clearly marked as EVA on plan and be so coloured to clearly differentiate the EVA from other building works). Width, inner/outer turning radii, loading capacity and gradient for the entire EVA. Location of all types of EVA signage and crash gate. If there is overhead structure encroaching onto the EVA, a separate sectional drawing showing the clear headroom of the structure to be incorporated into the EVA plan. A block plan showing the major faade of the building served by the EVA (to be so coloured for easy identification). /(f) ..

(b) (c) (d)

(e)

-2(f) Calculation on the total length of the faade of the building to be served by the EVA and the percentage of such length over the total length of all the perimeter walls of the building. For the avoidance of doubt, projections accepted by the Building Authority (excluding balconies and utility platforms under JPN 1 and 2) shall be disregarded for the purpose of the calculation. Use of paving materials other than hard paving for the EVA (e.g. grass paving materials).

(g)

5. Where the EVA is a public street, the information required for the EVA plan may be confined to the information in paragraph 4(a), (b), (e) and (f) above. For paragraph 4(b), the information required may be confined to the portion of the EVA serving the major faade of the building and the information of loading capacity of the EVA would not be required. Measurement of Major Faade of a Building 6. Paragraph 24.2(e) of the MOA Code stipulates the requirements in the provision of major faade of the building to be served by the EVA. In the measurement of one-fourth of the length of the perimeter wall as the major faade, the actual total length of the perimeter walls shall be used for the calculation of the major faade for buildings with simple contour design (e.g. in the shape of square, rectangle, circle, triangle, L-shaped, cruciform etc.). For buildings with complicated contour design, in lieu of the actual total length of the perimeter walls, the total length of the notional building contour line, as illustrated in Appendix A, may be used for the measurement of one-fourth of the length of the perimeter wall as the major faade. Exemption and Modification 7. As stipulated in B(P)R 41D(3), the Building Authority may exempt a building from complying with any or all of the EVA standards specified in the MOA Code if the Building Authority is satisfied that compliance with the requirements is: (a) impracticable having regard to the topographical features of the area on which the building is situated; or unwarranted on the ground that the purpose for which the building is to be used constitutes a low fire risk.

(b)

8. When the circumstances arise that an EVA will not be provided or when the EVA provided cannot meet the standards as stipulated in the MOA Code, an application for exemption from B(P)R 41D(1) or (2) should be made on Form BA16 with full justification and, where appropriate, substantiated by a fire-safety report as required by paragraph 27.2 of the MOA Code. The Building Authority in consultation with the Director of Fire Services will consider such an application on the merits and the special circumstances of the case. /9. ..

-39. AP/RSEs may make reference to the guidance notes at Appendix B for information on exemption/modification in special circumstances. In general, applications for relaxation of the items of requirement listed in Appendix B do not require the submission of a fire-safety report, although enhanced fire safety measures may be required on a case-by-case basis.

( CHEUNG Hau-wai ) Building Authority Ref.: BD GP/BREG/P/46(II) First issue May 2005 (AD/NB1) This revision July 2006 (AD/NB1) (Para. 1, 2, 3, 5 & 8 revised, paras. 6, 9, Appendices A & B added)

Index under : Emergency vehicular access EVA EVA plan B(P)R 41D MOA Code

(APP-136)

Appendix B (PNAP 288) (APP-136) Guidance Notes on Exemption / Modification Consideration of Part VI of the MOA Code where Special Circumstances warranted Situation 1 Dead-end EVA 2 Run-in/run-out point 3 Domestic building(s) of 34 storey or below, including single family building(s) to which MOE Code paragraph 5 applies 5 MOA Relaxation Code Para. 24.2(d) Non-provision of turning space at dead-end EVA is 25.2 acceptable should the F.S. appliances need not to reverse more than 30m for turning space. 24.2(a) The width of EVA may be relaxed to not less than 25.3(c) 4.5m. 24.2(a) The width of EVA may be relaxed to not less than 25.3(c) 4.5m depending on the topographical constraints. 24.2(e) The horizontal distance between the EVA and the 25.3(c) building faade exceeds 10m but within 30m is acceptable subject to the provision of FSI enhancement which may include a hose reel system. The horizontal distance between the EVA and the building faade exceeds 30m is acceptable subject to the provision of FSI enhancement which may include a sprinkler system and/or other enhancements depending on the scope of development, distance from the main road and source of water supply. 25.3(c) The width of the existing road(s)/street(s) serving as EVA may be relaxed to not less than 4.5m. The requirement on the EVA serving at least one major faade having not less than one-fourth of the total perimeter walls may be relaxed when the topographical features of the site make the compliance impracticable. Notwithstanding the above, the major faade of Class A site being served by EVA shall not be less than the minimum distance between the two opposite side boundaries within 10m from the EVA.; whilst for Class B and C sites, paragraph 24.2(e) should follow.

6 A building redevelopment in an original site such as Class A, B or C site (other than industrial, cinema or theatre)

(7/2006)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-137 289

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Ground-borne Vibrations Arising from Pile Driving and Similar Operations Pile driving (including pile withdrawal) operations and the like generate vibrations which, if not properly controlled, may have adverse effects on, or cause damage to, adjacent buildings and structures, in particular, non-structural elements therein. For the purpose of this PNAP, such operations are termed as pile driving operations. 2. This practice note aims to provide guidelines on the control of ground-borne vibrations generated from pile driving or similar operations with a view to minimizing possible damage to adjacent properties and streets. Authorized Persons (AP)/Registered Structural Engineers (RSE) are reminded that under the Buildings Ordinance, it is their responsibility to ensure that the building works carried out will not impair the stability of, or cause damage to any building, structure, land, street or services. They should also exercise their professional judgment in choosing suitable and safe construction methods and provide vigilant supervision over the works throughout the construction period. Piling Plan Submission 3. Piling plans submitted for approval should, in general, follow the requirements laid down in PNAP 66. AP/RSEs particular attention should be paid to the monitoring requirements and the required appraisal report at items 4(k) and 4(o) therein respectively for adjacent buildings/structures. Depending on the structural condition of the adjoining buildings/structures, the Building Authority (BA) may require the following details to be included in the appraisal report : (a) Pre-construction condition survey with a full set of photographic record of the external and common areas of the buildings/structures that are vulnerable to vibration damage. If access to some internal areas can be gained, the condition therein should also be recorded. Recommended vibration control limits (with due consideration of the recommendations given in Appendix A of this practice note) and vibration monitoring proposal. Critical locations for vibration monitoring should be identified by the RSE and included in the monitoring proposal. Preliminary appraisal of the stability of the structural and non-structural elements of adjacent buildings/structures under the expected ground-borne vibrations.

(b)

(c)

-2(d) If vibration control limits greater than those given in Appendix A are to be adopted, a detailed assessment of the magnitude of the ground-borne vibrations generated by the piling operations should be made. Under such circumstances, reference could be made to Technical Note 142 published by CIRIA of the UK for such assessment or to any other relevant references acceptable to the BA. Consideration should also be given to the cumulative effects from the driving of all piles at the site. The structural stability of all adjoining buildings/structures due to the effects of ground-borne vibrations in item (c) above should also be appraised by detailed engineering analyses. A monitoring proposal to monitor the movements of adjoining grounds and buildings/structures. If the site is situated close to buildings/structures that are vulnerable to damage caused by the piling operations, a trial pile proposal to confirm the accuracy of the vibration assessments and the effects of the piling works on adjacent buildings/structures (see paragraphs 6 to 8 below).

(e) (f)

Required actions from the RSE prior to consent application for piling works 4. Prior to consent application, the RSE is required to confirm with the Registered Specialist Contractor the method of construction including the maximum number of piles to be driven concurrently and the relevant details of the construction plants. In case there are changes from the approved details, the RSE should submit an amendment plan together with a re-assessment of the ground-borne vibrations and, if necessary, revise the appraisal report for item 3(c) above. Final reports for items 3(b) & (c) above shall be submitted together with the amendment submission. 5. It should be noted that certain types of piles installed by vibratory equipment may cause significant damage to vibration sensitive buildings/structures such as those mentioned in paragraph 7 below. Such method will not normally be accepted by the BA unless it can be satisfactorily demonstrated to him by means of trial piling as described below. Prior to the installation of the trial piles, precautionary measures such as the provision of shoring for temporary support to cracked structural members of adjacent buildings may need to be provided. Test/Trial Pile(s) for Vibration Control 6. If the adjoining buildings/structures are not vulnerable to the effects of vibration from the piling works, the magnitude of ground-borne vibrations as assessed at item 3(b) or the re-assessed values at paragraph 4 above, as appropriate, can be verified during the driving test of piles. Ground-borne vibrations should be measured during the driving of the test pile(s) as detailed in paragraph 8 below. The RSE will be required, under BO section 17 and in conjunction with PNAP 242, to supervise personally the driving of at least the first test pile to ensure that the upper limits of the ground-borne vibration will not be exceeded. The effects of the piling works on the adjoining buildings/structures should also be assessed by the RSE during the driving of the test pile(s).

-37. In cases where buildings or structures that are particularly vulnerable to the effects of vibration, such as masonry buildings, are in the proximity of the piling site, the AP/RSE should submit for approval a trial pile proposal to confirm the magnitude of ground-borne vibrations assessed at item 3(b) or the re-assessed values at paragraph 4 above, as appropriate, at each critical ground condition where generation of maximum ground-borne vibrations will be expected (usually at the highest founding level or at location of obstruction at shallow depth). The number of such trial pile(s) would depend on the actual site condition. The RSE will be required, under BO Section 17 and in accordance with PNAP 242, to supervise personally the driving of the trial pile(s) to ensure the upper limits of the ground-borne vibration will not be exceeded. 8. For the vibration monitoring of trial/test pile(s), the maximum ground-borne vibrations, measured in terms of peak particle velocity (ppv), should be recorded at every meter length of penetration of pile, at final set and at levels where obstructions are encountered. The monitoring work should be carried out using a properly calibrated device under the direction of the RSE. If the measured ground-borne vibrations have been found to exceed the allowable values or if damage to either the structural or non-structural elements of the adjacent buildings/structures has been observed, all piling works should be stopped and the agreed precautionary measures referred to at item 4(o) of PNAP 66 should be reviewed and revised as necessary, and submitted by the RSE to the BA for agreement. The suspended piling works should not be resumed without the prior agreement of the BA. 9. A condition survey of all adjacent buildings/structures should be carried out after the completion of the trial piles for confirmation of the effects of the piling works. Two sets of trial piling report on ground-borne vibrations and their effects on adjacent buildings/structures should be submitted to the BA for consideration/record prior to the commencement of the driving of the working piles. Required actions from the RSE during the driving of working piles 10. The vibration monitoring work should be under the supervision of the RSE or his representatives throughout the piling process. The RSE should review the site situation from time to time and if found necessary, suspend the piling works, revise the precautionary measures and/or vibration monitoring proposal and submit them to the BA for agreement prior to the resumption of the piling works. Requirements for controlling vibrations arising from site formation and excavation and lateral support works 11. The installation of temporary pile walls such as steel sheet piles, pipe piles or steel channel plankings are often included in site formation and excavation and lateral support works. Such temporary pile walls, if installed by percussive or vibratory methods, are likely to generate vibrations that may cause damage to adjoining buildings/structures, particularly those that are vulnerable to vibrations. Excessive vibrations are also likely to be experienced during the removal of underground obstructions. Due consideration should thus be given to the recommendations in Appendix A for the vibration control limits to various types of structures. A detailed vibration and settlement monitoring proposal on all adjoining

-4buildings, structures, land, streets or services should be included in the site formation or excavation and lateral supports plans to be submitted to the BA for approval/acceptance. If there are vibration sensitive buildings in the proximity of the site, the AP/RSE should exercise vigilance during the driving of the first few piles and closely monitor the effects of such driving on all adjoining grounds and properties. If the measured ground-borne vibrations have been found to exceed the allowable values or if damage to either structural or non-structural elements of the adjacent buildings/structures has been observed, the driving of elements of the temporary pile walls should be stopped and the agreed/approved installation method and precautionary measures should be reviewed and submitted by the RSE to the BA for agreement/approval. The suspended temporary pile wall works should not be resumed without the prior agreement from the BA. Vibration monitoring should be carried out during the installation of the remaining elements of the temporary pile walls. Likewise, vibration monitoring should be carried out during the removal of the temporary pile walls.

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD/GP/BREG/C/36 First issued May 2004 (AD/NB2) Index under : Ground-borne vibration Vibration Peak Particle Velocity

Appendix A (PNAP 289) (APP-137) Vibration Measurement and Recommended Ground-borne Vibration Limits Resulting from Piling and Similar Works Vibration measurement The effect of ground-borne vibration from piling works on adjacent structures should be assessed by the maximum peak particle velocity (ppv). The maximum ppv should be evaluated from the peak particle velocities at three orthogonal axes measured at ground levels of the structures in question. All such measurements should be made by properly calibrated device and under the supervision of the RSE or his representatives. Recommended Ground-borne vibration limits 2. For the detailed assessment of the effects of ground-borne vibrations on adjacent buildings/structures, an engineering analysis should be carried out. Reference could be made to BS 7385 Part 1 : 1990 or similar references. 3. In the absence of an engineering analysis, the following empirical guidelines may be used for reference : Targeted Results Upper limit on maximum ppv (mm/sec)

To avoid damage to buildings, sewerage tunnel structure and major public utilities in 15 general To avoid damage to MTR & KCR Refer to PNAP 77 and structures PNAP 279 To avoid damage to water retaining structure/water tunnels/masonry retaining 7.5 wall and dilapidated buildings 4. The above upper limits of maximum ppv are suggested to give minimal risks of vibration-induced damage. Due attention should also be paid to sensitive buildings close to the piling site such as hospitals, academic institutes, buildings installed with sensitive equipment etc. A lower value of the upper limit of ppv for these buildings may have to be specified based on site and building conditions. 5. The AP/RSE is also required to fulfill the requirements imposed by other government departments. First issued May 2004 (AD/NB2)

-1-

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized APP-138 Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

290

Appointment of Authorised Signatory to Act for Registered Contractor and Temporary absence of Authorised Signatories Every registered contractor (RC) should appoint at least one person to act for it for the purposes of the Buildings Ordinance (BO). This appointed person is commonly known as the authorised signatory (AS) of the RC. Under section 9(5) and (6) of the BO, a registered general building contractor (RGBC) or a registered specialist contractor (RSC) should provide continuous supervision to the carrying out of the building works or street works in accordance with the supervision plan and to comply with the BO generally. Such duties of the RC are more specifically stipulated under Part V of the Building (Administration) Regulations (B(A)R), the Technical Memorandum for Supervision Plans and the Code of Practice for Site Safety Supervision. AS on the specified forms and supervision plans 2. The AS who signs the Form BA 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 14A, 18 and 20 in respect of building works or street works should be the person who is responsible for the carrying out of the duties of the RC under the BO for the works. The Building Authority (BA) only accepts one AS to act for the RC for each project and the AS who signs the Form BA 10 is deemed to be such person. 3. The name of the AS appointed for a project should be clearly indicated on all specified forms relating to the project. With effect from 1 July, 2004, if the name of the AS is not shown on a specified form, the BA would consider the form as incomplete and unacceptable. Moreover, if the name of the AS indicated on the supervision plan is different from that on any specified forms such as Form BA 10, 13 or 14 of the project, the BA would reject the supervision plan or the specified forms, as the case may be, unless the BA has approved or has been notified of the change of AS as stipulated in paragraph 4 below. 4. For an RC, other than a sole proprietorship, who has only one AS, any proposal to change the AS of a project will not be accepted unless an application for addition of the new AS in the contractors registration has been made in accordance with the procedures set out in PNRC 38 and approved by the BA. For an RC having more than one AS in its registration who intends to change the AS of a particular project to another AS of the RC, the RC should notify the BA in the standard form at Appendix A to PNRC 59, countersigned by the authorized person (AP) of the project, not less than 7 days prior to such change. Otherwise, the original AS would still be regarded as responsible for the project. /Nomination ..

-2Nomination of another AS to act in case of temporary absence 5. The absence of the AS of an RC may cause the RC unable to act. Under B(A)R 22(2), if the RGBC or RSC becomes unable to act, it should immediately cease the building works or street works under its purview until another RGBC or RSC is appointed. 6. In the case of temporary absence of the AS of a project due to various reasons such as illness, the RC may still wish to continue with the carrying out of the works. In such circumstances, the BA would accept the RC nominating another AS to act temporarily for the purpose of supervising the carrying out of the building works or street works under its purview, subject to the following conditions : (a) Notification of such nomination should be made to the BA in the standard form at Appendix B to PNRC 59 and countersigned by the AP of the project; The notification should be submitted at least 7 days prior to the absence of the AS except in case of sudden illness or accident. In the latter case, the RC or the AS should provide documentary proof within 3 days showing that the AS is unable to act due to illness or accident; The person nominated to act temporarily should fulfill one of the following criteria : (i) He is another AS of the same RC on the same register or sub-register; or

(b)

(c)

(ii) He is an AS currently acting for another RC on the same register or sub-register. In case that another RC is a partnership or a corporation, an authorization letter from that another RC signed by the rest of the partners or the required quorum of directors, as the case may be, should be submitted with the notification; and (d) The maximum period of temporary acting by the nominated AS is 14 days. Further extension of this acting period would only be considered upon submission of documentary proof of special circumstances, such as illness. The total temporary acting period permitted is subject to a maximum of 30 days.

7. If the nominated temporary AS does not meet the criteria stipulated in paragraph 6(c) above, the BA would not accept the nomination and would inform the RC/AS and the AP accordingly. In such cases the building works or street works under the purview of the RC may have to be ceased if there is no AS acting for it (see paragraph 5 above). /8. ..

-38. If the absence of the AS for a project exceeds 30 days, the RC should arrange to change to another AS of the same company to be responsible for the project or apply for addition of a new AS in its registration, in accordance with paragraph 4 above. The role of the nominated temporary AS 9. The nominated temporary AS would only act for a short period of time for the purpose of supervision of the carrying out of building works or street works. During the period of acting, he is required to fulfill the duties of site supervision and sign on the inspection records on site in accordance with the accepted supervision plans. However, the nominated temporary AS, being not the AS appointed to act for the RC for the project as stipulated in paragraph 2 above, is not permitted to sign on any supervision plans or specified forms for the project for which he is only acting temporarily for the purpose of paragraph 6 above.

(Marco M H WU) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BREG/A/9 (V) First issue May 2004 (AD/Support) Index under : Authorised Signatory of Registered Contractor Temporary absence of Authorised Signatory

Appendix A (PNRC 59) Notification of Change of Authorised Signatory Date ___________ To the Building Authority, We __________________________ (Chinese) _________________ the registered general building contractor/registered specialist contractor , of registration no. ________ and date of expiry of registration __________, hereby notify that the person (name in full) _____________________ (Chinese) __________________ (the original authorised signatory) acting for us for the purposes of the Buildings Ordinance in respect of the building works/street works detailed below, will be changed to (name in full) ____________________ (Chinese) _________________ (the new authorised signatory) with effect from (date) ___________. Address of site Lot No. BAs Ref. No.

___________________________ Signature (original authorised signatory)

___________________________ Signature (new authorised signatory)

___________________________ Full name and signature of authorized person Certificate of Registration No. : ____________ Date of expiry of registration : ____________

Delete whichever is inapplicable

(5/2004)

Appendix B (PNRC 59) Notification of Nomination of Temporary Authorised Signatory Date____________ To the Building Authority, We __________________________ (Chinese) __________________ the registered general building contractor/registered specialist contractor of registration no. ________ and date of expiry of registration __________, hereby notify that we have nominated (name in full) ____________________ (Chinese) _________________ (the nominated authorised signatory), in stead of (name in full) ____________________ (Chinese) _________________ (the original authorised signatory) to act for us for the purpose of supervision under the Buildings Ordinance during the period of the latters illness/temporary absence from (date) ___________ to (date) ____________ in respect of the building works/street works detailed below. Address of site Lot No. BAs Ref. No.

_________________________ Full name and signature of authorized person Certificate of Registration No. : ____________ Date of expiry of registration : ____________

___________________________ Signature of original authorised signatory

I (name in full) ___________________ (Chinese) _____________________, HKID/Passport No.____________, Telephone No. __________, Fax No. ____________ confirm my acceptance of the above nomination and that I will act in stead of (name in full) _________________(Chinese) __________________, in respect of the above building works/street works from (date) ___________ to (date) ____________.
I am currently *one of/the AS acting for (name of the registered general building

contractor/registered specialist contractor) __________________________ (Chinese) __________________ of registration no. ________ and date of expiry of registration __________, for the purposes of the Buildings Ordinance. *A letter of authorisation for me to act as the nominated authorised signatory is enclosed. ___________________________________ Signature of nominated authorised signatory

Delete whichever is inapplicable

(5/2004)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized APP-139 Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

291

Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004 Main Features of the Code The Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004 (The 2004 Code) replaces the existing 1983 wind code by taking into account additional wind data collected in Hong Kong and enriched knowledge of structural response under wind effects. It introduces several changes to the wind design which include the adoption of a single terrain wind velocity profile, a new approach to address the site topographic effects, the assessment of resonant dynamic response effects for slender and/or dynamic significant buildings under wind load, and necessary provisions for wind tunnel testing. Explanatory Materials 2. As the 2004 Code aims to retain the essence of simple format for ease of application, a supplementary technical document Explanatory Materials to the Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004 will be issued in parallel to give a summary of background information and considerations that were reviewed during the preparation of the Code. The document also addresses special situations where the application of the Code might require special attention. Nevertheless, the document should NOT be construed as a part of the Code. Transitional Period for the Application of the Code 3. To allow sufficient time for the building industry to migrate to the 2004 Code, a one-year transition period starting from 15 December 2004 would be implemented. During the transitional period, all first structural submissions and their subsequent re-submissions, if applicable, including those for alterations and additions works, received by the Buildings Department may be designed to either the 2004 Code or the 1983 Code. After the transitional period, i.e. starting from 15 December 2005, all structural submissions for new building development proposals received by the Buildings Department should be designed in accordance with the 2004 Code. 4. Building development proposals for which the superstructure or foundation plan submissions have been received by the Buildings Department during the transitional period and structural plans which have been designed according to the 1983 Code and submitted/approved before the transitional period may continue to be designed using the 1983 Code for both the foundations and superstructures including its subsequent amendments until the Occupation Permit has been granted.

/5. ..

-2-

5. For foundation works for which plans have been submitted and approved using the 1983 Code, the RSE may choose to design the superstructure works to the 2004 Code provided he has checked and satisfied the Buildings Authority that the foundation works already approved are structurally adequate to resist the wind loads and the combinations with other loads transmitted from the superstructure. 6. For new alteration and addition works to be submitted after the transitional period, the design of new structural elements and/or checking of structural adequacy of the existing structure should follow the guidance given in PNAP 249. 7. Notwithstanding the aforesaid administration arrangements, you are required to advise the owners that the Building Authority may under BO section 16(3)(d) refuse to give his consent to the commencement of any building works when a period exceeding 2 years has elapsed since the approval of the prescribed plans in respect of the building works.

Design of External Building Elements 8. External building elements, e.g. canopies, cladding to building faade, curtain walls and architectural features etc. are subject to wind channel down effect the design requirements of which are described in Clause 6.2 of the 2004 Code. Such design requirement is not postulated in the 1983 Code. However, RSEs are strongly advised to consider such effect in the design of external building elements even though the building has been designed to the 1983 Code.

Access for the Code 9. Both the Code and the Explanatory Materials are available for viewing in the Buildings Department website <http://www.info.gov.hk/bd> under the "Codes of Practice and Design Manuals" page of the "Publications" section. The documents may be downloaded subject to terms and conditions stipulated in the website.

( Marco M H WU ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/1-50/59/0 First issue December 2004 (AD/NB2) Index under : Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004 Channel down effect, of wind

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-140

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

293

Registration of Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers as Registered Geotechnical Engineers Introduction Many developments in Hong Kong stand on steep hillsides and man-made slopes. In such cases, geotechnical works are usually involved which call for geotechnical expertise. In the past, the Buildings Ordinance (BO) only required the appointment of an authorized person (AP) as the coordinator of building works and a registered structural engineer (RSE) for the structural elements of the building works. As such, the AP had to be held statutorily responsible for geotechnical works although geotechnical engineers were usually engaged as sub-consultant to the AP for the design and supervision of the geotechnical works. Registered Geotechnical Engineers 2. The Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 2004 establishes a register of geotechnical engineers and introduces the requirement for the appointment of a registered geotechnical engineer (RGE) for the geotechnical elements of building works. The RGE so appointed will undertake the investigation, design and supervision of geotechnical works and will be statutorily responsible for such works. AP/RSE applying for registration as RGE 3. The basic qualification for registration as RGE is a registered professional engineer in the geotechnical engineering discipline. The Building Authority (BA), however, also recognizes the experience and competence of those AP and RSE who have actually been engaged in geotechnical works in the past. Upon commencement of the registration system for RGE on 31 December 2004, an AP in the list of engineers or RSE may apply, within 12 months, i.e. on or before 30 December 2005, for registration as RGE under section 53I of the BO (added by clause 43 of the Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 2004). He is qualified for registration if he satisfies the following conditions: (a) During the period of 7 years immediately preceding the date of his application, he has been engaged in or has taken part in site formation works carried out and completed in accordance with the BO. (b) He was the AP or RSE appointed in respect of the building works or street works in relation to which the site formation works were carried out. (c) He satisfies the BA that he has the appropriate geotechnical experience and competence in relation to the site formation works.

4. In relation to condition (c) stipulated in paragraph 3 above, the BA will be satisfied with the geotechnical experience and competence of the applicant if, within the period of 7 years immediately preceding the date of his application: (a) He has been engaged in the following projects of site formation works from preparation of plans for submission to the BA for approval, obtaining approval of such plans from the BA and supervision of the carrying out of the works through to satisfactory completion of the works: 5 projects requiring Category I qualified supervision, or 2 projects requiring Category II qualified supervision, or 3 projects requiring Category I qualified supervision and 1 project requiring Category II qualified supervision.

For the above purpose: preparation of plans includes the supervision of his employees to prepare the plans but excludes the preparation of plans by a geotechnical engineering sub-consultant; Category I and Category II qualified supervision are as defined in PNAP 83; the projects must not be one which has been claimed to support an application under section 53I(2)(a) by other applicants;

(b) For an AP in the list of engineers, he has certified completion of the site formation works under the BO. For an RSE, being not in a position to certify completion under the BO, he has reported to the certifying AP of the site formation works that he is satisfied that the works have been completed in accordance with the approved plans and in compliance with the BO; and (c) The site formation works were completed with no record of contravention of the BO. 5. The BA may require the applicant to furnish such information or documents as may be required to justify his application. Upon registration as RGE, the registration will be valid for 5 years which is renewable as long as his name remains in the register of AP/RSE.

6. This practice note should be read in conjunction with PNAP 43, particularly paragraphs 7 and 11 to 14 thereof.

( Marco MH WU ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GP/BORD/75(VIII) First issue December 2004 (AD/Sup) Index under : AP registering as RGE Registered geotechnical engineer RSE registering as RGE

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-141

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

294

Division of Responsibilities between Authorized Person, Registered Structural Engineer and Registered Geotechnical Engineer Introduction The Buildings Ordinance (BO) requires the appointment of an authorized person (AP) as coordinator of building works and a registered structural engineer (RSE) for the structural elements of the building works. In the past where there were geotechnical matters and/or geotechnical elements involved, the AP and/or the RSE would take up the responsibility. In many cases, geotechnical engineers were engaged as sub-consultant for the design and supervision of the geotechnical works but the AP still had to be held statutorily responsible for the works. 2. The Buildings (Amendment) Ordinance 2004 established a register of geotechnical engineers and introduced the requirement for the appointment of a registered geotechnical engineer (RGE) for the geotechnical elements of building works. This will enhance the public safety since only suitably qualified and experienced geotechnical engineers may undertake the design and supervision of geotechnical works and they will be held statutorily responsible for the quality of their work. Duties and functions of the RGE 3. The duties and functions of a RGE under the BO are classified into executive role and advisory role as appropriate in respect of the geotechnical elements of building works as outlined at Appendix A. Division of responsibilities between AP, RSE and RGE 4. With effect from 31 December 2005, an RGE is required to be appointed for the geotechnical elements of building works as stipulated in section 4(1)(c) of the BO. The RGE will take up the statutory responsibility for the geotechnical elements. The respective responsibilities of AP, RSE and RGE in building works under the BO are mainly specified in Building (Administration) Regulation 12 with reference to the prescribed plans and documents they are required to prepare and sign. While the AP is the co-ordinator of all building works, this practice note gives detailed guidelines on the division of responsibilities in building works involving geotechnical elements as described at Appendix B. This practice note should be read in conjunction with all the PNAPs relevant to building works involving geotechnical elements, particularly PNAP 50, 75, 77, 83, 85, 132, 148, 161, 200, 283 & 284. /5. ..

-2-

5. The RGE would take up an executive role for tasks 2A, 2B, 4, 7A, 7B, 10 and 11. For these executive tasks, the RGE shall prepare and sign the prescribed geotechnical plans and reports. For example in task 11, the submission of monitoring reports, justifying the proper functioning of permanent anchors and horizontal drains, should be prepared and signed by the RGE. For the geotechnical works for which the RGE takes up an executive role, the RGE shall also be required to certify that the works have been carried out in accordance with the approved plans and that the works completed are geotechnically safe. 6. Tasks 1, 3, 5A, 5B, 6, 8 and 12 are duties and functions of the RGE in an advisory role in geotechnical related matters. In all these advisory tasks, the geotechnical report/supporting documentation should be prepared and signed by the RGE. The signature is deemed to indicate the RGEs acceptance of responsibility for the geotechnical report/supporting documentation. The AP or RSE should be responsible to prepare and sign as appropriate the plans concerned and the associated reports and documentations relating to non-geotechnical matters. Sanctions 7. Similar to AP and RSE, the RGE will also be subject to prosecution or disciplinary action where an offence is committed or when matters justifying the taking of disciplinary action arise, as stipulated under section 40 and 7 respectively of the BO.

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority

Ref : BD GP/BORD/75(X) BD GP/BREG/P/16 (Pt V) First issue December 2004 Last revision April 2006 This revision February 2009 (AD/NB1) (paras. 4 & 6 and Appendix A amended and Task 12 added to Appendix B) Index under : APs responsibilities Division of responsibilities between AP, RSE and RGE RGEs responsibilities RSEs responsibilities

Geotechnical Tasks Under the Buildings Ordinance and Regulations to be undertaken by the RGE Role Executive Geotechnical Task

Appendix A (PNAP 294) (APP-141)

Ground Investigation in Scheduled Areas (Task 2A in Appendix B) Ground Investigation in Non-scheduled Areas (Task 2B in Appendix B) Site Formation (Task 4 in Appendix B) Groundwater Drainage Works in Scheduled Area 1 (Task 7A in Appendix B) Water Supply and Wells (Task 7B in Appendix B) Remedial Works to Dangerous Hillsides (Task 10 in Appendix B) Long Term Monitoring (Post Occupation Permit) (Task 11 in Appendix B)

Advisory

Demolition Affecting Slopes and Retaining Walls (Task 1 in Appendix B) Geotechnical Assessment for General Building Plan where required (Task 3 in Appendix B) Foundation in Scheduled Areas Nos. 1, 2 & 4 and Designated Area of Northshore Lantau (Task 5A in Appendix B) Foundation Affecting Slope and Retaining Wall (Task 5B in Appendix B) Excavation and Lateral Support (Task 6 in Appendix B) Superstructure (Report on geotechnical design parameters) (Task 8 in Appendix B) Hoardings, Covered Walkways and Gantries Affecting the Stability of Any Nearby Slope or Retaining Walls (Task 12 in Appendix B)

(Rev. 2/2009)

Division of Responsibilities between AP, RSE and RGE 1. Demolition Affecting Slopes and Retaining Walls Brief Description of the Requirement BA may refuse consent when precautionary and other protective measures are not adequately provided. Signing of Plans Signing of Supporting Documents Supervision of Works RGE Qualified supervision on geotechnical aspects imposed under BOs.17(1)(6)(e) as a condition of approval RSE All supervision of structural works apart from the above

Appendix B (PNAP 294) (APP-141)

Buildings Ordinance & Regulations BO s16(3)bb

Certification of Completion To be certified by AP & RSE

B(A)R 8(3) B(C)R 7

AP and RSE to prepare and RGE to sign Geotechnical sign demolition plans. Reports and supporting documentations RSE should ensure all the relevant recommendations RSE to sign Structural by the RGE are incorporated calculations for structural Demolition plans as in the plans. Any difference supports and structural prescribed plans in opinion should be assessment report relating resolved between the RSE to the demolition Building works not to and RGE before submission adversely affect adjoining to BD. buildings etc.

-1-

2A.

Ground Investigation in Scheduled Areas Signing of Supporting Documents Ground investigation plan RGE Ground RGE to sign in the scheduled areas are investigation plans in Geotechnical Scheduled Areas Reports and prescribed plans supporting documentations Site investigation to be carried out to recognized where submitted. standards as to provide adequate geotechnical data Brief Description of the Requirement Site investigation to be carried out to provide necessary information for design and construction of foundations Signing of Plans Supervision of Works The RGE appointed shall give such periodic supervision and make such inspection as may be necessary to ensure that the geotechnical works are being carried out in general accordance with the provisions of the Ordinance and regulations and with the plans approved by the BA, and the supervision plan prepared in compliance with the technical memorandum issued under section 39A of BO. and Qualified supervision imposed under BOs.17(1)(6)(e) to be provided by RGE as set out in PNAP 132. Certification of Completion RGE ground investigation in Scheduled Areas

Buildings Ordinance & Regulations B(A)R 8(1)(l)

B(C)R9

B(C)R24

-2-

2B. Ground Investigation in Non-scheduled Areas Buildings Ordinance & Regulations B(C)R9 Signing of Supporting Documents Site investigation to be Submission of plans RGE to sign carried out to recognized to BA for approval is Geotechnical standards as to provide not a statutory Reports and adequate geotechnical data requirement under supporting BO. documentations where submitted* Site investigation to be carried out to provide necessary information for design and construction of foundations Brief Description of the Requirement Signing of Plans Supervision of Works Certification of Completion

B(C)R24

The RGE appointed shall give such RGE ground periodic supervision and make such investigation inspection as may be necessary to ensure that the geotechnical works are being carried out in general accordance with the Ordinance and regulations. Details are set out in PNAP 132.

* The relevant foundation, site formation, excavation or other plans may be disapproved if the ground investigation report- is found not acceptable; - does not include the required certificate from Registered Specialist Contractor (Ground Investigation Field Works) or RGE; or - does not include a proper surveyed record of the boreholes.

-3-

3.

Geotechnical Assessment for General Building Plan when required Brief Description of the Requirement BA may require N/A geotechnical assessment of adequacy of the site for the proposed building works Signing of Plans Signing of Supporting Documents Supervision of Works Certification of Completion N/A

Buildings Ordinance & Regulations B(A)R 8(1)(ba)

RGE to sign Geotechnical N/A Assessment Reports and supporting documentations where submitted

-4-

4.

Site Formation Certification of Completion AP* to certify completion of site formation works RGE to certify completion of geotechnical aspects of site formation works If structural works are involved, RSE to certify the structural works.

Signing of Plans Signing of Supporting Supervision of Works Buildings Brief Description of Ordinance & the Requirement Documents Regulations AP* - General layout RGE to sign Site formation plans The RGE appointed shall give such B(A)R plan showing location Geotechnical Reports periodic supervision and make such are prescribed plans 8(1)(bb) of site and extent of inspections as may be necessary to and supporting works, and connection documentations ensure that the geotechncial works are of proposed surface being carried out in general accordance B(A)R 11A In area number 1 of drainage to public the scheduled areas, RGE to sign with the provisions of the Ordinance foundation plan to be drains Performance Review and regulations and with the plans submitted with site Reports and supporting approved by the BA, and the RGE All site formation plan documentations on the supervision plan prepared in formation plan except completed site compliance with the technical Site formation works general layout plan and formation works as B(C)R 20 memorandum issued under section 39A to be designed and required under of BO, plans involving constructed to have structural details only BOs.17(1)(6)(g). and adequate margin of Qualified Supervision imposed under safety and would not RSE plans showing RSE to sign structural BOs.17(1)(6)(e) as set out in PNAP 83 adversely affect any calculations and structural details structure, etc. structural assessment RSE- supervision of structural works reports *

If the proposed works encroaches on Government land, AP shall arrange for permission from Lands Department.

-5-

5A.

Foundation in Scheduled Areas Nos. 1, 2 & 4 and Designated Area of Northshore Lantau Signing of Supporting Documents RGE to sign Geotechnical Reports and supporting documentations Supervision of Works Certification of Completion RGE Qualified supervision on the geotechnical aspects imposed under BOs.17(1)(6)(e) as a condition of approval as set out in PNAP 83 AP & RSE to certify completion of foundation works

Signing of Buildings Brief Description of the Requirement Ordinance & Plans Regulations B(A)R 8(1)(d)(i) Foundation plan to show size & To be signed position of foundation together with by RSE B(A)R11A site investigation work undertaken and grouting works to be carried out In Designated Area of Northshore Lantau, the submission of foundation plan to follow the conditions set out in PNAP 283 B(A)R 8(1)(d)(ii) Foundation plan in scheduled areas 2 & 4 to be accompanied by supporting documentation including schedule of geotechnical design assumptions and discussion of anticipated geotechnical problems etc B(C)R23 Foundation works not to adversely affect any building etc

RGE to sign RSE All supervision Performance Review of structural works reports on the completed apart from the above foundation in Scheduled Areas Nos.1, 2 & 4 RSE to sign structural design calculations of foundations and structural assessment reports

-6-

5B.

Foundation Affecting Slopes and Retaining Walls Brief Description of the Requirement Foundation works not to adversely affect any building, structure, land, street or services Signing of Plans To be signed by RSE Signing of Supporting Documents Supervision of Works Certification of Completion AP & RSE to certify completion of foundation works

Buildings Ordinance & Regulations B(C)R 23

RGE to sign Geotechnical RGE Qualified Reports and supporting supervision in the documentations geotechnical aspects imposed under RSE to sign structural BOs.17(1)(6)(e) as a design calculations of condition of approval as foundations and structural set out in PNAP 83 assessment reports RSE All supervision of structural works apart from the above

-7-

6. Excavation and Lateral Support Buildings Ordinance & Regulations B(A)R 8(1)(bc) Brief Description of the Requirement Excavation and lateral support plans required to be submitted for approval as stipulated in PNAP 148 shall include a schedule of geotechnical design assumptions, and a report to include discussion of anticipated geotechnical problems Building works not to adversely affect adjoining building etc Site formation and foundation works shall not render inadequate margin of safety of adjoining building etc Signing of Plans RSE to sign plans Signing of Supporting Documents Supervision of Works Certification of Completion To be certified by AP & RSE

RGE to sign Geotechnical RGE Qualified Reports and supporting supervision on the RSE shall ensure that all the documentations geotechnical aspects relevant recommendations imposed under by the RGE are incorporated RSE to sign structural BOs.17(1)(6)(e) as a in the plans. Any difference design of shoring and condition of approval as in opinion should be structural assessment set out in PNAP 83 resolved between the RSE report of the effects of the and RGE before submission excavation and dewatering RSE All supervision of to BD. on adjoining structures structural works apart from the above

B(C)R7

B(C)R 20& 23

-8-

7A.

Groundwater Drainage Works in Scheduled Area 1 Brief Description of the Requirement BA may require plans prescribed by regulations to show groundwater drainage works whether or not extending beyond the site boundary in Schedule Area No. 1 Signing of Plans Signing of Supporting Documents RGE to sign Geotechnical reports AP* to prepare and supporting and sign general documentations layout plan if proposed works RGE to sign extend beyond Performance Review the site boundary reports on the completion of the groundwater drainage works in Scheduled Area No.1 RGE Supervision of Works Certification of Completion

Buildings Ordinance & Regulations BO s28A

The RGE appointed shall give such To be certified periodic supervision and make such by AP* & RGE inspections as may be necessary to ensure that the geotechnical works are being carried out in general accordance with the provisions of the Ordinance and regulations and with the plans approved by the BA, and the supervision plan prepared in compliance with the technical memorandum issued under section 39A of BO, and Qualified supervision imposed under BOs17(1)(6)(e) to be provided by RGE

If the proposed works encroaches on Government land or adjoining private lots, AP shall arrange for permission from Lands Department or adjoining lot owners, and certify completion of works.

-9-

7B.

Water Supply and Wells Signing of Supporting Documents RGE to sign Wells to be AP General layout plan Geotechnical designed, showing location of well, constructed and proposed rate and duration assessment supported operated so as not of water extraction per day by calculation, of the to impair the effect of proposed stability of, or RGE plans showing details water extraction cause damage to of proposed well, services in any building etc. the vicinity, and the proposal for well yield test Brief Description of the Requirement Signing of Plans Supervision of Works The RGE appointed shall give such periodic supervision and make such inspections as may be necessary to ensure that the geotechnical works are being carried out in general accordance with the provisions of the Ordinance and regulations and with the plans approved by the BA, and the supervision plan prepared in compliance with the technical memorandum issued under section 39A of BO Qualified supervision imposed under BOs.17(1)(6)(e) to be provided by RGE Certification of Completion AP & RGE to certify completion of proposed well

Buildings Ordinance & Regulations B(C)R 85-89

- 10 -

8.

Superstructure Brief Description of the Requirement Prescribed plan to show structural details RSE Signing of Plans Signing of Supporting Documents RGE to sign Report on geotechnical design parameters for the superstructure RSE to sign structural design calculations of the superstructure Supervision of Works Certification of Completion

Buildings Ordinance & Regulations B(A)R 8(1)(i)

RGEs input as necessary. To be certified by AP & RSE

9.

Qualified Supervision (Already included in other items)

- 11 -

10.

Remedial Works to Dangerous Hillside Signing of Plans AP* General layout plan showing location and extent of works, and connection of proposed surface drainage to public drains RGE remedial works plan except plans involving structural details only RSE plans showing structural details Signing of Supporting Documents RGE to sign Geotechnical reports and supporting documentations RSE to sign structural calculations and structural assessment report Supervision of Works Certification of Completion

Buildings Brief Description of Ordinance & the Requirement Regulations BOs.27A BA may order owners of natural, formed or man-made land, or earthretaining structure considered to be dangerous or liable to become dangerous, to do works or to carry out investigation and remedial measures as specified

AP* & RGE to The RGE appointed shall give such certify periodic supervision and make such completion of inspections as may be necessary to investigation/ ensure that the geotechnical works are being carried out in general accordance slope stabilization with the provisions of Ordinance and regulations and with the plans approved works by the BA, and the supervisions plan prepared in compliance with the technical If structural memorandum issued under section 39A works are of BO involved, RSE to certify the Qualified supervision imposed under structural works BOs.17(1)(6)(e) to be provided by RGE RSE supervision of structural works

. AP is required for the following circumstances (1) if the proposed works encroaches on Government land or adjoining private lots, or (2) if the works involve not only geotechnical works and structural works. In respect of (1) above, AP shall arrange for permission from Lands Department or adjoining lot owners.

- 12 -

11.

Long Term Monitoring (Post Occupation Permit) Signing of Plans Submission of such monitoring report is not a statutory requirement, except when a Dangerous Hillside Order under BOs.27A is issued Signing of Supporting Documents Supervision of Works Certification of Completion N/A

Buildings Brief Description of the Ordinance & Requirement Regulations No statutory PNAP 50 Monitoring of requirement but pre-stressed ground Practice Note for anchors AP&RSE PNAP 137- Monitoring of horizontal drains

RGE to sign Geotechnical RGE to supervise the reports, including monitoring works interpretation of the monitoring data, and periodic monitoring records

- 13 -

12.

Hoardings, Covered Walkways and Gantries Affecting Slopes and Retaining Walls Brief Description of the Requirement Plans of hoardings, covered walkways and gantries to be submitted with application for hoarding permit Signing of Plans Signing of Supporting Documents Supervision of Works Certification of Completion N/A

Buildings Ordinance & Regulations B(P)R 64(1)

AP/RSE to prepare and sign RGE to sign Geotechnical AP and RSE All the plans supervision of Reports and supporting erection/demolition of documentations RSE should ensure all the hoardings, covered relevant recommendations RSE to sign structural walkways and gantries by the RGE are incorporated calculations for structural PNAP 75 - hoardings, in the plans. Any difference supports and structural covered walkways and in opinion should be assessment report relating gantries not to adversely resolved between the RSE to the hoardings, covered affect the stability of any and RGE before submission walkways and gantries nearby slopes or retaining to BD walls RGE to certify the stability of any nearby slope or retaining wall not being adversely affected, in the streamlined processing under Appendix D of PNAP 75 and renewal of hoarding permit and minor amendment under Appendix E of PNAP 75

(Rev. 2/2009)

- 14 -

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-142

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

296

Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2004 The Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2004 (the Code) was published in December 2004. Subject to the Code being used in its entirety, compliance with the requirements of the Code will be considered as complying with the provisions of the Building (Construction) Regulations (B(C)R) relating to concrete design. The concrete design for any new building development or alteration and addition works shall be based on the Code if the application for approval of the structural plans or foundation plans of which is submitted after 15 December 2006. 2. The Code specifies alternative requirements to some particular regulations of the B(C)R. The Building Authority is prepared to grant modifications of the relevant regulations of the B(C)R upon application in the specified form to permit adoption of these alternative requirements. Appendix A contains a list of the relevant B(C)R that may require such modifications. 3. From experience in the application of the Code since its publication in December 2004, some amendments and refinements to the Code for improvement have been identified. The amendments to the Code are set out in Appendix B. Major changes pertinent to the amendments are as follows: (a) The grouping of concrete has been changed to (i) grades below and up to C45 (previously, grade below and up to C40), (ii) grades higher than C45 and up to C70 (previously, grades higher than C40 and up to C70), and (iii) grades higher than C70 and up to C100. This allows many existing design tools and computer programs continue to be used without modifying the design equations for concrete grade up to C45 which is a grade commonly used by the building industry. The simplified stress block for concrete at ultimate limit state as given in Figure 6.1 of the Code has been amended to provide a more accurate stress block for the three different groups of concrete as given in (a) above. The other amendments are generally consequential to the amendments mentioned above, corrections of printing errors, or illustrative figures.

(b)

(c)

/4. ..

-2-

4. The above amendments would be incorporated in the next reprint of the Code. The updated version of the Code is now available for viewing in the Buildings Department website http://www.bd.gov.hk/ under the Codes of Practice and Design Manuals page of the Publications section. The document may be downloaded subject to the terms and conditions stipulated in the website.

( CHEUNG Hau-wai ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GR/1-125/58 First issue June 2007 (AD/NB2)

Index under : Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete Concrete, Code of Practice for Structural Use of

Appendix A (PNAP 296) (APP-142) List of Building (Construction) Regulations that may require modifications Relevant Clause/Table in the Code

Item 1

B(C)R 56(2)

Subject

Remarks Where the cement content exceeds 550 kg/m3, modification of the B(C)R will be required. Where the cement content is less than the minimum specified, modification of the B(C)R will be required. Where 100 mm concrete cubes are used, modification of the B(C)R will be required. Where the C2 Criteria in Table 10.2 of the Code are used, modification of the B(C)R will be required.

Cement content is Clause 4.2.6 3 limited to 550 kg/m .

57 The minimum & cement content is Table 6 specified.

Table 4.2 and Clause 4.2.5.4

58

Concrete cubes to be Clause 150 mm. 10.3.4.2

59 Acceptance criteria & for concrete cubes. Table 8

Table 10.2

(6/2007)

Appendix B (PNAP 296)

(APP-142)
Amendments to Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2004

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 1.2 (page 1) Delete Hong Kong Code of Practice for Dead and Imposed Loads for Buildings

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 2.3.1.1 (page 8) Replace the first and second bullet points with the following: characteristic dead load, Gk, which shall be taken as the dead loads calculated in accordance with Building (Construction) Regulation 16; characteristic imposed load, Qk, which shall be taken as the imposed loads stipulated in Building (Construction) Regulation 17; and

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 2.3.1.4 (d) (page 9) Replace the clause with the following: (d) Vehicular impact Where vertical elements are to be designed for vehicular impact the nominal design load shall be as specified in Building (Construction) Regulation 17.

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Figure 3.3 (page 17) At the Y-axis, replace with : Shrinkage Kc : Creep/shrinkage Kc

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Figure 3.5 (page 17) At the Y-axis, replace with : Shrinkage Kj : Creep/shrinkage Kj

-1-

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 3.1.8 (page 18) In the definition of cs, replace with : 4.0 : 3.0

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Figure 3.8 (page 19) Replace : See table 3.2 with : 3.46

f cu

+ 3.21 kN/mm2

Replace : 2.4 10 4 with :

f cu

1.34( f cu / m ) Ec

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 4.2.7.1 (page 29) Replace : section 10 with : Table 4.5

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 5.2.1.1 (e) (page 33) Delete and the height is at least 3 times the section depth.

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 5.2.1.2 (b) (page 36) In the pen-ultimate paragraph: replace with : taken as the elastic or redistributed values : taken as the greater of the elastic or redistributed values

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Figure 6.1 (page 41) Replace : 0.9x with : 0.9x for fcu 45 N/mm2, 0.8x for 45< fcu 70 N/mm2, or 0.72x for 70< fcu 100 N/mm2.

-2-

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Equation 6.1 (page 41) Replace the existing equation with the following : x 0.5d for fcu 45 N/mm2 ;

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Equation 6.2 (page 41) Replace the existing equation with the following : x 0.4d for 45 < fcu 70 N/mm2 ; or

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Equation 6.4 (page 41) Replace the existing equation with the following : x (b - 0.4)d for fcu 45 N/mm2 ; or

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Equation 6.5 (page 41) Replace the existing equation with the following : x (b - 0.5)d for 45 < fcu 70 N/mm2

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Equation 6.8 (page 42) Replace the existing equation with the following : K = 0.156 for fcu 45 N/mm2 ; or 0.120 for 45< fcu 70 N/mm2 ; or 0.094 for 70< fcu 100N/mm2 and no moment redistribution.

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Equation 6.9 (page 42) Replace the existing equation with the following : K = 0.402(b-0.4) - 0.18(b-0.4)2 , for fcu 45 N/mm2 ; or 0.357(b-0.5) - 0.143(b-0.5)2 , for 45< fcu 70 N/mm2.

-3-

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Equations 6.11 and 6.14 (page 42) Replace the existing equations with the following : x = (d - z)/0.45 , for fcu 45 N/mm2 ; or (d - z)/0.40 , for 45< fcu 70 N/mm2 ; or (d - z)/0.36 , for 70< fcu 100 N/mm2.

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Equation 6.17 (page 42) Replace the existing equation with the following : As =

M + k1 f cu bw d (k 2 d h f ) 0.87 f y ( d 0.5h f )

where k1 = 0.1 for fcu 45 N/mm2, 0.072 for 45< fcu 70 N/mm2 and 0.054 for 70<fcu 100 N/mm2; and k2 = 0.45 for fcu 45 N/mm2, 0.32 for 45< fcu 70 N/mm2 and 0.24 for 70<fcu 100 N/mm2.
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Equation 6.18 (page 43) Replace the existing equation with the following:

f = 0.45

hf d

hf b bw 1 + K' w 1 b 2d b

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Table 6.3 (page 44) In the last column, replace with : 400 : 400

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 6.1.2.5 (page 45) In line 9 under item (e): replace with : and are both greater than 45 : and are both equal to or greater than 45.

-4-

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Table 6.8 (page 55) In third column, replace with : Asb > : Asb

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Figure 6.12 (page 67) Replace : 1.4t (see clause 6.1.5.6(b) with : 1.4t (see clause 6.1.5.6(c))

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 6.1.5.7(e) (page 69) In the last sentence: Replace : 0.4ud/087fyv. with : vrud/087fyv, where r is defined in Table 6.2.

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 6.2.1.3 (page 75) In line 3 under item (c), replace with : 6.49 : 6.48

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Figure 6.17 (page 77) Interchange all k1 and k2. Interchange all M1 and M2.

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 6.3.2 (page 84) In the second paragraph, replace with : St. Venant torsional stiffness : torsional constant

-5-

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Equation 6.64 (page 84) Replace the existing equation with the following :

C=

1 3 hmin hmax . 2

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Table 6.17 (page 85) In the last line, replace with : N/mm3 : N/mm2

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Table 6.18 (page 85) Replacing the existing Table 6.18 with the following: vt vt min Minimum shear reinforcement; no torsion reinforcement Designed shear reinforcement; no torsion reinforcement vt > vt min Designed torsion reinforcement but not less than the minimum shear reinforcement Designed shear and torsion reinforcement

v vc + vr v > vc + vr

Notes: vr is defined in Table 6.2. Table 6.18 - Reinforcement for shear and torsion

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 6.7.2.2 (page 91) In line 7, replace with : Lc : lc

-6-

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Figure 6.19 (page 92) Replace the existing Figure 6.19 with the following new Figure 6.19.

Figure 6.19 Critical section for shear check in a pile cap


AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 7.1.5 (page 96) In line 6, replace with : at the ends of the ranges : in table 3.2

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 7.2.3 (page 97) Before the definition of a under equation 7.2, add:

is the strain at the level considered, calculated ignoring the stiffening effect of the concrete in the tension zone,

-7-

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 7.2.3 (page 97) In the paragraph after equation 7.2, replace with : In this 7.2 : In equation 7.2

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Table 7.4 (page 101) In Notes 2, replace with : clause 6.1.2.4(c) : clause 6.1.2.4(b)

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Table 7.5 (page 101) In Notes 2, replace with : A : As,prov

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 7.3.6(a) (page 105) Under the third bullet point, replace with : 1/(1+) times the short-term modulus where : 1/(1+c) times the short-term modulus where c

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Figure 7.1a) (page 106) In the strain diagram, replace with : fs / E : fs / Es

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 8.6 (page 114) In the paragraph after the definitions of notations for equation 8.7, replace with : equation 8.5 : equation 8.7

-8-

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Figure 8.5 (page 116) Replace the existing Figure 8.5 with the following new Figure 8.5.

<s

<s

= diameter of the lapped reinforcement s = 75 mm or 6, whichever is the greater

Note :

For laps in bottom of section as cast minimum cover criteria applies to corner bars only

Figure 8.5 Factors for lapping bars


AMD 1 Jun 2007

Figure 8.6 (page 118) Replace the existing Figure 8.6 with the following new Figure 8.6.

Figure 8.6 Transverse reinforcement for lapped splices

-9-

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 8.8 (pages 118-119) In the line preceding Figure 8.7, replace with : In figure 8.7a, n1=1, n2=1 : In figure 8.7a, n1=1, n2=2

In the second and last paragraphs, delete (see clause 9.2.4). At the end of the last paragraph, insert the following: Act,ext denotes the area of the tensile concrete external to the links, defined by Figure 8.7c.
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Figure 8.7 (page 118) Replace the existing Figure 8.7 with the following new Figure 8.7.

Figure 8.7 Additional reinforcement for large diameter bars

- 10 -

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 9.1 (page 128) Add the following paragraphs at the end of the clause 9.1: Detailing of members should normally comply with both the general detailing rules given in clauses 9.2 to 9.8 and the particular rules for ductility given in clause 9.9. However, members not contributing in the lateral load resisting system do not need to conform to the requirements of clause 9.9.

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Equation 9.4 (page 131) Replacing the existing equation 9.4 with the following: Asv vrbvsv/(0.87fyv) where vr is defined in Table 6.2. 9.4

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 9.4.3 (page 133) Replace : A full anchorage length beyond the centreline of the supporting member should be provided for top tension reinforcement of a cantilevered projecting structure. with : A full anchorage length should be provided for the top tension reinforcement of a cantilevered projecting structure. Where full rotational restraint is provided at the near face of the supporting member, i.e. the face at which the bar enters the supporting member, the anchorage shall be deemed to commence at 1/2 the width of the supporting member or 1/2 the effective depth of the cantilevered projecting structure whichever is the less, from the near face of the supporting member. Where the cantilevered projecting structure is a continuous slab or beam and the support is not designed to provide rotational restraint in the analysis of the continuous structure, the anchorage shall be deemed to commence at the far face of the supporting member.

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 9.9.1.1(d) (page 138) Before the definition for fyt, add: n number of bars uniformly spaced around circular sections, or the number of longitudinal bars in the layer through which a potential plane of splitting would pass,

- 11 -

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 9.9.2.1(a) (page 139) Replace : The area of longitudinal reinforcement shall not be greater than 4% of the gross concrete area except that at laps the area may increase to 5.2%. with : The area of longitudinal reinforcement for strength design shall not be greater than 4% of the gross concrete area except that at laps the area may increase to 5.2%.

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 10.3.4.1 (page 143) In the first bullet point in paragraph 2, replace with : clause 13.1.8.1 : clause 12.1.8.1

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 10.3.6.1 (page 147) In line 4 of the last paragraph, replace with : all concrete mixes of grade C60 or above : all concrete mixes of grade greater than C60

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Table 12.1 (page 166) In the second column, replace with : C30 : C35

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 12.3.4.3 (page 166) In line 5 of the second paragraph, replace with : class 1 and class 2 : groups a) and b)

In line 6 of the second paragraph, replace with : class 3 : group c)

- 12 -

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Table 12.2 (page 166) In the third column, replace with : C30 : C35

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 12.3.7.1 (page 168) Replace the second bullet point (including the Note) with the following : the design stresses in the concrete in compression are derived either from the stress-strain curve given in figure 3.8 or from the simplified stress block given in figure 6.1, with m = 1.5 in both cases;

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Equations 12.2 and 12.3 (page 168) Replace the existing equations with the following:

f pb = f pe + x = 2

f pu Aps 700001 1 0 . 7 2 l f cu bd d f pu Aps f pb d f f cubd pu

12.2

12.3

where 1 = 1 for fcu 60 N/mm2, or 1 0.017 f cu 60 for fcu >60N/mm2, and

2 = 2.58 for fcu 45 N/mm2, 2.78 for 45 < fcu 70 N/mm2, or 3.09 for 70 < fcu
100 N/mm2.

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Table 12.5 (page 171) In the second column, replace with : 30 N/mm2 : 35 N/mm2

AMD 1 Jun 2007

Clause 12.3.8.7 (page 171) In the caption, replace with : where Vr = 0.4fcubvd for fcu40N/mm2 or 0.4(fcu/40)2/3bvd for fcu>40N/mm2. : where Vr = vr bvd and vr is as defined in Table 6.2.

- 13 -

Revised text
AMD 1 Jun 2007

Equation 12.7 (page 172) Replace the existing equation with the following :

Asv Vr = sv 0.87 f yv d
AMD 1 Jun 2007

12.7

ANNEX A In the first paragraph, replace with : the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Concrete (Limit State Approach) : this Code of Practice

AMD 1 Jun 2007

ANNEX A Delete the second bullet point, i.e. Hong Kong Code of Practice for Dead and Imposed Loads for Buildings

(6/2007)

- 14 -

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-143

Quality Control and Supervision of Precast Concrete Construction Introduction In recent years, the use of precast concrete in private building developments in Hong Kong has increased. To ensure that the precast concrete elements are of good quality, proper supervision and adequate quality control are necessary during the production, erection and inspection processes of the concrete elements. This practice note sets out the requirements for the quality control and supervision of key precast concrete elements not fabricated on the building site. The requirements stipulated in this practice note do not apply to minor elements such as non-structural precast concrete block work, architectural features and planters. Duties of the Authorized Person, Registered Structural Engineer and Registered Contractor 2. The Authorized Person (AP), Registered Structural Engineer (RSE) and Registered Contractor (RC) have the responsibilities under the Buildings Ordinance (BO) to ensure that the precast concrete works comply with the provisions and standards of the BO and the approved plans. In accordance with Section 4(3)(a) of the BO and Regulation 37 of the Building (Administration) Regulations (B(A)R), adequate supervision has to be provided by the AP and RSE for the carrying out of the precast concrete works, whereas the RC has to provide continuous supervision, as required under Section 9(5)(a) and 9(6)(a) of the BO and Regulation 41 of the B(A)R, for the carrying out of such works. Quality Assurance 3. Under item 6 in Section 17(1) of the BO, I shall impose the condition, when giving approval of plans, that precast concrete elements should be manufactured by a factory with ISO 9000 quality assurance certification. 4. Under Regulation 10 of the B(A)R, I shall require a copy of the Quality Assurance Scheme of the manufacturer to be submitted prior to the application for consent to the commencement of the works. Such submission should be appended with a statement signed by the RSE to confirm that the scheme has adequate provisions in ensuring the quality of production complying with the provisions of the BO and the approved plans. 5. The Quality Assurance Scheme should cover the following items: (a) (b) Quality control tests of materials; Calibration of laboratory equipment for quality control tests; /(c) ..

-2-

(c)

Efficiency and proper operation of equipment at the casting yard; Production process; Testing procedures and requirements; Frequency and extent of inspection by in-house staff and independent parties; and Frequency and extent of audit by in-house staff and independent parties.

(d) (e) (f)

(g)

Qualified Supervision 6. Under item 6 in Section 17(1) of the BO, I shall also impose the condition, when giving approval of plans, that qualified supervision should be provided by the RSE and the RC for the fabrication, erection and examination of precast concrete elements. 7. The RSE should assign a structural quality control supervisor to supervise the precast concrete production works. The RSE should determine the necessary frequency of supervision, which should be no less than once a week. The minimum qualifications and experience of the quality control supervisor are to be the same as grade T3 technically competent person (TCP) under the RSEs stream, as stipulated in the Code of Practice for Site Supervision. 8. The RC should assign a quality control co-ordinator to provide continuous supervision of the precast concrete production works in the factory. The minimum qualifications and experience of the quality control co-ordinator are to be the same as grade T3 TCP under the RCs stream, as stipulated in the Code of Practice for Site Supervision. 9. The names and qualifications of the supervisory personnel assigned by the RSE and RC respectively should be recorded in an inspection log book. The details of precast concrete production, inspection, auditing and testing should be recorded in the log book by the supervisory personnel. The log book should be kept in the factory and a copy of it should be kept at the building site office and, when required, produced to officers of the Buildings Department for inspection. 10. In addition, the RSE and the Authorized Signatory (AS) of the RC should inspect and carry out audit checks to the factory at least once every month. The AS should submit the audit report to the RSE for endorsement and onward submission to the Buildings Department together with his/her own audit report for record purpose. 11. For good practices in the design, construction and quality control of precast concrete works, reference should be made to the recommendations and guidelines given in the Code of Practice for Precast Concrete Construction issued by the Buildings Department. /Separate ..

-3Separate Registered Structural Engineer 12. For precast concrete elements not affecting the stability of the parent structure, such as the precast concrete faade or staircase, a separate RSE may be appointed to prepare the design and to supervise the production and erection of such precast concrete elements. In such situation, the specified Forms BA4 and BA5 notifying the appointment of a separate RSE and the scope of works for which he/she is responsible are required to be submitted together with the plans for approval. The project RSE shall also notify the Building Authority in writing that he/she is fully aware of the appointment of a separate RSE and the demarcation of responsibilities. Upon completion of the precast concrete construction works, the separate RSE so appointed is required to certify the satisfactory completion of the works in accordance with Regulation 25(3) of the B(A)R. 13. The separate RSEs submission should be accompanied by an assessment report prepared by him/her giving an account of the effect of the proposed precast concrete works on the parent structure. The assessment report shall be appended with a statement of the project RSE to confirm that he/she is fully aware of the connection details and their effects on the parent structure. 14. The separate RSE shall be responsible for the supervision of the production and erection of the precast concrete elements, including the connection between the precast concrete elements and the parent structure, i.e. ties, anchor plates, cast-in embeds etc., except in the event where such associated works have been installed in the parent structure prior to his/her appointment. For such cases, the structural details and layout of the pre-installed parts should be given in the superstructure plans submitted for approval by the project RSE who shall then be responsible for the supervision of the installation of such parts. The separate RSE should refer to the pre-installed connection details when designing the precast concrete elements and should co-ordinate with the project RSE for any necessary amendment if different connection details are to be used. 15. The separate RSE shall ensure that the conditions and requirements of the quality assurance and qualified supervision as stipulated in paragraphs 3 to 5 and 6 to 10 above respectively are complied with. He/she shall also be responsible for the submission of the documents required in paragraph 4 above. 16. A similar practice note is issued to registered contractors.

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority Ref. : BD GR/1-125/54 This PNAP is previously known as PNAP 299 First issue August 2006 (AD/NB2) This revision April 2010 (AD/NB2) (Paragraphs. 2, 4 & 11 amended & 12 to 15 added)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized APP-144 Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

300

Design and Construction of Run-in and Run-out on Public Road Where vehicular ingress and egress points are allowed under the lease, the developer is normally required to construct the run-in and run-out in accordance with the lease conditions. As part of the effort to simplify the lease conditions for new leases, it is proposed to replace the special condition on the construction of run-in and run-out by a self-certification system. 2. This practice note provides guidelines on the design and construction standards for run-in and run-out and advice on the proposed self-certification system. Design and Construction Standards 3. Where the adjoining footpath is constructed of concrete, the run-in and run-out should also be constructed with concrete. 4. If the adjoining footpath is constructed with paver blocks, then paver blocks should be used for the construction of the run-in and run-out. In such cases, a visual contrast and/or a change in pattern between the paver blocks of the run-in and run-out and the adjoining footpath should be established. Care should be taken to ensure that the design and construction are appropriate in terms of safety and convenience to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. 5. The standard of design and construction of run-in and run-out shall comply with the specifications and standards set out in Appendix A. Updates of these standard drawings will be posted in the home page of the Highways Department (HyD). (http://www.hyd.gov.hk) Upon completion of construction of the run-in and run-out, the authorized person (AP) should ensure that the adjoining footpath or pavement is made good accordingly. Damage to Pavement 6. Saw-cut method shall be used for the construction of run-in and run-out in order to avoid damage to adjoining pavements. 7. Any damage to pavement by the construction activities outside the area of run-in and run-out shall be re-instated and made good after obtaining a separate Excavation Permit from the HyD.

/Procedures ..

-2-

Procedures for Construction of Run-in and Run-out 8. The AP should check with the relevant authorities for the utility services underneath the proposed run-in and run-out to ensure that the construction work will not cause any adverse impact on the underground services. In this regard, the AP should co-ordinate with the utilities undertakings for the diversion of utilities as necessary. The design details of the run-in and run-out should be incorporated in the general building plans for circulation to the HyD for comment. APs are reminded to make early arrangement for any necessary utilities diversion and the acquisition of the necessary Excavation Permit from the HyD for the required works. Where the construction of the run-in and run-out is completed prior to the submission of an application for an occupation permit, a Certificate of Completion of Vehicular Run-in and Run-out as shown in Appendix B should be submitted to the Buildings Department (BD). APs are encouraged to complete and certify the run-in and run-out well in advance of the application for an occupation permit. Certification of Completion of Run-in and Run-out supervised by AP 9. Upon receipt of the Certificate of Completion of Vehicular Run-in and Run-out or upon the submission of an application for occupation permit, BD will notify the HyD who will then arrange for inspection and taking-over of the run-in and run-out. Any defects identified by the HyD will be brought to the attention of BD who will inform the AP for rectification accordingly. In the event that the HyD raises objection to accept the works on the grounds of defects identified, this may constitute a ground for refusal of the application for an occupation permit under section 21(6)(a) of the Buildings Ordinance. Works Undertaken by Highways Department 10. In cases where the HyD has agreed to construct the run-in and run-out on behalf of the owner, the AP should submit to BD the entrustment letter together with a copy of the demand note receipt in respect of the payment of the required fees. Upon receipt of the information and provided that a temporary run-in and run-out is constructed to a manner that it does not pose any danger to the public or any inconvenience to vehicular or pedestrian traffic using the run-in and run-out, BD may process an application for an occupation permit before the construction of the permanent run-in and run-out is completed. 11. Under the Helping Business Scheme, all APs are encouraged to construct the permanent run-in and run-out with their own resources to suit their tight programme. HyD has expressed that their resources are fully stretched and may not be able to undertake any such works for the APs. 12. This practice note will come into operation on 1 January 2007. /13. ..

-3-

13.

A similar practice note has been issued to the Registered Contractors.

( CHEUNG Hau-wai ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GR/1-55/3/0 First issue September 2006 (AD/NB1) Index under : Vehicular Run-in and Run-out Run-in Run-out

Appendix A PNAP 300 APP-144 Standard of Design and Construction of Vehicular Run-in and Run-out 1. The following design and construction standard requirements are acceptable to the Highways Department (HyD). 2. General Specification for Civil Engineering Works (GS) published by the Government of the HKSAR, in particular Section 9 on carriageways: sub-base material and bituminous materials, Section 10 on concrete carriageways, and Section 11, Parts 5 to 7 on construction of footways and paved areas; and any relevant corrigendum as may be issued from time to time. Concrete Run-in and Run-out 3. The latest version of HyDs Standard Drawings, in particular drawing nos. H1113, H1114, H1115 and H1116 (Annex 1). 4. Specification Clauses 6.68, 9.44 and 16.58-16.62 of GS.

Paver Blocks Run-in and Run-out 5. The latest version of HyDs Standard Drawings, in particular drawing nos. H1103, H5101, H5102, H5114, H5115 and H5116 (Annex 2). 6. An authorized person (AP) should obtain such laboratory test certificates or such information from the registered contractors. 7. The colour of pavers shall be as specified by the AP to achieve a visual contrast and/or a change in pattern between the paver blocks and the adjoining footpath. 8. The design and construction of paver blocks shall be in accordance with the latest requirements of the HyD. The AP shall obtain information about these requirements from the Publications and Press Release Section of HyDs homepage (http://www.hyd.gov.hk/eng/public/index.htm) and incorporate them onto the general building plans at building plan submission stage. Protection of Underground Utilities 9. Please refer to HyD Technical Circular No. 3/90 or any updated version regarding the minimum ground cover requirement to facilitate protection of underground facilities. (9/2006)

Appendix B PNAP 300 APP-144 Certificate of Completion of Vehicular Run-in and Run-out BD Ref.: Date : ________________ Re:___________________________________________ (Address of Development Site) To Building Authority, Part A (to be certified by Authorized Person) I (name in full) _______________________, authorized person, confirm that the vehicular run-in(s) and run-out(s) as indicated on the attached Block Plan showing its/their location at the captioned development site has/have been completed in accordance with the approved plans and complies/comply with the requirements stipulated in PNAP 300. 2.* The above vehicular run-in(s) and run-out(s) are ready for handing-over to the Highways Department.

_________________________ Signature of Authorized Person

Certificate of Registration No.: ___________________________ Date of expiry of registration : ___________________________

Delete if not applicable

-1-

Part B (to be certified by Registered Contractor) 3. *I/We (name in full) ________________________________________, * registered general building contractor/registered specialist contractor in the ** ________________________ category, hereby confirm that the vehicular run-in(s) and run-out(s) as indicated on the attached Block Plan showing its/their location at the captioned development site has/have been completed in accordance with the approved plans and complies/comply with the requirements stipulated in PNRC 65.

Name of the person appointed to act for the Registered Contractor for the above works

Signature Certificate of Registration No. : Date of expiry of registration :

* **

Delete if not applicable Enter the name of the sub register for the category of specialized works

c.c.

Highways Department (Ref.:

) with a copy of Block Plan

(9/2006)
-2-

APP-144

APP-144

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

APP-145 302

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

Fire Safety (Buildings) Ordinance, Cap. 572 Introduction The Fire Safety (Buildings) Ordinance (the FS(B)O) came into operation on 1 July 2007. The purpose of the FS(B)O is to provide better protection from the risk of fire for occupants and users of, and visitors to, certain kinds of composite buildings and domestic buildings (target buildings) by upgrading the buildings to current fire safety standards. Owners/occupiers of such buildings are required to improve the fire safety measures which include fire service installations and equipment as well as fire safety construction of the building. Application 2. (a) The FS(B)O applies to a composite building or domestic building if: it was constructed, or intended to be used (i) (ii) AND (b) the plans of its building works was first submitted to the Building Authority for his approval on or before 1 March 1987; or constructed on or before 1 March 1987 where no plans of its building works were submitted on or before that date to the Building Authority for approval. partly for domestic purposes non-domestic purposes; or and partly for

for domestic purposes with more than 3 storeys;

(c)

3. A Domestic building includes ancillary club house, carpark and recreation facilities that are provided for the exclusive use of residents of the building and persons invited to use them by such residents. 4. Domestic purposes in respect of a composite building or domestic building means use for human habitation, but does not include a building or part of a building that is used for a hotel, guesthouse, home for the elderly, child care centre or nursery. 5. Composite building means a building that is constructed, or intended to be used, partly for domestic purposes and partly for non-domestic purposes but excludes a building where the part intended for non-domestic purposes consists wholly of a factory or industrial undertaking, godown, warehouse or place of bulk storage. /6. ..

-2-

6. The Ordinance does not apply to buildings constructed in accordance with the Buildings Ordinance (Application to the New Territories) Ordinance (Cap. 121). Fire Safety Measures 7. Depending on the use of a target building or part of the building, owners/occupiers may need to provide all or any of the following fire safety measures to current standards: (a) Fire safety construction requirements for the provision of: adequate means of escape for the building in the event of fire; (ii) adequate means of access to the building to facilitate access for firefighting and rescue; (iii) measures to inhibit the spread of fire and to ensure the integrity of the structure of the building. (b) Fire service installations and equipment requirements for the provision of: (i) automatic sprinkler system; (ii) automatic cut-off devices for a mechanical ventilating system; (iii) emergency lighting; (iv) manual fire alarms; (v) fire hydrant and hose reel system; (vi) the requirements specified in the Code of Practice for Minimum Fire Service Installations and Equipment 1994. Fire Safety Construction 8. In relation to fire safety construction requirements mentioned in paragraph 7(a) above, the scope of requirements is listed in Schedule 1 of the FS(B)O for the non-domestic parts of a target composite building and Schedule 2 therein for a target domestic building or the domestic parts of a target composite building. The corresponding detailed requirements are set out in the following codes of practice: the Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire 1996. the Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996; and the Code of Practice for Means of Access for Firefighting and Rescue 1995. /Enforcement .. (i)

-3-

Enforcement Authority 9. (a) For the purpose of the FS(B)O: the Director of Buildings is the enforcement authority for the provision of fire safety measures in the planning, design and construction of the building; and the Director of Fire Services is the enforcement authority for the provision of fire service installations or equipment in the building.

(b)

Fire Safety Section 10. The Fire Safety Section headed by the Chief Building Surveyor/Fire Safety is set up in the Buildings Department to administer the FS(B)O in respect of the fire safety construction requirements. Directions and Orders 11. Under section 5(1) or 5(2) of the FS(B)O, the Director of Buildings may serve on the owner of a target building or part of a target building a fire safety direction (FSDn) directing him to comply with all or any of the requirements in respect of fire safety construction specified in Schedule 1 or 2 of the FS(B)O. 12. Upon conviction of the offence of failure to comply with a FSDn, the Director of Buildings may, under section 6(1) of the FS(B)O, apply to a magistrate to make a fire safety compliance order directing the owner to comply with all or any of the requirements specified in the FSDn to which the offence is related. Difficulties in Complying with Fire Safety Construction Requirements 13. Under section 5(1) and 5(2) of the FS(B)O, if the relevant enforcement authority considers that it would not be reasonable for the owner to comply with a particular fire safety requirement as specified under paragraph 8 above, having regard to the structural integrity of building and the technology available to comply with such requirement, he may direct the compliance of other alternative requirements as appropriate. In cases of genuine difficulties, the Director of Buildings is prepared to consider owners alternative improvement measures based on fire safety engineering principles, which will equally achieve the primary objectives of the FS(B)O. Submission of Plans for Approval 14. Where non-exempted building works are proposed either to voluntarily comply with the FS(B)O or to satisfy the requirements of a FSDn, an application for approval under the Buildings Ordinance should be made in the usual manner. /However, ..

-4-

However, for such applications, three instead of two sets of plans showing fire service installations and equipment are required by the Fire Services Department for processing. 15. No fee will be charged under the Building (Administration) Regulation 42 if the proposals are entirely for improving the fire safety measures of the existing building pursuant to the requirements of a FSDn.

( H W CHEUNG ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD FS/OA/165 First issue October 2007 (AD/EB2)

Index under : Fire Safety (Buildings) Ordinance Target Composite Building Fire Safety Direction

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers APP-146

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers Large Metal Gates

304

The installation of metal gates in buildings is primarily for security purpose. Recent incidents of collapse of large metal gates have aroused serious safety concern. Not only proper design can ensure the safety of large metal gates, correct installation, proper use and regular maintenance are also important. This practice note provides guidelines on design and installation of large metal gates at fence walls or entrance of building. 2. Metal gates are building works as defined under the Buildings Ordinance, whether they be manually or electrically operated. For new buildings, metal gates should be shown on the building plans submitted for prior approval and consent by the Building Authority. For large metal gates with a height exceeding 2.2m and the weight of any gate leaf exceeding 300 Kg, plans showing structural details of the metal gates including design calculations are also required to be submitted for approval. For the installation of new metal gates in existing buildings, if the height of the metal gate exceeds 2.2m and the weight of any gate leaf exceeds 300 Kg, both building and structural plans are required to be submitted for approval prior to installation. Design and Installation Requirements 3. In general, all metal gates should be constructed of suitable materials and satisfy the performance requirements stipulated in the Building (Construction) Regulation 3. They should be properly designed and constructed in accordance with recognized standards to ensure their satisfactory and safe operation under the expected conditions of use. All parts of the metal gate installations, whether fixed or movable, including the fixings, should in all respects be of sound construction, adequate strength and free from obvious defects for their intended working life. 4. The installation of large metal gates should be under the qualified supervision of a registered general building contractor to ensure that the works are carried out in accordance with the approved plans and the required standards are complied with. Upon completion of installation, the metal gate should be inspected and trial operated to ensure that it has been properly installed.

/5. ..

-2-

5. Where submission of structural details of metal gate is required, special attention should be paid to the following: (a) design wind load should be in accordance with the appropriate provisions in the Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004; (b) details and design for the elements of the gate framework, post support and foundation should be given to demonstrate the stability of the metal gate during operation; (c) design of connection to fix the gate framework to the surrounding structure and the design check on the supporting structure should be provided; (d) for swing-type metal gate, details of hinge pin fittings to permit pivotal movement should be given; (e) for sliding metal gate, details of end stoppers to prevent the metal gate from over-travel at both ends should be shown; similar provisions should be made for multi-passing metal gate which also serve as connection between gate leaves; (f) additional measures should be provided to stop the metal gate from being lifted off or derailment during operation; and

(g) details of decorative parts of the metal gate need not be submitted. Additional Measures and Reference Standards 6. Recommendations on additional measures and design considerations for enhancing the safety of metal gates are given in Appendix A. Some relevant standards/specifications for the design and installation of metal gates are given in Appendix B. Authorized Person (AP) and Registered Structural Engineer (RSE) may also make reference to other international or national standards and specifications if equivalent performance can be demonstrated. Tests on Anchors 7. Where drilled-in anchors are proposed to secure the stability of metal gate, at least 5 numbers of each type and size of the anchors installed should be tested by pull-out test to demonstrate that its pull-out capacity is not less than 1.5 times the recommended tensile load as specified by the anchor manufacturer. The tested anchor should be considered satisfactory if it does not show any signs of separation, plastic deformation or deleterious effect during the test. Such tests should be carried out under the direction of the AP/RSE. /Electrically..

-3-

Electrically Operated Metal Gates 8. For electrically operated metal gates, reference should also be made to the "Code of Practice for Installation of Electrically Operated Sliding Gates, Sliding Glass Doors and Rolling Shutters" published by the Director of Electrical and Mechanical Services. Guidelines for Registered Contractors 9. A similar practice note is issued to Registered Contractors.

( AU Choi-kai ) Building Authority

Ref.: BD GP/BORD/108 (II) First issue: December 2008 (AD/NB1 & AD/NB2)

Index under: Large Metal Gates

Appendix A (PNAP 304) (APP-146) Recommendations for Enhancing the Safety of Metal Gates Swing-Type Metal Gate 1. All hinge fittings of a swing-type metal gate should be welded all round to the gate framework and should be able to withstand the dead weight of the metal gate and wind loads during normal operation. 2. A minimum of 3 hinges should be provided for the connection between the metal gate and each supporting post. To prevent the metal gate being lifted off from its hinges after installation, measures such as installing one of the hinge fittings with the hinge pin pointing in a reverse direction should be incorporated for providing restraint against vertical movement. Sliding Metal Gate 3. The gate leaf as well as any other moving parts of a sliding metal gate should be designed and constructed in such a way as to prevent them from falling down, collapsing or derailment during normal operation or in case of contact with stationary obstacles. Proper design and provisions of guide and metal gate stopper of adequate size and strength are required to maintain lateral stability of the metal gate and to resist the imposed loads and impact force. Folding Metal Gate 4. Paragraphs 1 to 3 above are applicable to a folding metal gate with two or more hinged leaves, guided and/or supported at the top or at the bottom. Similar provisions for preventing the gate leaf from being lifted off should be made for the hanging fittings connecting the hinged leaves. Installation and Use 5. Before installation, all members and components of the metal gate should be visually inspected to ensure that they are free from visual defects and comply with the approved structural details.

/Maintenance.. -1-

Maintenance and Repair 6. All parts of the metal gate providing mechanical resistance and connection, whether fixed or movable, are subject to normal deterioration of wear and tear. Regular inspection and maintenance should be provided to safeguard the metal gate from disengagement or derailment. 7. The AP should coordinate with the Registered Contractor to prepare documentation on the safe operation and maintenance of the metal gate installed, for regular maintenance and repair to be arranged by the Incorporated Owners/management company. Routine inspection and maintenance work such as cleaning of dirt and obstacles from the track and guide rail, and application of lubrication to enable smooth movement of the metal gate should be carried out every three months.

(12/2008)

-2-

Relevant Standards and Specifications for Metal Gates

Appendix B (PNAP 304) (APP-146)

The various standards, specifications for the design and installation of metal gates as listed below are intended to provide reference information and the lists are not exhaustive. Other international or national standards and specifications may also be referred to if equivalent performance can be demonstrated. BS 4092:Part 1:1996 BS EN 12433-1:2000 BS EN 12433-2:2000 BS EN 12604:2000 BS EN 12605:2000 BS EN 12635:2002 BS EN 13241-1:2003 : : : : : : : Domestic front entrance gates Specification for metal gates Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates Terminology Part 1: Types of doors Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates Terminology Part 2: Parts of doors Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates Mechanical aspects Requirements Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates Mechanical aspects - Test methods Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates Installation and use Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates Product Standard Part 1: Products without fire resistance or smoke control characteristics Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles - Specifications and test methods Paints and varnishes - Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective paint systems Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures - Zinc and aluminium coatings - Guidelines Playground equipment- Part requirements and test methods 1: General safety

BS EN 1461 BS EN ISO 12944 -1 to 8:1998 BS EN ISO 14713: 1999 BS EN 1176-1:1998

(12/2008)

Re-issued under new categorization in August 2009 as Practice Note for Authorized APP-144 Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineers

Buildings Department

Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers

300

Design and Construction of Run-in and Run-out on Public Road Where vehicular ingress and egress points are allowed under the lease, the developer is normally required to construct the run-in and run-out in accordance with the lease conditions. As part of the effort to simplify the lease conditions for new leases, it is proposed to replace the special condition on the construction of run-in and run-out by a self-certification system. 2. This practice note provides guidelines on the design and construction standards for run-in and run-out and advice on the proposed self-certification system. Design and Construction Standards 3. Where the adjoining footpath is constructed of concrete, the run-in and run-out should also be constructed with concrete. 4. If the adjoining footpath is constructed with paver blocks, then paver blocks should be used for the construction of the run-in and run-out. In such cases, a visual contrast and/or a change in pattern between the paver blocks of the run-in and run-out and the adjoining footpath should be established. Care should be taken to ensure that the design and construction are appropriate in terms of safety and convenience to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. 5. The standard of design and construction of run-in and run-out shall comply with the specifications and standards set out in Appendix A. Updates of these standard drawings will be posted in the home page of the Highways Department (HyD). (http://www.hyd.gov.hk) Upon completion of construction of the run-in and run-out, the authorized person (AP) should ensure that the adjoining footpath or pavement is made good accordingly. Damage to Pavement 6. Saw-cut method shall be used for the construction of run-in and run-out in order to avoid damage to adjoining pavements. 7. Any damage to pavement by the construction activities outside the area of run-in and run-out shall be re-instated and made good after obtaining a separate Excavation Permit from the HyD.

/Procedures ..

-2-

Procedures for Construction of Run-in and Run-out 8. The AP should check with the relevant authorities for the utility services underneath the proposed run-in and run-out to ensure that the construction work will not cause any adverse impact on the underground services. In this regard, the AP should co-ordinate with the utilities undertakings for the diversion of utilities as necessary. The design details of the run-in and run-out should be incorporated in the general building plans for circulation to the HyD for comment. APs are reminded to make early arrangement for any necessary utilities diversion and the acquisition of the necessary Excavation Permit from the HyD for the required works. Where the construction of the run-in and run-out is completed prior to the submission of an application for an occupation permit, a Certificate of Completion of Vehicular Run-in and Run-out as shown in Appendix B should be submitted to the Buildings Department (BD). APs are encouraged to complete and certify the run-in and run-out well in advance of the application for an occupation permit. Certification of Completion of Run-in and Run-out supervised by AP 9. Upon receipt of the Certificate of Completion of Vehicular Run-in and Run-out or upon the submission of an application for occupation permit, BD will notify the HyD who will then arrange for inspection and taking-over of the run-in and run-out. Any defects identified by the HyD will be brought to the attention of BD who will inform the AP for rectification accordingly. In the event that the HyD raises objection to accept the works on the grounds of defects identified, this may constitute a ground for refusal of the application for an occupation permit under section 21(6)(a) of the Buildings Ordinance. Works Undertaken by Highways Department 10. In cases where the HyD has agreed to construct the run-in and run-out on behalf of the owner, the AP should submit to BD the entrustment letter together with a copy of the demand note receipt in respect of the payment of the required fees. Upon receipt of the information and provided that a temporary run-in and run-out is constructed to a manner that it does not pose any danger to the public or any inconvenience to vehicular or pedestrian traffic using the run-in and run-out, BD may process an application for an occupation permit before the construction of the permanent run-in and run-out is completed. 11. Under the Helping Business Scheme, all APs are encouraged to construct the permanent run-in and run-out with their own resources to suit their tight programme. HyD has expressed that their resources are fully stretched and may not be able to undertake any such works for the APs. 12. This practice note will come into operation on 1 January 2007. /13. ..

-3-

13.

A similar practice note has been issued to the Registered Contractors.

( CHEUNG Hau-wai ) Building Authority

Ref. : BD GR/1-55/3/0 First issue September 2006 (AD/NB1) Index under : Vehicular Run-in and Run-out Run-in Run-out

Appendix A PNAP 300 APP-144 Standard of Design and Construction of Vehicular Run-in and Run-out 1. The following design and construction standard requirements are acceptable to the Highways Department (HyD). 2. General Specification for Civil Engineering Works (GS) published by the Government of the HKSAR, in particular Section 9 on carriageways: sub-base material and bituminous materials, Section 10 on concrete carriageways, and Section 11, Parts 5 to 7 on construction of footways and paved areas; and any relevant corrigendum as may be issued from time to time. Concrete Run-in and Run-out 3. The latest version of HyDs Standard Drawings, in particular drawing nos. H1113, H1114, H1115 and H1116 (Annex 1). 4. Specification Clauses 6.68, 9.44 and 16.58-16.62 of GS.

Paver Blocks Run-in and Run-out 5. The latest version of HyDs Standard Drawings, in particular drawing nos. H1103, H5101, H5102, H5114, H5115 and H5116 (Annex 2). 6. An authorized person (AP) should obtain such laboratory test certificates or such information from the registered contractors. 7. The colour of pavers shall be as specified by the AP to achieve a visual contrast and/or a change in pattern between the paver blocks and the adjoining footpath. 8. The design and construction of paver blocks shall be in accordance with the latest requirements of the HyD. The AP shall obtain information about these requirements from the Publications and Press Release Section of HyDs homepage (http://www.hyd.gov.hk/eng/public/index.htm) and incorporate them onto the general building plans at building plan submission stage. Protection of Underground Utilities 9. Please refer to HyD Technical Circular No. 3/90 or any updated version regarding the minimum ground cover requirement to facilitate protection of underground facilities. (9/2006)

Appendix B PNAP 300 APP-144 Certificate of Completion of Vehicular Run-in and Run-out BD Ref.: Date : ________________ Re:___________________________________________ (Address of Development Site) To Building Authority, Part A (to be certified by Authorized Person) I (name in full) _______________________, authorized person, confirm that the vehicular run-in(s) and run-out(s) as indicated on the attached Block Plan showing its/their location at the captioned development site has/have been completed in accordance with the approved plans and complies/comply with the requirements stipulated in PNAP 300. 2.* The above vehicular run-in(s) and run-out(s) are ready for handing-over to the Highways Department.

_________________________ Signature of Authorized Person

Certificate of Registration No.: ___________________________ Date of expiry of registration : ___________________________

Delete if not applicable

-1-

Part B (to be certified by Registered Contractor) 3. *I/We (name in full) ________________________________________, * registered general building contractor/registered specialist contractor in the ** ________________________ category, hereby confirm that the vehicular run-in(s) and run-out(s) as indicated on the attached Block Plan showing its/their location at the captioned development site has/have been completed in accordance with the approved plans and complies/comply with the requirements stipulated in PNRC 65.

Name of the person appointed to act for the Registered Contractor for the above works

Signature Certificate of Registration No. : Date of expiry of registration :

* **

Delete if not applicable Enter the name of the sub register for the category of specialized works

c.c.

Highways Department (Ref.:

) with a copy of Block Plan

(9/2006)
-2-

APP-144

APP-144

You might also like